THE EMERGENCE OF GRAMMARS: A CLOSER LOOK AT DIALECTS BETWEEN PHONOLOGY AND MORPHOSYNTAX 9781536198881, 9781685070229

124 11 22MB

English Pages [476] Year 2021

Report DMCA / Copyright

DOWNLOAD FILE

Polecaj historie

THE EMERGENCE OF GRAMMARS: A CLOSER LOOK AT  DIALECTS BETWEEN PHONOLOGY AND MORPHOSYNTAX
 9781536198881, 9781685070229

Table of contents :
THE EMERGENCE OF GRAMMARSA CLOSER LOOK ATDIALECTS BETWEEN PHONOLOGYAND MORPHOSYNTAX
THE EMERGENCE OF GRAMMARSA CLOSER LOOK ATDIALECTS BETWEEN PHONOLOGYAND MORPHOSYNTAX
CONTENTS
PREFACE
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Chapter 1THE SECONDARY LOCATIVE CASESIN THE LITHUANIAN DIALECT OF ZIETELA
ABSTRACT
ABBREVIATIONS
INTRODUCTION
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE LITHUANIANDIALECT OF ZIETELA
PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CASES IN LITHUANIAN
SECONDARY CASES IN THE DIALECT OF ZIETELA
LOCATIVE PREPOSITIONS IN THE DIALECT OF ZIETELA
SYNTHETIC CASES AND THEIR CONSTRAINTS
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Chapter 2FIRST CONJUNCT AGREEMENT IS NOTAN ELLIPTICAL ILLUSION:A CASE OF PRENOMINAL ADJECTIVES
ABSTRACT
1. INTRODUCTION
2. ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES AGREEINGWITH THE CLOSEST CONJUNCT
3. ELLIPSIS AND FIRST CONJUNCT AGREEMENT
3.1. Semantic Plurality
3.2. Syntactic Plurality
3.3. Split/Joint Reference
3.4. Licensing Ellipsis
3.4.1. FCA with Multiple Adjectives
3.4.2. Gender-Number Mismatches
3.5. Nominal Ellipsis
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Chapter 3NULL SUBJECTS AND SUBJECT PRONOUNSIN DIACHRONY: EVIDENCE FROM TEXTUALSOURCES OF NORTHERN OCCITAN (VELAY)
ABSTRACT
INTRODUCTION
1. BACKGROUND: THE NULL SUBJECTPARAMETER IN OCCITAN LANGUAGE
1.1. Synchronic Descriptions
1.2. Diachronic Descriptions of Subject Pronouns
2. NULL SUBJECT AND SUBJECT PRONOUNSIN MODERN DIALECTS OF VELAY
3. NULL SUBJECT AND SUBJECT PRONOUNS:DIACHRONIC EVIDENCE FROM THE CORPUSOF OCCITAN TEXTS OF VELAY
3.1. Binary or Gradual Parameterization?
3.2. Morphosyntax and Prosodic Status of Subject Pronouns
3.3. Subject Pronouns and Word Order
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Chapter 4ACCOUNTING FOR THE DEFINITE ARTICLESIN MEDIEVAL ITALIAN AND MODERNDIALECTS. NO ALLOMORPHY -A COMMON UR
ABSTRACT
1. INTRODUCTION. THERE IS NO ALLOMORPHYIN THE ITALO-ROMANCE DEFINITE ARTICLES
2. PHONOLOGICAL ALTERNATIONS IN ITALIAN ARTICLES
2.1. Why No Allomorphy?
2.2. (Underlying) Bisyllabic Articles in Medieval Italianand Modern Dialects
2.3. Extended Bisyllabic Forms before Vowel-Initial Stems
3. THE ‘EXTENDED’ MEDIEVAL VARIANTSAND PADOVAN VARIANT The same single bisyllabic UR has fully overt reflexes in some
4. THE EXTENDED BISYLLABIC NEAPOLITAN VARIANTAND THE REPRESENTATION OF (IN)DEFINITENESS
4.1. The Procidano and Ischitano Articles Variants.Hardening and Rhoticisation of the Extended Bisyllabic /ll/
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Chapter 5EMERGENCE OF MALTESEMORPHO-PHONOLOGICAL PROFILES
ABSTRACT
ABBREVIATIONS
1. INTRODUCTION
2. THE ARABIC HERITAGE
3. SYLLABIC STRUCTURE AND STRESS
3.1. The Segmental Cycle in Maltese Phonology
3.2. Theoretical Assumptions
3.3. Templatic Stems
3.3.1. Syllabic Constituency
3.3.2. Trochaic Minimality
3.3.3. Stem Vowel Syncope
3.3.4. Lexical and Word Strata
3.3.5. Stem-Syllabic Alternations at the Lexical Stratum
3.3.5.1. C-Final Templatic Stems
3.3.5.2. V-Final Templatic Stems
3.3.6. Stress Assignment
3.4. Non-Templatic Stems
3.4.1. Patterns of Incorporation as Templatic Stems
3.4.2. Paroxytone Stems
3.4.3. Proparoxytone Stems
3.4.4. Geminate-Initial Stems
3.5. Conclusion
4. LOSS OF EMPHATIC CONSONANTSIN MEDIEVAL MALTESE
4.1. Compensatory Effects
5. LOSS OF GUTTURALS IN MODERN MALTESE
5.1. Description of Gutturals by A. De Soldanis
5.2. Description of Gutturals by Vassalli
5.2.1. Minimal Pairs
5.2.2. Dialectal Variation in Pre-Modern Maltese
5.2.3. Allophonic Variation in Gutturals
5.3. Gutturals in Modern Maltese
5.3.1. Bonelli: Archivio Glottologico Italiano
5.3.2. Stumme Maltesische Studien
5.3.2.1. Dialectal Variants of q
5.3.2.2. Reflexes of h
5.3.3. Pharyngeal Sonorant З and Pharyngealized Vowels
5.4. Comparison with Tunisian Arabic
5.5. Pharyngealization in the 20th Century
5.5.1. Modern Dialectal Pharyngealized Vowels
5.5.2. Gutturals in Contemporary Maltese
5.6. Phonological Interpretation of Orthographic H and Għ
5.6.1. Orthographic h
5.6.2. Digraph għ
5.6.2.1. Għ Adjacent to a (Mid)Low Vowel
5.6.2.2. għ Adjacent to an Underlying High Vowel
5.6.2.3. Digraph għ Followed by h-Suffix
5.6.3. Predictive Phonology
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Chapter 6SONORITY AND REDUPLICATION:AN ATTEMPT TO REDUCE THE SONORITYCONDITION TO A TEMPLATIC CONDITION
ABSTRACT
1. INTRODUCTION1
2. THE SONORITY CONDITION
2.1. Reduplication and Templates
2.2. Reduplication and the Sonority of Consonants
2.3. Reduplications and the Sonority of Vowels
3. THE FORMALIZATION OF SONORITY
3.1. Sonority and Complexity
3.2. Sonority and Assimilation
3.3. Sonority and Branchingness
4. DERIVING THE SONORITY CONDITIONFROM BRANCHINGNESS
4.1. ‘Large’ Reduplicative Templates
4.2. ‘Small’ Reduplicative Templates
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Chapter 7REPETITIONS, RESTS INSERTIONAND SCHWA IN 16TH CENTURY FRENCHPOLYPHONY: AN EMERGENTSUB-GRAMMAR IN FRESNEAU’S SONGS?
ABSTRACT
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Fresneau and His Work
1.2. Main Corpus and Control Corpora
1.3. Reading and Interpreting Sources
2. BACKGROUND: PROSODY, METRICS AND MUSIC
2.1. What Is Textsetting?
2.2. The Textual Module
2.2.1. Linguistic Representation: Phonological Phrasing and Schwa
2.2.2. Metrical Representation: Patterns and Association Rules
2.3. Music’s Grouping Structure
3. CONSTITUENTS MATCHINGIN STANZAIC DIASYSTEMIC GRAMMAR
3.1. Musical Repetitions over the Stanza
3.2. Matching Groups While Text Changes
3.3. Deriving the Metrified Form of the Text
3.4. The Status of the String of Notes Matchedwith a Metrical Constituent
4. FRESNEAU’S CONSTITUENTS MATCHING
4.1. Deriving Fresneau’s Metrified Form of the Text
4.2. Dealing with the -ə in the Derivation
4.3. Rest Insertion
5. PARTIAL TEXTSETTING GRAMMAR EMERGENCE
5.1. Dealing with Inferred Parameters in an OT Model
5.2. Emergence of Non-Predictable Constraint’s Ranking
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
APPENDIX: CORPORA’S COMPOSITION
Main Corpus: Fresneau’s Songs
Idiolectal Control Corpus
Stanzaic Control Corpus
Chapter 8LOCATIVE, PRESENTATIVEAND PROGRESSIVE CONSTRUCTIONSIN ATLANTIC LANGUAGES
ABSTRACT
ABBREVIATIONS
1. INTRODUCTION
2. THE ATLANTIC LANGUAGES
3. LOCATIVE, PRESENTATIVEAND PROGRESSIVE CONSTRUCTIONS
4. STRUCTURE OF THE CONSTRUCTIONS
5. MARKERS OF THE CONSTRUCTIONS
6. ORIGIN OF THE CONSTRUCTION
6.1. A Genetic Inheritance
6.2. Grammaticalization and Reconstruction Hypotheses
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Chapter 9PARADIGM FUNCTION MORPHOLOGYAPPLIED TO THE SOUTHERN FINNICDIALECT NETWORK
ABSTRACT
ABREVIATIONS
Symbols
1. INTRODUCTION: METHODS AND GOALS
1.1. Methods
1.2. Goals
1.3. Theoretical Scope
2. THE PFM (PARADIGM FUNCTION MORPHOLOGY)FRAMEWORK APPLIED TO FINNIC DECLENSION
3. MODELING INFLECTIONAL CLASS SYSTEMSIN SOUTH EASTERN FINNIC LANGUAGES
4. MODELING THE PROCESSES FROM MPR
5. INTRICACY OF THE ITEM AND PROCESSMODEL PARAMETERS
6. NOMINAL AND ADJECTIVAL IC (DECLENSION)IN ÕS 2013: A LUMPING TAXONOMY FOR SE
7. DIASYSTEMIC IC SHIFTS, ACCORDINGTO A LUMPING TAXONOMY: SE VS. KIHNU
CONCLUSION AND PROSPECTS
REFERENCES
Chapter 10PLAUTDIETSCH: A REMARKABLE STORYOF LANGUAGE MAINTENANCE ANDCHANGE
ABSTRACT
1. INTRODUCTION
2. THE HISTORICAL BACKGROUND OF MENNONITEMIGRATIONS AND CHANGES IN THEIR LANGUAGE USE
2.1. Mennonite Migrations
2.1.1. Mennonite Migrations in Europe and Former Russia
2.1.2. Historical Background of Mennonites in Kansas
2.1.3. Historical Background of Mennonites in Oklahoma
2.2. Social Changes in Mennonite Communities
2.3. Summary and Conclusion
3. HISTORICAL BACKGROUND AND DEVELOPMENTOF PLAUTDIETSCH
3.1. The Linguistic Situation in 16th Century Northern Europe
3.2. Phonetic and Phonological Changes in the Formation of PD
3.2.1. The Vowel System
3.3. Specifics of Language Shift in the Mennonite Low GermanVarieties
3.3.1. Vowel Shifts
3.3.2. /r/-Vocalization and Its Effects on PD Vowels and Consonants
3.4. Plautdietsch Morphology in the Developmental Stage
3.5. Lexical Changes in the Developmental Stage: Borrowingsfrom Contact Languages
3.6. The State of Plautdietsch Syntax in the Developmental Stage
3.7. Summary and Conclusion
4. A LINGUISTIC SKETCH OF PLAUTDIETSCHAS SPOKEN IN NORTH AMERICA TODAY
4.1. A Basic Comparison of the Consonant Systemsof Plautdietsch and Standard German
4.2. Features of the Plautdietsch Sound System as Realized inNorth American Varieties
4.2.1. Comparing Old Colony and European Plautdietsch
4.2.2. The Sounds of the PD Spoken in Kansas and Oklahoma Today
4.2.2.1. R-Vocalization
4.2.2.2. Rounded Front Vowels
4.2.2.3. Diphthongs and Triphthongs
4.2.3. Plautdietsch Morphology
4.2.4. Maintenance and Change in the Syntax of Plautdietsch
4.2.5. Periphrastic Do
4.2.6. The Role of English as the Dominant Language
4.2.7. Syntactic Variation and Innovation in North AmericanPlautdietsch
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
ABOUT THE EDITOR
LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS
INDEX
Blank Page
Blank Page

Citation preview

LANGUAGES AND LINGUISTICS

THE EMERGENCE OF GRAMMARS A CLOSER LOOK AT DIALECTS BETWEEN PHONOLOGY AND MORPHOSYNTAX

No part of this digital document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means. The publisher has taken reasonable care in the preparation of this digital document, but makes no expressed or implied warranty of any kind and assumes no responsibility for any errors or omissions. No liability is assumed for incidental or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of information contained herein. This digital document is sold with the clear understanding that the publisher is not engaged in rendering legal, medical or any other professional services.

LANGUAGES AND LINGUISTICS Additional books and e-books in this series can be found on Nova’s website under the Series tab.

LANGUAGES AND LINGUISTICS

THE EMERGENCE OF GRAMMARS A CLOSER LOOK AT DIALECTS BETWEEN PHONOLOGY AND MORPHOSYNTAX

MICHELA RUSSO EDITOR

Copyright © 2021 by Nova Science Publishers, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means: electronic, electrostatic, magnetic, tape, mechanical photocopying, recording or otherwise without the written permission of the Publisher. We have partnered with Copyright Clearance Center to make it easy for you to obtain permissions to reuse content from this publication. Simply navigate to this publication’s page on Nova’s website and locate the “Get Permission” button below the title description. This button is linked directly to the title’s permission page on copyright.com. Alternatively, you can visit copyright.com and search by title, ISBN, or ISSN. For further questions about using the service on copyright.com, please contact: Copyright Clearance Center Phone: +1-(978) 750-8400 Fax: +1-(978) 750-4470

E-mail: [email protected].

NOTICE TO THE READER The Publisher has taken reasonable care in the preparation of this book, but makes no expressed or implied warranty of any kind and assumes no responsibility for any errors or omissions. No liability is assumed for incidental or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of information contained in this book. The Publisher shall not be liable for any special, consequential, or exemplary damages resulting, in whole or in part, from the readers’ use of, or reliance upon, this material. Any parts of this book based on government reports are so indicated and copyright is claimed for those parts to the extent applicable to compilations of such works. Independent verification should be sought for any data, advice or recommendations contained in this book. In addition, no responsibility is assumed by the Publisher for any injury and/or damage to persons or property arising from any methods, products, instructions, ideas or otherwise contained in this publication. This publication is designed to provide accurate and authoritative information with regard to the subject matter covered herein. It is sold with the clear understanding that the Publisher is not engaged in rendering legal or any other professional services. If legal or any other expert assistance is required, the services of a competent person should be sought. FROM A DECLARATION OF PARTICIPANTS JOINTLY ADOPTED BY A COMMITTEE OF THE AMERICAN BAR ASSOCIATION AND A COMMITTEE OF PUBLISHERS. Additional color graphics may be available in the e-book version of this book.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Names: Russo, Michela, editor. Title: The emergence of grammars : a closer look at dialects between phonology and morphosyntax / Michela Russo (editor). Description: New York : Nova Science Publishers, [2020] | Series: Languages and linguistics | Includes bibliographical references and index. | Identifiers: LCCN 2021038493 (print) | LCCN 2021038494 (ebook) | ISBN 9781536198881 (hardcover) | ISBN 9781685070229 (adobe pdf) Subjects: LCSH: Grammar, Comparative and general--Phonology. | Grammar, Comparative and general--Morphosyntax. | Dialectology. | LCGFT: Essays. Classification: LCC P217 .E44 2020 (print) | LCC P217 (ebook) | DDC 415--dc23 LC record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2021038493 LC ebook record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2021038494

Published by Nova Science Publishers, Inc. † New York

CONTENTS Preface

vii

Acknowledgments

xv

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela Daniel Petit First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion: A Case of Prenominal Adjectives Nadira Aljović Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony: Evidence from Textual Sources of Northern Occitan (Velay) Vincent Surrel Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian and Modern Dialects. No Allomorphy - A Common UR Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

1

43

69

101

vi Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Michela Russo Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles Gilbert Puech Sonority and Reduplication: An Attempt to Reduce the Sonority Condition to a Templatic Condition Guillaume Enguehard

159

221

Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa in 16th Century French Polyphony: An Emergent Sub-Grammar in Fresneau’s Songs? Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

247

Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions in Atlantic Languages Maximilien Guérin

303

Paradigm Function Morphology Applied to the Southern Finnic Dialect Network Jean Léo Léonard

343

Plautdietsch: A Remarkable Story of Language Maintenance and Change John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

377

About the Editor

441

List of Contributors

443

Index

449

PREFACE This book brings together ten original contributions to the linguistic study of grammars. In several works carried out according to different theoretical perspectives, linguists have tried to identify the phonological, morphological, syntactic, and semantic properties of a grammar. What is a grammar? What types of grammar are possible in natural languages? Why and to what extent do grammatical properties vary from one language to another? The answer to these questions is not obvious. Linguistic analysis can have for object the linguistic knowledge, the grammatical competence (i.e., I-language), while an explicit grammar must model this knowledge in its entirety. A mentalist interpretation of grammar implies that it is not enough to propose any axiomatized system compatible with a given corpus. The book also raises the question of a modular grammar. Some researchers admit in the grammar only one productive component, others postulate a modular grammar composed by several autonomous generative systems interacting with one another. The book recalls one of the major empirical challenges to which a general theory of language structure must satisfy: to describe in detail both the variation and the absence of variation between languages, and to explain why this variation has the properties that we observe. This book also raises the question of the status of linearity in grammar, that is to say, first of all, the question of its multiplicity or its uniqueness.

viii

Michela Russo

The topic of linearity represents what can be called the maximum impact of phonology in grammar. The ten contributions that make up this book were conducted independently by linguists who, without necessarily sharing the same theoretical framework, share a universalist conception of grammar, and the ambition to go beyond the simple facts in order to propose an explanation. All languages are human and the properties of Lithuanian, Gothic, Sanskrit, Nakanai, Bosnian, Croatian and Serbian, Finnic languages, Atlantic Languages, Proto-Western Arabic and Maltese, Occitan, medieval and modern Italo-Romance grammars are therefore relevant to English or French specialists as well. Each article of this book aims to describe and understand complex data from empirical materials collected in a language, a group of languages or a type of language. Daniel Petit studies in his Chapter 1 (“The secondary locative cases in the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela”) the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela (Belorussia), where the Common Baltic system of secondary locative cases has been maintenaid. He provides information on this variety in the context of Baltic languages, then he addresses the case system in detail. He presents the reconfiguration – thus the emergence of a new system in Zietela - of case markers in the language. This system is structured in Old Lithuanian according to two parameters [±contact], [±motion]. In this chapter he aims to formally describe the new features configuration and distribution in the dialect of Zietela from the historical development. This dialect has original features, some of which are contact-induced innovations. Nadira Aljović in her Chapter 2 (“First conjunct agreement is not an elliptical illusion: a case of prenominal adjectives”) addresses the question of first-conjunct agreement with prenominal adjectives in Bosnian, Croatian, Serbian. She argues against an analysis of this phenomenon based on ellipsis. The claim is that first conjunct agreement can arise within a structure in which the prenominal element scopes semantically and syntactically over a conjunction noun phrase. Vincent Surrel’s Chapter 3 (“Null Subjects and subjects pronouns in diachrony: evidence from textual sources of Northern Occitan Velay”)

Preface

ix

focuses on the little-known pronominal systems present in northern Occitan, intermediate between the Oc and Oïl domains. One would expect verbs in Occitan, as in other Romance languages such as Italian or Spanish, to have no subject. The forms analysed by Vincent Surrel are therefore surprising and require a linguistic and dialectological interpretation. In the dialects of Oïl, subject pronouns are obligatory for inflected verbs, and this grammatical distinction, known by linguists as the null subject parameter (or pro-drop parameter), groups together two typological areas with or without an expressed subject. Vincent Surrel highlights the behavior of transitional dialects, with partial pro-drop. The idea is therefore to define these partial paradigms which seem to escape the traditional pro-drop parameterization. He proposes to model this pronominal variation. Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn in their Chapter 4 (“Accounting for the definite articles in Medieval Italian and Modern Dialects. No allomorphy – a commun UR”) explore (in the framework of Government Phonology) the properties of definite articles in Italo-Romance. It is well known that Italian definite articles are governed by allomorphic rules. They propose that this is not strictly speaking allomorphy because all Italian articles share a common underlying form that varies in shape according to phonological conditions. Their major claim is that the articles underlying form and their morphological exponents have remained virtually unchanged since Medieval Italo-Romance and the only important changes have been to the phonological and morphosyntactic processes that affect their surface realisation. In their Chapter they bring together diachrony, many modern dialects and Standard Italian under a shared, phonologically, and morphologically unified decompositional analysis. In all the medieval and modern dialects investigated, the same phonological objects expone the same syntactic features, and the variation in surface forms are merely the effect of the micro-parametric differences in the phonological and morphosyntactic processes that interpret the same UR (underlying representation) according to its phonological and syntactic context. Their analysis includes dialectal forms with ‘unexpected’

x

Michela Russo

gemination before vowel-initial stems (never previously analysed) and indefinite/mass articles in Southern Italo-Romance. In the framework called a Word Syntax (i.e., morphological linearity is derived from hierarchical organization), they show that in these dialects indefiniteness is marked by a bare marker ‘de’, in SpecDP within a layered DP structure (spelled out as P, such as ‘de’, only in the Medieval period). This bare marker acts as a licensor for a realized initial geminate of the masculine singular MASS and the indefinite feminine plural articles Vinitial in the indefinite morphosyntactic environments. In C-initial position the φ-features of the indefinite articles geminate the onset of the following indefinite nouns via the Raddoppiamento Sintattico triggered by these two indefinite markers. Gilbert Puech in his Chapter 5 (“Emergence of Maltese morphophonological profile”) explores the Arabic introduced on the islands of Malta and Gozo, close to Sicily, in the High Middle Ages, and he endorses the view that Maltese is an offspring of Proto-Western Arabic, although Maltese has prosodic and syllabification-related features in common with pre-Hillalian Levantine dialects, and on the grounds that it shares with continental Maghrebi dialects morphological innovations which identify this group. In his Chapter he focused on two aspects of Maltese morpho-phonology: syllabic structure and stress, and loss of ‘back’ consonants. The theoretical framework is structured by UG principles. He shows how emphatic consonants of Arabic Maltese were lost in the late Middle Ages and guttural consonants in modern times. This triggered substantial changes in Maltese phonology, and explains why Maltese, which is an Arabic dialect, now sounds very differently from the other dialect of the Arabic space. Once cut off from its Arabic and Islamic roots, new vocabulary was borrowed from European languages. The bilingualism with Italian, then with English impacted the morphophonological and morpho-lexical profile of modern Maltese. Guillaume Enguehard analyzes in his Chapter 6 (“Sonority and Reduplication: an attempt to reduce the Sonority Condition to a Templatic Condition”), within Government Phonology theory, the reduplicative

Preface

xi

mechanisms in Gothic, Sanskrit, and Nakanai which implement the melodic complexity regarding the sonority condition. According to him the size of the template (i.e., the quantity of skeletal positions) conditions the sonority of the reduplicated segments. Complex less sonorous templates are associated to larger templates. In this way he provides in this chapter a theoretical approach that relates the principle of sonority and the template. This has implications on the theory of sonority and allows for questioning the sonority driven syllabification principle, since it is generally assumed that the distinction between the complex segments and cluster types is generated by the Sonority Sequencing Principle. The proposal of Guillaume Enguehard, based on diagnostics of syllable structure, is inverse to this traditional assumption: for him sonority derives from structure, not the other way around. The constraints on the reduplicated segments derive from the representations. Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner (a singer, mezzosoprano) in their Chapter 7 (“Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa in 16th century French Polyphony: An Emergent Sub-Grammar in Fresneau’s Songs?”) focus on the relationship between text and music in the 16 th century song, and on hierarchical constituent structure matching grammar in textsetting. Each song combines two objects, the text, the linguistic object, and the song, the musical object (tune). The authors describe how these two objects interact in Henry Fresneau’s songs. The textsetting refers to the correspondence between text and tune, making use of formal similarities between language and music. One main similarity consists in the hierarchical constituent structure. Like syllables lexical items can be grouped into phonological or syntactic constituents, the notes in a tune can be bounded in groups, also nested in hierarchical larger groups. Henry Fresneau’s 16th century polyphonic songs show a specific interaction in textsetting. The authors establish the matchings generated by this grammar and model the emergence of Fresneau’s song sub-grammar. This chapter has benefited from the collaboration of a singer, Axelle Verner (mezzo-soprano) specialized in restoring a 16th century French pronunciation, as well as on the analysis of textsetting in ancient music, and their transmission to singers and performers.

xii

Michela Russo

Maximilien Guérin examines in his Chapter 8 (“Locative, Presentative and Progressive Construction in Atlantic Languages”) the verbal morphology of Atlantic Languages. He particularly focuses on a prototypical locative construction also used as a presentative and/or progressive construction and the marker associated to it. His hypothesis is that this construction, characteristic of this family, is inherited from ProtoAtlantic, and that its marker derives from a demonstrative determiner through a process of grammaticalization. His theoretical framework moves from grammatical constructions (usage-based Grammar), a functionalist approach to Grammars. His model of grammar diverges from the one adopted in the previous chapters since it is not based on the principles of universal grammar, rather in this model grammar is not independent of use and meaning, thus changes result from the creation of new grammars and the loss of the previous grammatical stages, processes called grammaticalizations from which the evolution of grammars would arise. Jean Léo Léonard in his Chapter 9 (“Paradigm Function Morphology applied to the Southern Finnic Dialect Network”) describes Finnic inflectional systems within a diasystemic analysis. He combines in his morpho-phonological analysis two different approaches, Paradigm Function Morphology (PFM), templatic phonology and particle phonology. He points out two main issues, relevant to Finno-Ugrian linguistics, general typology, and morpho-phonology: the relationship between Finnic inflectional taxonomies and typological inflection systems, and the challenge for theoretical linguistics to model morphological complexity and dialectal variation. He gives an account of Finnic inflectional taxonomies within PFM through a set of morphophonological rules and graphs of stem variation in order to turn ‘complexity’ into a ‘simplexity’ model. It is important to recall the core assumption of the Paradigm Function Morphology used in Chapter 9, in this framework Morphology is an autonomous component of the grammar. It means that in the internal architecture of Grammar, Morphology has an independent component with its own architecture, based on lexemes, paradigms, and realizations; thus, a language’s inflectional morphology is the result of its paradigm function.

Preface

xiii

John te Velde and Nora Vosburg in Chapter 10 (“Plautdietsch: A remarkable story of Language and change”) examine an endangered diasporic language of limited diffusion, Plautdietsch (also called Mennonite Low German), which has undergone changes dues to different linguistic factors. It is a religious minority originally from the Netherlands and Belgium, spoken as a primary language, and as heritage language. In the early formative years in the Vistula Delta, several phonological changes occurred that significantly changed the character of the original language, Dutch. It is composed by a cluster of dialects spoken among Mennonites in Europe, South America, and North America (USA, Canada, Mexico). Despite the actual distances, these varieties are still mutually intelligible. In this chapter they present interesting data from two Mennonite groups, one in Oklahoma, the other in Kansas. Despite the geographical distance for over a century their Plautdietsch varieties show a strikingly resemblance. Turning to formal aspects of syntax and phonology, they present evidence of the striking resilience of Plautdietsch dialect since earliest documentation. In particular, they found that the syntax of Plautdietsch varieties has remained intact as found in the other West Germanic languages with only very limited evidence of any shifts. These ten contributions could be grouped in thematic sub-headings ‘Syntax’, ‘Morphology’, ‘Morphosyntax’, ‘Phonology’, ‘Typology’, but from some of them a common point of view emerges: morphological properties are dependent on syntax, and syntax, phonology and morphology are together responsible for interpretative properties providing classification criteria to typology. In some of these contributions also emerges the hypothesis that morphology derives basically from the application of phonology to syntactic structures. However, some contributions have stated that Morphology is an independent component. Thus, an important question is left open: what place should be respectively given to Syntax and Morphology in the grammatical derivations? For some researchers, some operations are part of the syntax, while others see them as independent and post-syntactic mechanisms, and for some

xiv

Michela Russo

researchers, phonology creates linearity independently of syntax, within morphemes. The problem of the Syntax/Morphology and Phonology/Morphology interface is one of the major current issues in grammatical research. The themes proposed in this book particularly invite us to reflect.

Michela Russo Paris, the 14th of May 2021

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Many people have contributed to the creation of this volume. My thanks go especially to reviewers for various helpful criticisms and suggestions: -

Roland Noske (Associate Professor at University of Lille, France), Lameen Souag (Researcher at CNRS/LACITO = The Laboratory of Languages and Civilizations with an Oral Tradition, Paris, France) Mirko Grimaldi (Associate Professor at University of Salento, Italy) Luo Xiaoliang (Associate Professor at University of Orléans, France) Annie Rialland (Research Director at CNRS, UMR 7018, University of Sorbonne Nouvelle, Paris, France) François Dell (Research Director Emeritus at CNRS/CRLAO = The Center for East Asian Linguistic Research, Paris, France) Patrick Sauzet (Professor at University of Toulouse, France) Tjeerd de Graaf (Frisian Academy, Netherlands), Wolfgang Haubrichs (Professor at University of Saarbrücken, Germany) Anne Hertz (Professor Emeritus at University of Paris 8, France) Elena Soare (Associate Professor at University of Paris 8, France)

xvi

Michela Russo

All the authors of this book have been invited to elaborate on an overall account of Grammar(s). I would like to thank them for their patience, their hard work, and their ability to react to the editorial requirements. I wish to thank Viktor Andreevski (University of Lyon 3, France) for his editorial and technical support. Finally, I would like to express my thanks to my Research institution: the UMR 7023 “Formal Structures of Language” (CNRS) of the University of Paris 8.

Michela Russo Paris, the 14th of May 2021

In: The Emergence of Grammars Editor: Michela Russo

ISBN: 978-1-53619-888-1 © 2021 Nova Science Publishers, Inc.

Chapter 1

THE SECONDARY LOCATIVE CASES IN THE LITHUANIAN DIALECT OF ZIETELA Daniel Petit* Department of Antiquities, École Normale Supérieure, Paris, France

ABSTRACT The Lithuanian dialect of Zietela (Belorussia) is one of the few dialects that have preserved the Common Baltic system of secondary locative cases. Originally built on postpositional structures, these secondary locative cases were structured in Old Lithuanian along two parameters [±CONTACT], [±MOTION]. In the dialect of Zietela, two additional parameters were introduced in the distribution of the locative cases [±ANIMACY], [±NUMBER]. The aim of this chapter is to describe this new configuration and to account for its historical development both formally and functionally.

Keywords: Lithuanian, dialect, Zietela, case system, locative roles

*

Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected].

Daniel Petit

2

ABBREVIATIONS INESS ADESS ILL ALL

inessive adessive illative allative

INTRODUCTION Owing to its late standardization (beginning of the 20th century), the Lithuanian language offers extraordinary conditions for the description of dialectal diversity within a relatively small territory. The position of the Lithuanian language, largely shared with Latvian, the other language of the Baltic family preserved to this day, was long considered fragile or even endangered both by the existence of powerful superstrates (Polish, German and more recently Russian) and by the relative scarcity of the written culture until the 19th century. It is only thanks to the two periods of independence of the Baltic states (first independence in 1918–1940 and second independence from 1990 onwards) that Lithuanian became an official language and could develop a solid literary tradition. Understandably enough, the consequence of this late standardization has been an exceptional diversity of dialects still preserved, for most of them, to the present day, even if the most recent years have witnessed a sensible decay of their usage which will probably result in the disappearance of some of them in the years to come. The Lithuanian language is not limited to the three million speakers in the Republic of Lithuania (plus a sizeable diaspora); it also includes dialectal islands scattered in the neighboring countries, Latvia, Poland and Belorussia. These dialects were thoroughly described during the Soviet period and their position was recognized from the outset as more problematic than that of the dialects spoken in Lithuania, due to their integration in a foreign country, with no official linguistic status. Some of these dialects have disappeared in the meantime. It can be assumed that the extension of the Lithuanian language was once greater than historically

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

3

documented; as a result, some of these dialects remained isolated, separated from all cognate dialects, due to the extinction of the varieties of Lithuanian once spoken in the intermediate areas. The Lithuanian dialect of Zietela (Belorussia) is probably the most fascinating of these dialectal islands of Lithuanian. The aim of this chapter is to describe a morphosyntactic peculiarity of the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela — the system of secondary synthetic cases — and particularly to show how this system survived in a typically peripheral linguistic island within the context of intensive linguistic contacts. This study is empirically oriented and not connected to any kind of theoretical framework. It is but one modest contribution to the description and analysis of an original dialect which has discreetly left the history, but still deserves the attention of linguists interested in the emergence of grammatical structures and their evolution in contact-driven situations.

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE LITHUANIAN DIALECT OF ZIETELA To begin with, it is necessary to give some overall information about the dialect itself.1 Zietela (Beloruss. Dzjatlava, Russ. Djatlovo, Lith. Zietela, Pol. Zdięcioł) is a small town in the northwestern part of Belorussia, with approximately 7900 inhabitants (in 2013). It belongs to Belorussia and is now populated exclusively by speakers of Belorussian; the Lithuanian dialect has disappeared during the second part of the 20th century. If one looks at the map given on the next page, which reflects the distribution of the Lithuanian dialects at the mid-20th century, one clearly sees that the situation of Zietela, approximately 80 kms from the Lithuanian border and separated from other Lithuanian dialects, created favorable conditions for linguistic isolation and, as a result, for intensive linguistic interference. The Lithuanian dialect of Zietela has long attracted the attention of linguists. Apart from first mentions dating back to the beginning of the 19th century, there was a series of ethnographic and linguistic journeys 1

More details are given by Zinkevičius (2006, 119–131).

4

Daniel Petit

undertaken by famous scholars, Eduard Volter (1856–1941) in 1886, 1888 and 1896, Jan Rozwadowski (1867–1935) in 1901 and 1903, Kazimieras Būga (1871–1924) in 1906, Georg Gerullis (1888–1945) in 1929 and 1930, Peter Arumaa (1900–1986) in 1930, Christian Stang (1900–1977) in 1930, Ernst Fraenkel (1881–1957) in 1934, Juozas Balčikonis (1885–1969) in 1955–1957, Vladimir Toporov (1928–2005) and Viačeslav Ivanov (1929– 2017) in 1958, Tamara Sudnik (1939) in 1964, Anatolii Nepokupnyj (1932– 2006) in 1970 and, last but not least, Aloyzas Vidugiris (1928–2016) on several occasions in the 1950s and 1960s. Vidugiris became the best expert in the dialect of Zietela and, at the turn of the 20th and the 21th centuries, shortly after the extinction of the dialect, published three major sources based on his own field research: a dictionary (Zietelos šnektos žodynas, Vilnius, 1998), a grammar (Zietelos lietuvių šnekta, Vilnius, 2004) and a collection of oral texts (Zietelos šnektos tekstai, co-editor with Danguolė Mikulėnienė, 2 vol., 2005–2010).

Source: Visuotinė lietuvių enciklopedija, K. Morkūnas. Figure 1. The Lithuanian dialect of Zietela.

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

5

The reason for the attractivity of the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela lies in its archaism: it is famous for having preserved grammatical features of Old Lithuanian lost in most other modern dialects, particularly the complex system of secondary locative cases. Nevertheless, owing to its isolation and the constant pressure of Belorussian, the dialect displays remarkable innovations, some of which are unparalleled in any other Lithuanian dialect. The aim of this paper is to assess one of the most striking peculiarities of the dialect of Zietela which can shed light both on the evolution of the Lithuanian language and on the linguistic contacts it has developed in the course of its history.

PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CASES IN LITHUANIAN The Baltic languages have largely preserved the inflectional structure inherited from Proto-Indo-European (PIE). In Lithuanian, for example, we still find 6 primary synthetic cases: nominative, vocative, accusative, genitive, dative and instrumental (the locative will be discussed below). The PIE ablative disappeared, having merged by syncretism with the PIE genitive: this evolution is shared by all other Baltic languages as well as by the Slavic languages and must therefore go back to a very ancient date. The fusion of genitive and ablative is complete both formally and functionally: some genitive forms (e.g., fem.sg. -os) go back to ancient genitives, others (e.g., masc.sg. -o) to ancient ablatives, and ablative and genitive functions are conveyed by a single case, traditionally called ‘genitive’ (Lith. kilminiñkas from kilmė̃ ‘origin’) in grammatical descriptions of Lithuanian. All other cases can be traced back to PIE and have generally retained their original functions. The only problematic case is the locative: while it is clearly preserved in Slavic, it has undergone substantial changes in Baltic, due to the competition with the system of secondary cases. In Latvian, the system of primary cases was reduced to 5 cases (nominative, accusative, genitive, dative and partly vocative). To judge from its limited documentation (a few Lutheran Catechisms from the 16th century), Old Prussian, the only West Baltic language documented by written texts, but

Daniel Petit

6

now extinct since the 17th century, had a case system entirely copied on the German model, with 4 cases (nominative, accusative, genitive, dative); it is difficult to determine whether this reduction is due to the nature of the documentation, consisting of slavish word-for-word translations from German, or reflects a genuine evolution of the language itself. As it stands, Lithuanian is the best witness of the Proto-Baltic case system. Apart from its 6 primary cases, Lithuanian has developed a rich system of secondary locative cases. The same system has left significant traces in Latvian, so that its development can reasonably be traced back to the Common East Baltic period at least; the position of West Baltic (Old Prussian) in this respect is disputed. The system was in full use in Old Lithuanian (16th-18th centuries), but was significantly reduced in Modern Lithuanian. The secondary cases are structured along two parameters: [±CONTACT], [±MOTION]. This can be represented in a tetrachoric table as follows (model: rankà ‘hand’): Table 1. The Old Lithuanian Secondary Cases Position IN-CASES (WITH CONTACT) AD-CASES (WITHOUT CONTACT)

Motion

INESSIVE (to be in) SG rañkoje PL rañkose ADESSIVE (to be at,

ILLATIVE (to go into) SG rañkon(a) PL rañkosn(a) ALLATIVE (to go to,

near) SG rankáip(i) PL rankósemp(i)

towards) SG rañkosp(i) PL rankum̃p(i)

The reason why these four locative cases are traditionally called ‘secondary cases’ is that they were created quite recently in the prehistory of East Baltic on the basis of originally postpositional constructions reanalyzed as synthetic forms. As a rule, they derive from inflected case forms + postpositions, which regularly represent the postpositional counterparts to historically documented prepositions:

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

7

Table 2. The Secondary Cases and their Postpositional Origin Reconstruction [LOC=*ēn]

Plural rañkose

Reconstruction [LOC=*ēn]

ILLATIVE rañkon(a) (to go into)

[ACC=*nā]

rañkosn(a)

[ACC=*nā]

ADESSIVE (to be at)

rankáip(i)

[LOC=*p(r)ēi̯ ]

rankósemp(i)

[LOC=*p(r)ēi̯ ]

ALLATIVE (to go to)

rañkosp(i)

[GEN=*p(r)ēi̯ ]

rankum̃p(i)

[GEN=*p(r)ēi̯ ]

INESSIVE (to be in)

Singular rañkoje

There are still some grey areas in this table. Several problematic aspects have been omitted for the sake of simplicity. Sometimes, the parallelism between the secondary case and its prepositional counterpart is perfect, as in the allative [GEN=*p(r)ēi̯ ] exactly matching the prepositional construction [*p(r)ēi̯ + GEN] = Lith. priẽ + GEN ‘near, at, by’. Sometimes, however, the parallelism does not work, either because there is no preposition corresponding to the postpositional construction (e.g., illative [ACC=*nā] ≠ no preposition [*nā + ACC]) or because the inflected case form disappeared in the language (e.g., inessive and adessive based on the inherited locative, which was ousted by the inessive itself). In spite of these formal imbalances, the original structure of the secondary cases is clear. As they show up in the historical documentation, however, they were certainly analyzed as synthetic case forms rather than as postpositional structures. This analysis is suggested by the fact that in complex noun phrases the secondary ending is repeated on both members, as in (1), taken from an Old Lithuanian text from the end of the 16th century: (1) Old Lithuanian: Mikalojus Daukša, Postilla Catholicka (DP), 1599, 48534 idánt’ estúmbite ir giartumbite so that

you would eat-COND.2PL and

skomiáip

manáip

table-ADESS.SG

my-ADESS.SG

you would drink-COND.2PL

‘so that you could eat and drink at my table’

Daniel Petit

8

The adessive ending -(ai)-p is expressed twice, on the noun skomiáip ‘table’ and on the possessive adjective manáip ‘my’. A postposition would have been expressed only once at the end of the noun phrase. The double marking shows that -(ai)-p was treated as an inflectional ending, replicated on each member of the noun phrase. The evolution from PIE to East Baltic can be described differently for in-cases (inessive and illative) and ad-cases (adessive and allative). From a broad perspective, in-cases seem to have undergone a spiral development from synthetic to analytic and later on from analytic to synthetic (corresponding to Haspelmath’s anasynthetic evolution):2 EVOLUTION OF IN-CASES: [SYNTHETIC] (PIE synthetic locative cases: locative and accusative) → [ANALYTIC] (East Baltic postpositional structures) → [SYNTHETIC] (new synthetic in-cases)

In-cases ultimately go back to PIE synthetic forms (locative of position resp. accusative of goal), later on replaced by postpositional constructions, which eventually merged in East Baltic to new synthetic forms. On the other hand, already in PIE the meaning of ad-cases (adessive, allative) was conveyed by adpositional constructions; there was no dedicated synthetic case form to convey their specific meaning. As a result, we have to reconstruct for ad-cases a different, non-cyclic scenario: EVOLUTION OF AD-CASES: [ANALYTIC] (PIE adpositional structures) → [ANALYTIC] (East Baltic postpositional structures) → [SYNTHETIC] (new synthetic ad-cases)

In the history of the Lithuanian language, the fate of in-cases (inessive, illative) and ad-cases (adessive, allative) was different: in-cases were largely preserved in the modern language, whereas ad-cases disappeared, replaced by prepositional constructions. In Modern Lithuanian, the inessive is in full use; it is called ‘locative’ (Lith. vietiniñkas from vietà ‘place’) in descriptive 2

Haspelmath (2018).

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

9

grammars, which might create some confusion, since it clearly reflects the East Baltic secondary inessive, not the PIE primary locative. The illative is still widespread in most Lithuanian dialects, but, in the standard language, at least in its urban usage, it is often replaced by an analytic construction with the preposition į̃ ‘into’ + ACC (< *in < PIE *n̥); cf. ‘to go to the meadow’ = both Lith. eĩti píevon (illative *-ān=nā) and eĩti į̃ píevą (preposition į̃ + ACC). On the other hand, ad-cases disappeared in the modern language, apart from lexicalized vestiges (e.g., Lith. eĩti galóp ‘to go to the end’), and were regularly replaced by the prepositional construction Lith. priẽ + GEN ‘near, at, by’ (both adessive and allative). The different evolution of in-cases and ad-cases reflects the distinction between semantically primary and secondary locative roles, in-cases being largely preserved as synthetic, adcases being conveyed by adpositional constructions. It is striking that incases, involving contact with the spatial landmark, are treated as more primary than ad-cases, involving contiguity, but no contact with the spatial landmark. In this configuration, [+CONTACT] is the unmarked member, [-CONTACT] the marked member. This distribution is found in most modern Lithuanian dialects, with the exception of Zietela and a few other dialects.

SECONDARY CASES IN THE DIALECT OF ZIETELA The Lithuanian dialect of Zietela is one of the few dialects that have retained the four secondary cases to the present day. 3 Their distribution, however, displays curious features which have not yet been paid the attention they deserve. Vidugiris (2004, 146) gives the following paradigm of the secondary locative cases illustrated with feminine ā- and ī-stems (models: rankà ‘hand’, martì ‘daughter-in-law’):

3

A similar system can be found in Lazūnai, Gervėčiai and Dieveneniškės, other isolated Lithuanian dialects located in Belorussia or Lithuania, a few kilometers north of Zietela.

Daniel Petit

10

Table 3. The secondary cases in the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela

IN-CASES (WITH CONTACT) AD-CASES (WITHOUT CONTACT)

Position

Motion

(to be in) SG rαŋ̃.ko.i̯ PL rαŋ̃.ko.sa ADESSIVE (to be at, near)

ILLATIVE

INESSIVE

SG mαr.̃ č’eip, PL —

mαr.č’ǝĩ.p

(to go into) SG rαŋ̃.ko.n PL rαŋ̃.ko.sna ALLATIVE (to go to, towards) SG mαr.̃ č’õ·s, mαr.̃ č’àp PL —

As in the other dialects, in-cases (inessive, illative) are well preserved in the dialect of Zietela; ad-cases are said to be considerably less frequent.4 Globally speaking, the distribution between in-cases and ad-cases in Zietela seems to be congruent with the Old Lithuanian evidence, reproducing the same distinction between [+CONTACT] (in-cases) and [-CONTACT] (adcases). Two points, however, warrant particular emphasis. The first one is the semantic distribution of the two sets of secondary cases. Due to their core meaning, which implies being inside resp. entering a closed area, in-cases are regularly limited to inanimate beings: they normally refer to concrete places defined by clear boundaries (like ‘house’, ‘forest’, ‘city’, etc.). For obvious reasons, animate beings, especially human beings, are not typical landmarks for in-cases. As a result, in the declension tables of his grammar (2004), Vidugiris does not provide inessive and illative forms for words like v’í·ras ‘man’, su·nùs ‘son’ or mαrt’ì ‘daughterin-law’, which suggests that these forms are not documented in the dialect. He states explicitly (2004, 129): Paprastai šiuos vietininkus turi tik negyvus daiktus reiškiantys daiktavardžiai. ‘Usually only nouns referring to non-living objects have these locatives [in-cases].’

4

Cf. Vidugiris (2004, 129).

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

11

Ad-cases could be expected to be more open from a semantic point of view, since proximity without contact could refer both to inanimate and to animate landmarks. Vidugiris notes, however, that ad-cases are limited in the dialect of Zietela to animate landmarks (2004, 129): (Juos) turi dažniausiai gyvus asmenis ar gyvulius reiškiantys daiktavardžiai. ‘Most often nouns referring to living human beings or animals have them [ad-cases].’

As a result, in the declension tables of his grammar, he does not provide adessive and allative forms for words like p’ir.̃ štas ‘finger’, tur.̃ gus ‘market’ or rαŋkà ‘hand’. The animacy constraint clearly shows up in table 3, where in-cases are illustrated with the inanimate word rαŋkà ‘hand’, ad-cases with the animate word mαrt’ì ‘daughter-in-law’. The distinction between [+CONTACT] and [-CONTACT] thus seems to have been largely superseded by a stronger distinction between [-ANIMATE] and [+ANIMATE]. The second point worthy of particular attention is that ad-cases are, to a certain extent, sensitive to the category of number: whereas in-cases are widely used both in the singular and in the plural, ad-cases are usually limited to the singular and considerably much rarer (or even completely absent) in the plural, where they are most often replaced by in-cases.5 The distinction between in-cases and ad-cases does not work completely for the plural, where in-cases are often used instead of ad-cases, regardless of the degree of contact with the landmark and of the distinction between inanimate and animate landmarks. The system can thus be described to a large extent as fundamentally unbalanced:

5

Cf. Vidugiris (2004, 129).

Daniel Petit

12

Table 4. Animacy and contact in Zietela

POSITION

IN-CASES (WITH CONTACT) AD-CASES (WITHOUT CONTACT)

MOTION

IN-CASES (WITH CONTACT) AD-CASES (WITHOUT CONTACT)

Singular inessive for inanimates adessive for animates illative for inanimates allative for animates

Plural inessive for inanimates inessive for (in)animates illative for inanimates illative for (in)animates

In order to understand this table, it is necessary to bear in mind that four factors play a role in the distribution of the secondary locative cases: position/motion; contact/non-contact; inanimate/animate; singular/plural. Some of these factors are closely correlated with each other, sometimes for obvious reasons (e.g., in-cases are normally incompatible with animacy), but sometimes without clear motivation (the neutralization of in-cases and adcases in the plural is unexplained). In addition, the table given above leaves aside a number of possible configurations: it remains unclear, for example, how to express inessive resp. illative functions for animates or adessive resp. allative functions for inanimates in the singular. Globally speaking, these preliminary observations are corroborated by the dialectal texts, but with some specific details which require a more finegrained analysis. In what follows, I shall examine the dialectal evidence from Zietela through a detailed reading of volume 1 of Zietelos šnektos tekstai (2005), supplemented with data from Vidugiris (1998, 2004). Most of the data that will be provided below result from the intensive field research conducted by Vidugiris at the end of the 1950s and at the beginning of the 1960s in Zietela. The informers were generally born in the 1860– 1890s and can thus provide us with a reliable picture of the usage of the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela at the end of the 19th century.6 In addition, I 6

The main informers of the dialect of Zietela documented in Vidugiris (2005) are Petronėlė Dicevičiūtė-Chaleckienė (1864–1962) = PDC; Stanislava Kaškaitė-Kaškienė (1866–1958) = SKK; Regina Dargevičiūtė (1876–1958) = RD; Marija Dicevičiūtė-Vasiukevičienė (1878– 1962) = MDV; Juzefas Žukelis (1883–1978) = JŽ; Katryna Žukelytė-Žukelienė (1884–1965)

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

13

shall mention earlier data from Rozwadowski’s field research in 1901–1903 (edited by Gregorski in 1995), some of which may have specific traits, as they consist not only of conversations with native speakers, but also of ancient folktales and folksongs with an archaic coloration. In both cases, most of the informers were simple peasants, with few literacy skills. Some of them travelled during their lifetime to different places in Russia or even in Lithuania, which may have had some influence on their dialect. The interference of the written medium is also a factor to take into account: some of the informers, especially those interviewed by Vidugiris, may have had the possibility to hear the Lithuanian radio or to read Lithuanian newspapers more or less regularly. The majority of the informers were women, who had very few opportunities to leave their village and thus remained relatively unaffected by foreign influence. One should note, however, that the population of the village was mixed, including Lithuanians, Belorussians, Poles and, until 1945, Jews (3500 of them were killed during the Second World War); it is therefore quite reasonable to think that, however isolated they might have been, speakers of the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela were all plurilingual and had full command of other languages (at least Belorussian, Russian and Polish). The use of the secondary cases in Zietela according to Rozwadowski and Vidugiris is congruent with the grammatical description provided by the same Vidugiris (2004), at least to some extent. In-cases are regular in the dialect. We have extensive evidence for the inessive (to be in), both in the singular (ex. 2-4): (2) Rozwadowski (1995, 75 [1901–1903]) Bazńī́č́oj zvā́ d’ino church-INESS.SG

called-IND.PST.3

žmóńes. people-ACC.PL

‘In the church, they called people.’

= KŽŽ; Paulina Kaškaitė-Samuolinkienė (1885–1974) = PKS; Jonas Laurukevičius (1886– 1972) = JL; Juzefa Žukelytė-Kaškienė (1890–1966) = JŽK.

Daniel Petit

14

(3) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 68 (PDC) Dùkαrt buvåũ. V′íl′n′o.i̯ . twice-ADV

I was-IND.PST.1SG

Vilnius-INESS.SG

‘I was twice in Vilnius.’ (4) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 209 (PKS) Mã·nas žmõ·gus b′ìt my-NOM.SG

man-NOM.SG

Am′èriko.i̯ .

was-IND.PST.3

America-INESS.SG

‘My man was in America.’ and in the plural (ex. 5–6 with pluralia tantum): (5) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 77 (PDC) V′ienà ži.dåuk′ẽ ̣·lε·

kõ·p′ẹ·s′i

one-NOM.SG

Jewish woman-NOM.SG

po.

du·b′ès

P′etrùkuͦsa.

was

buried-IND.PST.3

under

grave-GEN.SG

Petrukai-INESS.PL

‘A Jewish woman was buried in a grave in Petrukai (a place name).’ (6) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 87 (SKK) Àš Nαrč′uõs buvåũ. I-NOM.SG

Narčiai-INESS.PL

was-IND.PST.1SG

‘I was in Narčiai (a place name).’ Most inessive forms documented in the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela refer to place names (cities, villages) or to separate buildings (churches, houses), i.e., to closed areas with clear boundaries which constitute prototypical landmarks for a location with contact (penetrability). I have found no instance with animate landmarks. Like the inessive, the illative (to go into) is widely attested in the dialect. We have extensive evidence for the illative singular (ex. 7-9) (7) Rozwadowski (1995, 24 [1901–1903]) Ȧi̯ sȕ ioau̯ sfĭetȧn. I shall go-IND.FUT.1SG

already, well

‘I shall go to the world.’

world-ILL.SG

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela (8) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 51 (PDC) O.͜ v′íenas nuvažá.u̯ and one-NOM.SG

went-IND.PST.3

15

Αrgαnt′ìno.n. Argentina-ILL.SG

‘And one (of my sons) went to Argentina.’ (9) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 69 (PDC) Àš αimù bazn′ĩ·č′o.n. I-NOM.SG

go-IND.PRS.1SG

church-ILL.SG

‘I am going to the church.’ and for the illative plural (ex. 10-12): (10) Rozwadowski (1995, 50 [1901–1903]) It atai̯ dińéjä̰ ãńēs v́is’ı̏

trĩs

and came-IND.PST.3 they-NOM.PL all-NOM.PL

namũosna

tũosna

houses-ILL.PL

those-ILL.PL

three-NOM.PL

‘Then all three of them came to those houses.’ (11) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 58 (PDC) O.͜ m′æ̃·z dá.r to·l′ì k′itúosna and we-NOM.PL still

namúosna

far away other-ILL.PL houses-ILL.P

àtαimαm. we come-IND.PRS.1PL

‘And we come a little bit far away to other houses.’ (12) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 160 (JŽ) O.͜ mó·t′eris tαi ͜ kúl′b′ẹsna and woman-NOM.SG it-ACC.SG gunstocks-ILL.PL

instã·to·. puts-IND.PRS.3

‘And the woman puts it into the gunstocks.’ As with the inessive, we observe a limitation to inanimate landmarks, usually referring to closed areas (like cities, villages or houses) or closed objects (like ‘gunstocks’ in 12) that can be entered by the trajectory (the object in movement) and thus represent prototypical landmarks for motion with contact (penetrability). Animate landmarks are usually inappropriate

Daniel Petit

16

for this meaning and rarely found in the illative, with only a few exceptions (ex. 13–15): (13) Rozwadowski (1995, 13 [1901–1903]) V́ íe̯nas sūnū̏s nuv́ei̯ one-NOM.SG

son-NOM.SG

went-IND.PST.3

maskōlũȯsna. soldiers-ILL.PL

‘One son went to the soldiers (to the army).’ (14) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 180 (KŽŽ) N′ẽ ̣·jo masko.l′úosna. NEG=went-IND.PST.3

soldiers-ILL.PL

‘He did not go to the soldiers (to the army).’ (15) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 280 (JŽK) Ir ͜ atvažú·ok kadαĩ.k sv′eč′úosna. and come-IMPER.2SG one day

guests-ILL.PL

‘And come one day and visit us.’ (literally: ‘come to the guests’) It is likely that the usage illustrated in (13-14) is calqued from Russian, where we find a parallel expression idti v soldaty ‘to go to the soldiers’ (literally: ‘into’), ‘to become a soldier’. This expression was also calqued in Polish iść w sołdaty ‘to go (in)to the soldiers’, now commonly replaced by iść do wojska ‘to go to the army’. The Russian phrase is striking, not only because of the use of the illative preposition v ‘into’, but also because the animate noun soldaty is not marked in the genitive-accusative, which supposes that it is treated as inanimate.7 We have a similar construction in Russian idti v gosti ‘to go to the guests’, ‘to become a guest’, which is certainly the source of (15). Interestingly enough, the Russian prepositional construction was rendered in the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela by the synthetic illative, reproducing the same shift to inanimacy as in Russian, but by different means.

7

See Bilý (1988) and Mel’čuk (1985, 461–489) for the Russian type.

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

17

As already said, ad-cases are less frequent in Zietela and extremely rare, or even virtually absent, in the plural. We have evidence for the adessive singular (ex. 16-20): (16) Rozwadowski (1995, 5 [1901–1903]) Manȁi̯ p momȕt́ei̯ p my-ADESS.SG mother-ADESS.SG

ir also

v́eč́ ãrōt

śédō.

spend the evening-INF

sat-IND.PST.3

‘She also sat close to my mother to spend the evening.’ (17) Jan Rozwadowski (1995, 30 [1901–1903]) Bȕvo Aléŋka dvaŕȅ

põńip.

was-IND.PST.3 Alenka-NOM.SG garden-INESS.SG master-ADESS.SG

‘Alenka was in the garden beside her master (or at her master’s).’ (18) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 52 (PDC) Anà ko.plõ.n′ip b′ìt. she-NOM.SG

priest-ADESS.SG was-IND.PST.3

‘She was at the priest’s.’ (19) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 175 (KŽŽ) P′ir.̃ ko.m põ·n′ip dαr.̃ žin′e·. bought-IND.PST.1PL

master-ADESS.SG barn-ACC.SG

‘We bought a barn at the master’s (from the master).’ (20) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 74 (PDC) kàd ã·nas pas′iklá·ustu.p savá.mp that he-NOM.SG ask-COND.3

bró·l′ip.

own-ADESS.SG brother-ADESS.SG

‘(I said) him to ask his brother.’ Examples (16-19) show the prototypical use of the adessive, expressing proximity to an animate landmark, usually a human being beside whom the main argument is located. Example (20) shows a conventionalized use of the adessive introducing the object of the verb pasikláusti ‘to ask’ (instead of

Daniel Petit

18

the genitive or accusative in other Lithuanian varieties). In all cases, the landmark is animate (human being). Examples of adessive plural are extremely rare. A few instances are found in Rozwadowski (1901–1903, ed. 1995), but they are even much rarer in Vidugiris (2004). Taken at face value, this could suggest that the limitation to the singular is a recent phenomenon in the history of the dialect, but the matter is probably more complicated than that, as we have to distinguish different kinds of usages. In Rozwadowski (1995 [1901–1903]) and in Zietelos šnektos tekstai (2005), I have only found instances with personal pronouns, like (21-23): (21) Rozwadowski (1995, 5 [1901–1903]) Anȁ mūśı̏ p us stàłō she-NOM.SG us-ADESS.PL at ńe pas’édi. NEG=sits-IND.PRS.3

table-GEN.SG

‘She is not sitting beside us at the table.’ (22) Rozwadowski (1995, 68 [1901–1903]) Muśı̏ p śeńı̏ ũtarinō. us-ADESS.PL

old-NOM.PL

said-IND.PST.3

‘Among us (in our village) old men used to say….’ (23) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 168 (KŽŽ) B′ìt mu·s′ìp ži·dá.uka. was-IND.PST.3 us-ADESS.PL Jewish woman-NOM.SG

‘There was a Jewish woman among us (in our village).’ It seems to be the case that ad-cases were better preserved with personal pronouns than with nouns. It is for the moment impossible to determine whether this is due to a formal feature of personal pronouns or to the fact that personal pronouns are characterized by a higher degree of animacy. An interesting feature of the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela is the use of the adessive case in a possessive construction ‘to be’ + ADESS, corresponding to the meaning conveyed in Standard Lithuanian by the verb turė́ ti ‘to have’. The dialect uses the verb turė́ ti ‘to have’, but also developed

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

19

with the same meaning the construction ‘to be’ + ADESS, obviously calqued from the Russian equivalent ‘to be’ + u ‘at’ + ACC = ‘to have’. From a typological point of view, the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela has undergone the very uncommon evolution from a HAVE-language to a BE-language (using Isačenko’s 1974 terminology). The possessive construction with the adessive case is extremely frequent in Zietela, both in the singular (ex. 2427): (24) Rozwadowski (1995, 31 [1901–1903]) Tā́ m pṓńip b’ĭt this-ADESS.SG master-ADESS.SG was-IND.PST.3

p’irmō̃s

pač́ ōs̃ .

first-GEN.SG

wife-GEN.SG

dukt́i̯ḗ daughter-NOM.SG

‘This master had a daughter from his first wife.’ (literally: ‘at this master was a daughter’) (25) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 50 (PDC) Man′im̃.p b′ìt k′eturì at me-ADESS.SG

were-IND.PST.3

ir ͜ v′ienà

m′ǝrg′í·t’ẹ.

and one-NOM.SG

girl-NOM.SG

su·nαĩ.

four-NOM.PL sons-NOM.PL

‘I had four sons and one girl.’ (literally: ‘at me were four sons and one girl’) (26) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 59 (PDC) K′eturì αr ͜ š′ešì slũ·gαi

òt

four-NOM.PL

or six-NOM.PL

servants-NOM.PL look

b′ìt

tαĩ.p

põn′ǝip.

were-IND.PST.3 this-ADESS.SG

g′erαĩ. well

mistress-ADESS.SG

‘This mistress, look, had four or six servants.’ (literally: ‘at this mistress were four or six servants’) (27) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 74 (PDC) V′íenas man′im̃.p vαĩ.kas one-NOM.SG

at me-ADESS.SG child-NOM.SG

nùm′irẹ. died-IND.PST.3

‘One of my children died.’ (literally: ‘at me one child died’, extended use)

Daniel Petit

20

and in the plural (ex. 28-30), with personal pronouns: (28) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 52 (PDC) Mú·s′ip b′ìt palã·cus

ir ͜

põ·nas.

at us-ADESS.PL were-IND.PST.3 castle-NOM.SG and master-NOM.SG

‘We had a castle and a master.’ (literally: ‘at us were a castle and a master’, the meaning is still more adessive ‘in our village’ than strictly possessive) (29) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 69 (PDC) Mú·s′ip b′ìt at us-ADESS.PL

dv′ì

were-IND.PST.3

trĩ·s

slũ·gu.

two-NOM.PL three-NOM.PL

maids-GEN.PL

‘We had two or three maids.’ (literally: ‘at us were two or three maids’) (30) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 54 (PDC) B′ìt k′æ̃·tv′eras vαikũ· was-IND.PST.3 group of four-NOM.SG

children-GEN.PL

jú ͦsm′i. at them-ADESS.PL

‘They had four children.’ (literally: ‘at them were four children’) Semantically, there is no perceptible difference between ‘to be’ + ADESS and turė́ ti ‘to have’, the latter being used in the same contexts (ex. 31): (31) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I, 73 (PDC) P′ǝŋk′ìs vαikùs turé ̣jåu five-ACC.PL

nuk͜

from

sã·vo.

children-ACC.PL

I had-IND.PST.1SG

v′í·ro.

own-GEN.SG husband-GEN.SG

‘I had five children from my husband.’ The only thing one can say is that turė́ ti ‘to have’ is more frequent with material objects than with abstract relationships (like kinship, for example),

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

21

which is reminiscent of the distribution observed in Latin between the mihi est-type (often connected with non-material possession) and the habeō-type (often connected with concrete inanimate objects).8 In any case, the calque of the Russian possessive construction ‘to be’ + u ‘at’ + ACC in the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela has considerably enhanced the survival of the adessive case. Probably a majority of the occurrences of the adessive are attested in possessive constructions. The allative is extremely rare in the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela. Vidugiris (2004, 133) mentions only a few instances (ex. 32-33): (32) Vidugiris (2004, 133) Kun′igó·p važúoja. priest-ALL.SG

goes-IND.PRS.3

‘He goes to the priest.’ (33) Vidugiris (2004, 133) Aimù Kaškàp. go-IND.PRS.1SG

Kaška-ALL.SG

‘I am going to Kaška (name of a woman).’ In the texts themselves, it is difficult to find reliable examples, and my impression is that the allative was residual in the dialect from the very beginning. Significantly enough, Adam Gregorski, in his edition of Rozwadowski’s manuscripts (1901–1903), does not present the allative as a living case of the dialect (1995, 117sq.) and only mentions three secondary locatives (inessive, illative, adessive). Wherever it appears, the allative is characterized by two limitations. First, it is restricted to animate landmarks, usually human beings (as in 32-33). There is only one exception, which is otherwise quite frequent, with namóp ‘towards the house, home’ (ex. 3435): (34) Rozwadowski (1995, 3 [1901–1903]) Aš namuõp tav́ȅ užv́ä̰sȕ. I-NOM.SG

8

home-ALL.SG you-ACC.SG

On this distinction see Bauer (2000, 183 and 185).

will lead-IND.PST.1SG

Daniel Petit

22

‘I shall take you back home.’ (35) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 93 (RD) Atajåũ. aš ͜ namó·p went-IND.PST.1SG

I-NOM.SG home-ALL.SG

‘I went home.’ The form namó·p ‘home’ (with movement) is probably adverbialized and reflects, in the dialect of Zietela, an earlier stage of the Lithuanian language prior to the limitation of ad-cases to animate landmarks. Second, the allative is usually limited to the singular and does not appear in the plural. There are a few exceptions, with personal pronouns (ex. 3637): (36) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 183 (KŽŽ) Žmó·n′ẹ.s b′ijó.i̯ people-NOM.PL

αĩ.t

feared-IND.PST.3

mu.sum̃.

go-INF us-ALL.PL

‘People feared to come to us.’ (37) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 254 (JL) Tαi ͜ b′ié ̣ga m′ǝrgùč′o.s paz ͜ mùs, then

run-IND.PRS.3 girls-NOM.PL at

žmó·n′ẹ.s

αĩ.t

us-ACC.PL

mú·sump.

people-NOM.PL go-IND.PRS.3 to us-ALL.PL

‘Then girls run to us, people come to us.’ or extremely rarely with nouns (ex. 38): (38) Vidugiris (2004, 133) paαĩ.t b′ǝrnum̃.p go-INF

boys-ALL.PL

‘to go to the boys, to go to see boys.’

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

23

The most striking point is the tendency to replace ad-cases by in-cases in the plural. In my corpus, I have found a few instances of this tendency. The inessive plural is sometimes used instead of the adessive plural both in the primary adessive meaning (ex. 39): (39) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 67 (PDC) Àš põ.nuos prismó·k′inåu I-NOM.SG

lords-INESS.PL

kã·

d′írpt′i.

how

work-INF

learned-IND.PST.1SG

‘I learned at masters’, with masters how to work.’ or in the possessive construction (‘to be’ + INESS instead of ‘to be’ + ADESS = ‘to have’, ex. 40-41): (40) Rozwadowski (1995, 50 [1901–1903]) Ńḭ̈ -bit jūosȁ NEG=were-IND.PST.3

them-INESS.PL

vai̯ kũ. children-GEN.PL

‘They did not have children.’ (literally: ‘in them were no children’, instead of ‘at them’) (41) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 252 (JL) B′ìd vαikũ· were-IND.PST.3

children-GEN.PL

bõ·č′uos. fathers-INESS.PL

‘The fathers had children.’ (literally: ‘in the fathers were children’, instead of ‘at the fathers’) As a result, the inessive can alternate with the adessive in the same micro-context, as in (42), where at a distance of two lines we find the inessive (plural) and the adessive (singular) to express exactly the same function:

Daniel Petit

24

(42) Rozwadowski (1995, 67 [1901–1903]) Ir b′ĭ́t juo̯sȁ dukt́ẽ them-INESS.PL

[…]

daughter-NOM.SG Ir

and

was-IND.PST.3

Ir

jḕi

b′ĭt

móč́ ekai̯ p

and

PCLE

was-IND.PST.3

mother-ADESS.SG

dukt́ẽ. daughter-NOM.SG

‘And they had a daughter […] The mother had a daughter.’ (literally: ‘and in them was a daughter’, vs ‘at the mother was a daughter’) To sum up, the data collected by Rozwadowski and Vidugiris confirm in its main lines the presentation given by Vidugiris (2004) and draw attention to the following features: 1. Inessive and illative are well preserved in the dialect, and their usage is consistent with what is described as the canonical usage of in-cases in Old Lithuanian. 2. The animacy constraint (in-cases = inanimates / ad-cases = animates) is usually respected, exceptions being due either to Russian influence (the Russian type idti v soldaty in 13-15) or to the adverbialization of ancient case forms (namóp in 34-35). 3. Ad-cases are rare in the plural (and often replaced by in-cases), but they are a little more often used with personal pronouns. There are, however, blind spots in this description, especially due to the fact that some configurations are not covered by the synthetic locative cases. It is necessary to look at other potential strategies which can convey the same meaning in the dialect of Zietela, in the first instance prepositions.

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

25

LOCATIVE PREPOSITIONS IN THE DIALECT OF ZIETELA Apart from the synthetic locative cases, which can be traced back to originally postpositional structures, the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela displays, like Standard Lithuanian, a wide range of prepositions whose meaning can be very close to that of the synthetic cases. The following prepositions can be listed as equivalents to the secondary locative cases: Table 5. Spatial prepositions in the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela Position WITH CONTACT

INESSIVE

Motion (to be in)

WITHOUT CONTACT

ADESSIVE

(to go into) añ + gen, iñ + acc, dõ ALLATIVE (to go to, towards) añ + GEN, pàs + acc, piẽ, priẽg, prìg ILLATIVE

añ + gen (to be at, near)

añ + GEN, pàs + acc, piẽ, priẽg, prìg

While dõ ‘to, towards’ is borrowed from Slavic do and limited to the incorporation of Slavic phrases into the dialect (as in išvažá.u̯ do. Pòl′sk′ẽ ̣·i̯ ‘he went to Poland’),9 the remaining prepositions are genuinely Lithuanian, but may diverge in some aspects from their equivalents in the standard language. The most striking divergence is that two different prepositions, añt ‘on, over’ + GEN (both positional and motional) and iñ ‘into’ + ACC (motional), have progressively merged (añ, iñ) in the dialect of Zietela, or at least came closer to each other, with two consequences. First, the specific meaning of añ ‘on, over’ was partly blurred and the preposition came to be used with the inessive or illative functions (implying being inside resp. entering a closed area). An example with the inessive meaning is (43): (43) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 181 (KŽŽ) B′ìt αn ͜ p′irk′õ·s. was-IND.PST.3

on, over

home-GEN.SG

‘He was at home.’ 9

Vidugiris (1998, 154). Cf. Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 52 (PDC).

Daniel Petit

26

to compare with the synthetic inessive in (44): (44) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 188 (KŽŽ) B′ìt k′itõ·i̯ p′irk′õ·i̯ . was-IND.PST.3

other-INESS.SG

house-INESS.SG

‘He was in the other house.’ An example of añ with the illative meaning is (45): (45) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 183 (KŽŽ) Išl′iñ.do dùkαrt αn ͜ went out-IND.PST.3

twice

on, over

sũ·do. tribunal-GEN.SG

‘He went twice to the tribunal.’ Añ is also attested with the adessive or allative meanings (implying proximity without contact), which is more compatible with the superficial meaning ‘on, over’. An example with the adessive meaning is (46): (46) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 137 (JŽ) An ͜ tõ·s ùp′ẹs near

that-GEN.SG

river-GEN.SG

b′ìt was-IND.PST.3

štã·bas. stick-GEN.SG

‘Near that river there was a stick.’ It is likely that the semantic evolution of añ in Zietela (‘on, over’ > ‘in’, ‘into’, ‘at’) was not only triggered by its formal proximity to iñ, but also, more crucially, influenced by the model of the Slavic preposition na, which originally means ‘on, over’, but can be used more widely in reference to open spaces one can come across, i.e., with a meaning quite close to the inessive or the illative meanings. One may compare, for example, Polish na niebie ‘in the sky’ (literally: ‘on the sky’), directly calqued in the Lithuanian dialect of Zietela αn dαŋgåũ.s.10 On the other hand, the proximity between añ and iñ is responsible for the fact that iñ, originally construed with the accusative and specialized in the illative meaning ‘into’ (like Standard Lith. 10

Vidugiris (2004, 303).

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

27

į̃ ‘into’ + ACC), is sometimes construed in Zietela with the genitive and moreover displays a superficial meaning, e.g., iŋ gαlvõ·s ‘on the head’.11 It comes, finally, as no surprise that iñ, like añ, can introduce animate landmarks, e.g., atã·i̯ in žen′ĩ·ko ‘she came to a husband, got married’.12 Quite close to the meaning of ad-cases (adessive and allative) are two prepositions which are widely used in the dialect of Zietela: *p(r)iẽ ‘near, at, by, to’ and pàs ‘id.’. The former has various formal realizations in the dialect, piẽ, priẽg or prìg, with or without internal -r-, and with or without the particle -g (Standard Lith. has priẽ). The coexistence of these variants is probably due to secondary analogies between preposition, verbal prefix and nominal prefix, but the details of these analogies go beyond the scope of this paper. Suffice it to say that their meaning is exactly the same. In Standard Lithuanian, the distinction between pàs + ACC and priẽ + GEN is relatively clear. Whereas the preposition priẽ conveys the notion of proximity in general, in reference to any kind of spatial landmark (‘near, at, by’ = French à, près de), both in positional and motional contexts, the preposition pàs has a more limited meaning and refers to a location ‘at someone’s house’ (= French chez), both in positional and motional contexts. In comparison with Standard Lithuanian, the dialect of Zietela is characterized by the extension of pàs, which can convey the basic meaning ‘near, at, by’. As a result, we find pàs not only with human beings, in reference to a location in resp. a motion to someone’s house (ex. positional in 47, motional in 48-50): (47) Vidugiris (1998, 458) Nu.naĩk b′ìt today

was-IND.PST.3

ãnas

paz

man′è.

he-NOM.SG

at

me-ACC.SG

‘Today he was at home (at my home).’ (48) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 220 (JL) Ẹ.jåũ. paz ͜. dã·kto.ri·. went-IND.PST.1SG

‘I went to the doctor.’

11 12

Vidugiris (2004, 317). Vidugiris (2004, 317).

at

doctor-ACC.SG

Daniel Petit

28

(49) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 70 (PDC) Tαĩ. αimù pas põ·na·. then

go-IND.PRS.1SG

at

master-ACC.SG

‘I am going to my master’s.’ (50) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 74 (PDC) Anà atvažá.u̯ pas ͜ man′è she-NOM.SG went-IND.PST.3

to

sa ͜

me-ACC.SG

.

with

vαikù child-INSTR.SG

‘She went to me with her child.’ but also with inanimate landmarks defined by their proximity, where Standard Lithuanian would not use pàs, but priẽ (ex. 51): (51) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 70 (PDC) Po·n′ẽ ̣· pasã·k′ẹ kàd that

àš

mistress-NOM.SG

said-IND.PST.3

paduod′iné ̣·č′ap

pas ͜

stã·la·.

I-NOM.SG

would give-COND.1SG

at

table-ACC.SG

‘My mistress ordered me to serve at table.’ (~ Standard Lith. priẽ stãlo) The preposition pàs can also be used in Zietela with the same possessive meaning as the adessive, ‘to be’ + pàs + ACC = ‘to be’ + ADESS = ‘to have’ (ex. 52): (52) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 175 (KŽŽ) Č′à ir ͜ ká.rv′ẹs mã·no.s here are-IND.PRS.3

cows-NOM.PL

ir ͜

v′ìšto.s.

and

hens-NOM.PL

pas ͜ man′è

my-NOM.PL at

me-ACC.SG

‘Here I have my cows and hens.’ (literally: ‘here are at me my cows and hens’) In its different realizations (piẽ, priẽg, prìg), the preposition priẽ + DAT or + ACC (or + GEN) conveys a meaning of proximity to a landmark, which can be inanimate (ex. 53-54):

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela (53) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 137 (JŽ) ÷n′i.s dåug′á.us′a prik they-NOM.PL

mostly

at, near

29

p′íevαi. meadow-DAT.SG

‘They were mostly at the meadow.’ (54) Vidugiris (1998, 476) Anà b′ìt she-NOM.SG

was-IND.PST.3 ‘She was near the church.’

p′ie

bazn′ĩč′ai.

near

church-DAT.SG

or animate (ex. 55): (55) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 171 (KŽŽ) O.͜ to.k′õ·s p′ir.̃ k′o.s and such-NOM.PL

p′ie ͜

houses-NOM.PL

b′ìt were-IND.PST.3

mú·su.

near, at us-GEN.PL

‘And such houses were around us.’ With the accusative (or the genitive), the same preposition can have the allative meaning (ex. 56-57): (56) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 230 (JL) P′ie namùs ͜ gan′åũ. near, at

house-ACC.PL

herded-IND.PST.1SG

‘I herded cattle back home.’ (57) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 153 (JŽ) Àš prieg ͜ dαrbũ· I-NOM.SG

at, near

works-GEN.PL

påuzó·ju. drag oneself-IND.PST.1SG

‘I dragged myself to my work.’ Whatever their distribution, the prepositions añ, iñ, pàs and priẽ have in common to encroach, at least partly, on synthetic locative cases. There are overlapping zones where both synthetic cases and prepositional constructions can be used with exactly the same meaning. This equivalence

Daniel Petit

30

is particularly visible when the two possibilities are attested side by side in the same micro-context, as in (58-59): (58) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 111 (MDV) Pas ͜ põ·nus buvåũ. […] at

masters-ACC.SG

I was-IND.PST.1SG

Põ·n′ip

slũ·žinåu.

master-ADESS.SG

I served-IND.PST.1SG

‘I was at masters’, I served at a master’s.’ (pàs + ACC = adessive) (59) Zietelos šnektos tekstai I 254 (JL) Tαi ͜ b′ié ̣ga m′ǝrgùč′o.s then run-IND.PRS.3

girls-NOM.PL

paz ͜

mùs,

at

us-ACC.PL

žmó·n′ẹ.s

αĩ.t

mú·sump.

people-NOM.PL

go-IND.PRS.3

to us-ALL.PL

‘Then girls run to us; people go to us.’ (pàs + ACC = allative) The range of contexts where we observe this equivalence between a synthetic locative case and a prepositional construction can be described as follows: 1. Inessive function (to be in) + inanimate: inessive case (ex. 44) / añ + GEN (ex. 43) 2. Illative function (to go into) + inanimate: illative (ex. 9) / añ + GEN (ex. 45) 3. Adessive function (to be at, near, next to)  with the adessive meaning (to be at, near, next to) + animate: adessive (ex. 16) / piẽ + DAT or GEN (ex. 55)  with the apudessive meaning (to be at someone’s home) + animate: adessive (ex. 18) / pàs + ACC (ex. 47)  with the possessive meaning (to be at X = X has) + animate: adessive (ex. 24) / pàs + ACC (ex. 52) 4. Allative function (to go to, near, next to) + animate: allative (ex. 32) / pàs + ACC (ex. 48)

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

31

It is difficult to determine the reasons for selecting the synthetic locative cases or their prepositional equivalents. Judging from the data available to me, with all the reservations required by the limitations of my corpus, it can be noted that synthetic in-cases are very frequent in the dialect of Zietela. Their replacement by prepositions is possible, but not predominant. In some cases, it can be seen as contact-driven: the extension of the preposition añ, for example, is influenced by its Slavic model na. On the other hand, adcases are considerably less frequent and correlatively often replaced by prepositions, especially in the plural. The possessive construction (‘to be’ + ADESS) is probably an exception, the synthetic case being recorded very regularly in the dialect and only sporadically replaced by a preposition (pàs + ACC ‘at’). More informative are contexts in which prepositional constructions are used alone, without synthetic counterparts. For example, whereas the synthetic adessive is limited to animate landmarks, the use of the prepositions pàs and priẽ (piẽ, priẽg, prìg) is more open and can be applied to inanimate landmarks (as in 51, 53-54), which suggests that the gap created by the incompatibility of ad-cases with inanimacy is filled up by the prepositional construction. Put differently, this means that proximity to inanimates can be expressed only by a preposition, whereas proximity to animates can be expressed both by the adessive and by a preposition.

SYNTHETIC CASES AND THEIR CONSTRAINTS The question we have to address now is why synthetic cases are limited in the dialect of Zietela by the two constraints identified above:  

Animacy constraint: in-cases = inanimates / ad-cases = animates Number constraint: ad-cases replaced by in-cases in the plural

These two constraints have a different scope, the former being stronger than the latter, which is subject to some exceptions, especially with personal

Daniel Petit

32

pronouns. A comparison with the most ancient texts from the 16th century suggests that the animacy constraint was already inceptive in Old Lithuanian, but not completely established, whereas the limitation of adcases to the singular is a recent tendency proper to the dialect of Zietela. In Old Lithuanian, the correlation between in-cases and inanimacy resp. between ad-cases and animacy was not absolute. In Mikalojus Daukša’s Postilla Catholicka (1599), we can easily find instances of in-cases with animate landmarks, but exclusively in the inessive and always with a figurative meaning, as in (60): (60) Old Lithuanian: Mikalojus Daukša, Postilla Catholicka (DP), 1599, 53732 Mes / giwe̗ntú̗ Diéwe Wieſʒpatiié. we-NOM.PL would live-COND.1PL God-INESS.SG

Lord-INESS.SG

‘We would live in the Lord God.’ Even if God is akin to a human being, it is presented in (60) by metonymy as a place to live in. I have not found any comparable instance with the illative. Ad-cases are semantically more open in Old Lithuanian and can appear both with inanimate and with animate landmarks (ex. adessive with inanimate landmark in 61, allative with inanimate landmark in 62): (61) Old Lithuanian: Mikalojus Daukša, Postilla Catholicka (DP), 1599, 48534 idánt’ estúmbite so that you would eat-COND.2PL

ir

giartumbite

and

you would drink-COND.2PL

skomiáip

manáip

table-ADESS.SG

my-ADESS.SG

‘so that you could eat and drink at my table’ (62) Old Lithuanian: Mikalojus Daukša, Postilla Catholicka (DP), 1599, 3357 W. Chriſtus tů mętú̗ miéſtoṗ Lord God-NOM.SG that-INSTR.SG time-INSTR.SG

city-ALL.SG

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

33

ęio. went-IND.PST.3

‘At that time, the Lord God went to a city.’ Even if ad-cases are often connected with animacy, as argued by Kavaliūnaitė (2001, 2003), instances like (61) and (62) show that this was not an absolute constraint in Old Lithuanian, or at least not developed to the same extent as in Zietela. The Old Lithuanian evidence thus points to an unbalanced system which can be summarized as follows: 1. Inessive and illative are usually limited to inanimate (penetrable) landmarks. The inessive can be applied to animates, but mostly in figurative meanings. 2. Adessive and allative do not display any strong restriction and can be used both with animate and with inanimate landmarks, with only a strong preference for animate landmarks. The reason why the animacy constraint is stronger with in-cases than with ad-cases is obvious: in-cases imply penetration into the spatial landmark, which must be permeable (this explains the resistance of animate landmarks to in-cases), whereas ad-cases do not affect the spatial integrity of the landmark to which the argument is adjacent. In other words, in-cases presuppose a certain quality of the spatial landmark, whereas ad-cases do not make any such presupposition. In comparison with Old Lithuanian, the dialect of Zietela has retained the inherited constraint on in-cases (virtually excluding animate landmarks), but established a new constraint on ad-cases (excluding inanimate landmarks, which was not completely the case in Old Lithuanian). It can be suggested that this semantic reconfiguration results from a mirror effect operating between in-cases and ad-cases: from an unbalanced system opposing [IN-CASES = -ANIMATES] and [AD-CASES = FREE], the dialect of Zietela developed a balanced system with two symmetric constraints opposing [IN-CASES = -ANIMATES] and [AD-CASES = +ANIMATES]. Originally, in-cases were marked, ad-cases unmarked; at the final stage, both were marked in a similar way by the same feature defined negatively or positively. This evolution was sparked by the internal logic of

Daniel Petit

34

the dialect and does not result from its contact with Belorussian, Russian or Polish. The other constraint is more difficult to account for. Ad-cases are well preserved in the dialect of Zietela, but almost exclusively in the singular and very rarely in the plural. We have seen that the possessive construction ‘to be’ + ADESS = ‘to have’ provides a context favorable to the use of the adessive even in the plural. This could suggest that the low frequency of adcases in the plural is a recent phenomenon and was not yet established as the possessive construction in the adessive came to acquire its autonomy under Belorussian influence. In Old Lithuanian, ad-cases were regularly used in the plural as in the singular, without any perceptible restriction (e.g., adessive in 63, allative in 64): (63) Old Lithuanian: Mikalojus Daukša, Postilla Catholicka (DP), 1599, 4549 Stówi dúriſia̗mp mu̗ſu̗. stand-IND.PRS.3

doors-ADESS.PL

of us-GEN.PL

‘They stand at our doors.’ (64) Old Lithuanian: Mikalojus Daukša, Postilla Catholicka (DP), 1599, 44341 Ir grábumṗ ſʒwe̗ntu̗iu̗ a̗nt ȧtłaidu̗ and graves-ALL.PL

saints-GEN.PL

on

remissions-GEN.PL

wáikſʒiodawo. used to go-IND.PST.3

‘And they used to go to the graves of saints for the remission of their sins.’ The rarity, or quasi-absence, of the plural of ad-cases in the dialect of Zietela is not the only striking point. What is more surprising is the tendency to replace ad-cases by in-cases in the plural, as shown by instances like (3942). There must be something special in the plural, or in plurality in general, to explain the avoidance of plural ad-cases in Zietela. Surprisingly enough, we observe in some Old Lithuanian texts a reverse tendency to replace incases by ad-cases (both in the singular and in the plural); this tendency was already noticed and duly described by several authors, especially Fraenkel (1947: 13), Laigonaitė (1957, 26–27), Gelumbeckaitė (2002, 96–97),

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

35

Žilinskaitė (2004, 48–50) and Bukantytė (2007, 226), and is generally ascribed to the influence of the prepositional constructions of the original languages from which these Old Lithuanian texts are translated. There can hardly be any organic link between this sporadic merger of in-cases with adcases in Old Lithuanian and the reverse tendency to replace ad-cases by incases in the dialect of Zietela. In order to explain this oddity of the plural forms of ad-cases, it is worth recalling that personal pronouns seem to have better preserved ad-cases in the plural than nouns. The special position of personal pronouns with regard to plurality may be explained by a striking detail of their morphology: as a rule, in most inflectional Indo-European languages, personal pronouns express plurality twice, both by their stem and by their ending. This difference is conspicuous in Modern Lithuanian (illustrated in Table 6 with the genitive): Table 6. Plurality in personal pronouns and nouns in Lithuanian Personal pronoun (1st person) ‘of me’ ‘of us’ man-ę̃s mū́ s-ų stemSG-endingSG stemPL-endingPL

Noun (diẽvas ‘God’) ‘of god’ ‘of gods’ diẽv-o diev-ų̃ stemX-endingSG stemX-endingPL

Plurality is marked twice in personal pronouns, by the stem (SG man- vs PL mūs-) and by the ending (SG -ęs vs PL -ų), whereas it is marked only once

in nouns, by the ending (SG -o vs PL -ų), not by the stem (SG and PL diev-). Considering that ad-cases are better preserved in the plural of personal pronouns than in that of nouns, one may suspect that this better preservation is due to the double marking of plurality in personal pronouns and correlatively that the weakness of the plural of ad-cases has something to do with the simple marking of plurality in nouns. Originally, the adessive endings were built on primary locatives + the postposition *p(r)ēi̯ ‘at, near, by’. There was in the locative, and

Daniel Petit

36

consequently also in the adessive, a clear distinction between the singular and the plural; this is confirmed by the Old Lithuanian evidence13: Table 7. Adessive endings in old Lithuanian Singular -aip

Origin *-āi-píe

Plural -osemp

o-stems

-iep -ip

*-ie-píe *-i-píe

-uosemp

ē-stems

-eip

*-ēi-píe

-ėsemp

u-stems

-up

*-u-píe

-usemp

consonant and istems personal pronouns (e.g., 1st person)

-ip -iep

*-i-píe or *-ie-píe

-isemp

manip’ (DP 60511) manîmp’ (DP 13351)

*mani-píe (secondarily *manim-píe after the adessive plural)

músip (DP 60745) músimp’ (DP 2437)

ā-stems

Origin *-āsu-píe (secondarily *-āsēm-píe after the inessive plural) *-uosu-píe (secondarily *-uosēm-píe after the inessive plural) *-ēsu-píe (secondarily *-ēsēm-píe after the inessive plural) *-usu-píe (secondarily *-usēm-píe after the inessive plural) *-isu-píe (secondarily *-isēm-píe after the inessive plural) *mūsi-píe (secondarily *mūsim-píe after the inessive plural)

Adessive endings are clearly different in the singular and in the plural. But there is an exception. The adessive endings of personal pronouns are instable in Old Lithuanian and usually identical for the singular and the plural: 

13

Ending -ip: SG manip’ (Daukša, Postilla Catholicka, 1599, 60511) vs PL músip (Daukša, Postilla Catholicka, 1599, 60745)

The presentation is simplified. More details are given in Petit (2007).

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela 

37

Ending -imp: SG manîmp’ (Daukša, Postilla Catholicka, 1599, 13351) vs PL músimp’ (Daukša, Postilla Catholicka, 1599, 2437)

The origin of this formal confusion, which is extremely well attested in Old Lithuanian, is complicated and certainly points to recent analogies. A possible scenario could be to assume that the adessive singular ending of personal pronouns (and of consonant stems in general) was originally *-ip (< locative singular ending *-i + postposition *p(r)ēi̯ ), whereas the adessive plural ending was originally *-isup (< locative plural ending *-i-su + postposition *p(r)ēi̯ ), secondarily reshaped with a nasal as *-isēmp on the model of the inessive plural (*-isēn), and finally phonetically reduced to *-ip or *-imp. As a result, singular and plural endings merged into a single form *-ip and, correlatively, the merger of both numbers was extended to the alternative plural ending *-imp. In any case, this formal indistinction is never detrimental to the morphological legibility of the forms, since the number distinction is already ensured in personal pronouns by the stem. Let us now examine the adessive endings in the dialect of Zietela, as they are presented in Vidugiris (2004): Table 8. Adessive endings in the dialect of Zietela

ā-stems o-stems ē-stems u-stems consonant and i-stems personal pronouns (e.g., 1st person)

Singular -əip -ip, -iep -əip -ip, -iep -ip, -iep man′ìp, man′im̃.(p), man′ímp

Plural — — — — — mu·s′ìp, mu.s′im̃.(p)

We clearly see that the adessive of personal pronouns has the same ending in the singular and in the plural. As already said, this creates no harm, since number marking is already ensured by the stem: man′ìp is anyway distinguished from mu·s′ìp. But the situation is quite different with nouns since the number distinction can only be assumed by the ending, not by the

38

Daniel Petit

stem. As a result, the systemic extension of the same ending to both numbers, potentially triggered by the model of man′ìp (SG) / mu·s′ìp (PL), could hardly be applied to the adessive forms of nouns like bró·l′ip (SG) / †bró·l′ip (PL) ‘brother(s)’, because this would have jeopardized the morphological legibility of the nouns affected by this analogy. On the other hand, the inherited adessive plural endings (e.g., *brólisup or *brólisēmp) could hardly be preserved as such: a pattern *-ip (SG) / *-isēmp (PL), for example, was at odds with the model of personal pronouns in which the dialect had developed the homonymy of *-ip (SG) and *-ip (PL). My assumption is that the disappearance of the adessive plural in nouns was caused by the impossibility of incorporating its forms into a balanced and coherent system of morphological markers. There was a conflict between the necessity to ensure number marking and the analogical model of personal pronouns. The situation was different with the allative, where singular and plural endings could always be distinguished (e.g., SG -o-p vs PL -um-p in ostems), but they are extremely rare in the dialect and usually replaced by prepositions. Several options were possible at this point. The tendency to replace the adessive plural by the inessive plural in the dialect of Zietela can be seen as a lesser evil, since the distinction between [+CONTACT] and [-CONTACT] is in a certain sense less crucial, i.e., easier to supplement by the context, than that between [SG] and [PL], which cannot be dispensed with. We find the same tendency in the dialect of Gervėčiai, situated north of the Lithuanianspeaking area in Belorussia (approximately 25 kms from the Lithuanian border). 14 In this dialect, ad-cases are preserved in the singular (e.g., adessive Antonẽlik ‘near Anton, at Anton’s’, allative Juzók ‘towards Juozas’, with -k instead of -p), and, in the plural, only for personal pronouns (e.g., adessive mu·sùk ‘near us’, allative mu·suñk ‘towards us’). With nouns, adcases are often replaced in the plural by in-cases (adessive > inessive), exactly as in Zietela. Alternatively, ad-cases are replaced in the dialect of Gervėčiai by prepositional constructions (adessive meaning = par + ACC < ‘along’, allative meaning = ingi, ungi + GEN < *an(t) ‘on, over’, *in ‘into’).15 14 15

Cf. Vidugiris (2014, 114–117). Cf. Kardelytė (1975, 41–43).

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

39

In the dialect of Lazūnai, another Lithuanian dialect of Belorussia, located between Zietela and Gervėčiai (approximately 40 kms from the Lithuanian border), there is no adessive plural in nouns, apart from a few relics like žmonėspi ‘near people’, recorded in 1958 (< *žmonēsēm-pi); in personal pronouns, a distinction is retained between the adessive singular and plural (SG manìp or manim̃.p vs PL mú·s(p)). The allative plural is better preserved in the dialect, e.g., vaikum̃.p ‘near the children, beside the children’. In the dialect of Dieveniškės, situated in Lithuania a few kilometers from the Belorussian border, ad-cases are preserved in the singular for nouns (adessive t′iév′ip ‘near the father, at the father’ resp. allative kun′igó·p′i ‘towards the priest’); only personal pronouns have plural ad-cases, but with the particularity that the allative form is used for the two functions (e.g., mu·sum̃.p both adessive and allative plural < originally allative). 16 A comparison between the four Lithuanian dialects that have preserved the secondary locative cases (Zietela, Gervėčiai, Lazūnai, Dieveniškės) shows several parallel tendencies: 1. In-cases are well preserved. 2. Ad-cases are preserved in the singular, the adessive more robustly than the allative (probably due to the predominance of the structure ‘to be’ + ADESS = ‘to have’). 3. In the plural, ad-cases are preserved only in personal pronouns. 4. Defective ad-cases are usually replaced by prepositions, sometimes by in-cases, or rarely the adessive by the allative. The initial challenge posed to the adessive case — the homonymy between the adessive singular and plural in personal pronouns — was common to all four dialects and the solutions developed by them were therefore largely parallel.

16

Cf. Mikulėnienė and Morkūnas (2005, XX).

40

Daniel Petit

CONCLUSION The Lithuanian dialect of Zietela has many original features, some of which are conspicuous archaisms, whereas others are recent, particularly contact-induced innovations. Special attention has been paid to the preservation of the secondary locative cases of Old Lithuanian in Zietela and a few other dialects of the same area, but what I tried to show in this paper is that, beyond the glaring archaism, the system of locative cases underwent a profound reconfiguration due to both functional and formal factors: first, the fixation of the animacy constraint modified the distribution between incases and ad-cases; second, the weakness of adessive plural forms was remedied by various stop-gap measures, the replacement by in-cases or by prepositions. Far from being relevant only for the limited concerns of Baltic philology and linguistics, the data of these peripheral Lithuanian dialects are of high interest for all linguists concerned with the diachronic evolution of case systems and the restructuring of locative roles over time.

REFERENCES Bauer, Brigitte. (2000). Archaic Syntax in Indo-European. The Spread of Transitivity in Latin and French. Berlin: de Gruyter. Bilý, Milan. (1988). “Russian quantification expressed via grammatical number and the construction idti v soldaty”. Scando-Slavica, 34/1, 69– 93. Bukantytė, Eglė. (2007). Martino Lutherio Naujojo Testamento (1522-1546) įtaka Jono Bretkūno Naujojo Testamento vertimui (1579-1580) sintaksės aspektu. Klaipėda: Klaipėdos universiteto leidykla. [The Influence of Martin Luther’s New Testament (1522-1546) on John Bretkūnas’ Translation of the New Testament (1579-1580) from a syntactic perspective.] Daukša, Mikalojus. (1599). Postilla Catholicka (DP), edited by J. Palionis, 2000. Mikalojaus Daukšos 1599 metų Postilė ir jos šaltiniai. Vilnius:

The Secondary Locative Cases in the Lithuanian Dialect of Zietela

41

Baltos lankos. [Postilla Catholicka (DP), edited by J. Palionis, 2000. The Postille of Mikalojus Daukša from 1599 and Its Sources.] Fraenkel, Ernst. (1947). Sprachliche, besonders syntaktische Untersuchung des kalvinistischen litauischen Katechismus des Malcher Pietkiewicz von 1598. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. [Linguistic, especially syntactic, study of the Calvinistic Lithuanian catechism of Malcher Pietkiewicz from 1598.] Gelumbeckaitė, Jolanta. (2002). Linksnių ir prielinksnių konstrukcijų sintaksė Jono Bretkūno Biblijos Evangelijoje pagal Luką. Vilnius: Lietuvių kalbos institutas. [Syntax of inflectional and prepositional constructions in the Bible Gospel of John Bretkūnas according to Luke.] Haspelmath, Martin. (2018). “Revisiting the anasynthetic spiral.” In Grammaticalization from a Typological Perspective, edited by B. Heine, H. Narrog, 97–115, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Isačenko, Alexander V. (1974). “On ‘have’ and ‘be’ languages. A typological sketch.” In Slavic Forum essays in linguistics and literature, edited by M. S. Flier, 43–77. The Hague, Paris: Mouton de Gruyter. Kardelytė, Jadvyga. (1975). Gervėčių tarmė (Fonetika ir morfologija). Vilnius: Mintis. [The dialect of Gervėčiai (Phonetics and morphology).] Kavaliūnaitė, Gina. (2001). “Adesyvas Chylinskio Naujojo Testamento vertime.” Acta Linguistica Lithuanica, 45, 93–111. [“Adessive in Chylinski’s New Testament Translation.”] —. (2003). “Postpozicinių vietininkų Sistema Chylinskio Naujojo Testamento vertime.” Acta Linguistica Lithuanica, 49, 33–49. [“The System of Postpositional Locatives in Chylinski’s New Testament Translation.”] Laigonaitė, Adelė. (1957). “Pašalio vietininkai dabartinėje lietuvių kalboje.” Kai kurie lietuvių kalbos gramatikos klausimai, 21–39. Vilnius: Valstybinė politinės ir mokslinės literatūros leidykla. [“Ad-locatives in the contemporary Lithuanian language.” Some questions of Lithuanian grammar.] Mel’čuk, Igor. (1985). Poverxnostnyj sintaksis russkix čislovyx vyraženij. Wien: Wiener Slawistischer Almanach.

42

Daniel Petit

Mikulėnienė, Danguolė. & Morkūnas, Kazys. (2005). Dieveniškių šnektos žodynas. Vilnius: Lietuvių kalbos institutas. [Dictionary of the dialect of Dieveniškės.] Petit, Daniel. (2007). “Syncrétisme, sous-spécification et création casuelle dans les langues baltiques.” Bulletin de la Société de linguistique de Paris, 102.1, 325–366. [“Syncretism, underspecification and case creation in the Baltic languages.” Bulletin of the Linguistic Society of Paris.] Range, Jochem D. (1995). “Allativ und Adessiv in altlitauischen Texten des 16. Jahrhunderts.” Linguistica Baltica, 4, 93–102. [“Allative and Adessive in Old Lithuanian Texts of the 16th Century.” Linguistica Baltica.] Rozwadowski, Jan. (1995). Litewska gwara okolic Zdzięcioła na Nowogródczyźnie, edited by A. Gregorski. Kraków: Polska Akademia Nauk. [Lithuanian dialect of the vicinity of Zdzięcioł in the Nowogródek region.] Vidugiris, Aloyzas. (1998). Zietelos šnektos žodynas. Vilnius: Mokslas. [Dictionary of the dialect of Zietela.] —. (2004). Zietelos lietuvių šnekta. Vilnius: Presvika. [The Lithuanian dialect of Zietela.] —. (2014). Lazūnų šnekta. Vilnius: Lietuvių kalbos institutas. [The Lithuanian dialect of Lazūnai.] Vidugiris, Aloyzas. & Mikulėnienė, Danguolė. (2005–2010). Zietelos šnektos tekstai, 2 volumes Vilnius: Lietuvių kalbos institutas. [Zietela's dialect texts.] Zinkevičius, Zigmas. (2006). Lietuvių tarmių kilmė. Vilnius: Lietuvių kalbos institutas. [Origin of Lithuanian dialects.] Žilinskaitė, Eglė. (2004). “M. Daukšos Postilės postpozicinių vietininkų ir jiems sinonimiškų prielinksnių konstrukcijų vartosena ir vertimo šaltiniai. “ Baltistica, 39.1, 33–53. [“The use of the postpositional locatives and the synonymous prepositional constructions in Daukša’s Postille and their translation sources. ” Baltistica.]

In: The Emergence of Grammars Editor: Michela Russo

ISBN: 978-1-53619-888-1 © 2021 Nova Science Publishers, Inc.

Chapter 2

FIRST CONJUNCT AGREEMENT IS NOT AN ELLIPTICAL ILLUSION: A CASE OF PRENOMINAL ADJECTIVES Nadira Aljović* University of Zenica, Bosnia and Herzegovina

ABSTRACT The goal of this chapter is to argue on the basis of a number of NPinternal phenomena related to first conjunct agreement and ellipsis that this agreement pattern is not an “elliptical” illusion. The chapter presents agreement patterns of attributive adjectives in Bosnian/Croatian/Serbian standing prenominally and agreeing with the first conjoined noun. The central claim of this study is that accounting for first conjunct agreement cannot be based on ellipsis, i.e., that this agreement pattern is not a mere illusion resulting from an elliptical process affecting the prenominal element in the second conjunct. Instead, it is claimed that first conjunct agreement can arise within a structure in which the prenominal element scopes semantically and syntactically over a conjunction noun phrase.

*

Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected].

44

Nadira Aljović

Keywords: ellipsis, attributive adjective, first conjunct agreement, closest conjunct agreement, vocabulary items, agree

1. INTRODUCTION The phenomenon of agreement with the linearly closest agreement target (also called Closest Conjunct Agreement or CCA) has been studied considerably in recent years, both theoretically and experimentally. CCA arises in a configuration involving an agreeing element (e.g., a verb) related syntactically and semantically to a conjoined noun phrase (ConjP); the agreeing element can agree either with the entire ConjP or with the linearly closest noun of ConjP. If the agreeing element precedes ConjP, CCA states it should agree with the first conjunct (this pattern will be referred to as First Conjunct Agreement or FCA); if the agreeing element follows ConjP, CCA states it should agree with the last conjunct in ConjP (this pattern will be referred to as Last Conjunct Agreement or LCA). South Slavic languages are known to allow CCA patterns with verbal or adjectival predicates (agreeing with ConjP subjects) and FCA patterns with attributive adjectives (agreeing with an NP-internal nominal conjunction). The two CCA patterns have been confirmed both by written corpus data and experimentally for Slovenian and Bosnian/Croatian/Serbian, as involving agreeing verbs (see Corbett 1983; 1991; Marušič et al. 2007, Marušič and Nevins 2009, Marušič et al. 2015; Willer-Gold et al. 2016)1. Slovene: 1

Abbreviations used: F – feminine M – masculine N – neuter (gender) SG – singular PL – plural PlA – plural agreement (with ConjP) SE – pronominal clitic formally identical to the reflexive pronoun se, but which need not have the reflexive meaning AUX – auxiliary FCA – first conjunct agreement (as involving a linearly closest conjunct) LCA – last conjunct agreement (as involving a linearly closest conjunct) CCA – closest conjunct agreement

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

45

(1) a. Podražile so se knjige FCA become-more-expensiveF.PL AUXPL SE booksF.PL in peresa. and pensN.PL ‘Books and pens have become more expensive.’ b. Knjige in peresa so se podražila. LCA booksF.PL and pensN.PL AUXPL SE become-more-expensiveN.PL (Willer–Gold et al. 2016, 188, 190, ex. 2b, 4c) Bosnian/Croatian/Serbian: (2) a. Oglasile su se trube i zvona. FCA soundedF.PL AUXPL SE trumpetF.PL and bellN.PL ‘Trumpets and bells resounded.’ b. Trube i zvona su se oglasila. LCA trumpetF.PL and bellN.PL AUXPL SE soundedN.PL (Willer–Gold et al. 2016,189, 190, ex. 3b, 5c) As Marušić et al. (2007) point out, FCA is found in many languages, unlike LCA. Even in languages that allow LCA (like Slovene or BCS), this pattern has a more restricted distribution than the FCA pattern (in the sense that FCA is far more acceptable than LCA). Marušič et al. (2007) deal with this distributional asymmetry by proposing that LCA and FCA result from entirely independent mechanisms so that there could be, in principle, languages that have the mechanism(s) generating FCA, but lack the mechanism(s) generating LCA. Their analysis of the LCA pattern in Slovene is based on separate probing mechanisms for gender and number features of the agreement target. In fact, the LCA pattern in (1b, 2b) is not predicted under standard assumptions about the Agree relation and the way it is established in Chomsky (2000) - with the Probe restricted to search for local and c-commanded Goals. The LCA pattern seems to suggest that linear order has incidence on calculating agreement. One way of addressing this issue is to propose more intricate and elaborate syntactic mechanisms governing the Agree relation (as in Bošković 2009, a.o.); another way is to shift part of the

46

Nadira Aljović

agreement calculation into the postsyntactic component. 2 This latter approach has been taken by van Marušić et al. (2015), Begović and Aljović (2015), Aljović and Begović (2016), Willer-Gold et al. (2016) and Arsenijević et al. (2019). The FCA pattern, on the other hand, can be dealt with within the Agree model developed by Chomsky (2000) as amended either by the concept of equidistant Goals (see Citko 1999; van Kopen 2005; Bošković 2009), i.e., ConjP and its Spec (the first conjunct), or along the clausal reduction/ellipsis scenario, under which the agreement with the first conjunct rather than with the entire ConjP is an “elliptical” illusion. This would occur in a structure including two conjoined clauses, each containing one conjunct and identical verbs agreeing with these nominals. If everything but the subject in the second clause is elided, we get an illusion of two conjoined nouns with the verb agreeing with the first noun. However, this scenario implies that the verb agrees regularly and not exceptionally with the apparent first conjunct. This configuration is depicted in (3) with the elliptical material struck through3: (3) Oglasile su se trube soundedF.PL AUXPL SE trumpetF.PL oglasila su se zvona soundedN.PL AUXPL SE bellN.PL ‘Trumpets and bells resounded.’

i and

However, Munn (1999) shows that clausal ellipsis cannot be the only source of the FCA pattern illustrated in (1a, 2a) (and CCA in general) since it incorrectly predicts that predicates requiring plural or collective interpretation of ConjP (e.g., together) should not be available in a configuration similar to (3): a sentence with two conjoined clauses should not contain any element that would refer to the two nouns. Marušič et al. 2

The idea of agreement being calculated in the postsyntactic (PF or morphological component) is argued for by Bobaljik (2008), too. This author defends the idea that the copying of features from an NP to a verb takes place in the morphology (i.e. after Spellout). 3 The clausal reduction approach is adopted in Aoun et al. (1994) for Moroccan and Lebanese Arabic.

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

47

(2007), Marušič and Nevins (2010), Marušič et al. (2015), Aljović and Begović (2016) and Arsenijević et al. (2019) show that this prediction is not borne out in Slovene or BCS, as shown by the well-formdness of (4a,b): (4) a. Včeraj so trčile druga ob drugo yesterday AUXPL collidedF.PL other into another krave in tele(ta) cowsF and calf(es)N ‘Yesterday cows and calves bumped into each other.’ (Marušič et al. 2007, ex. 27) b. Negdje u šumi zajedno živi lisica i somewhere in forest together live3SG.PRES fox and lav. lion ‘Somewhere in the forest, live together the/a fox and lion.’ (Aljović and Begović 2016, 10, ex. 2a) The relevant interpretation of (4a), which is unpredicted if the structure in (3) is assumed, is the one denoting a single event involving cows bumping into calves and calves bumping into cows; the other available interpretation - denoting two events with a group of cows bumping into each other (one event), and a group of calves bumping into each other (another event) - can be associated with a structure similar to the one in (3). As for example (4b), the collective adverb zajedno ‘together’ requires a plural controller, and under the hypothesis that the sentence is a reduction of two clauses, neither clause could provide a valid controller for this adverb (since only singular nouns would be available as subjects in these clauses). Given the acceptability of the sentence, we have to conclude that it is not a reduction of two clauses (with ellipsis in the second clause) but a single clause with a conjoined subject capable of satisfying the plural controller requirement of the adverb zajedno. Begović and Aljović (2015) and Aljović and Begović (2016) use similar logic to claim that ellipsis is not a likely explanation of FCA with attributive adjectives in BCS noun phrases. In this chapter, I explore further FCA with

48

Nadira Aljović

attributive adjectives in order to argue on the basis of a number of NPinternal phenomena related to attributive adjectives and ellipsis that this agreement pattern is not an elliptical illusion, and that more likely explanations of this phenomenon are to be found in syntactic approaches using elaborated mechanisms of Agree and/or in distributed morphosyntactic accounts allowing certain agreeing mechanisms to operate in the PF branch of the derivation. The chapter is organized in the following way: section 2 gives a brief overview of FCA with attributive adjectives and the gist of the morphosyntactic analysis proposed by Begović and Aljović (2015) and Aljović and Begović (2016). In section 3, I address problems arising if an ellipsis-based account of FCA with attributive adjectives is adopted. A set of problems revolve around morpho-syntactic and interpretative properties of noun phrases that the ellipsis approach creates, and another set of problems arise around licensing ellipsis in noun phrases. In section 4 I give concluding remarks.

2. ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES AGREEING WITH THE CLOSEST CONJUNCT BCS attributive adjectives resemble adjectives in some other languages, such as Spanish and Polish, and also some determiners in English, in that they can agree with the first conjunct of a conjunction phrase (ConjP) while scoping semantically over both conjuncts. This is most clearly visible when the conjoined nouns are singular and when the adjective surfaces in the singular, that is, agrees in number with the first conjoined noun rather than with the entire ConjP; compare BCS (5a) with Spanish (5b), and English (5c): (5) a. polarna polarF.SG

lisica i foxF.SG and

sova owlF.SG

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

49

‘the/a polar fox and owl’ b. […] cuya madre y padre […] whoseF.SG motherF.SG and fatherM.SG (Demonte and Perez–Jimenes 2012, 2) c. this table and chair The singular forms of prenominal elements in (5a-c) is what I will call the NP-internal adjectival First Conjunct Agreement (FCA). In this section I present the core properties of this agreement pattern found in BCS noun phrases and the gist of the morpho-syntactic account proposed by Begović and Aljovć (2015) and Aljović and Begović (2016). Firstly, the adjectival FCA is subject to much inter- and intraspeaker variation in acceptability. A gender mismatch between the conjoined nouns may degrade the acceptability of FCA for some speakers. This is witnessed by the absence of the reading whereby the adjective scopes over both conjuncts (and not in the overall unacceptability of the relevant structure), which is signalled by % in (6a). A considerable degradation in the acceptability of FCA (i.e., the absence of the scoping interpretation) is caused by a number mismatch between the two conjuncts, as in (6b), which is marked by?*. With no gender or number mismatches between the conjuncts, the FCA pattern is generally well-formed as illustrated in (5a) above (for more details about this gradient acceptability see Aljović and Begović 2016). (6) a. (%)polarna lisica i medvjed polarF.SG foxF.SG and bearM.SG ‘the/a polar fox and bear’ b. ?*polarna lisica i medvjedi polarF.SG foxF.SG and bearM.PL (intended: the/a polar fox and polar bears) Moreover, not all languages allow NP-internal FCA. For example, English and Dutch allow it, while Italian and French seem not to (see Heycock and Zamparelli 2000). BCS belongs to the former group of

50

Nadira Aljović

languages. Languages that allow it impose different restrictions on NPinternal FCA (morpho-syntactic, lexical and/or semantic; for example, in Dutch, FCA seems to be restricted by the choice of the prenominal element: definites and demonstratives allow it, but indefinites do so only marginally; for more details see Heycock and Zamparelli 2000, Dalrymple and Nikolaeva 2006, Willim 2012). Another property that sets apart the NPinternal FCA form the predicate FCA (on verbs agreeing with subjects) concerns the availability of the so-called resolution or default agreement (see Corbet 1983, 1991). A verb agreeing with a postverbal subject ConjP composed of nouns of different genders can agree with the first conjunct (as in 4b) or show the default agreement morphology: masculine plural in BCS. In case the two conjoined nouns have the same gender, this gender value will be inherited by the entire ConjP and the plural agreement on the verb will show this gender value (and not the default masculine). For an attributive adjective in BCS, however, these two possibilities are in complementary distribution: when FCA is available, plural agreement is not, and vice versa. Thus, the FCA pattern is the only option when the two conjoined nouns are singular and of the same gender (example 7), singular and of different genders (example 8), and of different numbers and genders if their agreement exponents are syncretic (example 9): (7) koja/*koje tašna i whichF.SG /F.PL purseF.SGand ‘which purse and bag’

torba bagF.SG

(8) skupa/*skupi tašna i nalivpero expensiveF.SG /M.PL purseF.SGand fountain-penN.SG ‘the/an expensive purse and fountain pen’ (9) a. zlatna/*zlatni tašna i nalivpera godlenF.SG/N.PL /M.PL purseF.SGand fountain-penN.PL ‘the/a golden purse and the/Ø golden fountain pens’ b. zlatna/*zlatni nalivpera i tašna godlenN.PL/F.SG /M.PL fountain-penN.PL and purseF.SG

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

51

‘the/Ø golden fountain-pens and the/a golden purse’ Even for those BCS speakers who do not readily accept FCA for all prenominal elements in contexts such as (7–9), the plural agreement is clearly unacceptable. On the other hand, in certain contexts, plural can be required semantically, in which case plural agreement (with the entire ConjP) overrides the FCA pattern. This happens in the presence of collective expressions requiring syntactic and semantic plural licensing, such as the adverb međusobno ‘with each other’, or the reciprocal expression jedandrugi ‘each other’. If such an element occurs in the attributive AP, the adjective will need to agree in plural number, while singular agreement with the first (singular) conjunct is unacceptable, as shown in (10-12): (10)[AP međusobno zavađene/*zavađena] princeza with-each-other quarreling F.PL /F.SG princess F.SG kraljica queen F.SG ‘the princess and queen in conflict with each other’

i and

(11) [AP jedno s drugim zapakovani/*zapakovana] one with another packed M.PL / F.SG i nalivpero and fountain-pen N.SG ‘the purse and fountain pen packed together’

tašna purse F.SG

(12) a. [AP jedno s drugim zapakovani/*zapakovana] tašna one with another packed M.PL / F.SG/N.PL purse F.SG i nalivpera and fountain-pen N.PL ‘the purse and the fountain pens packed together’ b. [AP jedno s drugim zapakovana/zapakovani] nalivpera one with another packed N.PL/F.SG / M.PL fountain-pen N.PL

52

Nadira Aljović i tašna and purse F.SG ‘the fountain pens and the purse packed together’

Finally, as shown in example (6b) above, a number (and gender) mismatch between the two conjuncts leads to unacceptable FCA. Importantly, these structures cannot be always ‘rescued’ by plural agreement – plural rescuing is available only in case of morphological syncretism, as in (9a,b) and (12b). On the basis of such contrasts, Begović and Aljović (2015) and Aljović and Begović (2016) conclude that both plural (default) agreement with the entire ConjP and agreement with the first conjunct (illustrated as singular agreement in the above data) are calculated in the syntax since they can bleed and feed semantic requirements (therefore, they must arise before Spellout). On the other hand, data such as (6a) are considered as cases of ineffability (syntactic inputs without valid morphological outputs, see Pesetsky 1997), i.e. as being morphologically unacceptable. As such, we expect syncretic exponents, when available, to be able to rescue ineffable cases, as confirmed by 9a,b and 12b). Further evidence that both agreement patterns (with ConjP and with the first conjunct) can and must be calculated in the syntax (prior to Spellout) is witnessed by (12a,b) where FCA is instantiated by zapakovana ‘packed-N.PL/F.SG’ and plural agreement with ConjP by zapakovani ‘packed-M.PL’. Both agreement patterns are acceptable: the FCA neuter plural adjective is able to license the reciprocal and at the same time is syncretic with the second conjunct’s phi-features; the default masculine plural is acceptable since it licenses the reciprocal. Aljović and Begović (2016) propose that a Probe (AP) can establish agreement with two equally distant Goals (ConjP and Conjunct 1 in Figure 1) prior to Spellout, and that an additional mechanism, operating postsyntactically, can filter out certain morphological forms.

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

53

Figure 1.

The proposed morphological filter operates on vocabulary items realizing morpho-syntactic feature bundles created in syntax, not on the morpho-syntactic features themselves. The filter, called Vocabulary Item Feature Harmony, states that harmony is expected to hold between features of vocabulary items realizing a feature’s multiple instances which appear in a link of case-feature instances, and that features are harmonious when their values are identical. Basically, this means that within a certain domain (defined by morphological case, essentially) exponents of morpho-syntactic feature bundles are expected to be ‘harmonious’ i.e., to have identical morphological values. The greater the harmony between vocabulary items, the greater acceptability. Let’s take the vocabulary items in (7): the acceptable sequence is F.SG – F.SG – F.SG; the unacceptable sequence is M.PL – F.SG – F.SG, with M.PL disrupting feature harmony. In (8) the acceptable sequence is F.SG – F.SG – N.SG. Feature harmony is distrupted by the last vocabulary item and only by one feature (gender) (some speakers find this distruption of feature harmony more or less problematic, some find it unproblematic, as indicated in 6a). In (6b) however, the last vocabulary item disrupts feature harmony by two features, gender and number (the relevant sequence is F.SG – F.SG – M.PL) and the result is far more degraded than in (6a). Interestingly, the harmony disruptions in (7) and (6b) are not equally degraded: the unacceptable sequence of (7) seems more seriously degraded, that is clearly unacceptable; compare *M.PL – F.SG – F.SG vs. ?*F.SG – F.SG – M.PL. I suppose that this could be an effect created by processing: the former sequence is processed as implying the lack of agreement between the adjective and the noun and consequently as a

54

Nadira Aljović

syntactic problem; while in the latter sequence the processing of the disrupted harmony cannot signal any lack of expected or required syntactic agreement since no agreement is ever expected to hold between the two conjoined nouns. Only in cases with syncretic exponents, such as -a in zlatna ‘godlen’ standing for N.PL or F.SG’ in (7a,b), harmony will not be disrupted even if the second conjunct is different in gender and number from the first. It is precisely this morphological syncretism, capable of cancelling the disruption of harmony, that shows harmony is a pure morphological phenomenon, independent of syntactic agreement.

3. ELLIPSIS AND FIRST CONJUNCT AGREEMENT An elegant and simple way of accounting for the NP-internal FCA and for the reading whereby the adjective is shared by the two conjuncts would be by deriving (5a) from (3) and Figure 2, i.e., by postulating ellipsis of the adjective in the second conjunct (ellipsis is signalled by strike-through). Under this view, FCA is just an illusion, with regular agreement of adjectives taking place with their respective nouns, the second adjective being elided. (5a) polarna lisica i polarF.SG foxF.SG and ‘the/a polar fox and owl’ (13) polarna lisica i polarna sova

Figure 2.

sova owlF.SG

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

55

However, the analysis implied by (13) and the tree diagram in Figure 2 produce a number of problems. A set of problems revolve around the fact that this view fails to predict some important morpho-syntactic and interpretive properties of the phrases such as those in (5a, 6a). Another set of problems are related to the licensing of adjectival ellipsis. Moreover, the initial appeal of the ellipsis account weakens when we take into consideration the possibility for adjectives to license ellipsis of the entire ConjP. In the remainder of this study I present evidence against the ellipsis account of NP-internal first conjunct agreement.

3.1. Semantic Plurality The ellipsis account cannot explain the availability of the reciprocal reading in (15). Rather, it predicts, given the reading of (14), that the reciprocal reading should be absent in (15), contrary to facts. Namely, the adjectives in (14) require a semantic plural controller and can have a discourse-linked reading: they can imply a shirt ill matched with something and a tie ill matched with something. The same reading is available in (15). However, (15) can also be interpreted as implying a shirt and a tie that are ill matched with each other (reciprocal interpretation, the relevant controller being supplied for by the conjunction itself). Surprisingly, this reading is absent in (14), which is unexpected if we assume that (15) is derived from (14) by ellipsis of the adjective in the second conjunct (as represented in Figure 2 above) and that ellipsis is a PF process affecting syntactic structure, meaning that it cannot alter interpretation (as implied by Kenedy and Merchant 2000, Kenedy 2003): (14) loše sparena košulja i loše sparena ill matchedFSG shirtFSG and ill matchedFSG ‘an ill-matched shirt and an ill matched tie’ discourse-linked reading of ill-matched

kravata tieFSG

56

Nadira Aljović (15) loše sparena košulja i kravata ill matchedFSG shirtFSG and tieFSG ‘the/an ill-matched shirt and tie’ 1) reciprocal meaning of ill matched 2) discourse linked meaning of ill matched

3.2. Syntactic Plurality If FCA were the result of an elliptical process in the second conjunct in Figure 2 and a mere elliptical illusion, we would not expect an adjective requiring syntactic plurality to be able to agree in plural with ConjP. However, plural agreement is obligatory in (16) (as well as in 10, 11 and 12a,b above): (16) međusobno zavađeni / *zavađena doktorica i with-each-other quarrellingM.PL / F.SG doctorF.SG and ‘the doctor and patient in conflict with each other’

pacijent patientM.SG

A possible solution (along the view adopted in Abels 2004) would be to posit an independent semantic mechanism - a covert movement of the adjective in the first conjunct to a position above ConjP - in order to ensure the correct scopal interpretation of the adjective (as modifying the two conjuncts) and also the reciprocal reading for cases such as (15). However, in order to obtain plural agreement in (16), this movement would have to be overt and precede any agreement operation, contrary to what is standardly assumed about Agree and movement operations (see for example Chomsky 2000). Otherwise, adjectives would be expected to always agree with the first conjunct, and in case of singular conjuncts, this means singular agreement, contrary to what we see in (16). Thus, the possibility of plural agreement strongly disfavours the structure in Figure 2 (whether combined or not with the movement of the adjective according to Abels 2005).

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

57

3.3. Split/Joint Reference Another problem faced by the ellipsis approach in Figure 2 concerns the predictions about possible and impossible referential interpretations of ConjP (see also Aljović and Begović 2016). Nominal conjunction structures can receive two types of interpretation, the so called split reading and the joint reading. Heycock and Zamparelli (2000, 2005) propose a single nominal structure capable of accounting for these readings where the coordination takes place DP-internally (their model refers primarily to English, hence DP) which contains a prenominal element (typically a determiner in English) that is ‘shared’ by the two lower conjoined projections. Now, they also observe that, when coordination repeats identical structures, the split reading is predominant. I illustrate this in (17)4: (17) a. jedan prijatelj i one friend and ‘a friend and colleague’ b. jedan prijatelj i jedan one friend and one ‘a friend and a colleague’

kolega (joint reading possible) colleague kolega (split reading only) colleague

As we can see in Figure 2, the ellipsis approach to NP-internal FCA implies the repetition of identical structure in the two conjuncts. We expect the joint reading to be unavailable in much the same way it is unavailable in (17b). However, the joint reading in (18b) is fully available: (18) a. moja engleska prijateljica i engleska myF.SG EnglishF.SG friendF.SG and EnglishF.SG kolegica colleagueF.SG (split reading only: my English friend and English colleague) b. moja engleska prijateljica i kolegica (joint reading possible: my English friend and colleague) 4

For more details regarding the split/joint readings argument see Aljović and Begović (2016).

58

Nadira Aljović

If (18b) were derived through ellipsis from (18a), as implied by Figure 2 above, we would expect for the joint reading to be unavailable as in (18a) since the relevant derivation that is sent to LF for interpretation contains a repetition of identical structures. The adjective ellipsis affects phonological material only at PF and thus is by definition unable to affect the interpretation at LF.

3.4. Licensing Ellipsis In this section we will see that licensing ellipsis in the structure represented in Figure 2 creates problems for the ellipsis account of FCA.

3.4.1. FCA with Multiple Adjectives An ellipsis-based account of FCA faces the problem of licensing ellipsis of two adjectives since it would imply ellipsis of a non-constituent. Look at (19b) which, under the ellipsis view, underlies (19a): the two adjectives to be elided are indicated by square brackets: (19) a. ona polarna lisica i zec thatF.SG polarF.SG foxF.SG and hareM.SG ‘that polar fox and hare’ b. ona polarna lisica i [onaj polarni] thatF.SG polarF.SG foxF.SG and thatM.SG polarM.SG 'that polar fox and that polar hare'

zec hareM.SG

Under standard assumptions about attributive adjectives (see for example Aljović 2010; Talić 2017; Cinque 2010, among many others), stacked attributive adjectives are assumed to be multiple adjunctions or specifiers of a nominal projection, or different specifiers of multiple nominal functional projections. In such structures multiple adjectives do not form a single constituent, hence are not ‘deletable’ as a single constituent. Sailor and Thoms (2014) propose to resolve similar problems of non-constituent ellipsis by first extracting the visible material and then deleting the phrase

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

59

containing the trace(s) of the moved constituent(s). (20a) shows the problematic deletion of a non-constituent; (20b) shows Sailor and Thoms’s (2014) proposal to solve this problem; (20c) shows the actual sentence: (20) a. I spoke to John on Thursday and I spoke to [Mary] [on Friday] b. I spoke to John on Thursday and [Mary]i [on Friday]j [I spoke to ti tj] c. I spoke to John on Thursday and Mary on Friday. (Sailor and Thoms 2014:361) In (21) I am applying this scenario to the example in (19a). (21) [ona polarna lisica] i [zeci [onaj polarni ti]]

(=19a)

While the structure in (21) could solve the problem of apparent nonconstituent ellipsis, it creates some problems and would ultimately lead to a non-unified account of first conjunct agreement of attributive adjectives. Firstly, like ‘regular’ ellipsis of a single adjective, this ellipsis scenario faces the problem of not being able to derive the reciprocal interpretation of the example (15). Namely, in order to derive this reading, the adjective in front of the first noun requires a plural controller (the conjunction of nouns) and the structure in (21) would have it sitting inside the first conjunct without the second conjunct being available to it, as shown in (22b). Given that (22c) cannot have the reciprocal reading, (22b) should not have it either. For this reason, a more likely structure seems to be the one in (22a), with no ellipsis at all: (22) a. [ona [loše sparena [košulja i kravata]]] thatF.SG ill matchedF.SG shirtF.SG and tieF.SG ‘that ill-matched shirt and tie’ (reciprocal: ‘with each other’) b. [ona loše sparena košulja] i [kravatai [ona lose sparena ti]] c. ona loše sparena košulja i ona loše sparena kravata (discourse linked reading only, see 14)

60

Nadira Aljović

Second, even without this interpretative problem, the treatment of NPinternal FCA in terms of ellipsis would lead to a non-unified analysis of the phenomenon since none of the ellipsis approaches can tackle the issue of obligatory plural agreement (as in example 16) and would need to allow prenominal adjectives to syntactically scope over the conjunction of two nouns and to agree with it in the plural. Should such a structure be allowed at all, then a special mechanism would be needed to prevent adjectives to agree with the equally distant and available first conjunct (Conjunct 1 in Figure 1).

3.4.2. Gender-Number Mismatches As shown by Kennedy and Merchant (2000) and Kennedy (2003), ellipsis of attributive adjectives occurs when contiguous with (pseudo-)gapping and stripping: (23) a. Pico wrote a more interesting novel than he did [e] a play. (pseudo-gapping) b. Pico wrote a more interesting novel than Brio, [e] a play. (gapping) c. Pico wrote a more interesting novel than [e] a play. (stripping) (Kennedy and Merchant 2000, 98) Similarly, to the English data in (23), BCS allows elliptical processes affecting attributive adjectives, as illustrated in (24)5:

5

Under proper conditions, BCS allows pseudogapping and stripping, too, and both processes can include attributive adjectives: (i) Senad je napisao lošiji rječnik nego što Senad AUX written worse dictionary than what bismo mi [e] gramatiku. (pseudogapping) AUX we grammar 'Senad has written a worse dictionary than we would [e] a grammar.' (ii) Senad je napisao lošiji rječnik nego [e] gramatiku. Senad AUX written worse dictionary than grammarACC 'Senad has written a worse dictionary than [e] a grammar.' (stripping)

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

61

(24) Senad je napisao loš rječnik, a Senad AUX written badMSG dictionaryMSG, and Vlado [e] gramatiku. (gapping) Vlado grammarFSG ‘Senad has written a bad dictionary, and Vlado has [e] a grammar. As noticed by Kennedy (2003) two interpretations can be associated with the pseudogapping structure illustrated by the English translation in (24); the same is true for the BCS sentence in (24), one of them being Senad has written a bad dictionary and Vlado has written a bad grammar, the other is given in (25a,b). Crucially, the structures of (25a,b) cannot be interpreted as implying ellipsis of the attributive adjective (they cannot mean something like Vlado has written a bad grammar). The adjective cannot be elided alone but only under (pseudo-)gapping or stripping. (25) a. Senad je napisao loš rječnik a Vlado je napisao gramatiku. b. Senad has written a bad dictionary and Vlado has written a grammar. Now, remember that NP-internal FCA is sensitive to featural mismatch between the two conjoined nouns: in (6b) we have seen that a gender and number mismatch creates unacceptable FCA, that is, it becomes difficult to interpret the adjective as scoping over both nouns if it agrees only with the first. Under the ellipsis view of FCA, this is difficult to explain in a consistent way as a condition imposed on ellipsis. In fact, testing adjective ellipsis in (pseudo)gapping or stripping contexts shows that it is insensitive to the different gender and number features of the noun following the ellipsis site and of the noun providing the appropriate ellipsis context, i.e., the one that precedes the ellipsis site; the two relevant nouns are given in bold in example (26):

62

Nadira Aljović (26) Senad je napisao lošiji rječnik, nego što Senad AUX written worseM.SG dictionaryM.SG than what je Vlado [e] gramatike. AUX Vlado grammarsF.PL ‘Senad has written a worse dictionary than Vlado has [e] grammars.’

On the basis of the contrast between (6b) and (26), I conclude that defending an ellipsis account of the data such as (6b), and all other examples of NP-internal FCA presented above, becomes all the more difficult as it would make it necessary to explain why adjectival ellipsis should be sensitive to gender/number mismatches in some contexts but not in others.

3.5. Nominal Ellipsis Given the problems that an ellipsis-based account of FCA faces, I propose that the structure depicted in Figure 3 is the basis for NP-internal FCA and that the adjective that modifies ConjP can indeed establish agreement with the first conjunct or with ConjP itself.

Figure 3.

A final piece of evidence supporting this view concerns the licensing of nominal ellipsis. In BCS adjectives precede the head noun, agree in phifeatures with it, and they also license ellipsis of the following noun (under proper contextual conditions and when they appear in the so-called ‘long’ form). Aljović (2010) argues that the ellipsis site involves a nominal projection which is a complement of a functional head standing in a Spechead agreement relation with the adjective. In general, agreement is standardly assumed to play an important role in licensing nominal ellipsis

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

63

(see Lobeck 1995; Kester 1996). Given this perspective, it is tempting to verify whether an adjective showing FCA can license ellipsis of the following nominal conjunction. The data in (27) indicate that this is indeed possible6: (27) (?) Mijenjam staru četku i ogledalo change1SGPRES oldF.SG brushesF.SG and mirrorsN.SG za novu četku i ogledalo for new F.SG brushesF.SG and mirrorsN.SG ‘I’m exchanging the old brush and mirror for a new brush and mirror.’ (28) Mijenjam stare četke i ogledala change1SGPRES oldF.PL brushesF.PL and mirrorsN.PL za nove četke i ogledala for new F.PL brushesF.PL and mirrorsN.PL ‘I’m exchanging the old brush and mirror for a new brush and mirror.’ If we go back to Figure 2, we can see that ellipsis of the kind illustrated in (27, 28) cannot be predicted by the structure in which the adjective in the first conjunct, which agrees with the first-conjunct noun, licenses the ellipsis of the material containing this noun, the coordinator and the second conjunct – a non-constituent. I thus conclude that the data in (27, 28) strongly support the structure in Figure 3 and the view that agreement is possible between the AP in this structure and the first conjunct.

CONCLUSION Accounting for NP-internal FCA by postulating ellipsis of the adjective(s) in the second conjunct has an initial appeal of trivially 6

Some of my informants felt that (28) was slightly better than (27), although they accepted (27) as well. Pending a better understanding of this contrast (if there is any); (27) is with a question mark.

64

Nadira Aljović

explaining the fact that the pre-modifying adjective scopes over both conjuncts and agrees with the first conjunct. However, this view creates a series of incorrect predictions. The ellipsis-based account of FCA cannot explain the fact that attributive adjectives that require semantic plurality can exhibit agreement with the first conjunct. Furthermore, this account is not able to predict plural agreement on the adjective without postulating a distinct structure, not based on ellipsis. Third, the ellipsis account predicts the split referential reading of the conjunction to be available while the joint reading should not be available, contrary to facts. Fourth, certain facts about licensing elliptical pre-modifying adjectives cause certain problems and disfavour the ellipsis account of NP-internal FCA. When multiple adjectives are present, they can agree with the first conjunct and scope over both conjuncts. But, under the ellipsis view, we would have to assume ellipsis of two stacked adjectives which clearly do not form a constituent. Moreover, contexts allowing ellipsis of attributive adjectives involve (pseudo-)gapping or stripping. This means that adjectives are never elided alone but only with other sentence material. In structures involving this type of ellipsis, gender and/or number mismatches between the relevant nouns do not affect the adjectival ellipsis. FCA, on the contrary, is gender/number-sensitive, since number (and gender) mismatches between the conjoined nouns block the scoping of an FCA adjective over the conjunction. This suggests a different origin for FCA on attributive adjectives. Finally, an interesting piece of evidence against the ellipsis account of NP-internal FCA is related to the possibility of attributive adjectives showing FCA to license ellipsis of the conjunction phrase. This possibility is predicted straightforwardly if the structure underlying FCA contains an adjectival position above the conjunction phrase (Figure 3). In conclusion, the exploration of adjectival FCA and its semantic and morphological properties, as well as certain facts about licensing adjectival ellipsis, support the view that this agreement pattern is not an ‘elliptical illusion’ and that more likely explanations of this phenomenon are to be found in syntactic approaches using elaborated mechanisms of Agree and/or in distributed morpho-syntactic accounts allowing certain agreeing

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

65

mechanisms to operate in morphology, that is, in the PF branch of the derivation.

REFERENCES Abels, Klaus. 2005. “Right Node Raising: Ellipsis or Across the Board Movement.” In Proceedings of NELS 34, edited by K. Moulton and M. Wolf, 45–59. Amherst. MA: GLSA. Aljović, Nadira. 2010. Syntactic positions of attributive adjectives. In Adjectives, Formal analyses in syntax and semantics, edited by Cabredo Hofherr, P. and Matushansky, O., John Benjamins, 29–52. Aljović, Nadira, Begović, Muamera 2016. “Morphosyntactic aspects of adjectival and verbal first conjunct agreement.” Journal of Slavic Linguistics 24–1, 7–39. Arsenijević, Boban, Willer‐Gold, Jana, Aljović, Nadira, Čordalija, Nermina, Kresić, Marijana, Leko, Nedžad, Malenica, Frane, Marušič, F., Lanko, Milićev, Tania, Milićević, Natasa, Mišmaš, Petra, Mitić, Ivana, Peti‐ Stantić, Anita, Stanković, Branimir, Tušek, Jelena, and Nevins, Andrew. 2019. “Elided Clausal Conjunction Is Not the Only Source of Closest‐ Conjunct Agreement: A Picture‐Matching Study.” Syntax 23.3. doi:10.1111/synt.12171. Aoun, Joseph, Benmamoun, Elabbas, and Dominique Sportiche. 1994. “Agreement, word order, and conjunction in some varieties of Arabic.” Linguistic Inquiry 25: 195–220. Begović, Muamera and Aljović, Nadira. 2015. “Accounting for agreement patterns in coordinate noun phrases with a shared modifier.” In Slavic languages in the perspective of formal grammar: Proceedings of FDSL 10.5, edited by M. Ziková, P. Caha, and M. Dočekal, 39–58. Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang. Bobaljik, Jonathan. 2008. “Where’s Phi? Agreement as a Postsyntactic Operation.” In Phi Theory, edited by D. Harbour, D. Adger, and S. Béjar, 295–328. Oxford: OUP.

66

Nadira Aljović

Bošković, Željko. 2009. “Unifying first and last conjunct agreement.” Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 27.3: 455–496. Chomsky, Noam. 2000. “Minimalist inquiries: The framework.” In Step by step: Essays on minimalist syntax in honour of Howard Lasnik, edited by M. Roger, D. Micheals, and J. Uriagereka Cambridge, 89–115. MA: MIT Press. Cinque, Guglielmo. 2010. The Syntax of Adjectives: A Comparative Study. Cambridge Mass: MIT Press. Citko, Barbara. 1999. “Case and agreement in Slavic predicates.” Formal approaches to Slavic Linguistics 7: The Seattle Meeting, edited by Dziwirek, Katarzyna, Coats, Herbert, Vakareliyska, Cynthia, 17–37. Ann Arbor, Michigan: Slavic Publications. Corbett, Greville. 1983. “Resolution rules: Agreement in person, number, and gender”. In Order, concord, and constituency, edited by G. Gazdar, E. Klein, and G. K. Pullum, 175–206. Dordrecht: Foris. Corbett, Greville. 1991. Gender. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Dalrymple, Mary and Nikolaeva, Irina. 2006. “Syntax of natural and accidental coordination: Evidence from agreement.” Language 82.4: 824–49. Demonte, Violeta and Pérez-Jiménez, Isabel. 2012. Closest-conjunct agreement in Spanish DPs: Syntax and beyond. Folia linguistica 46.1: 21–73. Heycock, Caroline, Zamparelli, Roberto. 2000. “Friends and colleagues: Plurality and NP coordination.” In Proceedings of the Thirtieth Annual Meeting of the North East Linguistic Society, edited by M. Hirotani, A. Coetzee, N. Hall, and J, 341–52. Kim Amherst: GSLA. Heycock, Caroline, Zamparelli, Roberto. 2005. “Friends and colleagues: Plurality, coordination, and the structure of DP.” Natural Language Semantics 13: 201–270. Kennedy, Christopher, Merchant, Jason. 2000. Attributive comparative deletion. Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 18: 89–146. Kennedy, Christopher. 2003. “Ellipsis and Syntactic Representation.” In The Interfaces – Deriving and interpreting omitted structures, edited by K. Schwabe, S. Winkler, 29–54. John Benjamins: Amsterdam– Philadelphia.

First Conjunct Agreement Is Not an Elliptical Illusion

67

Kester, Ellen–Petra. 1996. The nature of adjectival inflection. PhD Diss., University of Utrecht. Lobeck, Anne. 1995. Ellipsis: functional heads, licensing and ellipsis. Oxford: Oxoford University Press. Marušič, F. Lanko Nevins, Andrew, and Badecker, William. 2015. “The grammars of conjunction agreement in Slovenian.” Syntax 18.1: 39–77. Marušič, F., Lanko. Nevins, Andrew, Saksida, Amanda. 2007. “Lastconjunct agreement in Slovenian.” In Formal Approaches to Slavic Linguistics 15, edited by Compton, R., Goledzinowska, M., and Savchenko, U. (The Toronto Meeting), 210–227. Ann Arbor: Mich. Michigan Slavic Publications. Marušič, F. Lanko, Nevins, Andrew. 2010. “Two Types of Neuter: ClosestConjunct Agreement in the Presence of 5 and Ups.” In Annual Workshop on Formal Approaches to Slavic Linguistics (The Second Cornell Meeting 2009), W. Browne, M. Despic, N. Enzinna, S. Harmath-de Lemos, R. Carlin, D. Zec, 301–317. Ann Arbor: Michigan Slavic Publications. Munn, Alan. 1999. “First conjunct agreement: Against a clausal analysis.” Linguistic Inquiry 30: 643–68. Pesetsky, David. 1997. “Syntax and optimality.” In Optimality theory, D. Archangeli and T. Langendoen, 134–170. London: Blackwell. Sailor, Craig, Thoms, Gary. 2014. “On the Non-existence of Nonconstituent Coordination and Non-constituent Ellipsis.” In Proceedings of the 31st West Coast Conference on Formal Linguistics, edited by R. E. Santana-LaBarge, 361–370. Somerville, MA: Cascadilla Proceedings Project. Talić, Aida. 2017. From A to N and Back: Functional and Bare Projections in the Domain of N and A. Diss., University of Connecticut. van Kopen, Marjo. 2005. One probe—two goals: Aspects of agreement in Dutch dialects. Diss. University of Leiden (LOT 105).

68

Nadira Aljović

Willer-Gold, J., Arsenijević, Boban, Batinić, Mia, Čordalija, Nermina, Kresić, Marijana, Leko, Nedžad, Marušić, F. Lanko, Milićev, Tania, Milićević, Natasa, Mitić, Ivana, Nevins, Andrew, Peti-Stantić, Anita, Stanković, Branimir, Šuligoj, Teina, Tušek, Jelena. 2016. “Conjunct Agreement and Gender in South Slavic: From Theory to Experiments to Theory.” Journal of Slavic Linguistics 24–1, 187–224. Willim, Ewa. 2012. Concord in Polish coordinate NPs as Agree. In Slavic languages in formal grammar: Proceedings of FDSL 8.5, edited by M. Ziková and M. Dočekal, 233–53. Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang.

In: The Emergence of Grammars Editor: Michela Russo

ISBN: 978-1-53619-888-1 © 2021 Nova Science Publishers, Inc.

Chapter 3

NULL SUBJECTS AND SUBJECT PRONOUNS IN DIACHRONY: EVIDENCE FROM TEXTUAL SOURCES OF NORTHERN OCCITAN (VELAY) Vincent Surrel UMR 7023 SFL CNRS/University of Paris 8 École Nationale des Chartes, Paris (ENC), France

ABSTRACT Although modern Occitan is considered a null subject language, it is remarkable that uses of subject pronouns are frequent in the texts of Velay that we are currently updating and that they are far from always corresponding to emphasizing strategies as suggested by the grammars. It is tempting to interpret these uses as layers of French syntax, but we wish to show here that, according to the clues provided by our corpus, subject pronouns have constituted free syntactic variants and that their grammaticalization as an obligatory element has been blocked because of their ambiguous morphophonological status.



Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected].

70

Vincent Surrel

Keywords: Occitan language (Velay), null subject, subject pronouns, linguistic philology

INTRODUCTION The question of subject pronouns has given rise to a very extensive literature in general linguistics and remains a very lively field of investigation for Romance languages; see Heap (2000) and Heap and Oliviéri (2013). As far as Occitan is concerned, there do not seem to be any particular difficulties, given that this language belongs to the southern continuum that has retained the null subject parameter of the source language. However, this typological description contradicts historical textual sources which produce a large number of constructions with expressed subject pronouns; see Stroh (1971), Sauzet (2007) and Oliviéri and Sauzet (2016, 238–240). The problem then arises is to understand the status of these subject pronouns in a diachronic perspective, the temptation being to consider them either as simple layers of the French syntax that innovated by cliticizing the subject forms, or as morphemes necessarily semantically marked in order to preserve the validity of the parameter [+NULL SUBJECT]. The noncliticization of subject pronouns in modern Occitan should lead us to consider the possibility of an incomplete grammaticalization cycle, which must be clarified at the interface of syntax, morphology, phonology and semantics. While in French the analysis of subject clitics ultimately allows us to interpret them as marks of verbal agreement (see Auger 2003), the question that remains problematic for us for the former Occitan, in view of the abundance of attestations, is whether subject pronouns are necessarily generated in syntax as strong phonological forms, always semantically marked, as considered by modern grammars. The study of subject pronouns we propose here is based on a corpus of Occitan texts from a linguistic area that is little exploited in diachrony, namely the former Velay, which today corresponds approximately to the Haute-Loire department (Auvergne-Rhône-Alpes region). The surrender of

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

71

editorial projects has logically led to the creation of an invisible area of historical Romance linguistics (see Lodge 1991 and Pfister 2002). The updating of textual data allows us here to propose a descriptive study of the linguistic phenomena related to the expression of the subject pronoun, for a domain located on the fringe of the Occitan domain, early francized and on the edge of the Franco-Provençal dialectal zone.

1. BACKGROUND: THE NULL SUBJECT PARAMETER IN OCCITAN LANGUAGE 1.1. Synchronic Descriptions The pro-drop parameter, that has been very successful with authors, has been reformulated in a minimalist perspective by a [+NULL SUBJECT] category, because it seems impossible to maintain a pro element, without phonetic realization, in a theory based on Agree, requiring to take into account all the nominal formal features. Consequently, for Rouveret (2015, 235) “c’est la matrice pronominale sur T (Tense) qui est finalement réalisée et prononcée, rendant inutile et redondante la prononciation du pronom luimême” 1 . Thus, in null subject languages, the verbal agreement has an unvalued Definiteness feature, which allows the pronoun to be erased. This Agree based model avoids the use of a pro category, which is not a primitive of grammar, but only a descriptive entity. Occitan is generally considered as a language with no pronominal subject. In his typology of Romance languages, Bossong (2008, 144) can write that “[i]m Okzitanischen gibt es keine Subjektklitika. Dies ist ein wichtiges Unterscheidungsmerkmal gegenüber dem Französischen”2. This parameter therefore distinguishes Occitan from the innovative northern Galloroman continuum (French and Franco-Provençal), but also from North

1

Trad. “it is the pronominal matrix on T (Tense) that is finally realized and pronounced, making the pronunciation of the pronoun itself unnecessary and redundant.” 2 Trad. “[i]n Occitan there are no subject clitics. This is an important distinguishing feature from French.”

72

Vincent Surrel

Italian varieties, Santo Domingo Spanish and Brazilian Portuguese, according to Posner (1996, 51). However, this categorisation is based on taking into account the central varieties of Occitan, generally taken as reference varieties, and the neutral assertive sentence. The non-use of subject pronouns is generally justified by the existence of a verb-rich inflectional paradigm that does not require the use of a pronoun to express the different features (person and number). Thus Alibert (1976, 282) notes that “en occitan, la distinccion entre las divèrsas personas del vèrb es plenament assegurada per las desinénsias. Ataben los pronoms subjèctes son pas exprimits davant lo vèrb, coma o son en francés”3 and he produces the following examples: (1) a. Leg-issi .........mentre qu’ estúdi-as. ....read-PRS.1SG while ........study-PRS.2SG ‘I read while you study.’ b. Semen-an ........e ....culh-issètz ...spread-PRS.1PL and pick-PRS.2PL ‘We spread and you harvest.’ The existence of subject pronouns in other contexts is generally interpreted as particular functionalities, always well distinguished from the French syntax. For Ronjat (1930–1941, § 770–772), the use of subject pronouns allows: (i) avoid amphibologies since verbal inflections do not distinguish nominal referents by gender: (2) a. dóu tèms qu’eilamount Elo risié ..................jitant de siéule, ....while ...........up there ...she laugh.PAST.3SG throw.PTCP Vincèn escalè ..........l’aubre V. ........climb.PST.3SG the=tree ‘While she was laughing up there, V. climbed the tree.’ 3

Trad. “In Occitan, the distinction between the two persons of the verb is fully justified by the inflectional endings. Moreover, the subject pronouns are not expressed before the verb, as they are in French.”

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

73

(ii) for stylistic reasons, to emphasize or oppose: b. elo èi ...............saureto, E ...iéu siéu, ...........lou vesès, ...she be.PRS.3SG blondie and I ....be.PRS.1SG that=see.PRS.2PL brun ...comme un courcoussoun brown like ......a ...weevil ‘She’s blonde and I’m, you see, brown as a weevil.’ In most studies, it is mentioned that the use of subject pronouns varies from a geolinguistic point of view and that it is to be related to contact situations. Wheeler (1988, 258) notes: “Most varieties of Occitan are ‘prodrop’ languages but subject pronoun usage is commoner as one moves towards the French dialect boundary, and obligatory in the northernmost varieties.” For modern dialects, Ronjat (ibid.) notes that subject pronouns are required or very frequent in the Occitan valleys of Piedmont (Italy), in La Mure (Isère department), in Limousin Occitan and in Les Martres-deVeyres (Puy-de-Dôme department), i.e., the north-eastern and northern borders. Modern dialectological surveys make it difficult to document syntactic facts, but ongoing surveys should help to fill some of these gaps4. More recently, the question of subject pronouns in Occitan dialects has given rise to formalizations, particularly within a generative framework, in a contrastive and crosslinguistic perspective 5 . Oliviéri (2004) studies the correlation between the null subject parameter and occurrences of subject inversion (or postverbal subject), with the possibility of drawing syntactic isoglosses. This theoretical model is based on the Extended Projection Principle (EPP) according to which there must be a subject in a finite sentence, with an inflectional mark that assigns a subject function. The 4

See SYMILA NES (SYMILA Nouvelles Enquêtes Syntaxiques) and THESOC . 5 Sibille (2012, 410) notes in his study on subject pronouns in Occitan varieties of Piedmont that “il n’y a donc pas coïncidence entre catégories typologiques et parenté génétique, mais diffusion d’innovations ou résistances à l’innovation dans une zone d’intense contact linguistique entre des parlers appartenant à différentes branches romanes.” Trad. “there is therefore no coincidence between typological categories and genetic kinship, but rather the diffusion of innovations or resistance to innovation in an area of intense linguistic contact between languages belonging to different Romance branches.”

74

Vincent Surrel

absence of an expressed subject seems to violate this constraint and the author discusses on the one hand the possibility of an empty category, without phonological realization, but present in D-structure, and on the other hand the possibility of subjects generated on the right or on the left periphery, according to the argument structure. The comparison of syntactic structures of standard Italian, northern Italian dialects and alpine Occitan involves micro-parameterization and allows the author to account for syntactic variations, considering a specialized head Definiteness. In the same perspective, Oliviéri (2009, 2015) is interested in two other Occitan dialectal marginal areas, namely La Roya (Alpes-Maritimes department) and Auvergne and Limousin Occitan (documented by ALAL) as part of the THESOC project. Savoia and Manzini (2010) study clitic subjects in Occitan and FrancoProvençal varieties from Italy, which can duplicate lexical subjects. They produce an exhaustive exemplification of the syntactic configurations. They also identify a Definiteness feature and the left periphery is associated with modal and pragmatic properties. Dialectal variation requires for them too a micro-parameterization, which does not call into question the fundamental linguistic properties, and which implies differences at the lexical level. For their part, Hinzelin and Kaiser (2012) conclude, on the basis of a reduced questionnaire, that it is difficult to consider a binary parameter in the Occitan and Franco-Provençal dialects observed, where the use of the expletive subject pronoun is not necessarily parallel to the use of the referential subject pronouns.

1.2. Diachronic Descriptions of Subject Pronouns The question of subject pronouns in Occitan is not normally a problem, because it does not imply a parametric change as is the case for French (see Roberts 2007, 24–40). Indeed, we can consider that modern Occitan has inherited the syntactic system of medieval Occitan. Syntactic descriptions confirm the identity of structures, involving a general parameter [+NULL SUBJECT]. For Jensen (1994, 82–86), the non-expression of the subject

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

75

pronoun is the norm in ancient Occitan, as can be seen from the example given: (3) ar ....auzires ...........qu’ ..........ai respondut now listen.FUT.2PL PRON (Ø) answer.PST.1SG ‘Now you will hear what I said.’ The author writes that “le pronom sujet est souvent exprimé pour des raisons d’ordre rythmique, syntactique ou stylistique qui ne sont pas toujours faciles à débrouiller” (op.cit.: 86)6 . The pronoun can thus, as in modern Occitan, mark insistence and opposition. It is in any case assumed that the subject pronoun is always phonologically tonic, which is confirmed by the morphology, because subject pronouns are derived from the Latin strong paradigm, and by the syntax, since the pronouns can be separated from the verb: they can be used in coordination with another pronoun and they can be placed as the initial element of a sentence, which requires a tonic element, especially in front of a clitic preverbal object. For an update of the uses of null subjects and subject pronouns in old Occitan, see Sitaridou (2005) and Donaldson (2016)7. However, it is difficult to neglect the high frequency of subject pronouns in old Occitan, which must question a greater integration into the syntactic structure than the parameter [+NULL SUBJECT] alone assumes, especially since some subject pronouns have been grammaticalized in Occitan varieties at the margins. 6

Trad. “the subject pronoun is often expressed for rhythmic, syntactic or stylistic reasons that are not always easy to understand.” 7 It is interesting to note that in the metalinguistic commentary of the Leys d’Amors, a 14th century prescriptive grammar, it is recommended in some cases to use the subject pronoun (cited by Sauzet 2007): “Generalment en la primiera singular persona deu hom segon latin entendre yeu; e en la segonda singular tu; et en la primiera del plural nos; et en la segonda del plural vos. Enpero, segon romans, alcunas vets es miels dig can li dig pronom son expressat en las dichas personas; et aysso pot hom leumen coneysher a la maniera del parlar, coma yeu fau aysso, e no seria ben dig: fau aysso ses yeu.” Trad. “Generally, in the first person singular one must by Latin hear yeu (= I); and in the second singular tu (= you); and in the first plural nos (= we); and in the second plural vos (= you). However, in Romance, sometimes it is preferable when these pronouns are used with these persons; and this can easily be recognized from the manner of speaking, as yeu fau aysso (= I do this), and it would not be well said: fau aysso ses yeu (= do this without me).”

76

Vincent Surrel

The most advanced explanation model is Lafont (1967, 413–446), which seeks to unify data in diachrony and synchrony, following Brusewitz’s study (1905). His interpretation, of a psychomechanical nature, leads us to consider that, if many uses of subject pronouns attested since the medieval period can be considered as processes of clarification, they find an explanation in the fundamental structure of the Occitan sentence. For him, it is based on the notion of ‘orientation syntaxique,’ involving a tonic-atone successiveness, that is to say a rhythmic definition. The opening of the sentence by a tonic element can thus be assumed by a pronoun, that can be a substitute for other introductory words. The thrust of subject pronouns as introductory elements, perceptible from the emergence of Occitan texts, declined from the 18th century onwards, leading to a simple removal for the most part of the linguistic domain or to a cliticization at the margins mentioned, sometimes to the substitution by an enunciative element as in Gascon (especially que). Through these various elements “se dévoile la tendance générale de la langue à soutenir (sauf exceptions) l’actualisation verbale par un morphème-palier. Cette tendance a abouti en n[ord] oc[citan] (comme en fr[ançais]) à la généralisation du pronom sujet, sans qu’on puisse alléguer l’homophonie des formants personnels du verbe” (op. cit.: 446). The main difficulty in diachrony is of course the impossibility of verifying the syntactic properties by grammaticality tests, but it is especially striking that explanatory models assume a fundamental syntactic and phonological unity, what can be discussed.

2. NULL SUBJECT AND SUBJECT PRONOUNS IN MODERN DIALECTS OF VELAY It is known that dialectal monographs rarely deal with syntax. For the field of interest to us, which is particularly well known from a phonetic point of view (see Nauton 1957–1963 and 1974), there is no specific study. At the southern limit of our linguistic domain, Marcon’s study (1987, 72) notes that subject pronouns are not usually expressed. If they are used, it is to draw attention to the person being referred to. They are then separated from the

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

77

verb in the pronunciation and their place is not necessarily before the verb. They correspond to the tonic pronouns in French: Ièu, los ai viste ‘Moi, je les ai vus/ I have seen them’ Los ai vistes, ièu ‘Je les ai vus, moi/ I have seen them’ Los ai vistes ‘Je les ai vus/ I have seen them’

However, atlantography provides us with interesting data. Those provided by the SYMILA ALF database confirm the absence of a subject pronoun in neutral sentences 8. The map9 below (Figure 1) represents the geolinguistic distribution of the [+/-NULL SUBJECT] parameter from the sentence of type 44 J’allume ma pipe (‘I light my pipe’):

Figure 1. Occitan dialectal space of Velay and null subject parameter.

It is noteworthy that the syntactic isogloss draws compact areas, which quite strictly intersect the dialectal border with the Franco-Provençal, but 8

SYMILA (Syntactic Microvariation in the Romance Languages of France) - . Pt 813 = Monistrol-d’Allier, pt 814 = Solignac-sur-Loire, pt 815 = Chamalièressur-Loire, pt 817 = Riotord. 9 We used the map base provided by Hans Goebl (), obtained by polygonizing the dialectal space; see Goebl (2002).

78

Vincent Surrel

which form along the border with the Oïlic zone a narrow band encroaching on the Occitan domain. Our linguistic domain studied here, at the borders of the Franco-Provençal Forez, belongs entirely to the area of the null subject, but borders on the area of the obligatory subject10. The ALMC maps (Nauton 1957–1963) offer us a series of sentences corresponding mainly to grammatical persons 1SG and 3SG. It appears that subject pronouns are not expressed at all points of the domain, in simple clauses and in both matrix and embedded clauses. (i) Referential pronouns: ALMC 1887* pt 21S (Je veux que tu ailles à... = ‘I want you to go to...’) .....vwˈɔle ...........k .............ˈɔniz .............a (Ø) want.PRS.1SG COMP (Ø) go.SBJV.2SG to ALMC 1597 pt 21 (Il délire) .....despˈarla (Ø) rave.PRS.3SG (ii) Expletive pronouns ALMC 1874* pt 21NE (Pourvu qu’il ne grêle pas = ‘as long as it doesn’t hail’) ma kə ..................ɡrˈele ............pa provided that (Ø) hail.SBJV.3SG NEG In modern Occitan dialects of Velay, the non-expression of subject pronouns generally seems to be the norm in neutral sentences, but documentation is lacking for discourse-related issues such as Focus or Topic. Our goal is now to describe the uses and non-uses of subject pronouns attested by our corpus of Occitan texts from the ancient Velay, and, given the current state of dialects, to suggest indicators of linguistic evolution.

10

About linguistic boundaries, see also Bouvier (1971).

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

79

3. NULL SUBJECT AND SUBJECT PRONOUNS: DIACHRONIC EVIDENCE FROM THE CORPUS OF OCCITAN TEXTS OF VELAY 3.1. Binary or Gradual Parameterization? The first question to be solved is: can the language of texts from Velay be described using a binary parameterization ([+/-NULL SUBJECT]) or should a gradual parameterization, such as split pro-drop, be used? The answer is not obvious because the uses with expressed subject pronouns are very frequent in our texts. Our textual documentation knows limits that are obviously linked to the very constitution of genres and it would be interesting to look for correlations between linguistic structures and generic constraints, which is not our purpose here. In any case, medieval documentary genres confirm generally the quantitative domination of uses with no pronominal subject: from a pragmatic perspective, non-equivocal referential systems do not require the use of a pronoun, as in feudal registers (4a) or in tax registers (4b): (4) a. Peyre Cluzel per Katarina Bessas, per sa meyso (Ø) deu de argent XV d. ob. (Ø) deu de pebre meja liure (Ø) deu de avena ung ferrat (LièveÉvêqPuy, 16th) ‘P. C. for K. B. for his house owes of silver 15 deniers obole owes of pepper half pound owes of oatmeal one bucket’ b. Sen Guinot Coly, merchant, ung hostal ont ista en las Farghas, que (Ø) hac de la molier de sen Aymar Davino (CompoisPuya1464, 15th) ‘Sir Guinot Coly, merchant, one house where he lives in las Farghas, which he had from sir Aymar Davino’s wife.’

80

Vincent Surrel

Conversely, notarial documents use subject pronouns at the beginning of the sentence, in imitation of Latin legal phraseology, to which it should be added that the appositive function seems not to be possible for clitic pronouns: (5) hieu, Joh. Austorc, donat et governador de-l-espital de Nostra Dona, cofesse et reconoysse a dever et de aver agut de Joh. la Chassa, merchant et drapier del Peu, la soma de onse marcz et sex onsas d-argent (ObligLachasaAust, 15th) ‘I, J. A., donat (= the one who gave himself and his belongings to a monastery) and ruler of the hospital of N. D., confess and acknowledge that I owe and must have had from J. la Chasa, merchant and drapery of Le Puy, the sum of eleven marcs and six ounces of silver.’ In general terms, it is clear that there is no syntactic structure with an obligatory subject pronoun in our corpus and we have also found no construction with a pronoun that doubles the nominal subject, which are strong indicators of the non-grammaticalization of pronouns. However, it is remarkable that in neutral sentences, i.e., without any perceptible focusing, the coexistence of sentences with null subject and sentences with expressed subject pronouns is frequent and noted as soon as the scriptae emerge, around 1200. The majority of our texts allows this double possibility, for all grammatical persons that can be documented. The oldest texts are mainly records written in objective form, more rarely in subjective form, allowing a documentation for 1SG, 3SG and 3PL persons. For example, the seventeen Occitan texts of the Templar cartulary (13th century) show the possibility of both types of uses, in both independent and dependent clauses: (6) 1SG a. per aquesta sivada (Ø) redei-lor-en ......................for .this ......oatmeal ....give.back-PERF.1SG=them=it una pessa de terra one piece of land ‘And for this oatmeal, I gave them back one land’ b. done ..............a-Deu ..e ....a-la-maiso ......del .....Temple

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

81

...give-PRS.1SG to=God and to=the=House of=the T. tot aquo qu-eu ei .....a-Chantoen all that ..that=I have in=C. ‘I give to God and to the Templars everything I have in C.’ 3SG c. Pons Comarcz a-fait .........definement de la-rancura ...P. C. ...............do-PST.3SG end ............of the=quarrel (Ø) que avia .....a-Chantoen ........that have-IMPF in=C ‘P. C. put an end to the quarrel he had in C.’ d. e ....per aquet do ...........el .......ac ..................de ....la ...and for this ....donation he-SBJ have-PST.3SG from the maiso del .....Temple ....XXX e ....VII lib. house of=the Templars 30 ....and 7 ...pounds ‘And for this donation he had from the Templars thirty-seven pounds.’ 3PL e. Iteirius de Mirmanda e Na Peironela de Rafael venderunt loprat Archimbaut LX sol. de-poges e (Ø) an jurat ambedui sobre-sains qu-en pas o fasant portar a-la maso del Temple ‘I. de M. and Lady P. de R. sold the A.’s meadow sixty pennies (from Le Puy) and they both swore on Gospels they wouldn’t bring it to the Templars.’ f. [lo] Temples ..compret lo-vilanatge del Steve e ....de W. de ...Templars bought ..the=tenure ...of=the S. and of W. de Chantoent de la-terra ..que-il ......aviant ..............a-Chantoent C. .............of the=land that=they have-IMPF.3PL in=C. ‘The Templars bought the tenure of S. and W. de C. for the land they had in Chantoent.’ Thus, it seems possible to us to interpret these subject pronouns, in many neutral sentences, as expletive forms for the medieval period. Similar observations can be made for the literary genres that developed after 1500. Indeed, if syntactic structures with null subject remain the most numerous, it is generally not possible to affirm that the referential subject pronoun has an emphatic value: in most cases it is positioned in the preverbal zone,

82

Vincent Surrel

immediately in front of the verb, without any indication of semantic marking such as the use of punctuation. There is no objective reason, by analyzing the discourse, to assume absolutely an emphatic value of the subject pronoun in a sentence as in (7), whose type is quite common: (7) Yeu voulié ..paya la ...peno / Qu-o pre ..aquel angiavou I ......wanted pay ..the trouble that=took this ...cherub ‘I wanted to thank this cherub.’ (NoëlsCordat, 17th) This syntactic variation can be used to interpret the different readings given by Antoine Clet’s texts. His two bilingual plays, composed in the years 1750–1760, are known by manuscripts and printed witnesses that indicate linguistically interesting rewritings. In many cases, it can be seen that the rewriting process is aimed at improving the literary quality of these plays, in particular by correcting the metric. The elimination of subject pronouns can be interpreted in two ways: for (8a-b), it could be a procedure for correcting very common hypermetrical verses of the oldest manuscript witness A of the play Le Sermon manqué (CletSM), if si iau is disyllabic, but, at any rate, this elimination can plead for a change in the language structure: (8) a. A si iau arrape un bastou b. BCE si (Ø) attrape un bastou if (I) catch ...a ..staff In the same way, a more recent witness (D) adds a subject pronoun to form a correct hemistich, perhaps to compensate for the loss of the hiatus in the suffix of the imperfect indicative (here /ˈias/ > /ˈjas/): c. D tiu me poudias bé creyre d. ABCE (Ø) me poudias bé creyre .............(You) me could right believe ‘You could believe me.’

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

83

As the rewritings progress, which extend over about a century, the tendency is mainly towards the erasure of pronouns, and E, the most recent witness of CletSM (after 1845), prefers in some cases to erase the subject pronoun, which constitutes the variant shared by the other witnesses, but creates an hypometric verse: e. E

quant (Ø) l-ey vi .....marcha when .......him=see-PST.1SG walk ‘When I saw him walking.’

In the case of interrogative sentences, subject pronouns can also be interpreted as expletive forms and, when expressed, they always appear in postverbal position: (9) a. Aguessat ........vous dit ..........aquo? (NoëlsCordat, 17th) ...AUX.SBJV.2PL you ..tell.PTCP this ‘Would you have said that?’ b. Sabet (Ø) .......q’uno ....pioucello / Ayo fayt ....un effon? (id.) ...know-PRS.2PL COMP=a virgin .......do-PST.3SG a ...child ‘Did you know that a virgin had a child?’ c. que ..cresias .............tu ...de fayre? (ChansonMallon, 17th) ...what think-IMPF.2SG you to do ‘What did you think you were doing?’ We have noted only one example of a postposed interrogative morpheme ti, reduplicating the subject pronoun (see similar examples in Chabaneau 1877): (10)

àquo n’est ....ty .........pas bien ..liour dever? that ..NEG=is INTERR NEG right their duty ‘Isn’t that their duty?’ (SocConstPuy, 18th)

In parallel with syntactic structures with referential pronouns, the use of subject pronouns is developing in impersonal constructions, with so-called

84

Vincent Surrel

expletive pronouns, and in constructions marking indefiniteness. The impersonal is most often expressed using the neutral pronoun lo (< lat. ĬLLUM) as in (11), and never with a masculine personal pronoun (el), like in French: (11)

vos fant ...asaber que ...lo es inhibit ....et ...deffendut you CAUS know ..COMP it is forbidden and prohibited ‘We let you know that it is forbidden and prohibited.’ (ProclamChastel1422, 15th)

Indefinite constructions with pronouns use two grammatical means. On the one hand, the neutral subject pronoun from lat. HŎMO, giving the forms hom/on/l-on/l-om, interpreted as non-person with a 3SG verbal inflection (12a) or sometimes 3PL (12b): (12) a. es advis ...que ....on ..deu ..far ....visitar los arneitz ........de la ....is opinion COMP one must CAUS visit ....the adornments of the viala city ‘We are of the opinion to show the adornments of the city.’ (PardonPuy, 15th) b. quant on .apportariant .......a ladicta ...moneda lo profeict ....when one bring-COND.3PL to the=said money the benefit ‘When the profit would be brought to that currency.’ (ForgeMonnaiePuy, 15th) Furthermore, indefiniteness is frequently expressed by passive pronominal constructions: (13)

non se .....a trobat ........argent .contant prestament ....quickly ‘We didn’t find any money quickly.’ (ForgeMonnaiePuy, 15th) NEG REFL find-PST.3SG money cash

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

85

The pronouns of pronominal verbal forms are traditionally interpreted as object clitics, but in these indefinite uses their syntactic status is more ambiguous. It should be noted that in cases where the internal argument is expressed, it may govern verbal inflection: (14)

que ...devers ...Sainct Johan ce .....fassant ........grans COMP towards S. J. ..............REFL do-SBJV.3PL big barreyras fortes barriers ...solid ‘it is required to build large barriers in S. J.’ (PardonPuy, 15th)

There are many constructions in our corpus with neutral demonstrative pronouns of the aiso/so type, especially in medieval times, and aco, which extends considerably after 1500: (15)

a. aiso es lo .ces .de la ..segel del .....chastel ...here is the due of the rye ...of=the castle ‘Here is the rye contribution due to the lord.’ (CensChom, 12th–14th) b. en verita aquo es une chause indigne ...in .truth .this ..is a .....thing ...shameful ‘In truth, it’s a shameful thing.’ (CletSM, 18th)

While aiso clearly has a deictic role, the neutral demonstrative pronoun aco is originally anaphoric. On his part, Marcon (1987, 73) notes for the modern dialect of Pradelles, at the southern limit of our domain: “Aucun mot ne remplace le pronom impersonnel français il, même pour les verbes exprimant des notions météorologiques où l’on n’emploie pas aquo comme dans les parlers du Velay et d’Auvergne”11. The grammaticalization of a demonstrative pronoun as subject is unfortunately not well documented by

11

Trad. “No word replaces the French impersonal pronoun il, even for verbs expressing meteorological notions where aquo is not used as in the Velay and Auvergne languages.”

86

Vincent Surrel

dialectological sources, but we have here a clue, easily explicable for reasons of textual coherence. In addition to that, it can be mentioned that the neutral demonstrative pronoun so is used essentially in the introductory phrase of the type so es assaber, documented from the 14th to the 16th century. It is quite clear that in our corpus (i) constructions with null subject are largely majority; (ii) there is no case of an obligatory pronoun; (iii) one can never speak of split pro-drop since there is no trace of restriction for referential or non-referential pronouns, which allows us to postulate a general parameter [+NULL SUBJECT] consistent with modern data. This setting could be compatible with the inflectional verbal system that remains ‘rich’ in diachrony, i.e., with very few grammatical homophones. On the other hand, many constructions show a significant syntactic fact, namely the possibility of using a referential pronoun as a subject that is not semantically marked and the recurrence of conctructions using pronouns on the left periphery, expressing impersonality or indefiniteness, except in cases of interrogative modality. It is not possible at this stage to identify clearly the status of these different types of pronouns that must be carefully distinguished. In any case, the pronominal system as a whole should be observed to determine the phonological and morphosyntactic value of the subject pronouns.

3.2. Morphosyntax and Prosodic Status of Subject Pronouns If our corpus can attest to the use of subject pronouns as unmarked syntactic variants, with a possible grammaticalization for some constructions (maybe for neutral demonstratives?), we can think that the language has allowed a tendency towards cliticization of subject pronouns, but that has not yet been completed. We know that the Occitan subject pronouns are derived from the tonic Latin nominative forms. In our texts, this tonicity seems preserved in uses such as:

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

87

(i) coordination with another pronoun or nominal syntagm, attested only in the 13th century: (16) E ..juret ...el e-sos .....fils Raimons sobre sains avangelis que and swore he and=his son R. ..........on .....holy .Gospels ... COMP gamais re ..........no-i ....demandesunt (CartTempPuy, 13th) never ...nothing NEG=it claim-SBJV.3PL ‘And he and his son R. swore on the holy Gospels they wouldn’t claim for anything.’ (ii) the possibility of separation to the left (inducing a Focus or Topic effect?), by inserting an adverbial group: (17) a. ant-o ...jurat ...........qu-il ...........d-aisi ........aenant .re ....AUX=it swear.PTCP COMP=they from=here onward nothing no-i ....queirant (VenteCollStAgr, 13th) NEG=it claim-COND.3PL ‘They swore that from now on they would’t claim anything.’ b. et ...hieu sur aquela pena .....vous ho deffende a vous autres que ...and I ......on this .....sentence you it ..prohibit .to you others .who ces presens are present ‘And for this sentence I defend it to you who are here.’ (ProclamChastel1422, 15th) c. Et ..hieu eyssi sobre li ...mota Me ..vauc ...........eyvarsar ....and I .....here .above the clod REFL go-PRS.1SG set ‘And as for me, I’m going to lie down on this clod.’ (MystèreNDPuy, 16th) d. et ...ioou çaï ..crebe de fon (TradParabolePuy, early 19th) ....and I ......here die ....of hunger ‘And I’m starving here.’ by inserting a co-referential nominal phrase:

88

Vincent Surrel (18) Hieu Maurici Valete baile et recebedour del Vialar per ma dame de Guodet soy content de Peire Roby (LivreAffaire1452, 15th) ‘I, M. V., bailiff and receiver of le Vialar for my lady of G., am satisfied of P. R.’

by inserting a relative clause: (19) Z-ey, qu’es toujour esta en paou farceur, Diguait be tout naou amay de bon coeur (ChantLoire*, 18th) ‘He, who has always been a bit joker, said out loud and heartily.’ (iii) If postposing the subject pronoun without semantic value exists until about 1500 (this is especially true for indefinite constructions as in (20)): (20) Item et si era advisat eytal, devria on faire de la gleysa de Sainct Peire lo Monestier (PardonPuy, 15th) ‘Likewise, if it has been so advised, it should be done for the church of S. P.’ after 1500, the possibility of postposition must be interpreted as a semantic value of the type [+FOCUS]: (21) a. Mas parbiou non farey ...........pas .hiou (MystèreNDPuy, 16th) ....but ..INTERJ .NEG do-FUT.1SG NEG I.SBJ ‘But, my Goodness! I won’t do it.’ b. et ...si te ...paye ............pas, tan ..nous faray ..........pas yau ...and if you pay-PRS.3SG NEG also NEG do-FUT.1SG NEG I.SBJ ‘And if she doesn’t pay you, I’ll do the same.’ (CletSM, 18th) In addition, the non-cliticization of referential subject pronouns can be supported by two morphosyntactic events: in the singular, the substitution, attested since the 17th century, of subject forms to oblique forms in prepositional groups:

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

89

(22) 1SG a. ha ..la ..commayre Margarida de ....me ung anel d-or ....has the godmother M. ............from me a ....ring of=gold ‘the godmother M. received from me a gold ring.’ (MedPrivada, 16th) b. Chias .........toudzour embe ioou ....be-PRS.2SG always ...with ..me ‘You will always stay with me.’ (TradParabolePuy, early 19th) 2SG c. iou proteste contre .te (LettresChalencon, 14th) ...I ....protest ..against you d. Tout .......se .....mouque ..........de tiu (CletML, 18th) ...everyone REFL mock-PRS.3SG of you ‘Everyone laughs at you.’ 3SG e. Dona ............de pencions lodit .....sen Matheu de Monpeyros ...give-PRS.3SG of pensions .the.said sir .M. de M. per se ...a sa ..sor for him to his sister ‘M. de M. gives pension for him to his sister’ (CompoisPuy1408, 15th) f. Sont .....el ...tout serié ..............pardut (NoëlsCordat, 17th) ...without him all .be-COND.3SG lost ‘Without him all would be lost.’ (ii) corollary, in the plural, the extension of marked pronominal forms as subject pronouns: pronominal forms doubled with the adjective altre (only for 1PL and 2PL) (23) 1PL a. nous-autres refusen ...........pas .de ly ...estre fidèles ....we=others .refuse-PRS.1PL NEG to him be ....faithful ‘We do not refuse to be faithful to him.’ (SocConstPuy, 18th) 2PL b. Vous autres seriat ...........be ....sours

90

Vincent Surrel ....you=others be-COND.2PL right deaf ‘You’d be very deaf.’ (NoëlsCordat, 17th) The subject pronoun can be specified by a quantifier of the type tot: c. ont refusa ........de presta un sérament que toutes vous-autres ....refuse-PST.3PL of swear .a ..oath ........that all=you=others avez presta swear-PST.2PL ‘They refused to take an oath that you took.’ (SocConstPuy, 18th)

a disyllabic pronoun used as subject pronoun for 3PL, that can be derived either from the plural suffixation of a diphthongized form (els > eus > ieus > ieusses) or from the demonstrative lat. ĬPSE (cf. Jensen 1994, 126): (24) Yeusses .......poudien be ...courna (NoëlsCordat, 17th) .they-SBJ.3PL can .......right toot ‘They could toot.’ These different morphosyntactic phenomena seem to argue for a nonclitic value of subject pronouns, and it should also be noted that they do not undergo any phonological alteration in these positions, being on the contrary reinforced by grammatical means developed around the 17th century and still alive in today’s dialects. For his part, Sauzet (2007) analyses some of these substitution phenomena as an indication of a particular functioning of pronouns in the transition from a non-configurative linguistic system to a configurationnal system: in modern Occitan, he assumes that pronouns derived from the Latin subject forms maintain a casual nominative marking, making them available to explain the valential structure, but not typically in a specific position like preverbal position. Pronouns, which are redundant with verbal inflections, cannot constitute obligatory elements and they can freely alternate with a null element. However, it is clear that, from a positional point of view and despite the blocking of grammaticalization, the majority tendency is the immediate

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

91

anteposition before the verb, which leads us to make some remarks on the relationship between pronouns and word order.

3.3. Subject Pronouns and Word Order We noted in 3.1. that the use of subject pronouns not semantically marked, which is the most frequent syntactic construction, favours a preverbal position. This position on the left periphery could be conditioned by the general structure of the sentence, which involves all linguistic levels, as informational structure, the agent to be placed on the left, or even the prosodic structure. The data in our corpus show us that the position of pronominal subjects is more constrained than that of the nominal subjects, that alone can be located on the right periphery at all periods, as in the examples below12: (25) a. aquel an ...donnet lo rey ....los privileges a .la ..viala del Peu ....this ...year gave ...the king the privileges to the town of=the P. ‘That year the king gave privileges to the city of Le Puy.’ (ChronPuy, 14th?) b. S-en .....sequen .............las terras et possessions ...que tenen ...REFL=it follow-PRS.3PL the lands and possessions that have los hommes de Mons (TerrMons, 16th) the men .......of M. ‘Here follow the lands owned by the men of M.’ c. Per ana’n la ..meysouneto Que ly’avié eyseniat ...to ..go=in the little.house ..that him=indicate-PST 12

Here we mention an undocumented morphosyntactic fact, attested by the text CompoisPuy1408 (15th), namely that placed on the right periphery, the nominal subjects take a nominative mark, here a morpheme /-s/: Item un hostal en Montpeyros ont demora l-esperoners, Also a house in M. where lives the-spur.maker-SBJ seyssanta sous per an que lhi laisset sos payres sen Johan. sixty cents for year which him left his father.SBJ Sir J. ‘Also, a house in Montpeyros where the spur maker lives, sixty cents a year left to him by his father Sir John.’

92

Vincent Surrel l’angiau the=angel.SBJ ‘To go to the little house that the angel had indicated to him.’ (NoëlsCordat, 17th)

During the medieval period, the possibility of postposing is extended to the object pronouns, even in the case as in (26a) where the verb is not in the first position: (26) a. E-l Temples .........torna .......me I .....champ ....and=the Templars give.back me one field ‘And the Templars give me back a field.’ (CartTempPuy, 13th) b. Et ..beilet las ...lo reys ...........a messire Guillaume ...and gave .them the=king.SBJ to sir G. ‘And the king gave them to Sir G.’ (ChronPuy, 14th?) c. P. Faures per las terras que foro .............Jo. Symeon ...P. F. .......for the lands .that be-PERF.3PL J. S. Ia ...emina ..las quals .so .sotz ...l-estrada, e ...ac one hemina the PRON are under the=road and have-PERF.3SG las ....pel .......mairatge de son fihl them for=the wedding .of his son ‘P. F., (owes) one hemina for the lands that belonged to J. S., which are below the road and he had them when his son married.’ (CensChom, 12th-14th) This postposition is also possible for reflexive pronouns: (27) Sec ....se .....so ...que .es ....istat pagat a sen Joh. Rochier ..follow REFL DEM that AUX been paid .to sir J. R. ‘Then follows what was paid to Sir J. R.’ (LeydeSelPuy*, 15th)

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

93

However, it can be seen that the general trend is the migration of pronouns in the preverbal zone and that after 1500 the position and the order of pronouns are fixed. Object clitics are systematically in the preverbal zone and are inserted between the subject and the verb in the finite sentence, even in cases where the clitic is governed by an infinitive verb: (28) a. lli ...soutet ...............ei .......couei et ..l’embrasset ....him jump-PERF.3SG to=the neck and him=embrace-PERF.3SG ‘He jumped on him and embraced him.’ (TradParabolePuy, early 19th) b. quo .lou .fatchet ...............et ..se .....voulio ..............pas .saca ....DEM him anger-PERF.3SG and REFL want-IMPF.3SG NEG enter This phenomenon of pronoun migration to the left has an impact on the grammaticalization of subject pronouns and may be related to the general structure of the sentence. Indeed, for many authors, both medieval and modern Occitan are languages with a predominance of the V2 type; see Lafont (1991, 14)13 and Wolfe (2018). As such, the preverbal position can be occupied by various elements and the subject pronoun then plays the role of introductory as Camproux once suggested (1958, 132). There are many examples of sentences with initial verbs in our corpus, like in (29): (29) a. Sapchant .........tuit ..........que-la ....presens cedula .....know.SBJV.3PL everyone who=the present schedule veyrant see-FUT.3PL ‘All those who will see this schedule know.’ (ObligLachasaAust, 15th) 13

“Le verbe, qu’il fût impersonnel absolu ou impersonnel par économie d’actant, a été senti unité tonique insuffisante à ouvrir une séquence syntaxique. (...) Le pronom doit ainsi être considéré comme un véritable ‘introductif du verbe,’ imposant un syntagme verbal complexe.” Trad. “The verb, whether it was absolute impersonal or impersonal by economy of actant, was felt to be an insufficient tonic unit to open a syntactic sequence. (...) The pronoun must thus be considered as a real ‘introducer of the verb,’ imposing a complex verbal syntagm.” For Holmberg (2015), the V2 structure assumes a functional verbal head requiring a constituent to take place as a specifier.

94

Vincent Surrel b. Vouole ..........d’aqueste pas anar troubar moun païre ....want-PRS.1SG of=this ...step go ...find ....my ....father ‘I’m going to find my father right now.’ (TradParabolePuy, early 19th)

but the fixing of the position of the subject pronouns on the left is maybe to be related to this general trend. Ultimately, the syntactic structure remains fundamentally ambiguous: if on the one hand the general tendency is a non-null preverbal zone, which can be occupied by an adverbial syntagm, a conjunction and even more so by a subject pronoun, this same zone can also be a weak position attracting clitics. This syntactic ambiguity may have led to the elimination of referential and non-referential subject pronouns, whereas they seemed to be able to enter the orbit of the verb and merge with the clitic group. Around 1800, constructions with expressed subject pronouns are no longer well documented. The various grammatical means of expressing indefiniteness, which favoured the use of (preverbal) subject pronouns, are generally replaced by a construction with a verbal inflection 3PL, as in (30), compatible with modern dialectological data (see Marcon 1987, 74): (30) Troisiemoment, liour damondount d’estre fidèles .à [lo] lei ..thirdly ..............them ask-PRS.3PL to=be ..faithful to the law ‘Third, they are asked to be faithful to the law.’ (SocConstPuy, 18th)

CONCLUSION Our corpus of Occitan texts from the ancient Velay, which necessarily provides incomplete documentation since it is constrained by the contingencies of transmission and preservation, allows us to understand the main trends of the history of subject pronouns in the geolinguistic field of interest. The difficulty in interpreting these pronouns is that they are

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

95

complex phenomena, but it is appropriate to distinguish between syntactic and phonological levels. What clues are given by our corpus? First of all, subject pronouns have not been integrated into the syntactic structure as clitics. Their grammaticalization as clitics has been blocked because they are governed by a double tension: if they tend to integrate the left periphery which can be a weak zone, they seem to keep their status as tonic elements and we follow Sauzet (2007) who interprets them as morphosyntactically underspecified forms. The use of subject pronouns is therefore less a matter of semantic processes such as focusing than of the non-obligatory expression of agentivity. While dialectally the cliticization of subject pronouns can lead to success, it seems that in our linguistic field we are witnessing a retraction movement, but which in reality is maybe not general, since unlike referential and indefinite pronouns, constructions with the neutral demonstrative pronoun aco seem to have completed its grammaticalization cycle. Thus, from a diachronic perspective, it seems appropriate to consider the continuity of a (binary) parameter [+NULL SUBJECT], supported by the maintenance of a rich verbal inflectional system, while assuming parametric microvariations that need to be further investigated14. Despite its situation on the fringes of the Oïlic and Franco-Provençal domains and its early francization, it seems that syntactic loan phenomena cannot be envisaged: the use of subject pronouns is present as soon as the scripta emerges, i.e., before the integration of French into the linguistic architecture, and they decline when the francization is the most massive. Comparison with neighbouring linguistic domains would shed light on the general processes at work in this complex structure, but similar data provided before us suggest a global phenomenon that excludes only a few margins.

14

For micro-parameterization in other Romance varieties, see Roberts (2014).

96

Vincent Surrel

REFERENCES ALAL = Potte 1975–1992. Alibert, Louis. 1976 [11935]. Gramatica occitana segon los parlars lengadocians. Montpelhièr: CEO. [Occitan grammar according to Languedocian dialect.] ALMC = Nauton 1957–1963 Auger, Julie. 2003. “Les pronoms clitiques sujets en picard: une analyse au confluent de la phonologie, de la morphologie et de la syntaxe.” Journal of French Language Studies 13: 1–22. [“Subject clitic pronouns in Picard: an analysis at the interface of phonology, morphology and syntax.”] Bossong, Georg. 2008. Die romanischen Sprachen. Eine vergleichende Einführung. Hamburg: Buske. [The Romance languages. A comparative introduction] Bouvier, Jean-Claude. 1971. “Le pronom personnel sujet et la frontière linguistique entre provençal et francoprovençal.” Revue de linguistique romane 35: 1–17. [“The personal subject pronoun and the linguistic border between Provençal and Franco-Provençal.” Revue de linguistique romane] Brusewitz, Victor. 1905. Étude historique sur la syntaxe des pronoms personnels dans la langue des Félibres. Stockholm: Marcus. [Historical study on the syntax of personal pronouns in the language of Félibres] Chabaneau, Camille. 1877. “Ti interrogatif en provençal moderne.” Romania 6: 442–443. [“Ti interrogative in modern Provencal.” Romania] Donaldson, Bryan. 2016. “Preverbal subjects, information structure, and object clitic position in Old Occitan.” Journal of Linguistics 52: 37–69. Goebl, Hans. 2002. “Analyse dialectométrique des structures de profondeur de l’ALF.” Revue de linguistique romane 66: 5–63. [“Dialectometric analysis of ALF depth structures.” Romance linguistics review] Heap, David. 2000. La variation grammaticale en géolinguistique: les pronoms sujets en roman central. Munich: Lincom Europa.

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

97

[Grammatical variation in geolinguistics: subject pronouns in central Romance.] Heap, David, and Oliviéri, Michèle. 2013. “On the emergence of nominative clitics in Romance dialects.” Presentation at the Workshop on European Dialect Syntax VII, University of Constance, 13-15 June. http://ling.unikonstanz.de/pages/home/edisyn2013/EDISYN_HeapOlivieri_2013.pdf. Hinzelin, Marc-Olivier, and Kaiser, Georg. 2012. “Le paramètre du sujet nul dans les variétés dialectales de l’occitan et du francoprovençal.” In Études de linguistique gallo-romane, edited by Mario Barra-Jover, Guylaine Brun-Trigaud, Jean-Philippe Dalbera, Patrick Sauzet, and Tobias Scheer, 247–260. Saint-Denis: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes. [“The null subject parameter in the dialectal varieties of Occitan and Franco-Provençal.” In Gallo-Roman linguistics studies] Holmberg, Anders. 2015. “Verb second.” In Syntax - Theory and Analysis: An International Handbook, Volume 1, edited by Tibor Kiss, and Artemis Alexiadou, 342–383. Berlin/Munich/Boston: De Gruyter Mouton. Jensen, Frede. 1994. Syntaxe de l’ancien occitan. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer. [Medieval Occitan syntax] Lafont, Robert. 1967. La phrase occitane: Essai d’analyse systématique. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France. [The Occitan phrase: An essay of systematic analysis.] Lafont, Robert. 1991. “Okzitanisch: Interne Sprachgeschichte I. Grammatik.” In Lexikon der Romanistischen Linguistik (LRL). Band V/2. Okzitanisch, Katalanisch, edited by Günter Holtus, Michael Metzeltin, and Christian Schmitt, 1–18. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer Verlag. [“Occitan: Internal Language History I. Grammar.” In Lexicon of Romance Linguistics (LRL). Volume V / 2. Occitan, Catalan] Lodge, Robert A. 1995. “Okzitanische Skriptaformen II. Auvergne.” In Lexikon der Romanistischen Linguistik (LRL). Band II/2. Die einzelnen romanischen Sprachen und Sprachgebiete vom Mittelalter bis zur Renaissance. Les différentes langues romanes et leurs régions d’implantation du Moyen Âge à la Renaissance, edited by Günter

98

Vincent Surrel

Holtus, Michael Metzeltin, and Christian Schmitt, 420–424. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer Verlag. [“Occitan script forms II. Auvergne.” In Lexicon of Romance Linguistics (LRL). Volume II / 2. The individual Romance languages and language areas from the Middle Ages to the Renaissance. The different Romance languages and their regions from the Middle Ages to the Renaissance] Marcon, Guy. 1987. Étude phonétique, morphologique, syntaxique et lexicale du parler occitan de Pradelles (Haute-Loire). Lille: ANRT. [Phonetic, morphological, syntactic and lexical study of the Occitan language of Pradelles (Haute-Loire).] Nauton, Pierre. 1957-1963. Atlas linguistique et ethnographique du Massif Central. Paris: CNRS. [Linguistic and ethnographic atlas of the Massif Central.] Nauton, Pierre. 1974. Géographie phonétique de la Haute-Loire. Paris: Les Belles Lettres. [Phonetic geography of Haute-Loire] Oliviéri, Michèle. 2004. “Paramètre du sujet nul et inversion du sujet dans les dialectes italiens et occitans.” Cahiers de grammaire 29: 105–120. [“Null subject parameter and subject inversion in Italian and Occitan dialects.” Grammar notebooks] Oliviéri, Michèle. 2009. “Syntactic Parameters and Reconstruction.” In Workshop on Null-Subjects, Expletives and Locatives in Romance, edited by Georg Kaiser, and Eva-Maria Remberger, 27–46. Konstanz: Fachbereich Sprachwissenschaft Universität Konstanz. Oliviéri, Michèle. 2015. “Le statut des pronoms sujets dans les dialectes du nord de l’Occitanie.” In Paroddi varghji. Mélanges offerts à Marie-José Dalbera-Stefanaggi, edited by Stella Retali-Medori, 289–302. Alessandria: Edizioni dell’Orso. [“The status of subject pronouns in the dialects of northern Occitania.” In Paroddi varghji. Volume in Honor of Marie-José Dalbera-Stefanaggi] Oliviéri, Michèle, and Sauzet, Patrick. 2016. “Southern Gallo-Romance (Occitan).” In The Oxford guide to the Romance Languages, edited by Adam Ledgeway, and Martin Maiden, 319–349. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Null Subjects and Subject Pronouns in Diachrony

99

Pfister, Max. 2002. “L’area galloromanza.” In Lo spazio letterario del Medioevo. II. Il Medioevo volgare. Volume II. La circolazione del testo, edited by Piero Boitani, Mario Mancini, and Alberto Vàrvaro, 13–96. Roma: Salerno. [“The Galloromanza area.” In The literary space of the Middle Ages. II. The vulgar Middle Ages. Volume II. The circulation of the text] Posner, Rebecca. 1996. The Romance languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Potte, Jean-Claude. 1975-1992. Atlas linguistique et ethnographique de l’Auvergne et du Limousin. Paris: CNRS. [Linguistic and ethnographic atlas of Auvergne and Limousin.] Roberts, Ian. 2007. Diachronic syntax. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Roberts, Ian. 2014. “Subject clitics and macroparameters.” In Diachrony and Dialects: Grammatical change in the dialects of Italy, edited by Paola Benincà, Adam Ledgeway, and Nigel Vincent, 177–201. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Ronjat, Jules. 1930-1941. Grammaire istorique (sic) des parlers provençaux modernes. Montpellier: Société des langues romanes. [Historical grammar (sic) of modern Provençal dialects.] Rouveret, Alain 2015. Arguments minimalistes. Une présentation du Programme Minimaliste de Noam Chomsky. Lyon: ENS Éditions. [Minimalist arguments. A presentation of the Minimalist Program by Noam Chomsky] Sauzet, Patrick. 2007. “L’emplec dels pronoms subjèctes e la lenga d’Augièr Galhard.” Lengas 62: 77–114. [“The use of subject pronouns and the language of Augièr Galhard. ” Lengas] Savoia, Leonardo M., and Manzini, Rita. 2010. “Les clitiques sujets dans les variétés occitanes et francoprovençales italiennes.” Corpus 9: 165–189 https://journals.openedition.org/corpus/1904. [“Subject clitics in Italian Occitan and Franco-Provençal varieties.” Corpus] Sibille, Jean. 2012. “Les clitiques sujets dans le parler occitan de Chiomonte et des Ramats (Italie).” Revue de linguistique romane 76: 401–435. [“The clitics subjects in the Occitan dialect of Chiomonte and Ramats (Italy).”]

100

Vincent Surrel

Sitaridou, Ioanna. 2005. “A corpus-based study of null subjects in Old French and Old Occitan.” In Romance corpus linguistics II: Corpora and diachronic linguistics, edited by Claus D. Pusch, Johannes Kabatek, and Wolfgang Raible, 359–374. Tübingen: Gunter Narr. Stroh, Hans. 1971. “Remarques sur l’emploi du pronom personnel sujet en rouergat moderne.” Revue de linguistique romane 35: 271–278. [“Notes on the Use of the Subject Personal Pronoun in Modern Rouergat.” Romance linguistics review] Wheeler, Max W. 1988. “Occitan.” In The Romance Languages, edited by Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent, 246–278. London: Croom Helm. Wolfe, Sam. 2018. “Occitan, verb second and the Medieval Romance word order debate.” In Romance Languages and Linguistic Theory 13: Selected papers from ‘Going Romance’ 29, Nijmegen, edited by Janine Berns, Haike Jacobs, and Dominique Nouveau, 315–336. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.

In: The Emergence of Grammars Editor: Michela Russo

ISBN: 978-1-53619-888-1 © 2021 Nova Science Publishers, Inc.

Chapter 4

ACCOUNTING FOR THE DEFINITE ARTICLES IN MEDIEVAL ITALIAN AND MODERN DIALECTS. NO ALLOMORPHY A COMMON UR Michela Russo1,* and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn2 1

Linguistics Department, Lyon 3 University and UMR 7023 SFL CNRS, France 2 Modern Languages and Basque Studies Department Deusto University, Spain

ABSTRACT Italo-Romance presents a complex array of definite articles, proclitically bound and often listed in descriptive grammar as allomorphic forms. In this article we explain the variation in shape of the definite articles in multiple systems without resorting to allomorphy. This includes dialectal forms with ‘unexpected’ gemination before vowel-initial stems (never previously analysed) and indefinite/mass articles. We show that a

*

Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected] and [email protected].

102

Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn bisyllabic underlying representation for the definite article is surprisingly uniform across time and space in Italy. Our major claim is that this underlying form and its morphological exponents have remained virtually unchanged since Medieval ItaloRomance and the only important changes have been to the phonological processes that affect its surface realisation. This analysis brings together diachrony, many modern dialects and Standard Italian under a shared, morphologically unified, decompositional analysis that is compatible with Distributed Morphology assumptions.

Keywords: allomorphy, bisyllabic UR, (in)definiteness, bare articles, φfeatures

1. INTRODUCTION. THERE IS NO ALLOMORPHY IN THE ITALO-ROMANCE DEFINITE ARTICLES Standard Italian articles are governed by well-known phonologicallyconditioned allomorphic rules, especially in the masculine form 1 . The complexity of the synchronic articles distribution is ‘listed’ in reference and descriptive grammars according to a paradigm of gender and number, and in the frame of syllabification rules which govern the insertion of the articles with the following onset. The basic assumption behind the allomorphic articles’ selection is that certain segmental combinations word-initial are constrained by phonotactic rules, thus the allomorph selection is based on syllable structure. Our claim is that the allomorphic forms of the articles are not lexically stored, and instead it is possible to reduce them to a single underlying representation (UR). The surface variants are therefore derived rather than listed as separate lexical entries. The shape of the proclitic article varies in accordance with the shape of the stem, for instance, the definite masculine singular surfaces as in (1): 1

See among others: Repetti (2020); Faust (et al. 2018); Kramer (2009, 86–87); Russi (2006); McCrary (2004); Tranel and Del Gobbo (2002); Russo (2002); Del Gobbo (2001); Nikiema (2000); Davis (2000); Larsen (1998); Vanelli (1992); Marotta (1993, 1988); Nespor (1993); Kaye (1992, 4–5); Davis (1990); Chierchia (1986); Dressler (1985); Muljačić (1974, 1971); Stammerjohann (1973); Romeo (1969).

Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

103

(1) Standard Italian articles allomorphic rules Masculine definite singular [il/lo/l] a. C-initial and TR clusters (T = any obstruant, R = sonorant) [il] + C1 (C2) C2 = sonorant [il + ˈtavolo] ‘il tavolo/the table’ [il + ˈtrɛ:no] ‘il treno/the train’2 b. [l] + V-initial [l + ˈalbero] ‘l’albero/the tree’ [l + opeˈrajo] ‘l’operaio/the worker’ c. [lo] + sC-initial and [lo] + SC1 (C2) C2 = sonorant [lo + sˈta:to] ‘lo stato/the state’ [lo + skwa:lo] ‘lo squalo/the shark’ [lo + sˈtrappo] ‘lo strappo/the sprain’ d. Initial Geminate and Bogus clusters [lo] + C1= C2 C2 = /ts dz ʎ ʃ ɲ/ [lo tˈs:i:o] ‘lo zio/the uncle’ [lo ʃˈʃɔkko] ‘lo sciocco/the stupid’ [lo ʃˈʃ a:me] ‘lo sciame/the beehive’ [lo ɲˈɲɔ:mo] ‘lo gnomo/the gnome’ [lo] + Bogus clusters [lo psiˈkɔlogo] ‘lo psicologo/ the psychologist’3 Feminine definite singular [la/l] a. C-initial and TR clusters [la ˈkanna] ‘la canna/the hosepipe’ b. [l] + V-initial [ˈlɔ:ka] ‘l’oca/the goose’ c. sC-initial [la skwɔ:la] ‘la scuola/the school’ d. Initial Geminate and Bogus clusters 2

See also [il ˈkwa:dro] ‘il quadro/the painting’, [il ˈtroŋko] ‘il tronco/the trunk’, etc. and masculine plural [i ˈkwa:dri] ‘i quadri/the painting’, [i ˈtroŋki] ‘i tronchi/the trunk’. 3 The consonant /p/ can be followed in Standard Italian by /n s t/, see also [lo pneuˈmatiko] ‘lo pneumatico/the tire’, [lo ptjaˈlizmo] ‘lo ptialismo/the ptyalism’.

104

Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn [la ʃˈʃi:a] [la psiˈkɔloga]

‘la scia/the streak’ ‘la psicologa/the psychologist’

Given the basic facts in (1), it may seem impossible to derive the variants of the masculine singular [il, lo, l] from each other, let alone the plural forms [i, ʎi]. Therefore, the conclusion has been that the various forms /il, lo, l/ are selected in accordance with the phonological shape of the base. However, contrary to the expectations of phonologically conditioned allomorphy, the allomorph selection in this case is not optimizing: *[lo tre:no] would have been more optimal than [il tre:no] *CC. It is no clear why the allomorph [il], which introduces a coda is preferred in the singular before a consonant. The correlation of the variants in (1) states that the allomorph definite masculine article [il] ‘il/the’ is selected before consonantal onsets ([il +ˈtavolo] ‘il tavolo/the table’) and before rising-sonority consonant clusters such as [il +ˈtre:no] ‘il treno/the train’ (1a)4, unless those rising-sonority clusters are from an ‘irregular’ set of exceptions: [lo + pneuˈmatiko], see below. The allomorph definite article [l] is selected before vowels [l + ˈalbero] ‘l’albero/the tree’ (1b). The general explanation is that certain segmental sequences are prohibited, Italian phonotactic seems to disfavour onsetless syllables with initial V (hence [ˈlalbero]). Likewise, rhymeless syllables with an initial extrasyllabic segment (/s/ in /sC/ sequences) or initial geminates, which are naturally heterosyllabic segments, are equally disfavoured by selecting [lo], which allows for the coda syllabification of such segments (Nikiema 2000; Baroni 2011). The allomorph definite article [lo] is selected before s + C-initial sequences (as in (1c) [lo + sˈta:to] ‘lo stato/the state’), where /s/ could be argued to be extrasyllabic, certain consonant clusters (bogus clusters: [lo + psiˈkɔlogo] ‘lo psicologo/the psychologist’) and inherent initial geminates ([lo + tˈs:i:o] ‘lo zio/the uncle’), as in (1d). For bogus clusters we mean a particular type of branching onsets, with rising sonority /ps, pt, pn, tl…/ more susceptible to be split up

4

For the very rare exceptions such as [lo zˈla:vo] ‘lo slavo/the Slav’, [lo zradikaˈmento] ‘lo sradicamento/the eradication’, see Muljačić (1974).

Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

105

by epenthesis /pVs/: (Harris 1994; Sheer 2004; Ulfsbjorninn 2017; Russo 2019a)5. The feminine definite article surfaces as ‘la’ if nouns start in a consonant, but the determiner also lacks the vowel ( = [l]) if nouns start in a vowel: [l+u:va] > [ˈlu:va] ‘l’uva/the grape’. The elision of the final /-o/ or /-a/ from [lo] and [la], which results in = [l] is due to the tendency to avoid hiatus (heterosyllabic VV sequences). As for [lo + tˈs:i:o] ‘lo zio’ in (1d), [lo] is selected by the nouns beginning with the Italian five initial consonants /ts dz ʎ ʃ ɲ/ for which the pronunciation is always geminate at the beginning of the word and wordinternally: they are the palatals [ʎʎ], [ɲɲ], [ʃʃ] and the alveolar affricates [tts] and [ddz] (Muljačić (1969, 411–412)6. Nouns having these five consonants in initial position, /sC/sequences and bogus clusters always select [lo] in the singular and gli [ʎi] in the plural (1d) and (2): (2) Behavior of /ts dz ʎ ʃ ɲ/ underlying long segments combined to the allomorphic article7 5

Within the Strict CV theory (an offspring of Government Phonology, see below), the bogus clusters template is made by an empty nucleus between the two members of the cluster, with no licensing relationship between the two elements. 6 The palatal glide /j/ is also a potential geminate. Thus, the allomorph [lo] is also selected before words beginning with the /j/: [lo jˈja:to] ‘lo iato/the hiatus’ or [lo jˈjo:ne] ‘lo ione/the ion’. The palatal glide /j/ is also considered an underlying long segment in the literature, Russo (2002); Loporcaro (2001); Schmid (1999, 169), Marotta (1988); Muljačić (1969, 411); for a parallel in Gallo-Romance, see Scheer and Ségéral (2020). To support the argument of /j/ as long segment, the distributional selection of [lo] is crucial: the article distribution makes us to distinguish the structures of the sequences [jV] from the sequences of [wV], which select [l] (lo iato [lo jˈja:to] vs. l’uomo). This indicates on one side a consonantal status of the onset /j/, on the other side, it shows that /j/ behaves as long palatals and affricates not only in the regional variaties, but also in Standard Italian, namely it is phonologically long (Russo 2002). We also recall that [il] and [l] are variants not in use anymore before the nuclear glide /j/, even if there exist a few cases mentioned by Serianni (1989, 116): l’iato (Italo Calvino, Ti con zero) and il Jugoslavo ‘the Yugoslav’, Primo Levi). Muljačić (1974, 69) also reports this fact: “il sottoallomorfo l’ si usa facoltativamente se la parola inizia con il legamento nongrave (/j/)” (= the sub-allomorph is used optionally if the word begins with the non-labiovelar glide). The indefinite article un/uno ‘a’ is more uncertain before /j/ in the usage of Italian litterature Serianni (1989, 116): [un jettaˈtore] ‘un iettatore/a jinxer’, D’Annunzio, Gozzano). Finally, the feminine article la and una do not get elided before /j/: la Juve [la jˈju:ve] ‘the Juve’. This argument strengthens to the phonological status of long /j/, that brings the palatal glide /j/ closer to /ts dz ʎ ʃ ɲ/. 7 We must recall that synchronically /ʎʎ/-initial geminate concerns only Italo-Romance dialectal variation. The few words that have entered Standard Italian are borrowed, such as the Neapolitan [ʎˈʎɔmmero] ‘gliommero/skein’, entered in Italian with the meaning of a

106

Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn a. [lo] + Initial Geminate [tts ddz ʎʎ ʃʃ ɲɲ] MSG MPL [lo tˈs:i:o] [ʎitˈtˈs:i:i] ‘gli zii / the uncles’ [loʃˈʃa:me] [ʎiʃˈʃa:mi] ‘gli sciame/ the swarms’ [loɲˈɲɔ:mo] [ʎiɲˈɲɔ:mi] ‘gli gnomo / the dwarfs’ [lo ddzɔkkolo] [ʎidˈdzɔkkolo] ‘gli zoccoli/ wooden shoe’ b. Geminate Word-Internally [tts ddz ʎʎ ʃʃ ɲɲ] [ˈlaʃʃa] ‘lascia/he leaves’ [ˈbaɲɲo] ‘bagno/bath’ [ˈfiʎʎo] ‘figlio/son’ [ˈpɛttsa] ‘pezza/rag’ [ˈmɛddzo] ‘mezzo/means’

The masculine plural forms of the definite articles are [i] ‘i’ and [ʎi] ‘gli’ such as in (2) and in (3)8. Summing up, the articles ‘lo’ and the correlated masculine plural ‘gli’ [ʎi] are selected before sC-initial sequences and codified by the Italian grammar next to ‘il’ and its correlated masculine plural ‘i’ [i]. Before vowels we always find [l] in the singular (1b), as well as [ʎi] ‘gli’ in the masculine plural: (3) Masculine plural definite articles (Standard Italian) [i/ʎi] [ʎi + sˈta:ti] ‘the states’ MSG [lo + sˈta:to] [lo/ʎi] [ʎi +ˈalberi] ‘the tree’ MSG [l + ˈalbero] [l/ʎi] [i ˈtrɛ:ni] ‘the trains’ MSG [il + ˈtrɛ:no] [il/i] [i ˈtavoli] ‘the tables’ MSG [il + ˈtavolo] [il/i] particular poetic composition, sense already existing in Neapolitan. In standard Italian /ʎ/ is only found intervocalically realized as a geminate, see (2b), and in the masculine plural definite article [ʎi]. 8 We deal in section 4 with the syntactico-semantic correlation in the same nominal paradigm between the MSG definite article ‘il’ and FPL ‘le’ such as Standard Italian ‘il braccio/le braccia’ = ‘the arm/the arms’ (see Russo 2007, 2009, 2021; Acquaviva 2008; Franco et al. 2015; Cavirani 2018).

Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

107

Once again, the allomorphic selection is not optimal: it is unclear why the onsetless syllable allomorph [i] is preferred in the plural, nor why the allomorph [ʎi] co-occurs with the coda in the plural. In both cases, the representation of plural involves a φ-maker [i]. Faust et al. (2018), building on Larsen (1998), propose that this is not strictly speaking allomorphy because all Italian articles share a common underlying form that varies in shape according to phonological conditions. Along these lines, we focus on the allomorphic correlation of definite articles, aiming to review the traditional interpretation of the distribution usually given in Italian grammars in terms of synchronic and diachronic reality. We particularly concentrate on the shape of definite articles through Italo-Romance dialectal variation. Furthermore, in Southern Italo-Romance varieties, the existence of the mass/count distinction within the Determiner Phrases (DPs), for both (in)definite articles and mass nouns, shows the insufficiency of a purely phonological analysis (Russo and Ulfsbjorninn 2018; Russo 2019b, 2021). We assume that the articles distribution in ItaloRomance varieties is morphophonological, not only phonological, although the underlying form of the article always has the phonological shape of two CV units. In the following sections, we offer a decompositional analysis of the determiner (within Government Phonology, Kaye et al. 1990; and within the Strict CV model, Lowenstamm 1996, 1999, 2000; Scheer 2004, 2011, 2015) that is consistent with the Distributed Morphology (DM) assumptions (Morris and Marantz 1993; Marantz 1997, 2007; Lowenstamm 2008; Franco et al. 2015). Crucially, we assume that the underlying form of the definite article is composed of two CV units (‘bisyllabic’): C1V1C2V2. Definiteness is marked by a floating vowel under V1 and a floating /l/ sits under C2, while V2 expones -features.

Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

108

2. PHONOLOGICAL ALTERNATIONS IN ITALIAN ARTICLES 2.1. Why No Allomorphy? This analysis describes a process called: phonologically conditioned allomorphy (see Nevins 2011). Architecturally, it implies that vocabulary insertion makes direct reference to the phonological shape of lexical objects. Though this is certainly not unprecedented (Paster 2005, 2014, 2015, 2017; Nevins 2011), it is essential to confirm that this is the best analysis for the data (excluding architecturally simpler options). Insightfully, Larsen (1998) proposed a different type of analysis, which undercuts the ‘selectional’ allomorphy account and is architecturally simpler. He proposes that the masculine singular determiners are all derived from a common underlying form: [il, lo, l] = l. The analysis relies on the notion of floating objects, the contrastive status of melody/features being attached to a skeletal position (C/V) (fixed = yes, floating = no) (cf. Charette 1991; Zoll 1993; Guerssel and Lowenstamm 1996; Zimmermann 2017). Along the lines of Larsen (1998) and Faust et al. (2018), the underlying representation of [il]/[lo]/[l] is /(i)l+(o)/ as in (4): (4) The UR of the masculine determiner C1

V1 i

C2 | l

V2 o

In (4), the featural material under V1 and V2 is floating. The material under C2 is fixed. We have a template of two CV units, definiteness is realized by /(i)l/ and the final vowel realize the φ-features. We briefly recall some theoretical autosegmental principles of the framework called Strict CV that are used to build templatic structures such as in (4) (Lowenstamm 1996; Scheer 2004). The CV template is a strict alternation of non-branching nuclei and non-branching onsets. The distribution of empty V-positions is constrained by the Empty Category Principle (ECP) and Proper Government (PG) (Kaye et al. 1985,

Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

109

1990)9. According to the notion of Government (Kaye et al. 1990; Charette 1991), empty positions must be followed by ungoverned positions that ‘govern’ them. C/V positions can be filled with melody/features or be empty. Floating melody cannot link to governed positions. The representational configuration presented in (4) and its conditions are all independently required in this framework to handle other general phonological processes (vowel-zero alternations), none of this machinery is specific to the reanalysis of allomorphy. The realization of [i] and [o] depends on governement. (5) Derivation of /il, lo, l/ (a) UR in C-initial stem Def + φ-feature

[il pakko] ‘il pacco/the pack’

(b) il + C-initial stem

(c) UR in Bogus cluster-initial stem [lo psiˈkɔlogo] ‘lo psicologo/the psychologist’

9

The Empty Category Principle (ECP) states that an empty V position may be phonetically noninterpreted if and only if it is properly governed. According to Proper Government (PG), A properly governs B if and only if A governs B from the right to the left, and A is not properly governed.

110

Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn (d) [lo] + Bogus cluster-initial stem

Because the variation in form is being derived from a single underlying form, the pattern does not constitute true allomorphy (Faust et al. 2018). There is no competition between variants for insertion (such as ‘PRIORITY’ Bonet et al. 2007), the scenario under which the same grammatical information is associated to more than one lexical representation. In this more architecturally streamlined model of the phenomenon, vocabulary insertion does not have to consult the phonological form of the morphemes to generate the surface variation of the articles. The basic shape of the definite article in Standard Italian is shown to be as represented in Faust et al. (2018). Crucially, in this analysis, the apparently monosyllabic variants [il, lo, l]10 are all underlyingly ‘bisyllabic’ (composed of 2 CV units) (see 6). (6) Standard Italian decompositional analysis

10

Faust et al. (2018) also derive the masculine plural variants: [ʎi, ʎ(i)] and we show in section 4 the phonological evidence for the underlying bisyllabicity of the indefinite feminine plural and mass articles through Italo-Romance dialectal variation.

Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

111

Similarly, the plural [i/ʎ] derive from two CV units and palatalization /il + i/. The second /i/ acts as a palatal licensor (Faust et al. 2018) as shown in (7). This occurs whenever V2 cannot be governed and the /i/ of the plural masculine links to V2. This occurs before /sC/ sequences, with initial geminates, bogus clusters, and in vowel-initial stems ([ʎi ˈalberi]). Where there is no palatal licensor attached in V2, as shown in (8), the palatalized /l/ of the article is simply deleted: [i ˈtavoli] ‘the tables’. In the following structures, the palatalized /l/ is shown with its palatalizing trigger with { }. This ‘palatal complex’ is licensed by the /i/ in V2. (7) [ʎi + sˈta:ti] ‘gli stati/the states’

(8) [i ˈtavoli] complex deleted)

‘the tables’

Palatal Licensor

No Palatal Licensor (palatal

The Standard Italian feminine articles SG [la] and PL [le] do not show allomorphy according to the following onset: C-initial [la ˈkanna] ‘the hosepipe’, /sC/ [la skwɔ:la] ‘the school’, initial geminate [la ʃˈʃi:a] ‘the streak’ or bogus clusters [la psiˈkɔloga] ‘the psychologist’, since de first V is always governed as in (9):

112

Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn (9) /(i) l a/ [la] C V1 C | i l

/l/ = Def V2 | a

/a/ = φ-feat

We find the feminine article [l] + V-initial [ˈlɔ:ka] ‘the goose’. However, in many varieties of Southern Italian we find feminine plural and mass uncountable forms of the (in)definite article with gemination of /l/ DEF before vowel-initial stems. These forms are discussed in sections 2.2, 2.3 and 4. Especially for the indefinite/mass article, we will show some additional issues and morphosyntacic strategies to express uncountability within DPs including a mass N(oun) and the prenominal indefinite determiner (section 4). For all these forms, definite singular and plural articles, as well as the indefinite singular and indefinite feminine plural, we reduce the allomorphy to one underlying representation. In the following section, we will show that the bisyllabic structure is surprisingly uniform across time and space in Italy. Our analysis can be extended to Medieval Italo-Romance varieties and many modern dialects.

2.2. (Underlying) Bisyllabic Articles in Medieval Italian and Modern Dialects The definite masculine article come from the Latin pronoun ILLUM, shifted from ‘that’ to ‘the’ and truncated in ‘lo’/’la’ (Baroni 2011ms; Vanelli 1992; Dressler 1985), while the allomorphic masculine plural forms [i] and [ʎi] derive from Latin ILLI. Between [lo] and [il], the form /l/ + V [lo] is the oldest, according to the literature the form V + /l/ [il] derived from the truncated one, and the initial vowel is considered epenthetic (Baroni 2011ms; Vanelli 1992; Formentin 2010).

Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

113

The Standard Italian [lo] form surfaced in Medieval Italian as head of a DP structure at the beginning of a phrase before any onset: < lo giorno > [lo ˈdʒorno] ‘the day’ or [lo ˈpasso] ‘the step’ (Formentin 2010). It was also the only form after a final consonant: < rimirar lo passo > ‘admire the pass’. Conversely, after a vowel, [il/l] was selected: < paura il cor> ‘fear the heart’ or < che ‘l > [kel] ‘that the’11: (10) Medieval Distribution of Italian Definite Article lo giorno sen’andava (Dante Inf. II,1) ‘the day went by’ si volse a retro a rimirar lo passo (Dante Inf. I,27) ‘Turned himself behind to admire the pass’ [...] di paura il cor [...] (Dante Inf. I.15) ‘of fear the heart’ [...] che ‘l piè [...] (Dante Inf. I.30) ‘that the foot’ We recall that according to Gröber’s law [l] is an enclitic to the previous lexical item ending in a vowel: = [kel] ‘that the’. This strengthens the mentioned hypothesis that in the [il] form [i] is epenthetic before [l], not etymological (Gröber 1877; Vanelli 1998, 169–214; Formentin 2010). Furthermore, this gives just one marker of definiteness DEF D°, the segment [l] generated from the [lo] form after apocope of [o] in the enclitic contexts: [kel]. We have shown in the previous section that these two allomorphic realizations depend on government and dependency relationships in the autosegmental framework. The current geographical and typological distribution of articles within DPs [DP D° [NP N]] shows that in Northern Italian dialects, before consonantinitial nouns, we get the so called ‘weak type’ [il] (as in Standard Italian),

11

The period to which the (Dante) examples date is before 1321. These examples are taken from Formentin (2010).

114

Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

whereas in Southern Italian dialects we find the so called ‘strong type’: [lu/o]12. This distribution is generally motivated as follows: in Northern Italian dialects apocope occurred after a sonorant, while Southern dialects kept the vowel after the defineteness marker [l] (e.g., Neapolitan masculine definite article [o], section 4). Interestingly, we also find the strong type [lV] in a few Northern peripheral areas, such as in Ligurian modern dialects. Additionally, some other varieties such as Veneziano, Central Friulano changed from the strong type to the weak type in recent times (Benincà and Vanelli 1998, 72–73). In addition, there are also shapes of the definite article that spell out, diachronically and synchronically, as bisyllabic forms from the underlying representation (UR), which we are dealing with in this section. These variants of the definite article are typically found before vowelinitial stems (D + #_V) in medieval and modern dialects, from Tuscany to Sicily, and are characterised by a geminate [ll] and sometimes by an extended form of the DEF D° where the geminate in preceded by an epenthetic vowel [i/e/a]: [ill]/[ell]/[all]13. The data in (11) on Medieval Italian dialects have been taken from the Corpus TLIO via a direct search (= Tesoro della Lingua Italiana delle Origini www.vocabolario.org). We have selected data from modern Tuscan dialects from the online NavigAIS maps, illustrated in Table 114:

12

‘°’ as exponent of D° indicates the functional head of the DP phrase, the Determiner Phrase. Rohlfs (1966–1969, II, § 416 and § 420). For the [ill] forms in Tuscany, see Agostiniani (1980, 84–87), Renzi and Vanelli (1993, 296); Formentin (2002, 14, n° 17, 2010). For the Southern Italo-Romance forms, see Formentin (1996, 259–260, 2002, 13–14 and n.16; Russo 2021). Some epenthetic forms in Tuscany (senesi) [ell-] are also mentioned by Castellani (2000, 358, n. 202). 14 From the AIS maps n° 1539 ‘l’ago/gli aghi/the needle/the needles’, n° 1129 ‘l’ala/le ali/the wing/the wings, n° 524 ‘l’amo/the fishhook’, n° 917 ‘l’esca/the bait’, n° 1149 ‘l’oca/the duck’, n° 1132 ‘l’uovo/le uova/the egg/the eggs, n° 1125 ‘far l’uova/laying eggs’, n° 827 ‘l’anno passato/last year’. See also Rohlfs (1966–1969, II, § 420). 13

Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

115

Table 1. Tuscan forms of the extended DEF D° [vll] (with different nominal agreement) Tuscan Pitigliano (pt. 582)

Seggiano (pt. 572) Pisa Montecatini (pt. 542)16 Florence Vinci (pt. 522) Livorno Elba/Pomonte (pt. 570) Elba/Capoliveri17

[ilˈl ɔ:ka] [ilˈl a:la] [ilˈl a:le] [ilˈl a:ko] [ilˈl a:mu] [ilˈl ɔ:vu] [elˈleska] [elˈl an:o]

FSG FSG FPL MSG MSG MSG FSG MSG

St. Italian [ˈl ɔ:ka] [ˈl a:la] [ˈle a:li] [ˈl a:go] [ˈl a:mu] [ˈl wɔ:vo] [ˈl eska] [lˈanno]

[ɛlˈl a:mi]

MPL

[ʎi ˈa:mi]

‘gli ami/the fishhooks’

[ɛlˈl eska]

FSG

[ˈl eska]

‘l’esca/the bait’

[ilˈl u:va] [ilˈl ɔs:e]

FSG FPL

[ˈl u:va] [le ˈɔssa]

‘l’uva/ the grape’ ‘le ossa/ the bones’

‘l’oca/the duck’ ‘l’ala/the wing’ ‘le ali/the wings’ ‘l’ago/the needle’15 ‘l’amo/the fishhook’ ‘l’uovo/the egg’ ‘l’esca/the bait’ ‘l’anno/the year’

(11) Extended DEF D° [vll] Medieval Tuscan (13-14th c.) V-Initial [ell] = < ell’amore > ‘l’amore/the love’ Medieval Senese < ell’acqua > ‘l’acqua/the water’ < ell’occhio > ‘l’occhio/the eye’ Medieval Lucchese We have also found the extended form of the definite article in the Central dialects of Umbria, AIS map n° 1539 pt. 564 (Panicale/Perugia) [alˈl a:ko] ‘l’ago/the needle’, of Lazio, AIS 1149 pt. 603 (Acquapendente/Viterbo) [elˈlɔ:ka] ‘l’oca/the duck’. From field investigations conducted by the first author, the extended form of the

See also AIS Map n° 1539 pt. 590 Porto Santo Stefano (Grosseto) [elˈl a:d͡ʒi] ‘gli aghi’ ‘the needles’. 16 For the AIS map n° 524, see also pt. 532 (Montestertoli/Florence), pt. 534 (Incisa/Florence) [ɛlˈl a:mi] MPL ‘the fishhooks’, pt. 545 (Chavaretto/Arezzo), pt. 554 (Cortona/Arezzo) [elˈlɛ:mo] MSG ‘the fishhook’, pt. 572 (Seggiano/Grosseto) [elˈla:mo]. 17 Capoliveri on the Elba island in the province of Livorno is pt. 568 de l’ALI = Atlante Linguistico Italiano, http://www.atlantelinguistico.it/. 15

Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

116

definite with the initial epenthetic vowel is found in several localities in the Campania region, Table 218: Table 2. Extended D° forms with epenthetic initial vowel – Campania Region [alˈla:k:w̥] [alˈlu:na] [ilˈlu:na] [ilˈlu:na] [ilˈlu:na] [ilˈla:pə]

‘l’acqua/the water’ ‘l’una/one o’clock’

‘l’ape/the bee’

Pozzuoli (Naples) Pozzuoli (Naples) Ottaviano (Naples) Somma Vesuviana (Naples) Squille (Caserta) Squille (Caserta)

Cross-dialectally, the extended forms of the article are found across Central and Southern Italian dialects under a shape of a lateral geminate [ll] + V-initial or with an epenthetic vowel preceding the lateral geminate [e/i/a/ll] + V-initial. For example the form with epenthesis [alˈl a:k:w̥] ‘l’acqua/the water’ (Pozzuoli) correspond to the Neapolitan with a geminate without epenthesis [lˈl a:k:w̥] and to the Standard Italian [l] without gemination or epenthesis: [ˈl + a:k:wa] ‘l’acqua’. A systematic and comprehensive description and interpretation of the extended bisyllabic articles ([(v)ll]) in Italian dialects (in synchrony and diachrony) had never been carried out before. These forms are not easy to interpret and are much more widespread than one might imagine. Unlike definite Italian article, which is inflected for number [l] SG / [ʎi] PL, the extended form [ll] can be singular and plural. In some dialects, gemination involves the subsequent hardening of /l/ into a stop or its palatalization. We find a consonantal hardening of [-ll-] (see section 4), for instance in Garfagnana and in Lunigiana (Nord-West Tuscany) we have

18

The extended D° [Vll] form does not vary according to the syntactic positions, e.g., SPEC/Subjet vs. Object. We find the extended definite article [alˈla:k:w̥] in all positions (Pozzuoli/Naples): [TP[SPEC alˈla:k:w̥] [T' sˈte:və [PP ˈsott [DP a funˈda:nə]]] ‘the water stood under the fountain’ or [TP si jˈje:və a ppiʎˈʎa [DP alˈla:k:w̥]] ‘(somebody) was going to fetch water’ / or in postverbal subject [TP ˈeranə [DP alˈl ewnaacc]] ‘era l’una’/it was one o’ clock’ (in the last exemple there is lazy concord between subject (SG) and verb (3rd PL) (Russo’s fieldwork).

Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

117

[edˈd u:va] ‘l’uva/the grape’ [edˈd ɛrba] ‘l’erba/the grass’ (at Antona and Lucca). The ‘extended’ bisyllabic article appears closer to the Lat. ILLU than to the initial aphaeretic form of Standard Italian: [ˈl a:k:wa] ‘the water’. There is a correspondence between Tuscan definite article [ill/ell] ‘the’ and the forms with an aphaeretic initial syllable [ll] ‘the’ found in Southern Italian, that recall the extended forms. In general, what needs to be explained is why, in these forms, the definite article takes on this special extended shape. In line with what we have explained in the previous section, in the next section we will interpret the full range of extended bisyllabic forms. We will show that they are all surface instances of an underlying C1V1C2V2 representation.

2.3. Extended Bisyllabic Forms before Vowel-Initial Stems We will now focus on deriving the surface variation of the pre-vocalic extended forms. As we have seen in section 2.2, these are the variants in which we find gemination occurring before vowel initial stems: [ill/ell/all/ll]. Analysing the extended forms from a single UR has not previously been attempted. Diachronically, these forms correspond to a bisyllabic etymological geminate Lat. -LL-, however, nothing in the synchronic phonology should favor gemination in this position. Phonological optimization of a VC + V sequence would standardly produce V.CV. This proclitic is not a gemination/Raddoppiamento Sintattico trigger (see section 4). Since there is no synchronic motivation for gemination here, we term it ‘unexpected’. (12) Det. Vl + i/e/a//l

Stem V.C… + ombra ‘shadow’

Optimised form Actual form → V.lVC… Vl.lVC… *e.lombra [eˈl:ombra] ‘the shadow’

Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

118

In fact, unexpected gemination in these dialects is simply understood as another surface instance of the C1V1C2V2 underlying bisyllabic representation of the article. In Faust et al. (2018)’s analysis, the vowel-initial variant (/l-/) is the result of hiatus induced truncation before vowel-initial roots. In (13) beneath, the floating melody is shown as superscripts, and the empty syllable. (13) /iloV + Cago/

→ iloVCago → lago → [l-ˈa:go] ‘the needle’

As shown above, the second CV of C1V1C2V2 is truncated before vowelinitial roots due to hiatus. This is the case for Standard Italian, however, it is categorically not the case in these dialects. Instead, in Medieval and modern Italian dialects, the preference is to expone the full bisyllabic structure of the determiner. Therefore, in these varieties the full skeletal content of the article’s UR C1V1C2V2 is maintained, the C2V2 is not truncated. In fact, it is Standard Italian that has an extra process of truncation, rather than the dialects having an ‘extended’ variant. The empty syllabic structure of the article’s UR C1V1C2V2 remains as part of the derivation and leads to gemination. The initial geminate also leads to initial epenthesis, again something which is predictable based on the derivation already shown, and the proposed UR is common to all the forms. (14) Deriving gemination in the ‘extended’ variants (a) Bisyllabic UR + stem /ila +uva/ (‘l’uva/the grape’)

(b)

[ilˈl u:va] ‘the grape’ (Elba, Table 1)

Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

119

This analysis follows directly also for the ‘extended forms’ of the article accompanied by hardening of the geminate /l/ (such as [edˈd u:va], section 2.2). The phonological exponents of the morpho-syntactic features are essentially identical. The variation in surface forms is merely the effect of the micro-parametric differences in the phonological processes that interpret this UR according to its phonological context: Truncation or Gemination.

3. THE ‘EXTENDED’ MEDIEVAL VARIANTS AND PADOVAN VARIANT The same single bisyllabic UR has fully overt reflexes in some Medieval Italian areas, from Northern to Southern Italian, before vowels and consonants, see (15)19: (15) Fully overt reflexes of the ‘bisyllabic’ article UR in some Medieval Italian areas: (a) Medieval Veronese

‘i filosofi/the philosophers’ ‘i/the’ MPL (b) Medieval Padovano20

‘gli uomini/the men’ ‘i/the’ MPL (c) Medieval Marchigiano

‘il fanciullo/the child’ ‘il/the’ MSG

19 20

The following data on medieval dialects come from Formentin (1996 and 2002). Ruzante. Graphical is pronounced as a voiced palatal affricate in this area: = [d͡ʒ].

120

Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn (d) Medieval Lucano

‘il padre/the father’ ‘lo/the’ M/SG (e) Medieval Lucano

‘la carne/the meat’ ‘la/the’ FSG (f) Medieval Salentino

‘codardi/ the cowards’ ‘i/the’ MPL (g) Medieval Salentino

‘la donna/the woman’ ‘la/the’/the’ FSG

As we see in (15), traces of the ‘bisyllabic’ form are also found in Northern Italy. We provide in this section an analysis for Medieval Padovan’s allomorphy. It is not only the case of the full ([id͡ʒi]) in (15), but in Veneto, there exists a special palatalized form of the masculine plural article from Latin ILLĪ. It is widespread especially in Medieval Padovano and Veronese. This form is also underlyingly bisyllabic. The form ILLĪ has palatalized the geminate /-ll-/, something which has happened also in some lexical words of the same area, see (16). To be palatalized, /l/ shares its position with the palatalizer /i/ and precede the palatal licensor /i/ (see for [ʎ] section 2.1). (16) = [d͡ʒi] in Medieval Northern Italian Forms from Veneto Latin (a) ‘belli/beautiful’ BELLI (b) ‘capelli/hair’ CAPILLI (c) ‘quelli/those’ (EC)CUM ILLI (d) ‘uccelli/birds’ AUCELLI

Adj MPL N MPL D MPL N MPL

The extended bisyllabic variant in Northern Italy ‘i/the’ (15), as the Tuscan plural masculine [ʎi] ‘gli/the’, is a case of palatalization by spreading, and is linked to the Northern forms like ‘belli/beautiful’ in (16). The extended bisyllabic variant in Northern Italy ‘i/the’, as the Tuscan plural masculine [ʎi] ‘gli/the’, is a case of palatalization by

Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

121

spreading, and is linked to the Northern forms like in (14). These forms are related, in terms of palatal licensing which creates a palatal /l/ (as in the definite article [ʎi] ‘the’), to Modern Standard Italian pronoun [eʎˈʎi] ‘he’ (Latin ILLE) and e to the allomorphic prenominal adjective ‘belli/beautiful’ (masculine plural), which shows the allomorphy such as in (17), where the allomorph begli is prevocalic and bei is pre-consonantal ( [bɛʎˈʎandʒeli] ‘beautiful angels’, vs. [ˈbɛj ˈkwadri] ‘beautiful paintings’): (17) Phonotactic (prenominal) distribution of ‘belli/beautiful’ in Standard Italian V-Initial Adj MPL (a) [bɛʎˈʎandʒeli] ‘beautiful angels’ (b) [bɛʎˈʎɔkki] ‘beautiful eyes’ C-Initial (c) [ˈbɛj ˈkwadri] ‘beautiful paintings’ In Standard Italian today, the prenominal adjective allomorphic form begli ‘beautiful’ still exists V-initial in phonotactically restricted distribution with bei C-initial. As we saw for the medieval dialectal form ‘quelli/those’(16c) from the Latin (EC)CUM ILLI, Standard Italian has another allomorphie of this type among determiners, the phonotactic prenominal alternation between the demonstrative D° masculine plural V-initial [ˈkweʎʎi anˈtsja:ni] ‘those old people’ and C-initial [ˈkwej ˈdu:e] ‘those two’, which alternate in complementary contexts with the non palatal form ‘those’ (Serianni 1998). (18) Phonotactic (prenominal) distribution of / Latin (EC)CUM ILLI V-Initial D° MPL (a) [ˈkweʎʎi anˈtsja:ni] ‘those old people’ C-Initial (b) [ˈkwej ˈdu:e] ‘those two’

122

Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

This kind of palatal licensing (in 17a/b, 18a) affects also lexical items for which /-illi/ and /-elli/ are underlying, such as the Northern Italian forms ‘capelli/hair’ from Latin CAPILLI and ‘uccelli/birds’ AUCELLI in (16)), or such as the archaic Tuscan suppletive nominal forms for ‘capelli/hair’: [kaˈvaʎʎi], capegli [kaˈpeʎʎi] and cavai [kaˈvaj], capei [kaˈpej]. All these examples have a lexical geminate and a palatal licensor /i/ in the UR (/-vlli/). Regarding the northern forms, we need to understand if diachronically the starting point of the palatalized lateral is a Latin geminate /illi/ or /ili/. The question arises since to deal with a geminate in Northern Italy is not straightforward: it is assumed that in the Northern Italo-Romance area historical degemination applied already before the medieval period21. Yet, this palatalized form seems to go back to a lateral geminate /-ll-/ distinct from a form with a single lateral /-li/. This view is also supported by the evidence that the lexical forms with a simple /-li/ are never palatalized in medieval Padovano: [ˈpi:li], [ˈso:li] in front of [d͡ʒi], [ˈbɛ:d͡ʒi], [ˈkwi:d͡ʒi] etc. (according to Formentin 2002, 5). Some classical bibliographical sources express themselves on this point, e.g., Ascoli (1873) studied the Medieval Padovano and Veronese forms, see (19): (19) Medieval Padovano forms (and the same typology in Veronese) = [d͡ʒi] (a) ‘gli anni/the years’ (b) ‘i luoghi / the places’ (c) ‘gli asini/ the donkeys’ (d) ‘li arda/ burn them’22 Ascoli supposes that the gi form goes back to the Latin geminate -LL, and so does Mussafia (1873, 233). In his analysis of Medieval Veronese 21

Even if sonorant degemination applied later than for the obstruents (Zamboni 1976; Giannini and Marotta 1989). 22 With gi = [d͡ʒi] as proclitic pronoun in prevocalic context.

Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

123

texts, Ascoli traces back the palatalized forms, (i)gi pronoun and gi article, to ILLI with a lexical geminate. Regarding the reasons for the palatalization in the article gi, the traditional hypothesis suggested by Ineichen (1957) is that the vocalic onset of the following nucleus is the trigger of the non-syllabicity of the final i in the atonic /-li/ = [lj], with a consequent palatalization of the lateral. Ineichen did not come to a decision on the status of the lexical geminate (see for more details Formentin 2002). This traditional hypothesis also implies that /-li/ (which can be reduced to i) and gi are just two variants of the /-li/ form in a prevocalic context. This hypothesis is also supported by Rohlfs (§ 280 and § 414), who brought Northern forms such as prevocalic gi aseni [d͡ʒi ˈaseni] ‘gli asini/the donkeys’ closer to the Tuscan Italian/Standard Italian [ʎi aˈmit͡ʃi] ‘gli amici/the friends’ (see Formentin ib.). However, a problem arises from the phonotactic hypothesis concerning the Padovano forms in (15, 16 and 19), such as , , , , etc., since palatalization only occured in these forms and never in the case of a singleton /l/ preceding a final [-i/j]. In this dialect, the prevocalic context cannot be the trigger of palatalization in the 14th century. In Padovano, as we have seen in (19), in the 14th c. we also find [d͡ʒi] C-initial: ‘i luoghi/the places’ with [d͡ʒi] before a consonantal onset. Once it has been established that the phonotactic hypothesis does not work, we must believe that there is an active palatalization process involving the final /-i/ as palatal licensor. Moreover, in the same medieval texts Padovano shows allomorphy in the masculine plural articles, and we find (Stussi 1995) 23 . The allomorph is rare in Padovano during the 14th century, compared to other Northern varieties such as Trevisano; furthermore, the forms

  • and are preferred by authors and transcribers (Formentin 2002). The palatalized forms, which are not prevocalic, were very present in th 14 century texts, see (20)24: 23

    The relationship between i and li in some Northern Italian dialects has been investigated by Vanelli (1998). 24 Data from Formentin (2002, 8–11).

    124

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn (20) Phonotactics of the allomorphs MPL (14 th century) (a) with different onsets (Text Serapiom) IN ILLI + C ‘luoghi/places’ (35r.16) ‘campi/fields’ (35r.16) ‘dolori/pains’ (113v.1) ‘nervi/nerves’ (66v.1)

    ‘lidi/lidos’ (132r.1)25 (b)
  • with different onsets (Text Serapiom) IN ILLI + C ‘paludi/marshes’ (7r.41) ‘scrigni/ caskets’ (12v.2) ‘luoghi/places’ (25r.41) (100+)26 ILLI + V ‘occhi/eyes’ (7r.27)
  • ‘animali/animals’ (12v.16) ‘animali/animals’ (6v.21), etc. (c) with consonantal onset in Text Statuto della fraglia degli Strazaroli IN ILLI + C ‘luoghi sordidi/dirty places’ (5r.8) (d) with consonantal onset in Formulario notarile PER ILLI + C ‘per i suoi eredi’ (t. 13) (e) with a vocalic onset in Statuto della fraglia degli Strazaroli ILLI + V ‘asini/donkeys’ (1v.9)

    ‘asini/donkeys’ (1v.16)

    25

    Next to ‘altri/others’ 117r.4 and ‘edifici/buildings’ 132v.30. 77 times with a consonantal onset and only 15 times with a vocalic onset, see Formentin ib. 26 Next to ‘occhi/eyes’ 6v.44; ‘altri/others’ 26r.16 (50+), see Formentin ib.

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …



    ‘uomini/men’ ‘uomini/men’ ‘uomini/men’

    125

    (6r.7) (7r.6) (14r.13), etc.

    The palatalized form of the definite article [d͡ʒi] is very typical in medieval Northern Padovano-Veronese dialects. The data above pointed out by Formentin (2002) show that
  • , and do not alternate freely in Padovano texts: is usually found after the preposition and , whereas
  • and are employed in all contexts. Moreover, from the 15th century, the form appears more frequently in Padovano before a vowel. It is only from the 15th century (for instance in Ruzante texts), that in Padovano the palatalized form becomes phonotactically generalized only before a vowel, as it is today in Tuscan Italian: ‘gli asini/the donkeys’. However, the form appears in Medieval Veronese generalized before a consonantal onset ‘i baroni/the barons’ (ib.). Nonetheless, as argued by Formentin (2002), we are dealing here with an embryonic phonotactic condition for the definite article, which is essential for the distribution of the allomorphs according to different contexts. Even though we look at these forms from an etymological point of view, we still must consider these forms not a case of allomorphy (21): (21) Medieval Padovano – Embryonic phonotactic conditions (see Formentin 2002): Two allomorphs
  • and gi from /(i)li/ < Latin ILLI li (i) campi ≠ gi agni / in gi campi / per gi campi (IL)LI CAMPI ≠ ILLI ANNI, IN ILLI CAMPI, PER ILLI CAMPI ‘i campi/the fields’ and ‘gli anni/the years’ We see here that the two allomorphs of the definite article ≠ produce from the Latin ILLI two different forms: /(i)li/ = and . One shape () retains the whole C1V1C2V2 underlying, while the other shape () only allows some of it to surface. Crucial for us is that the palatalized form corresponds to the full UR C1V1C2V2, before a vowel or after a postconsonantal preposition (IN and PER).

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    126

    This variation is not an instance of allomorphy, since the UR is always C1V1C2V2, and we can represent the two derivations and as follows, see (22) and (23): (22) Medieval Padovano /(i)li/ =
  • [li]
  • ‘the fields’

    The condition on linking of floating melody stops palatalization in this context. V2 governs V1 and the first /i/ palatalizer cannot link to V1 and to C2 rightwards. If V1 of CV1 is governed by V2 of CV2, C1 does not need to be filled. (23) Palatal ‘bisyllabic’ UR Medieval Padovano (a)

    (b) Palatal complex licensed and geminated

    The /i/ under V2 links to this position leaving the /i/ under V1 to form a palatal complex with /l/ in C2. This is licensed by V2. The resultantly empty initial CV1 is filled by phonological gemination, and its accompanied phonetic hardening to [d͡ʒi].

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    127

    As we have seen in this section, evidence of the extended bisyllabic structure of the definite D° comes also from Northern dialects. Medieval Padovano clearly shows the realisation of the extended bisyllabic definite article MPL . The phonetic reflection of a phonological lateral geminate /ll/ before a vowel-initial word, even palatalized, reveals the bisyllabic form of the UR. This Northern form with a palatalized masculine plural article must be analysed as the full prevocalic extended forms already met in the medieval and modern dialects, from Tuscany to Sicily, as we have shown in section 2.2 and 2.3 for the Medieval Senese [ell a ˈmo:re] ‘the love’, Elbano [ilˈl a:kwa] ‘the water’, Versiliese [ilˈl ɔrto] (Tuscany Region), Neapolitan lˈl a:kwə̥] ‘the water’ (Campania Region), etc. In Tuscan, Central and Southern Italian dialects, these bisyllabic forms of the article (/ll/, [ill/ell/all] or [d͡ʒi]) are a surface instance of the C1V1C2V2 underlying representation and they confirm what we have proposed in section 1 and 2. We bring your attention once again to the fact that also in Tuscany (Garfagnana and Lunigiana), next to forms with hardening in [dd], mentioned in section 2.2, such as [edˈd u:va] ‘l’uva/the grape’, and next to the extended forms [ilˈl u:va] (in Elba and Maremma), we find the extended prevocalic palatalized/hardening article [iʝʝ] as well as the palatalized CAPILLI [kaˈpiʝʝi] ‘i capelli/the air’ (Rohlfs 1966–1969, § 416 and § 420). The Tuscan forms are close to those in Northern Italo-Romance dialects which show palatalization, as well as to the extended articles with palatalized/hardening found in the Neapolitan area (see section 4). However, the hardening and palatalization in Southern Italian dialects are not triggered by a palatal licensor The hardening of /-ll-/ ([dd, ddj ddʝ ʝʝ]) in north-western Tuscany (Lunigiana and Garfagnana) and on the island of Elba is not linked either to the Northern palatalization process, but it is rather linked to the hardening/retroflexion process which affected the Latin development of /-

    128

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    LL-/

    in Central and Southern Italian dialects (see section 4), as well as Corsican dialects (Meyer-Lübke 1934, 33)27. The licensing palatalization condition, in medieval Padovano-Veronese dialects is crucial to explain the definite article masculine plural form. This condition also explains the palatalization in the Northern forms in (16) ‘capelli/hair’, ‘belli/beautiful (MPL)’ as well as Italian [bɛʎˈʎɔkki] ‘begl’occhi/beautiful eyes’ (see (17)) and the Italian pronoun [eʎʎi] ‘he’. However, it does not explain the forms with hardening from a Latin lateral geminate /-LL-/ such as the lexical items derived from CAPILLI in Central and Southern Italian dialects28. In these dialects, we can have hardenings in the lexical words corresponding to the Latin CAPILLI with a final /i/, but also in CELLARIU ‘cellar’, CABALLU ‘cavallo/horse’ and CEPULLA ‘cipolla/onion’, where a palatal licensor /i/ is missing after the lateral geminate (Lausberg 1967, 69, § 496; Meyer-Lübke 1934, 33–35; Romito and Scuticchio 2009; Romito and Milelli 1999; Russo and Barry 2004, 2003, 2002; Jones 2004; Ruffino 1997; Bianco 1981). In Central and Southern Italian dialects all the lexical lateral geminate /-ll-/ may undergo a process of hardening from retroflexion to palatalization (and flapping = [ɾ] only in functional D°, articles and demonstrative pronouns prosodically weak/unstressed) [dd, ddj ddʝ ɖɖ ʝʝ ɾ] without a palatal licensor (see section 4).

    27

    According to Meyer-Lübke the hardening in Tuscany is due to the Corsican influence since Corsican refugees established themselves in the area. We find the same kind of hardening, as in the Southern Italian dialects, also in Sardinian dialects (see Wagner 1941, 195, § 347; Lausberg 1967, 69, § 496). 28 We recall that Merlo (1906) pointed out that the Northern forms with gi, begi, cavigi etc. are to be linked to Central and Southern Italian forms such as CAPILLI with hardening of /-ll-/ (see section 4). Viceversa, Rohlfs (1966–1969, § 233) makes a distinction between the palatalization in the article forms and the palatalization which occurs in lexical items ending with -LLI > -gi (such as CAPILLI), since he attributes the palatalization of the article to the prevocalic context.

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    129

    4. THE EXTENDED BISYLLABIC NEAPOLITAN VARIANT AND THE REPRESENTATION OF (IN)DEFINITENESS Many Southern extended bisyllabic articles show a lateral geminate Vinitial without an epenthetic vowel preceding. However, there is clear evidence for their bisyllabic underlying structure. We show in this section that they are all instances of C1V1C2V2, the variation on shapes depends on which part of the templatic proclitic structure is realised at the spellout according to phonological conditions, as well as to the morphosyntactic environment and agreement. The shape of the article V-initial in Neapolitan according to gender and number categories is shown in Table 3, the corresponding UR is given in (24)29. It should be noted immediately that the V-initial article variant [ll] does not have exponents of φ-features realized by vowels. Moreover, from Table 3 onwards we have introduced the functional category MASS in addition to the masculine and feminine morphosyntactic categories. Indeed, in the dialects of Southern Italy, especially in Neapolitan since the medieval period, we find three types of articles to express (in)definiteness, since we have the distinction between definite and indefinite articles. We point out that the syntactic and semantic difference between the proclitic articles from Latin MSG ILLUM and ILLUD or *ILLOC [+MASS] (neuter case in Latin), also exists in the Southern Romance (pro)clitic determiners, expressed by the simple lateral vs. the geminate lateral (see Russo 2019a, 2021). These articles have the property of introducing a massive noun such as the uncountable MSG ‘olio/oil’, ‘pane/bread’ etc., or of introducing an indefinite FPL such as [lˈl ɔ:və] ‘le uova/the eggs’ or FPL [lˈl ɔssə] ‘le

    29

    The data were gathered by the first author from fieldwork conducted (between 2011 and 2014), in the following places: Monte di Procida, Pozzuoli and the islands of Procida and Ischia (Forío, Barano, Serrara Fontana villages), all places in the province of Naples. 10 speakers have been recorded: 2 from Pozzuoli (1M, 1F), 2 from Monte di Procida (1M, 1F), 4 from Ischia, 2 from Forío (1F, 1M), 1 from Barano (1F), 2 from Serrara Fontana (1F, 1M), 2 from Procida (1M, 1F). Recordings, using a portable cassette recorder (Sony TC-D5M and a Sony F-V55 microphone) attached to the informants clothing, were made in informal interview situations in which questions were asked about the vocabulary used in the local speaker’s everyday life. The word-form answers were embedded in completely spontaneous structures. The interviewer (author MR) is also a Neapolitan native speaker.

    130

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    ossa/the bones’ and [e dˈde:tɐ] ‘dita/fingers’ from the Latin ILLAEC. At the MSG, the MASS marker indicates the extraction of a whole, the FPL marker indicates an indefinite plural. It is also useful to note that the feminine indefinite plural systematically involves also epicene nouns and paradigms, which oppose for example in Standard Italian a MSG such as ‘il dito/the finger’ and a FPL such as ‘le dita/the fingers’, or a MSG such as ‘l’osso/bone’ and a FPL ‘le ossa/bones’ (Russo 2007, 2009, 2019a/b, 2021; Acquaviva 2008, Acquaviva and Daniel to appear; Cavirani 2018). This class may contain nouns originally belonging to the Latin neuter (e.g., OSSUM/OSSA ‘bone/-s’ or BRACHIUM/BRACHIA ‘braccio/braccia’ eng. ‘arm/-s’), which show a reanalysis of the Latin plural neuter inflectional /a/, as an indefinite FPL. However, this process can also capture new epicene indefinites FPL from Latin original masculine nouns such as the ‘finger/-s’ (Latin DIGITUS/DIGITI). In this case the Latin masculine plural inflectional /i/ is reanalyzed in Standard Italian as an inflectional indefinite FPL /-a/ ‘dita/fingers’. Southern Italian dialects often keep within the same epicene nominal paradigm a countable MPL plural /-i/ in addition to an uncountable FPL /-a/ (spelled out [a] or [e]), which is syntactically a higher DP-internal head than the head of the masculine plural (Russo 2007, 2009, 2019a/b). Table 3. Bisyllabic [ll] INDEF FPL [lˈl ɔ:və] ‘le uova/the eggs’ C1V1C2V2 Modern Neapolitan SG PL

    M DEF [l] DEF [l]

    Mass INDEF [ll]

    F DEF [l] INDEF [ll]

    (24) Neapolitan indefinite (MSG MASS and INDEF FPL) article V-Initial [ll] - underlying structure C1V1C2V2 φ-features l C1V1C2V2 CV [ll]

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    131

    Parallel to this ‘weak form’ V-initial shaped [ll], we have the so called ‘strong type’ [(l)v] C-initial in Table 4. Moreover, singular MASS and Feminine Plural have a special property of triggering Syntactic Doubling = Raddoppiamento Sintattico (Repetti 1991; Fanciullo 1997; Larsen 1998; De Blasi and Fanciullo 2002; Russo 2013, Russo 2019a/b; Torcolacci 2014; D’Alessandro and Scheer 2015): the doubling of a following stem-initial consonant, see Table 4, and the corresponding UR in (25): Table 4. (In)definite Articles: C1V1C2V2 (all except MSG MASS and FPL) Modern Neapolitan SG PL

    M [o/u] [i]

    MASS o/u [+ RS] [o/u]

    F [a] e/i [+ RS]

    (25) Neapolitan article [o/u/i/a] ‘strong forms’- underlying structure l + φ-features C1V1C2V2 = {o/u/i/a} MSG MPL and FSG In Neapolitan, the SG Mass indefinite article/marker (INDEF MASS [o/u]) and the indefinite feminine plurals [e/i], which trigger Raddoppiamento Sintattico, show the extended bisyllabic UR spelled out with the following phonological shape: C1V1C2V2 (+[RSCV]) as in (26). It should be noted that, unlike definite proclitics, indefinite proclitics have a final latent consonant that allows the syntactic doubling, the Raddoppiamento Sintattico. This latent position is represented in the UR of indefinite markers as +[RSCV] inserted after the UR of the (in)definite article C1V1C2V2 and allows the gemination of the following onset, hence the structure C1V1C2V2 [RSCV] in our indefinite markers MSG MASS and feminine plurals in (26).

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    132

    (26) Neapolitan indefinite articles MSG MASS and FPL underlying structure

    As we will see, the indefiniteness of those two markers (MSG MASS and FPL) will turn out to be evident from certain facts of medieval and modern Neapolitan varieties. In Medieval Neapolitan, the lateral geminate of the indefinite feminine plural and Mass articles, expressed by the two CVs (C1V1C2V2) +[RSCV] is not always graphically represented in the texts as a geminate (see Russo 2021, 199–204). As shown in (Table 5), we cannot see the difference between the extended definite and indefinite articles, when the (in)definite markers are realized in the simple orthographic form (and without the preposition ‘di’ from Latin DE preceding)30: Table 5. Extended indefinite and definite articles in the simple form: represented graphically by single FPL SG MASS ‘the son’ lo figlyo MSG

    le donne ‘the women’ lo pane ‘amount of bread’ ‘the daughter’ la figlia FSG

    Medieval Neap. ‘the sons’ ly figlye MPL

    However, the difference between the indefinite articles (FPL and MASS MSG) and definite article can be detected in medieval texts when the two indefinite markers are combined with a preposition ‘di’ (Latin DE), forming ‘preposition articles sequences’ (called in the prescriptive Italian grammars preposizioni articolate) (Tables 6 and 7), see Russo (2021):

    30

    The forms in Table. 5, 6 and 7 come from the Medieval Neapolitan De Rosa (before 1475), see Formentin (1994, 47).

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    133

    Table 6. Extended indefinite FPL and MASS combined with a preposition ‘di’: Preposizione articolate FPL [+ RS] MASS [+ RS]

    C 1V 1C 2V 2 delle donne [-ll-] dello pane [-ll-]

    Table 7. Extended definite article (countable) combined with a preposition ‘di’: MSG de lo figlio

    C2V2

    FSG de la figlia

    MPL de ly figlie

    As we mentioned, the simple forms of the indefinite FPL and MASS articles were not always written with a lateral geminate in medieval texts. However, the lateral geminate of indefinite articles was represented graphically when there was an element (a preposition: Neap. de, a ‘to’, cu ‘with’…) before the indefinite marker. The lateral geminate in Table 6, represented exclusively in the MSG MASS and FPL MASS, and combined with a preposition preceding the article, is an irrefutable evidence of the article underling extended form since Neap. de ‘di’ (‘of’ in the indefinite sense conveyed by a quantifier such as ‘some’, used before nouns to refer to indefinite quantities) is not a RS trigger (there is no latent [RSCV] trigger after the preposition): Table 8. Bisyllabic articles without a RS trigger preceding SG PL

    M de lo de li

    MASS de llo [+RS]

    F de la de lle [+RS]

    (27) de + lo MASS indefinite article - Medieval Neapolitan ’an amount of bread’

    134

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    The lateral is realized as a geminate [ll] because it links to both C1 and C2. Moreover, the indefinite mass article is combined with a preposition such as , which is not a trigger of RS gemination in Medieval and Modern Neapolitan. Thus, the lateral geminate found in the indefinite FPL and MASS articles can only be due to its underlying status. Nevertheless, the lateral geminate can be due to the presence of the preposition. The same applies to the FPL article: (28) de + le FPL Medieval Neapolitan /Indefinite feminine plural = [ll]

    As we have seen in (26) and (27), in (28) it is the empty C1V1 of the bysillabic article which lets the lateral to spread. As for the MSG MASS article, also for the feminine plural the extended bisyllabic article can be realized because the UR provides the CV for the geminate lateral to be expressed, although only when a preposition that completes the indefiniteness of the article precedes the indefinite marker. To support our argument, we give in Table 9 some other examples of the lateral realized as a geminate in Medieval Neapolitan when combined with a preceding preposition, for instance from Latin ILLORUM ‘loro/them’, ILLAC ‘là/there’ and *ILLOCO (Neap. ‘loco/place’) , , : Table 9. Proclitic prepositions and conjonctions + sequences - /ll/ Latin Medieval Neapolitan CV + C1V1C2V2

    ILLORUM ‘loro/them’ de lloro

    ILLAC ‘là/there’ da lla

    *ILLOCO cha = Latin QUIA cha lloco

    We again point out that ca = QUIA, da ‘from’, de (Table 9) do not trigger Raddoppiamento Sintattico in Medieval and Modern Neapolitan, thus the

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    135

    gemination of the lateral is due to the phonological shape of the underlying form, the pronoun ILLORUM or the locative ILLAC and ILLOCO. The lateral geminate (UR /ll/ = C1V1C2V2) makes it possible to branch C2 on C1 after the proclitic de, da, ca. (29) Medieval Neapolitan /-ll-/

    ILLAC ‘là/there’

    This is an important additional argument for stating that in the indefinite feminine plural article and singular MASS the realization of the lateral geminate depends on the preceding phonosyntactic context: /ll/ = C1V1C2V2. It is also graphically represented in Medieval Neapolitan when a preposition such as Neap. , Italian ‘di’ (Latin DE) precedes it. What is crucial to point out is that this preposition has acquired the value of an indefinite partitive article, switching from the category of prepositions to the category of a partitive indefinite article, such as the optional Italian indefinite article ‘dei/delle’: ‘ho letto dei libri/I read some books’ and ‘ho mangiato delle mele/I ate some apples’ (this is shown by Russo 2021, 199–204)31. The Neapolitan innovation has been, since a Medieval stage, an overt ‘de’ in SPEC DP position, in a structure of a partitive determiner ‘de’ + article ( ‘some bread’, ‘an indefinite quantity of women’). As Russo (2021) points out these markers (MSG MASS = DE + ILLOC or ILLUD and indefinite FPL = DE + ILLAEC) correspond in some central-meridional dialects, such as Neapolitan, to indefinite articles. DE represents the grammaticalisation of an indefinite marker (in the position of SPEC DP), see (30):

    31

    On the variation of indefinite determiners in the Italo-Romance dialects, especially in Central and Northern Italy, as well as in Standard Italian, see at least Giusti (2002, 2015), Cardinaletti and Giusti 2018, 2017, 2016, 2015a/b).

    136

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn (30) Grammaticalisation of ‘de’ as indefinite marker MSG Mass [DP [SPEC Indef de] [D’ [D llo cv] [NP [N’ [N pane]]]

    The proclitic ‘de’ would be a definite article, used to express an indefinite quantity. It is overt (realized in Medieval Neapolitan, (30)) but bare in Southern modern dialects [ll], as we show in section 4.1.

    4.1. The Procidano and Ischitano Articles Variants. Hardening and Rhoticisation of the Extended Bisyllabic /ll/ We illustrate in this section the system of determiners for three Southern varieties in the region of Naples (Russo’s fieldwork): Procida island, Monte di Procida and Ischia island. All of them are characterized by the extended articles, the bisyllabic UR C1V1C2V2, realized as a geminate in the prevocalic position, and modified by different phonological process. These varieties have the distinction shown for Neapolitan between the definite and indefinite articles, the indefinite feminine plural and singular MASS articles, which also trigger Raddoppiamento Sintattico. We point out immediately that in these investigated varieties we also detected in the prevocalic position a distinction between a definite MPL article (realized by the simple lateral with hardening [d ɖ ʝ]) as well as an undefinite MPL realized by the lateral geminate (with different hardening [dd ɖɖ ʝʝ ddʝ]), see Table 10:

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    137

    Table 10. Hardening of the (in)definite article V-initial [dd] instead of Neap. [ll] Procida SG PL PL

    M [d] [+DEF] d [-DEF] dd

    MASS [+DEF] [dd] -

    F [d] [+DEF] [dd]

    All these varieties have the lengthened phonological shape of the article. The three varieties show a different hardening of the lateral geminate (C1V1C2V2 > [dd ɖɖ ʝʝ dʝ..], which affects the (IN)DEF article as we can see in Tables 10, 11 and 12. Procida and Monte di Procida show hardening but also rhoticisation of the bisyllabic UR (after the hardening) due to the prosodic weak position of the determiners within the DP structure. As for the other varieties the definite article in prevocalic position is uninflected in terms of final vowel realization. We have hardening of the definite article in prevocalic position: (31) Uninflected (in)definite article in prevocalic position Hardening φ-features Procidano MSG [dˈd wossə] ‘l’osso/the bone’ FPL [dˈd ɔssəɾə] ‘le ossa/the bones’ MSG (MASS) [dˈd woʝʝə] ‘l’olio /the oil’ (32) Bisyllabic UR: stem /ila/ + V-initial Epicene indefinite plural [dˈd ɔssəɾə] ‘le ossa/the bones’ Latin OSSA + -ORA (a) /ila / = FPL

    (b)

    [dˈd ɔssəɾə] ’le ossa/the bones’

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    138

    In (32), the empty syllabic structure leads to gemination. Interestingly, rhoticisation only affects the determiners prosodically weak. Indeed, the MASS and the feminine indefinite plural in Procida have a form of a rhoticizated [d] > [rə], as you can see from the distribution of the articles in Table 11, which distinguishes the MSG MASS and the indefinite feminine plural extended articles: Table 11. (In)definite articles C-initial Procida SG PL

    M [u] [i]

    MSG MASS [rə] [+RS]

    F [a] [rə] [+RS]

    (33) ‘Bisyllabic’ MSG MASS and INDEF articles FPL Procidano Rhoticisation of the indefinite articles MSG [rə kˈke:sə] ‘an amount of cheese’ FPL [rə dˈdetəɾɐ] ‘le dita/the fingers’ (INDEF) The indefinite affix -ORA is cyclically added to the nominal as the higher head [rə dˈdetəɾɐ]. Thus, in Procida we have the hardening of the lateral geminate V-initial C1V1C2V2 >  [dd] before initial vowel, but rhoticisation (/ll/  [r]) affects the other two indefinite determiners before C-initial forms, as in (33). The rhoticisation of Latin intervocalic -LL- within the category of determiners is a sound change affecting also Gascon dialect of Occitan, which undergoes rhoticisation, after retroflexion of the Latin lateral geminate 32 . Related developments can be found in other regions of Southern Italy, Sardinia, and

    32

    See ALG 685 = Atlas Linguistique de la Gascogne. Séguy and Ravier (1954–1973).

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    139

    Corsica (see also section 3), as well as in other romance areas, in Upper Aragonese and Western Asturian. In the Mass and indefinite FPL articles (Table 11), it is the hardened lateral geminate /ll/  [dd] which undergoes rhoticisation. The different results of the lateral hardening (alveolar/retroflex/ palatal...geminate) and consequent rhoticisation (the flapping of the strong segment in the weak prosodic position of the Procidano determiners) 33 indicate that in these varieties the extended MASS and indefinite feminine plural articles derive from a realized geminate in the indefinite DPs. This suggests the presence of a bare partitive ([DEF] article ‘de’ in the SPEC DP, which is the same grammaticalized preposition-indefinite article sequences we have observed for Medieval Neapolitan (see (30) and Table 6). This allows the different forms of the phonological geminate to surface in this position as we have shown in the previous section for the indefinite articles in Medieval Neapolitan (see Russo 2021), see (34): (34) Grammaticalization of the (bare) preposition-indefinite article sequences [DP [SPEC Indef bare de] [D’ [D rə cv] [NP [N’ [N kˈkesə]]] SPEC Indef bare de

    (35) MSG MASS [rə kˈkesə] 33

    ‘an amount of cheese’

    We found the rhoticisation after hardening of the lateral geminate also in Monte di Procida within determiners.

    140

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn CV + [rə] MASS Rhoticisation of the lateral geminate /-ll-/ > MASS [rə] see /de + llo/ in Medieval Neapolitan

    Interestingly, in Procidano, the hardening of the lateral geminate in [dd] surfaces in lexical words where the lateral geminate does not undergo prosodic weakening (which gives rhoticisation) as it is the case in the indefinite DPs for determiners: (36) Hardening of -LL- [dd] in Procidano lexical (not functional) words Procidano Latin [kaˈpiddə] ‘capelli/the hair’ CAPILLI [aˈnjɛddə] ‘anello (and -i)/ring’ ANELLU [kaˈvɛddə] ‘cavallo (and -i)/ horse’ CABALLU We found rhoticisation of the lateral geminate in Procida not only in the extended form of the indefinite articles (MSG MASS and FPL), but in other prenominal determiners (as the demonstrative D°, Procidano [ˈki:rə]/ [ˈke:rə]), as well as in adjective used in prenominal position (e.g., Procidano [ˈbe:rɐ] ‘bello/beautiful’). All these forms undergo rhoticisation of the lexical geminate /ll/ (Lat. -LL-) in prenominal prosodic weak SpecDP position, see (37): (37) D° and Adj in SpecDP Procidano [ˈki:rə] ‘quello/that’ [ˈke:rə] ‘quella/that’ [ˈbe:rɐ] ‘bella/beutiful’

    Latin (EC)CU + ILLU (EC)CU + ILLA BELLA

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    141

    In the Procidano grammar, the indefinite articles have a C1V1C2V2 underlying two units. The process which rhoticizes the lateral geminate /ll/ to [r] is sensitive to a prosodic-syntactic DP-effect. The rhoticisation of the indefinite articles is a property which contributes to the complex values of indefiniteness inside the DP. This picture interestingly shows that there is an inherent length feature of the determiner’s C1V1C2V2 template in the Italian articles’ variation, which is modified in different places by different phonological and morphosyntactic processes. The C1V1C2V2 representation is relevant to identify indefiniteness in DP morpho-syntactic different environments. Furthermore, for the indefinite masculine singular MASS and indefinite feminine plural (C-initial) the complexity of the indefiniteness values also depends on the final [RSCV], which triggers Raddoppiamento Sintattico producing gemination of the following onset after the indefinite articles. Thus, this phonological property is also a morphosyntactic property, since the indefiniteness information is shared between the lateral geminate of the indefinite articles (Mass D° and indefinite FPL), and the doubling of the initial mass nominal onset of indefinite nouns, which is introduced by the indefinite article. In this way, the Raddoppiamento Sintattico contributes to the morphosyntactic agreement for indefiniteness inside the DP. Turning to Ischia (see Russo 2021), the hardening of the lateral geminate produces palatalization, which affects the prevocalic articles as well as lexical words (such as ANELLU (36)). Table 12. Hardening of the lateral geminate indefinite article D° V-initial [ʝʝ] instead of Neap. [ll] Ischia (Forìo) SG PL

    M ʝ [+DEF] ʝʝ

    MASS [+DEF] ʝʝ -

    F ʝ [+DEF] ʝʝ

    142

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn (38) Uninflected prevocalic article in Ischia - C1V1C2V2 (UR) Ischia (Forìo) [ʝʝ] V-Initial D° [ʝʝ] + N MPL INDEF [ʝˈʝ ɔmmə] ‘gli uomini/the men’ FPL INDEF [ʝˈʝ ɔssə] ‘le ossa/the bones’ MSG MASS [ʝˈʝ woʝʝ] ‘l’olio/the oil’

    This dialect gives also additionally hints to see how the variation can be reduced to the single UR C1V1CV2 to represent the lateral geminate. As we have seen for Medieval Neapolitan/da + lla/ ILLAC in Table 9 and (29), we have in Ischia the initial lateral geminate/-LL-/ (palatalized [ʝˈʝ]) from the Latin ILLORUM, ILLAC and *ILLOCO, see (39): (39) Initial lateral geminate UR C1V1CV2 Pronoun Latin [ʝˈʝorə] ‘loro/their’ ILLORUM Locative Adv [ʝˈʝɑ f ˈforə] ‘là fuori/there outside’ ILLAC [cvRS] [ʝˈʝokə] ‘là/there ‘ *ILLOCO (40) Ischia (Forìo): Locative Adv [ʝˈʝα] as Medieval Neapolitan < lla> ILLAC [ʝˈʝα]

    Latin ILLAC [ʝˈʝα]

    C1V1C2V2 Clearly the form [ʝˈʝα] contains the first C1V1. This fact supports our hypothesis of a single lexical representation also for the lateral geminate of the article. Crucially, the underlying form is composed of two CV units (bisyllabic): C1V1C2V2. The variation between (in)definite Italo-Romance articles is not an allomorphy because all determiners share a common underlying form that varies in shape according to phonological and morphosyntactic conditions.

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    143

    CONCLUSION We have proposed that the UR for definite articles is composed of two CV units, C1V1C2V2 in Medieval Italian, as well as in Medieval and Modern dialects. Definiteness is marked by a floating vowel under V 1 and a floating /l/ sits under C2, while V2 expones φ-features. This UR allowed us to explain the ‘unexpected’ gemination in a variety of Medieval and modern dialects (Tuscan, Padovano, Neapolitan…). Our major claim is that this underlying form and its morphosyntactic exponents have remained largely unchanged (in terms of skeletal structure) since the Medieval period and that the only significant important changes have been to the phonological and morphosyntactic processes that affect its surface realisation. All the systems we have shown are syncronically derivable from this bisyllabic (C1V1C2V2) UR, without the need for phonologically allomorphy. We have seen in section 3 that overt reflexes of the full bisyllabic article are attested in some Medieval Italian areas (as in Medieval Padovano or Medieval Salentino and in the Medieval bisyllabic Northern palatalized form ). Moreover, the Tuscan, Central and Southern Italian dialects with ‘allomorphic’ prevocalic geminated forms [all-/ell-/ill-/ll] (section 2) are a synchronic reflex of what it is already registered in the medieval bisyllabic forms, the C1V1C2V2 UR. In section 4 we explained the Southern Italian dialects extended (in)definite articles, where the same underlaying UR C1V1C2V2 show the realisation of the lateral geminate with the two CV units especially in indefinite articles (often producing an initial geminate [ll] V-initial in indefinite DPs). We have shown that in Southern Italian indefiniteness is marked by a definite bare marker ‘de’, in SpecDP within a layered DP structure (spelled out as ‘de’ only in the Medieval period as part of the indefinite article in prepositions-articles sequences). This bare marker precedes the masculine singular MASS and the indefinite feminine plural articles. It acts as a licensor for the realized lateral geminate as part of the two indefinite articles

    144

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    in the indefinite morphosyntactic environments. In Southern modern varieties the hint of the indefinite bare marker ‘de’ is given by the lateral gemination (and its different hardenings) in V-initial position within indefinite DPs. In C-initial position the φ-features of the indefinite articles are transferred to the initial consonant of the following indefinite nouns via the Raddoppiamento Sintattico triggered by the MASS and indefinite feminine plural markers. An interesting hint for the lateral geminate realized from the same bisyllabic UR in the indefinite DPs is given by the rhoticisation of the lateral geminate after hardening in some Southern varieties (section 4). In Medieval Italian and the modern dialects shown above (section 2 and 3), the preference is for the maintaining of the second C2V2 of the article, which results in the gemination of the [ll] and in many dialects, subsequent hardening of /ll/. In Southern Italian dialects the preference is for the maintaining of the first C1V2 of the indefinite articles C-initial (section 4). Crucially, in all our cases, the variation in shape of the allomorphs is caused by the phonology and morphosyntax (especially for indefiniteness) of the language always interacting with a single UR. The surface variation is merely the effect of the micro-parametric differences in the phonological and morphosyntactic processes that interpret this UR according to its phonological and morphological context. Because, according to our analysis, most of the forms can be derived from a single UR, it seems that variation in the phonological shape of the (in)definite articles is not produced by allomorphy. Italo-Romance determiners look to be consistently generated by a phonologically and morphosyntactic unified analysis, from a single underlying form. This does not preclude phonologically conditioned allomorphy elsewhere, however, it does remove Italian, including diachronic varieties and many dialects from the data sample of phonologically and morphosyntactically conditioned (selective) allomorphy.

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    145

    REFERENCES Acquaviva, Paolo, & Michael Daniel. (edited by). To appear. Number in the world’s languages, Berlin: De Gruyter. Acquaviva, Paolo. (2008). Lexical plurals. A morphosemantic approach. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Agostiniani, Luciano. (1980). “Sull’articolo determinativo prevocalico e le preposizioni articolate nelle varietà toscane.” Archivio glottologico italiano, 65, 74–100. [“On the definite prevocalic article and the prepositions + articles sequences in the Tuscan varieties.” Italian glottological archive]. AIS = Jaberg, Karl and Jud, Jacob, Sprach- und Sachatlas Italiens und der Sudschweiz, Zofingen, Ringier, 1928–1940. NavigAIS Online: http://www3.pd.istc.cnr.it/navigais-web/. [Linguistic atlas of Italy and southern Switzerland]. ALG = Séguy, Jean. (1954–1973). Atlas linguistique et ethnographique de la Gascogne, 6 vol. Paris: Éditions du CNRS. [Linguistic and ethnographic atlas of Gascony]. Ascoli, Graziaddio Isaia. (1873). “Saggi ladini.” Archivio glottologico italiano, 1, 537–429. [“Ladin essays.” Italian glottological archive]. Baker, Mark. (2008). The syntax of agreement and concord. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Baker, Mark. (1985). “The Mirror Principle and Morphosyntactic Explanation.” Linguistic Inquiry, 16, 373–415. Bafile, Laura. (2008). “Alcune osservazioni sull’allomorfia dell’articolo determinativo e del proclitico oggetto nel dialetto napoletano.” Annali Online di Ferrara, 1.1–13. [“Some observations on the allomorphy of the definite article and of the proclitic object in the Neapolitan dialect.” Online Annals of Ferrara]. Baroni, Antonio. (2011ms). Italian article allomorphy and the treatment of initial glides. Paper presented at the University of Padova, Departmental Seminar, 10 November. Accessed March 2021. Béjar, Susana, & Milan Rezac. (2009). “Cyclic Agree.” Linguistic Inquiry, 40, 35–73.

    146

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    Benincà, Paola, & Laura Vanelli. (edited by). (1998). Esercizi di versione dal friulano in latino in una scuola notarile cividalese (sec. XIV). Testo, traduzione italiana, commento linguistico. Udine: Forum. Bianco, Emilio. (1981). “Gli sviluppi di LL in Calabria.” In La ricerca dialettale III, edited by Manlio Cortelazzo, 121–137. Pisa: Pacini. [“The developments of LL in Calabria.” In The dialectal research]. Bonet, Eulàlia, Maria-Rosa Lloret, & Joan Mascaró. (2007). “Allomorph selection and lexical preference: Two case studies.” Lingua, 117.9, 903– 927. Borer, Hagit. (2005). Structuring Sense, Vol. 1, In name only. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Cardinaletti, Anna, & Giuliana Giusti. (2018). “Indefinite Determiners: Variation and Optionality in Italo-Romance”. In Advances in Italian Dialectology, edited by Roberta D’Alessandro and Diego Pescarini, 135–161. (Grammars and Language Sketches of the World’s Languages). Leiden: Brill. Cardinaletti, Anna, & Giuliana Giusti. (2017). “The Syntax of Quantified Phrases and Quantitative Clitics.” In The Blackwell Companion to Syntax, edited by Martin Everaert and Henk van Riemsdijk, vol. 5, 23– 94. Oxford: Blackwell. Cardinaletti, Anna, & Giuliana Giusti. (2016). “The syntax of the Italian determiner dei.” Lingua, 181, 58–80. Cardinaletti, Anna, & Giuliana Giusti. (2015a). “Cartography and Optional Feature Realization in the Nominal Expression.” In Beyond Functional Sequence. The Cartography of Syntactic Structures, edited by Ur Shlonsky. 151–172. Oxford UK/New York: Oxford University Press. Cardinaletti, Anna, & Giuliana Giusti. (2015b). “Il determinante indefinito: analisi sintattica e variazione diatopica.” In Carla Bruno, Simone Casini, Francesca Gallina and Raymond Siebetcheu edited by, Plurilinguismo / Sintassi, Atti del XLVI Congresso internazionale SLI, vol. 59, 451–466. Roma, Bulzoni. [“The indefinite determinant: syntactic analysis and diatopic variation.” In Carla Bruno, Simone Casini, Francesca Gallina and Raymond Siebetcheu edited by, Plurilinguismo / Syntax, Proceedings of the XLVI International Congress].

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    147

    Cardinaletti, Anna, & Lori Repetti. (2007). “Vocali epentetiche nella morfologia dell’italiano e dei dialetti italiani.” In Miscellanea di studi linguistici offerti a Laura Vanelli da amici e allievi padovani, edited by Roberta Maschi, Nicoletta Penello, and Piera Rizzolatti, 115–126. Forum Udine: Editrice [“Epenthetic vowels in the morphology of Italian and Italian dialects”]. Castellani, Arrigo. (1965/1980). “Sulla formazione del tipo fonetico italiano. Fenomeni consonantici. Il Raddoppiamento delle consonanti diverse da ‘r’, ‘s’ davanti a j.” Studi Linguistici Italiani, 5, 88–96. In: Castellani 1980/l, 95–103. [“On the formation of the Italian phonetic type. Consonantal phenomena. The doubling of consonants other than ‘r’, ‘s’ in front of j.” Italian Linguistic Studies]. Castellani, Arrigo. (1980). Saggi di linguistica e filologia italiana e romanza (1946–1976). Roma: Salerno. [Essays on Italian and Romance linguistics and philology (1946-1976)]. Castellani, Arrigo. (2000). Grammatica storica della lingua italiana. I. Introduzione, Bologna, Il Mulino. [Historical grammar of the Italian language. I. Introduction]. Cavirani, Edoardo. (2018). “The Distribution of Gender and Number in Lunigiana Nominal Expressions.” In Advances in Italian Dialectology, edited by Roberta D’Alessandro and Diego Pescarini, 13–51. (Grammars and Language Sketches of the World’s Languages). Leiden: Brill. Charette, Monik. (1991). Conditions on phonological government. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Chierchia, Gennaro. (1986). “Length, syllabification and the phonological cycle in Italian.” Journal of Italian Linguistics, 8, 5–34. Chomsky, Noam. (2001). “Derivation by phase.” In Ken Hale: A life in language, edited by Michael Kenstowicz, 1–52. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Cinque, Guglielmo. (1997). “Quantifiers.” In The dialects of Italy, edited by Martin Maiden and Mair Parry, 186–189. London: Routledge. Davis, Stuart. (1990). “Italian onset structure and the distribution of il and lo.” Linguistics, 28, 43–55.

    148

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    D’Achille, Paolo. (2016a). “Architettura dell’italiano di oggi e linee di tendenza.” In Manuale di linguistica italiana, edited by Sergio Lubello, 165–189. Berlin: De Gruyter. [“Architecture of today’s Italian and trend lines.” In Handbook of Italian Linguistics]. D’Achille, Paolo. (2016b). Lo, gli, li, loro: un sistema pronominale non facile da usare. Website of the Accademia della Crusca. https://accademiadellacrusca.it/it/consulenza/lo-gli-li-loro-un-sistemapronominale-non-facile-da-usare/1045. Accessed April 27, 2021. [Lo, gli, li, them: a pronoun system not easy to use]. D’Alessandro, Roberta, & Tobias Scheer. (2015). “Modular PIC.” Linguistic Inquiry, 46/4, 593–624. De Blasi, Nicola, & Franco Fanciullo. (2002). “La Campania.” In I dialetti italiani: storia, struttura, uso, edited by Michele Cortelazzo, Carla Marcato, Nicola De Blasi, Michele Cortelazzo, Carla Marcato, Nicola De Blasi, Gianlorenzo P. Clivio, 628–678. Torino: UTET. [“The Campania.” In Italian dialects: history, structure, use] Delfitto, Denis, & Jan Schroten. (1991). “Bare Plurals and the Number Affix in DP.” Probus, 3.2, 155–185. Del Gobbo, Francesca. (2001). “An OT account of the distribution of articles in Italian.” In Proceedings of the fifth South Western Optimality Theory workshop, edited by Wind Cowles, Linda Godson, Andy Hickl, Alicia Munoz, Paola Nieddu, Todd O’Bryan, and Heidi Tonomura, 1–18. La Jolla: Department of Linguistics, University of California, San Diego. Dressler Wolfgang U. (1985). “On the definite Austrian and Italian articles.” In Phono-morphology. Studies in the Interaction of Phonology and Morphology, edited by Edmund Gussmann, 35–48. Lublin: Catholic University of Lublin. Embick, David, & Noyer, Rolf. (2001). “Movement Operations after Syntax.” Linguistic inquiry, 32(4), 555–595. Fanciullo, Franco. (1997). Raddoppiamento Sintattico e ricostruzione linguistica nel Sud italiano. Pisa, Edizioni ETS. [Syntactic doubling and linguistic reconstruction in Southern Italy].

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    149

    Faust, Noam, Ulfsbjorninn, Shanti, & Lampitelli, Nicola. (2018). “Articles of Italian Unite: Explaining the shapes of Italian definite articles without allomorphy.” Canadian Journal of Linguistics, 63.3, 1–27. Formentin, Vittorio. (1996). “Alcune considerazioni e un’ipotesi sull’articolo determinativo in area italo-romanza.” In Studi offerti a Luigi Blasucci, edited by Lucio Lugnani, Marco Santagata, and Alfredo Stussi, 257–272. Lucca: Pacini Fazzi. [“Some considerations and a hypothesis on the definite article in the Italo-Romance area.” In Studies offered to Luigi Blasucci]. Formentin, Vittorio. (2002). “Antico padovano ‘gi’ da ‘illi’: condizioni italo-romanze di una forma veneta.” Lingua e Stile, 37, 3–28. [“Ancient Paduan ‘gi’ already from ‘illi’: Italo-Romance conditions on a Venetian form.” Language and Style]. Formentin, Vittorio. (1994). “Dei continuatori del latino ‘ille’ in antico napoletano.” Studi linguistici italiani, 20, 40–93 and 196–233. [“On the continuers of the Latin ‘ille’ in ancient Neapolitan.” Italian language studies]. Formentin, Vittorio. (2010). s.v. Grammatica Storica. http:// www.treccani.it/enciclopedia/grammatica-storica_%28Enciclopediadell%27Italiano%29/. Accessed April 27, 2021 [Historical Grammar]. Franco, Ludovico, Rita, Manzini, & Leonardo Savoia. (2015). N Class and its Interpretation: The Neuter in Central Italian Varieties and its Implications. Isogloss, Special Issue, 41–68. Giannini, Stefania, & Giovanna Marotta. (1989). Fra grammatica e pragmatica: la geminazione consonantica in Latino. Pisa: Giardini. [Between grammar and pragmatics: consonantal gemination in Latin.] Giusti, Giuliana. (2015). Nominal Syntax at the Interfaces. A Comparative Analysis of Languages with Articles. Newcastle upon Tyne: Cambridge Scholars Publishing. Giusti, Giuliana. (2002). “The functional structure of determiners. A bare phrase structure approach.” In Functional Structure in DP and IP. The Cartography of Syntactic Structures, edited by Guglielmo Cinque, 54– 90. Oxford-New York, Oxford University Press.

    150

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    Gröber, Gustav. (1877). “Lo, li – il, i im Altitalienischen.” Zeitschrift für romanische Philologie, 1.1, 108–110. [“Lo, li - il, i in old Italian.” Journal of Romance Philology]. Guerssel, Mohand, & Jean Lowenstamm. (1996). “Ablaut in Classical Arabic Measure I Active Verbal Forms.” In Studies in Afroasiatic Grammar, edited by Jacqueline Lecarme, Jean Lowenstamm and Ur Shlonsky, 123–134. The Hague: Holland Academic Graphics. Halle, Morris, & Alec Marantz. (1993). “Distributed morphology and the pieces of inflection.” In The view from Building, 20, edited by Kenneth Hale, and Samuel J. Keyser, 111-176. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Harris, John. (1994). English sound structure. Oxford: Blackwell. Ineichen, Gustav. (1957). “Die paduanische Mundart am Ende des 14. Jahrhunderts auf Grund des Erbario Carrarese.” Zeitschrift für romanische Philologie, 73, 38–123. [“The Paduan dialect at the end of the 14th century based on Erbario Carrarese.” Journal of Romance Philology]. Jones, Mark J. (2004). “The origin of retroflex plosives in Italian, Sardinian, and Corsican dialects.” Cambridge Occasional Papers in Linguistics, 1, 147–156. Kaye, Jonathan. (1992). “Do you believe in magic? The story of s+C sequences.” SOAS working papers in linguistics and phonetics, 2, 293– 313. Reprinted in A Festschrift for Edmund Gussmann, edited by Henry Kardela and Bogdan Szymanek, 155–176. Lublin 1996: Lublin University Press. Kaye, Jonathan, Jean Lowenstamm, & Jean-Roger Vergnaud. (1990). “Constituent structure and government in phonology.” Phonology, 7, 193–231. Kaye, Jonathan, Jean Lowenstamm, & Jean-Roger Vergnaud. (1985). “The internal structure of phonological elements: a theory of Charm and Government.” Phonology Yearbook, 2, 305–328. Krämer, Martin. (2009). The phonology of Italian. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Larsen, Bergeton Uffe. (1998). “Vowel length, Raddoppiamento Sintattico and the selection of the definite article in Italian.” In Langues et

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    151

    Grammaire II-III, Phonologie, edited by Patrick Sauzet, 87–102. University of Vincennes-Saint-Denis. Paris. [Languages and Grammar II-III, Phonology] Lausberg, Heinrich. (1967). Romanische Sprachwissenschaft. II. Konsonantismus. 2nd edition. Berlin: De Gruyter. [Romance Linguistics. II. Consonants.]. Loporcaro, Michele. (2001). “Geminate intrinseche si diventa. Ovvero, come fu che il fonema /ʃ(ʃ)/ uscì dalla correlazione di geminazione.” In Italica – Raetica – Gallica. Studia linguarum litterarum artiumque in honorem Ricarda Liver, edited by Peter Wunderli, Iwar Werlen, and Matthias Grünert., 143–149. Tübingen and Basel: Francke. [“The development of inherent geminates. That is, how did the phoneme / ʃ (ʃ) / come out of geminates correlation.” In Italian - Rhætian - French. The study of literature and the arts to honor Ricardo Lung]. Lowenstamm, Jean. (2008). “On little n, roots, and types of nouns.” In Sounds of silence: Empty elements in syntax and phonology, edited by Jutta H. Hartmann, Henk van Reimsdijk and Veronika Hegedus, 105– 144. Amsterdam: Elsevier. Lowenstamm, Jean. (2000). “The image of a segment.” In Naturally! Linguistic studies in honour of Wolfgang Ulrich Dressler presented on the occasion of his 60th birthday, edited by Chris Schaner-Wolles, John Rennison, and Friedrich Neubarth, 281–290. Torino: Rosenberg and Sellier. Lowenstamm, Jean. (1999). “The beginning of the word.” In Phonologica 1996, edited by John Rennison and Klaus Kühnhammer, 153–166. La Hague: Holland Academic Graphics. Web. Lowenstamm, Jean. (1996). “CV as the only syllable type.” In Current trends in phonology models and methods, edited by Jacques Durand and Bernard Laks, 419–442. Salford: European Studies Research Institute. Marantz, Alec. (1997). “No escape from syntax: Don’t try morphological analysis in the privacy of your own lexicon.” University of Pennsylvania Working Papers in Linguistics, 4, 201–25. Marantz, Alec. (2007). “Phases and words.” In Phases in the theory of grammar, edited by Sook-Hee Choe, 191–222. Seoul: Dong In.

    152

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    Marotta, Giovanna. (1993). “Selezione dell’articolo e sillaba in italiano: un’interazione totale?” Studi di Grammatica Italiana, 15, 255–296. [“The selection of the article and the syllable in Italian: a total interaction?” Italian Grammar Studies]. Marotta, Giovanna. (1988). “The Italian diphthongs and the autosegmental framework.” In Certamen Phonologicum I, edited by Pier Marco Bertinetto and Michele Loporcaro, 399–420. Torino, Rosemberg & Sellier. McCrary, Kristie Marie. (2004). Reassessing the role of the syllable in Italian phonology: An experimental study of consonant cluster syllabification, definite article allomorphy and segment duration. Doctoral dissertation, University of California, Los Angeles. Merlo, Clemente. (1906). “Dei continuatori del latino ille in alcuni dialetti dell’Italia centro-meridionale.” Zeitschrift für romanische Philologie, 30, 11–25 and 438–454. [“On the continuers of the Latin ille in some dialects of central and southern Italy.” Journal of Romance Philology]. Meyer-Lübke, Wilhelm. (1934). Die Schicksale des lateinischen l im Romanischen. Berichte über die Verhandlungen der Sächsischen Akademieder Wissenschaften zu Leipzig. Philologisch-historische Klasse, 86, 2, S. Hirzel. [The fates of the Latin l in Romance]. Muljačić, Žarko. (1974). “Ancora sulla forma dell’articolo determinativo italiano.” Italica, 51.1, 68–71. [“Again on the form of the Italian definite article.” Italica]. Muljačić, Žarko. (1969). Fonologia generale e fonologia della lingua italiana. Bologna: Il Mulino. [General phonology and the phonology of the Italian language]. Muljaćič, Žarko. (1971). “Gli allofoni /il/, /lo/ e /l/ e la fonologia jakobsoniana.” Lingua Nostra, 32, 82–84. [“Allophones / il /, / lo / and /l/ and the Jakobsonian phonology” Our language]. Mussafia, Adolfo. (1873). “Zur Katharinenlegende.” Sitzungsberichte der Philosophisch-Historischen Classe der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, LXXV, 227–302. [“On the Catherine legend.” Session reports of the Philosophical-Historical Class of the Imperial Academy of Sciences].

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    153

    Nespor, Marina. (1993). Fonologia. Bologna: Il Mulino. [Phonology]. Nevins, Andrew. (2011). Phonologically conditioned allomorph selection. In The Blackwell companion to phonology, edited by Marc van Oostendorp, Colin J. Ewen, Elizabeth Hume, and Keren Rice, vol 4, 2357–2382. Malden: Wiley-Blackwell. Nikiema, Emmanuel. (2000). “Teaching and Learning Italian Grammar: The Case of the Distribution of /il/ and /lo/.” Italica, 77.4, 535–557. Paster, Mary. (2017). “Alternations: Stems and allomorphy.” In The Cambridge Handbook of Morphology, edited by Andrew Hippisley and Gregory T. Stump, 93–116. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Paster, Mary. (2015). “Phonologically conditioned suppletive allomorphy: Cross-linguistic resultsand theoretical consequences.” In Understanding Allomorphy: Perspectives from OT. Advances in Optimality Theory series, edited by Eulàlia Bonet, Maria-Rosa Lloret, and Joan Mascaró, 218–253. London: Equinox. Paster, Mary. (2014). “Allomorphy.” In The Oxford handbook of derivational morphology, edited by Rochelle Lieber and Pavol Štekauer, 219–234. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Paster, Mary. (2005). “Subcategorization vs. output optimization in syllablecounting allomorphy.” In Proceedings of the 24th West Coast Conference on Formal Linguistics. Somerville, edited by John Alderete, Chung-Hye Han, and Alexei Kochetov, 326–333. MA: Cascadilla Proceedings Project. Patota, Giuseppe. (2002). Lineamenti di grammatica storica dell’italiano. Bologna: Il Mulino. [Outlines of the historical grammar of Italian.] Renzi, Lorenzo. (1997). “The structure of the noun phrase.” In The dialects of Italy, edited by Martin Maiden and Mair Parry, 162–170. London: Routledge. Renzi, Lorenzo, & Laura Vanelli. (1993). “Storia e struttura dell’articolo italiano il.” In Actes du XXe Congrès International de Linguistique et Philologie Romanes, vol. III.IV: Typologie des langues romanes edited by Gerold Hilty (University of Zurich, 6-11th April 1992). 291–305. Basel-Tübingen: Francke. [“The history and structure of the Italian article il.” In Proceedings of the XXth International Congress of

    154

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    Romance Linguistics and Philology, vol. III.IV: Typology of Romance languages]. Repetti, Lori. (2020). “The masculine singular definite article in Italian: The role of the syllable.” Italian Journal of Linguistics, 32.2, 209–232. Repetti, Lori. (1991). “A Moraic analysis of Raddoppiamento Fonosintattico.” Rivista di Linguistica, 3, 307–330. [Journal of Linguistics]. Rohlfs, Gerhard (1966–1969). Grammatica storica della lingua italiana e dei suoi dialetti. Torino: Einaudi, 3 voll. [Historical grammar of the Italian language and its dialects]. Romeo, Luigi. (1969). “Notes on the Morpho-Syntax of the Italian Article.” Lingua, 23, 135–143. Romito, Luciano, & Paola Antonietta Scuticchio. (2009). “La retroflessione in alcuni centri della provincia di Catanzaro: verso una mappa regionale.” in La fonetica Sperimentale - Metodo e Applicazioni, Atti del 4°Convegno AISV, Cosenza – University of Calabria, edited by Luciano Romito, Rosita Lio and Vincenzo Galatà, 3-5 December 2007, Vol. 4, 412–422. Torriana: EDK Editore. [Retroflexed consonants in some localities of the province of Catanzaro: towards a regional map.” in Experimental phonetics - Method and Applications, Proceedings of the 4th AISV Conference, Cosenza - University of Calabria]. Romito, Luciano, & Rossella Milelli. (1999). “Analisi elettroacustica degli esiti di -LL- in alcuni dialetti della Calabria.” Quaderni del Dipartimento di Linguistica dell’Università della Calabria. Serie Linguistica, 716, 11–26. [“Electroacoustic analysis of the outcomes of LL- in some dialects of Calabria.” Notebooks of the Department of Linguistics of the University of Calabria. Linguistic Series]. Ruffino, Giovanni. (1997). “Sicily.” In The Dialects of Italy, edited by Martin Maiden and Mair Parry, 365–375. London: Routledge. Russi, Cinzia. (2006). “A usage-based analysis of the allomorphy of the Italian masculine definite article.” Studies in Language, 30.3, 575–598. Russi, Cinzia. (2008). Italian clitics. An empirical study. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    155

    Russo, Michela. (2021). “Prosodie et Raddoppiamento Sintattico dans les séquences à (double) enclise dans les dialectes italiens.” L’Italia Dialettale, Vol. LXXXII, 179–224. [“Prosody and Raddoppiamento Sintattico in (double) enclose sequences in Italian dialects.” Dialectal Italy]. Russo, Michela. (2019a). “A morphophonological account of Mass/Count distinction from Latin to Romance.” Poster presented at the ESHP4: The Fourth Edinburgh Symposium on Historical Phonology (Edinburgh 9th and 10th December 2019). Russo, Michela. (2019b). “Clusters and complex onsets in Romagnolo. A cross-linguistic syllabification algorithm?” Poster presentation at PaPE 2019 (3rd Phonetics and Phonology in Europe conference), 17–19 June, Lecce, U. Salento. Russo, Michela. (2013). “Il Raddoppiamento Sintattico dell’italiano. Tratti prosodici e struttura fonologica.” In Sudies in phonetics, phonology and sound change in Romance, edited by Fernando Sanchez Miret and Daniel Recasens (eds.), 145–178. LINCOM Europa Studies (Phonetics series). [The Syntactic Doubling of Italian. Prosodic features and phonological structure]. Russo, Michela. (2009). “Le origini del femminile plurale italoromanzo e la rideterminazione del neutro: osservazioni in margine alle carte medievali pugliesi.” Vox Romanica, 68, 23–44. [“The origins of the Italo-Romance feminine plural and the redetermination of the neuter: marginal remarks on the medieval Apulian archival documents.” Vox Romanica]. Russo, Michela. (2007). La metafonia napoletana: evoluzione e funzionamento sincronico. Bern: Peter Lang. [The Neapolitan metaphony: evolution and synchronic functioning]. Russo, Michela. (2002). “I dittonghi del puteolano e la fonologia nonlineare.” Bollettino Linguistico Campano, 1, 275–303. [“Puteolan diphthongs and non-linear phonology.” Campanian Linguistic Bulletin]. Russo, Michela, & Shanti Ulfsbjorninn. (2018). “Accounting for the Definite Articles in Old Italian and Modern Dialects. No allomorphy – a commun UR”. Conference presented at OCP2015 Old World

    156

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    Conference on Phonology Conference, UCL London: 12–14 January 2018, United Kingdom. Russo, Michela, & William John Barry. (2004). “Consonant lenition and strengthening in Italian dialect: Lambdacism and Rhotacism, Phonological Contrast and Production.” Bollettino dell’Atlante Linguistico Italiano, III.28, 17–24. [Bulletin of the Italian Linguistic Atlas]. Russo, Michela, & William John Barry. (2003). “Lambdacismo e rotacismo nelle varietà di Ischia e Pozzuoli (Naples): analisi acustico-uditiva delle varianti lenizzate dell’occlusiva sonora.” In Voce, canto, parlato, Studi in onore di Franco Ferrero, edited by Piero Cosi, Emanuela Magno Caldognetto and Alberto Zamboni, 37–42. Padova: Unipress. [“Lambdacism and rhotacism in the varieties of Ischia and Pozzuoli (Naples): acoustic-auditory analysis of the weak variants of the voiced occlusives.” In Voice, singing, speaking, Studies in honor of Franco Ferrero]. Russo, Michela, & William John Barry. (2002). “Lambdacismo e rotacismo in area napoletana: realizzazione fonetica e posizione fonologica.” In Atti del 29° Convegno dell’Associazione di acustica, Ferrara, edited by Roberto Pompoli, Eleonora Carletti, Patrizio Fausti, Francesca Pedrielli, Alessandro Peretti, Francesco Pompoli, Nicola Prodi, 12-14 June 2002, 377–382. Ferrara: Istituto Cemoter, CNR. [“Lambdacism and rhotacism in the Neapolitan area: phonetic realization and phonological position.” In Proceedings of the 29th Conference of the Acoustics Association]. Samuels, Bridget. (2012). “Consequences of phases for morphophonology.” In Phases: Developing the Framework, edited by Ángel J. Gallego, 251– 282. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Scheer, Tobias, & Philippe Ségéral. (2020). “Elastic s+C and Left-moving Yod in the Evolution from Latin to French.” Probus, 32.2, 183–208. Scheer, Tobias. (2011). A Guide to Morphosyntax-Phonology Interface Theories. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Scheer, Tobias. (2004). A lateral theory of phonology., Vol 1, What is CVCV, and why should it be? Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.

    Accounting for the Definite Articles in Medieval Italian …

    157

    Scheer, Tobias. (2015). Précis de structure syllabique. Lyon: Éditions ENS. [Precise syllabic structure]. Schmid, Stephan. (1999). Fonetica e fonologia dell’italiano. Torino: Paravia. [Phonetics and phonology of Italian]. Selkirk, Elisabeth. (1982). “The syllable.” In The structure of phonological representations, Harry van der Hulst and Norval Smith edited by, 337– 384. Dordrecht: Foris. Serianni, Luca. (1998). Lezioni di grammatica storica. Roma: Bulzoni. [Historical grammar lessons]. Serianni, Luca. (1989). Grammatica italiana. Torino: UTET. [Italian grammar]. Stammerjohann, Harro. (1973). “Phonologie des italienischen Artikels.” Italica, 50, 66–72. [“Phonology of the Italian Articles”]. Stussi, Alfredo. (1995). Venezien/Veneto. In Lexikon der Romanistischen Linguistik (LRL), edited by Günter Holtus, Michael Metzeltin, Christian Schmitt., II/2. 124–134. Tübingen: Niemeyer. [Lexicon of Romance Linguistics (LRL)]. Tekavčić, Pavao. (1980). Grammatica storica dell’italiano., vol. 1, Fonematica. Bologna: Il Mulino. [Historical grammar of Italian]. Torcolacci, Giuseppe. (2014). “Il raddoppiamento fonosintattico e la codifica di tratti morfosintattici. Il caso dei dialetti meridionali.” In Approcci diversi alla dialettologia italiana contemporanea, edited by Roberta D’Alessandro, Claudio Di Felice, Irene Franco and Adam Ledgeway. L’Italia dialettale, 75, 247-271. “Phonosyntactic doubling and the interpretation of morphosyntactic features. The case of southern dialects.” In Different approaches to contemporary Italian dialectology]. TLIO = Tesoro della Lingua Italiana delle Origini. Firenze: Istituto CNR Opera del Vocabolario Italiano (OVI) http://tlio.ovi.cnr.it/TLIO/. [TLIO = Treasure of the Italian Language of Origins]. Ulfsbjorninn, Shanti. (2020). “Segment–zero alternations in Galician definite article allomorphy Floating consonants at the left-edge of morphemes.” Acta Linguistica Academica, 67.1, 155–170.

    158

    Michela Russo and Shanti Ulfsbjorninn

    Ulfsbjorninn, Shanti. (2017). “Bogus clusters and lenition in Tuscan Italian.” In: Sonic Signatures, edited by Geoff Lindsey and Andrew Nevins, vol. 14, 278–296. Amsterdam: John Benjamins Publishing Company. Vanelli, Laura. (1998). “Da li a i: storia dell’articolo definito maschile plurale in italiano e nei dialetti settentrionali.” In I dialetti italiani settentrionali nel panorama romanzo. Studi di sintassi e morfologia edited by Laura Vanelli, 215–244. Roma: Bulzoni. [“From li to i: history of the definite articles as masculine plural in Italian and in the northern dialects.” In The Northern Italian Dialects in the Romance Landscape. Syntax and morphology studies]. Vanelli, Laura. (1992). “Da lo a il : storia dell’articolo maschile singolare nell’italiano e nei dialetti settentrionali.” Rivista italiana di dialettologia, 16, 29–66. [“From lo to il: history of the singular masculine article in Italian and northern dialects.” Italian journal of dialectology]. Wagner, Max L. (1941). Historische Lautlehre des Sardischen. Halle/Saale: Max Niemeyer. [Historical Phonology of Sardinian]. Zamboni, Alberto. (1976). “Alcune osservazioni sull’evoluzione delle geminate romanze”. In Studi di fonetica e fonologia (SLI = Società Linguistica Italiana 9), edited by Simone, Raffaele, Ugo Vignuzzi and Giulianella Ruggiero, 325–336. Roma: Bulzoni. [“Some observations on the evolution of the Romance geminates”. In Phonetics and Phonology Studies]. Zamparelli, Roberto. (2008). “Dei ex-machina: a note on plural/mass indefinite determiners.” Studia Linguistica, 63, 301–327. Zimmermann, Eva. (2017). Morphological Length and Prosodically Defective Morphemes. Oxford. Oxford University Press. Zoll, Cheryl. (2003). Directionless Syllabification and Ghosts in Yawelmani. ROW-1, Rutgers University talk Transcript, 10/23/2003. Accessed Mai 2021.

    In: The Emergence of Grammars Editor: Michela Russo

    ISBN: 978-1-53619-888-1 © 2021 Nova Science Publishers, Inc.

    Chapter 5

    EMERGENCE OF MALTESE MORPHO-PHONOLOGICAL PROFILES Gilbert Puech* University of Lyon, France

    ABSTRACT Arabic was introduced on the tiny islands of Malta and Gozo, close to Sicily, in the High Middle Ages. The particular dialect which took roots presents typical features of Maghrebi Arabic. On the other hand, syllabic structure and stress assignment have the same profile as in some nondifferential Levantine dialects. Be that as it may, Maltese was cut off from Arabic and Islamic culture after the 13th century and fell into the sphere of European cultures and languages (Romance Sicilian, Italian, and English in modern times). During the Millenium, phonological and lexical innovations altered the morpho-phonological and morpho-lexical profile of Maltese. The present linguistic study is focused on two central aspects of Maltese (morpho-)phonology: syllabic structure and stress, and loss of ‘back’ consonants. All stems satisfy a constraint of Trochaic Minimality. Mono- or bisyllabic templatic stems comply with constraints on their syllabic structure from which non-templatic stems are exempt. Emphatic consonants of Arabic Maltese were lost in the late Middle Ages; guttural *

    Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected].

    160

    Gilbert Puech consonants have been progressively lost in modern times. The theoretical framework is structured by two UG principles: the Obligatory Contour Principle, and the Control under Contiguity, with coindexation of empty positions.

    Keywords: Arabic heritage, templatic vs. non-templatic stems, syllabic structure and stress, obligatory contour principle, control under contiguity, loss of emphatic and guttural consonants

    ABBREVIATIONS 1 2m 2f 3m 3f sg pl UG SPE OCP CCy

    1st person 2nd person – Masculine 2nd person – Feminine 3rd person – Masculine 3rd person – Feminine Singular Plural Universal Grammar The Sound Pattern of English Obligatory Contour Principle Control under Contiguity

    1. INTRODUCTION Maltese is the native language spoken by a community of nearly 400,000 inhabitants on the islands of Malta and Gozo. Until the first half of the last century it was also practiced in Arabic-speaking Mediterranean cities from Egypt to Morocco. Nowadays there are fairly large Maltese-speaking communities in English-speaking countries, mainly England, North America and Australia. Dialectal Arabic was introduced on the archipelago in the 10th century CE at the earliest and has been the vernacular language of the islands ever since the 13th century. In early Antiquity, Malta was under

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    161

    Roman domination since the second Punic war. There is archeological evidence that Punic was spoken on the islands long after the Roman conquest. Over time, the islanders evidently became familiar with Latin. At the fall of the unified Roman Empire Malta was occupied by a Byzantine garrison. Thus, Greek became one of the languages attested during this period. Around 890 CE the Byzantines were expelled after successful raids by troops under Arab control. In 1090 CE the Norman Count Roger seized Malta but his troops did not stay. What happened in Malta between the 11 th and the 13th century is somewhat unclear. Whatever the exact sequence of events, Maltese during this period became a Muslim and Arabic-speaking country. After the 13th century the Maltese were converted to Christianity but retained their Arabic dialect. Malta fell under the political and cultural influence of Roman Sicily and was cut off from the Muslim world. By integrating new words from Romance Sicilian and adapting them to native or innovative patterns, the peripheral offspring of Arabic spoken on the islands became an autonomous language with its own dynamics. For example, the Maltese word for ‘mother’ is Arabic omm while the word for father is Sicilian missier. In 1530, the Pope trusted the archipelago to the Knights of the Order of St John of Jerusalem. The official language of the Order was Italian. Until mid-20th century, Italian was the prestige language from which new vocabulary was borrowed. In 1798, the Knights were expelled by Napoleon’s French troops. The people rebelled against this occupation by foreign forces and in 1800 entrusted their destiny to the British. Malta declared its independence in 1964. It is only after the Second World War that English superseded Italian as the prestige language. It was declared official language jointly with Maltese. Since the end of the 20th century most Maltese people are bilingual or, at least, have a good command of English. The influence of English is pervasive through the import of loanwords, code switching and the development of a Maltese-English continuum. However, Italian remains influential in cultural life and through the administrative and legal vocabulary that has been flourishing since the adhesion of Malta to the European community. To conclude this historical overview, I shall refer to the comprehensive work of Brincat (2011) on the story of “Maltese and other languages” and to its extensive bibliography.

    162

    Gilbert Puech

    Maltese has retained its Arabic morphophonological basis and morpholexical stock but underwent considerable mutations during the millenium. The following study is organized as follows. We first address the controversial position of medieval Maltese in Arabic dialectology. Section 3 deals with the central question of Stress and Syncope in patterns inherited from Arabic, examined through alternative theoretical assumptions. Section 4 and 5 examine mutations in the sound pattern: the loss of emphatic consonants in late medieval Maltese, and the progressive loss of Gutturals in (pre)modern Maltese. Concluding remarks are in section 6. This study examines reshuffled patterns acquired by new generations of native language-learners, for whom the Arabic, Romance or English origin of words is hardly relevant. In synchrony stems are distributed into two categories: mono- or bisyllabic templatic stems, which include the whole stock of words inherited from Arabic and fully integrated words from Romance and even English origin; and non-templatic stems, which have their own phonological discriminants. At the end of the 18th century, four major dialectal areas were identified in Vassalli’s introduction to his Lexicon (1796, XVII). In the 19th century standardization of Maltese emerged through the dominance of the new urban area around the Great Harbour and Valetta, head town of Malta. Nevertheless, village dialects are still practiced, though possibly in danger in the long run. Once a peripheral dialect of Arabic spoken by hardly more than a few thousand isolated islanders in the High Middle Ages, soon cut off from its original Islamic environment, Maltese is now one of the official languages of the European Community. On the foundations of its morpho-phonological and morpho-lexical Arabic base Maltese grew by integrating many strata of vocabulary from different cultures, while preserving its own internal diversity until the present time. In the meantime, the development of bi- or trilinguism among Maltese people is influencing their native language, as do Internet and social networks.

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    163

    2. THE ARABIC HERITAGE The popular thesis of the Punic origin of Maltese has been spread via influential works in the 18th and 19th centuries, Agius de Soldanis (1750), Preca (1904) for instance. Punic, an offshoot of the Semitic Phoenician language, was considered as a more prestigious ancestor for Maltese than Arabic. A contrario, in his review of Vassalli (1827) for the ‘Journal des savans’ De Sacy asserted the Arabic dialectal affiliation. Grech (1961) found no (morpho-)phonological trace of Punic in Maltese. However, according to Borg (2009, 53) “it is possible to arrive at a small kernel of Semitic lexical components in Maltese atypical of vernacular or literary Arabic and, at the same time, attested in some form of Phoenico-Punic and or Hebrew, its closest congener”. Stumme (1904, 83) claimed a genetic link between Maltese and Levantine dialects: “Wir halten das Maltesische also für ein Syro-Arabisch” [So we consider Maltese as Syro-Arabic]. His claim is based on the contrast between Maghrebi forms like ğbél qtél and their Maltese correspondances ğébel ‘stones, qátel ‘he killed’. More recently, Borg (1996) examined other morpho-phonological, syntactic and lexical convergences between Maltese and Eastern Arabic dialects. Yet, for Cohen (1970, 147) Maltese is basically a Maghrebi dialect: Cependant les traits maghrébins paraissent nombreux. Tout spécialement important du point de vue de la morphologie, est la conjugaison de l'inaccompli qui met en jeu les mêmes préfixes et suffixes, avec en particulier n- pour la première personne du singulier et -u pour l'ensemble des personnes du pluriel … Les faits d’accentuation ne sont peut-être pas non plus aussi significatifs qu’il peut paraître à première vue. [However, Maghrebi features seem to be numerous. Most importantly for morphology, the conjugation of the imperfect involves the same prefixes and suffixes, with, in particular, n- for the first person in the singular and u for all persons in the plural … Also, the data relative to accented vowels is not necessarily as relevant as appears at first sight]

    Vanhove (1993, 1998, 2016) endorses this analysis. Comrie (1991, 238) offers an alternative approach:

    164

    Gilbert Puech The traditional account, which I believe to be correct, of the difference between Maltese and other Western vernaculars is that other Western vernaculars underwent a stress shift from a Proto-Western vernacular Arabic form like kítib to kitíb: Maltese did not share in this innovation.

    First of all, Arabic dialects are differential or non-differential, cf. Cantineau (1936, 49, 1937, 154). In some contexts, the former syncopates a stem vowel i/u while maintaining vowel a while the latter syncopate i/u and a as well in similar environments. Two steps should be considered. First, from Proto-Western Arabic Maltese inherited similar syllabic and stress assignment structures to sedentary non-differential Levantine dialects (cf. Cantineau 1939), while implementing major morphological changes such as the extension of n- to the 1st person singular in the imperfect, the reduction of moods to indicative and imperative, the simplification of apophonic chains in verbal conjugation, the substitution of analytic constructions to some synthetic forms built on morphotemplatic measures, etc. Presumably, proto-dialects spoken in Maghrebi older cities, Sicilian Arabic and Maltese fell into the same dialectal group, with pre-Hilalian features; cf. Vanhove (1998). Second, after the arrival of Hilalian tribes in Mediterranean coastal regions, continental Maghrebi included new dialects with Bedouin profiles. This heterogeneous areal group underwent leveling innovations that Maltese did not share, in particular for syllabic structure. After the extinction of Sicilian Arabic, Maltese was left as the only heir to Proto-Western Arabic in its initial stage.

    3. SYLLABIC STRUCTURE AND STRESS According to Brame (1972, 1974) Maltese phonology is organized in two cycles: stress Assignment, the only cyclical rule, applies twice. Moreover, Brame (1974, 44) claims that Palestinian and Maltese “developed from a common source” and that Maltese “stress patterns are strikingly similar to those of Palestinian”. The author’s contributions on Maltese have been influential. Revised versions of the cyclical analysis of Maltese have been adopted into post-SPE frameworks: Odden (1993) in Lexical

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    165

    Phonology, Hume (1994) in Autosegmental Phonology, Kiparsky (2011) in Stratal OT, Wolf (2017) in Harmonic OT. Cyclical analysis implies that the primary stress assigned in the inner cycle may be downgraded if stress is reassigned to another vowel in the second cycle. Yet, as observed by Kiparsky (2011, 5) “Such a secondary accent is however not vouched for in any description of Maltese”, for instance Sutcliffe (1936) or Aquilina (1959). In Puech (2011) I highlight other difficulties with cyclic derivations in Maltese. Thus, after summarizing Brame’s argumentation, I will present a domain-based analysis built on alternative theoretical assumptions.

    3.1. The Segmental Cycle in Maltese Phonology Brame (1974, 39) uses the following examples “to motivate the rule that assigns stress in Palestinian Arabic”: (1)

    i. kátab ‘he wrote’ kátabit ‘she wrote’ katábna ‘we wrote’

    ii.

    fíhim ‘he understood’ fíhmit ‘she understood’ fhímna ‘we understood’

    In (1i), the radical vocalism is a, while it is i in (1ii). Generalizing the underlying CVCVC shape to all verbs in measure 1, we have the following stem representations: katab vs. fihim. Stress is assigned to phonetic representations by the following rule: (2) V → [1 stress] / — C0 ((V C) V C0¹)] According to SPE conventions, this rule abbreviates three disjunctively ordered subcases displayed below: (3) i. ii. iii.

    V → [1 stress] / — C0 VC V C0¹)] V → [1 stress] / — C0 V C0¹)] V → [1 stress] / — C0]

    166

    Gilbert Puech In (4) below, Palestinian Stress is antepenultimate or penultimate: (4) i. kátabit

    ‘she wrote’ ii. kátab ‘he wrote’

    katábna ‘we wrote’

    While some Palestinian subdialects have a different form for the 3rd feminine singular, antepenultimate stress is shared by all dialects in the 3rd plural form kátabu ‘they wrote’; cf. Faust (2017). Suffixed forms in (1ii) above require the syncope of either the first or the second radical i: (5) i. ii.

    fíhimit → fihímna →

    fíhmit (similarly: fíhimu → fíhmu) fhímna

    Brame (1974, 40) claims that the syncope rule “drops unstressed i before consonant-vowel sequences. It can be generalized to apply to all high vowels”. Thus, in the terminology of Arabic dialectology, Palestinian is a differential dialect: a low vowel a is maintained in contexts where a high vowel i/u is syncopated; cf. Cantineau (1936, 49). In differential dialects antepenultimate stress surfaces, as shown by kátabu. In non-differential dialects, low vowel a may also be syncopated in contexts (excluding attachment to guttural consonants) where i/u are dropped. In such dialects, stress may not be transparently antepenultimate, due to the drop of the penultimate vowel followed by CV. That is the case in some Levantine dialects, such as that of the Lebanese village of Kfar ʕabîda, among others; cf. Feghali (1919, 133), Cohen (1970, 149, note 22), Angoujard (1990, 206). The conjugation of ‘to bear’ in the perfect is representative:

    (6) 1 2m 2f 3m 3f

    Singular ḥmö́ lt ḥmö́ lt ḥmö́ lte ḥéməl ḥö́ mlet

    1 2

    Plural ḥmö́ lna ḥmö́ ltu

    3

    ḥö́ mlu

    Stress and syllabic structure are similar in Maltese:

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    (7) 1 2 3m 3f

    Singular ḥmílt ḥmílt ḥámɛl ḥámlɛt

    1 2 3

    167

    Plural ḥmílna ḥmíltu ḥámlu

    In such dialects, antepenultimate stress assignment is necessarily opaque due to the drop of the penultimate unstressed vowel. Why, in the first cycle, should language-learning children hypothetize an antepenultimate stress position which in all cases is masked by penultimate syncope in the second cycle? Within the framework of Stratal OT, Kiparsky (2011) organizes Maltese phonology in Stem Level, Word Level, and Postlexical strata. Inflectional affixes are concatenated at the Stem Level, object affixes at the Word Level; “The Stem Level will also assign accent of the standard Arabic type, similar to the Latin stress rule, except that superheavy final syllables are stressed”. Stress assigned at the Stem Level may be downgraded at the Word Level or Postlexically. The crucial assumption is that the accent in the input to the postlexical phonology (inherited from the output of the Word level) protects the vowel from postlexical syncope, by Max-V́, but the accent itself is deleted in virtue of FOOT-MIN, unviolated at that stratum. The constraint interaction is thus transparent at each level; opacity results only from masking of the constraint systems of earlier strata by those of later strata.

    In my approach, all Maltese stems must satisfy a constraint of Trochaic Minimality. Templatic stems are maximally bisyllabic and subject to Vowel Syncope; in non-templatic stems underlying vowels are non-syncopable. Word Level inherits syllabic structure from the Lexical Level; the enclitic negation particle may be concatenated and a phrase prosthetic vowel added. Penultimate or ultimate stress is assigned. Thus, each level is transparent, and word stress as well. A further benefit of this approach is that it is neutral with respect to learning strategies: children may acquire their morphophonology of Maltese through Word Level Stem allomorphy without

    168

    Gilbert Puech

    hypothesizing constraints on Trochaic Minimality and Stem Syllabic Reduction; cf. Camilleri (2014).

    3.2. Theoretical Assumptions I use a framework in which a word is a sequence of positions opened by symbol # and ended by %, cf. Anderson & Ewen (1984), Samuels (2011), among others. Within this sequence each position is occupied by a “Phonological Expression” (PE) which expresses the structural and melodic components of segments. The vocabulary includes element |C| for consonantal properties, |V| for vocalic properties, |I U A| for melodic properties. The vertex of a Phonological Expression is C for consonants (obstruents, or sonants), V for nuclei, and Ø for a position which underlyingly is neither consonantal nor vocalic; cf. Breit (2013). UG provides two principles: -

    Obligatory Contour Principle (OCP); cf. McCarthy (1986), among others; Control under Contiguity (CCy); cf. Sauzet (1988), Russo (2013), Russo and Ulfsbjorninn (2017).

    OCP prohibits the strict adjacency of two identical vertices. Thus, sequences *CC, *VV, and *ØØ are not well-formed. A phonetic sequence of two consonants is represented by C Ø C, for instance CVCØC for /ħɔbz/ ‘bread. CCy allows coindexation of an empty vertex with left-adjacent V (long vowels) or right-adjacent C (geminate consonants). Thus, a long vowel is represented by Vi Øi, for instance CViØiC for [daːr] ‘house’; a geminate consonant is represented by ØiCi, for instance CVØiCi for /mess/ ‘he touched’. The first lexical position after # may be C or V or coindexed Ø in case of an underlying initial geminate (see sub-section 3.4.4); the final position before % may be C or V, or underlying Ø coindexed with left-adjacent V.

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    169

    3.3. Templatic Stems The relevant notion of ‘stem’ is that of a “surface word, minus productive inflectional material”, Anderson (1992, 75). Affixes marking Person, Genre and/or Number are concatenated to stems. The allomorphic stem domain is in italics below: (8) i.

    Bare stem: no inflectional affix: kiteb ‘he wrote’, 3msg- Perfect- 1st measure. ii. Stem followed by suffixal V; kitb-u ‘they wrote’, 3pl- Perfect- 1st measure. iii. C-ending stem followed by suffixal C; ktib-t ‘I/you wrote’, 1/2sg- Perfect- 1st measure.

    In (8i) the stem and the lexical word occupy the same domain. To get the stem domain in (8ii and iii) the suffix is subtracted from the lexical-word domain. In (8iii) the empty position is part of the stem domain (in italics) since the 1st person suffix in the perfect is -t (not -Øt): Inflectional domain: ktibØt (based on: CØCVCØ-t) Stem domain: ktibØ (based on: CØCVCØ-)

    3.3.1. Syllabic Constituency In the present framework, full syllabicity σ is a projection from vertex V. A bisyllabic word has two full nuclei: (9)

    σ σ C V C V C

    e.g., kiteb

    Within a moraic framework Kiparsky (2003, 154) introduced the term ‘semisyllables’ for the representation of “superheavy syllables” in Arabic. In the present chapter, a semisyllable ς is the projection of an empty vertex. The empty position may separate two consonants or be coindexed:

    170

    Gilbert Puech (10) i.

    σ ς C V C Ø C e.g., ħobz iii. σ ς C Vi Øi C e.g., dār

    ii.

    σ ς C V Øi Ci e.g., mess

    When the empty position is coindexed with V, it receives its phonetic interpretation, i.e., length, from the PE whose V is the vertex; when it is coindexed with C, it receives phonetic interpretation, i.e., gemination, regressively from the consonant. I assume that no epenthetic material may be intercalated between two adjacent coindexed positions, viz Ø iCi or ØiVi; cf. contra the interpretation adopted in Russo and Ulfsbjorninn (2017) for the inalterability and integrity of geminates only.

    3.3.2. Trochaic Minimality Maltese stems are minimally based on a Trochaic foot. The head of a trochee is V; the dependent component to its right is either V or Ø. In the former case, the bare stem is bisyllabic, and, in the latter, sesquisyllabic (semisyllable ς appended to full syllable σ): (11) i.

    T

    σ σ C V C V C k ɩ́ t ɛ b The word-final consonant is extrametrical. ii.

    ‘he wrote’

    T σ ς C V C Ø C

    ħ ɔ́ b z

    ‘bread’

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles iii.

    171

    T σ ς C Vi Øi C T

    iv.

    σ ς C V Øi Ci

    d áː r

    ‘he turned

    m ɛ ss

    ‘he touched’

    It follows from the Trochaic Minimality constraint on stems that the following stem configurations are not allowed: (12) i. ii.

    *C V C *C Ø C V C

    *d a r *k t ɩ b

    Trochaic Minimality is a constraint which applies to Maltese but not to continental Maghrebi dialects. In the dialect spoken in the Tunisian old medina of Sūsa, for instance, we have ktib ‘he wrote’ (Talmoudi 1980, 171), in contrast with Maltese kɩ́tɛb, in which the initial trochee head vowel may not be syncopated. Augmented stems are all bisyllabic; they result from: i. ii. iii. iv.

    prefixation of the ‘formative’ vowel in the imperfect (measure 1); gemination of the medial radical in triradical roots (measure 2); lengthening of the initial stem vowel (measure 3); augmented roots (4 radical consonants, or doubling of 2 radicals).

    In the augmented stem of the imperfect of measure 1, the first radical C is preceded by the formative vowel Vf and separated from the second radical by an empty position; in the indicative mood, the morpheme of Person (Cp) is prefixed to Vf.

    172

    Gilbert Puech (13)

    T σ ς σ Cp Vf C Ø C V C

    e.g.

    n ɩ́ k t ɛ b ‘I write’

    Inasmuch as the formative vowel is an augment integrated to the stem, the following nuclear radical position is underlyingly an empty nucleus projecting a semisyllable to satisfy the constraint of Stem maximal bisyllabicity. Verbs conjugated in measure 2/3 have causative or intensive meaning, Tucker (2013); the actual meaning should be checked in dictionaries, like Aquilina (1987–1990), or through examples extracted from the electronic corpus MRLS. In Maltese, these two measures are in complementary distribution: the third measure is limited to a small set of forms; cf. Sutcliffe (1936), Spagnol (2011, appendix 1) for an exhaustive inventory of “root-and-patterns” verbs wich have such a form. In measure 2, the middle radical consonant is geminated, in measure 3, the first vowel is long: (14) i. T

    measure 2

    σ ς σ C V Øi Ci V C kisser

    ii.

    T

    measure 3

    σ ς σ C Vi Øi C V C bierek

    Quadriradical stems, built on 4 radical consonants or reduplication of 2 radicals (often onomatopoeic verbs), comply with the constraint of maximal bisyllabicity. (15)

    T

    σ ς σ C V C Ø C V C e.g., b ɩ́ ʃ k ɛ l ‘he entangled’

    T σ ς σ C V C Ø C V C g ɛ́ m g ɛ m ‘he grumbled’

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    173

    3.3.3. Stem Vowel Syncope According to Brame (1974, 44): “A rule of Syncope is needed to account for the absence of stem vowels … Syncope: V̆ → Ø / —— CV This rule has the effect of dropping all unstressed vowels appearing before a consonant-vowel sequence”. Indeed, only a stem vowel which is not trochee-head may be dropped. Under this interpretation we have for kitib: (16) i. T

    kiteb ‘he wrote’

    σ σ C V C V C ii. T

    T

    σ σ C V C V C -V C T

    σ ς → C V C Ø C -V C T

    σ σ C V C V C -V iii.

    kitbet ‘she wrote’

    T

    σ σ ς C V C V C Ø -C T

    kitbu ‘they wrote’

    σ ς → C V C Ø C -V T

    ktibt ‘I/you wrote’

    ς σ ς → C Ø C V C Ø -C T

    ktibna ‘we wrote’

    σ σ ς ς σ ς C V C V C Ø -C V → C Ø C V C Ø -C V

    174

    Gilbert Puech

    In (16i) neither stem vowel meets the conditions to be syncopated; the stem surfaces as a bisyllabic trochee. In (16ii) the second stem vowel is dropped before a V-initial suffix; the stem is a sesquisyllabic trochee. In (16iii) the suffix of person in the perfect is -t (1/2 sg) or -na (1 pl). The empty position intercalated by the OCP between the stem final consonant and the C-initial suffix falls within the stem domain, which is obtained by subtraction of the inflectional suffix. The stem trochee position is assigned by scanning the domain leftward. The initial vowel at the left of the trocheehead meets the conditions to be dropped. Thus, a semisyllable ς is prepended to the sesquisyllabic stem trochee. In the imperfect of the first measure, the first stem C is preceded by formative vowel V and followed by an empty position. The person morpheme (n-, t-, j-) is prefixed to the formative vowel, the plural mark -u is suffixed. (17) i. T

    nikteb ‘I write’

    σ ς σ n- ɩ k Ø t ɩ b ii.

    T

    T

    niktbu ‘we write’

    σ ς σ σ ς ς n- ɩ k Ø t ɩ b -u → n- ɩ k Ø t Ø b -u In (17) the formative vowel is necessarily the trochee head, which an empty position may not be. In (17ii) the final stem vowel meets the conditions to be dropped. Maltese allows phonetic CCC clusters, except if medial C is a sonorant (l, r, n, m). In the present case the cluster [ktb] is wellformed. The stem syllabic structure is represented by a sesquisyllabic trochee, which appends a semisyllable. Verbs in the Perfect of measure 2 (causative-intensive) are conjugated as exemplified below. The stem is bisyllabic, except if followed by V:

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles (18) i. T

    175

    kisser ‘he broke’

    σ ς σ k ɩ Øi si i r If the suffix is -V initial the 2nd radical V is dropped: ii. T T kissru ‘they broke’ σ ς σ k ɩ Øi si i r -u

    σ ς ς → k ɩ Øi si Ø r -u

    The stem syllabic structure in (18ii) shows that the medial geminate may form a phonetic cluster, here ‘ssr’. With a C-initial suffix the stem is bisyllabic, and the lexical word is scanned by a double trochee: iii.

    T

    T

    kissirt ‘I/you broke)

    σ ς σ ς k ɩ Øi si ɩ r Ø -t Let us compare with conjugation in measure 3. In (19i) the stem is bisyllabic. (19) i. T

    siefer ‘he went abroad’

    σ ς σ s ɩ i Øi f ɩ r In (19ii) the 2nd stem vowel followed by a -V initial suffix is dropped:

    176

    Gilbert Puech ii.

    T

    T

    σ ς σ s ɩ i Øi f i r -u

    siefru ‘they went abroad’

    σ ς ς → s ɩ i Øi f Ø r -u

    In (19iii) the 2nd stem vowel is maintained: iii.

    T

    T

    Td

    T sifirt ‘I/you went abroad’ s ɩ i Øi f ɩ r Ø -t → s ɩ Ø f ɩ r Ø -t

    Here, the initial trochee interpreting the morphological mark of measure 3 (length of the first stem vowel) is degenerate when followed by a stem trochee to its right. The contrast between (18iii) and (19iii) confirms an asymmetric behavior for long vowels and geminate consonants, Russo and Ulfsbjorninn (2017). In (19iii), V and the coindexed empty position belong to the same syllabic constituent, which allows prosodic reduction (degenerate trochee) whereas in (18iii) the empty position is not in the same syllabic constituent as the coindexed onset C, so that no reduction of the geminate may occur. In Maltese liquid and nasal consonants (set symbolized by R) require licensing from an adjacent vowel. When a medial radical is R, the syncope of the second stem vowel triggers compensatory licensing of the first stem nuclear position into V. (20) i. n- V C Ø R V C : ii. n- V C Ø R V C -u →

    n- ɩ t Ø l ɩ f ‘I lose’ n- V C V R Ø f -u ‘we lose’ n- ɩ t ɩ l Ø f u

    Brame (1972, 38) interprets this alternation as segmental metathesis: C R V C V → C V R C V. Hume (1994) and Puech (2011, 303) analyze the metathesis effect as V-syncope and V-licensing, as shown above. The formative vowel of the imperfect in measure 1 is underlyingly the head of the stem-trochee. With medial radical R, if the stem-final vowel

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    177

    followed by a -V initial suffix is dropped, the V vertex promoted by the compensatory licensing of the empty position becomes the rightest trocheehead in the lexical domain; the underlying stem trochee is degenerate but its head remains protected from syncope: (21)

    T

    σ ς σ n- ɩ t Ø l ɩ f -u

    Td



    T

    σ σ ς n- ɩ t ɩ l Ø f -u

    3.3.4. Lexical and Word Strata In Brame (1972, 40) “it is the stem and the subject pronoun that are relevant to the first cycle”. Object pronouns and negation but also the inflectional plural marker, are included in the second and final cycle. If the plural marker -u were in the first cycle, the author’s rules would fail. Yet, Brame (1974, 58) rightly wonders “to what extent can we claim that ‘we drink’ and ‘you (pl) lose’ are compositional functions of ‘I drink’ plus ‘plural’ and you (sg) lose’ and ‘plural’?”. In the two-strata approach that I propose, all affixes are concatenated to the stem at the Lexical stratum. Allomorphic choices and alterations in the stem syllabic structure take place on this level exclusively. The lexical stratum includes the following components: i. Stem (including formative affixes) ii. Subject prefix and/or suffix (including plural marker) iii. Object pronouns, in direct and/or indirect construction. Forms agree in Person, Genre, and Number. The Word stratum concatenates enclitic negative particle ‘x’ (phonetically ʃ). Stress is assigned at the word-level; within the rhythmic phrase, a ‘looking-back’ prosthetic vowel represents the initial edge # to avoid # R C word-initial clusters.

    178

    Gilbert Puech

    3.3.5. Stem-Syllabic Alternations at the Lexical Stratum Templatic stems are C-ending, or (underlyingly) ViØi-ending. 3.3.5.1. C-Final Templatic Stems In the perfect 1st plural, the Subject pronoun and the Object pronoun have the same form: word-final -na or word-internal -nɩː. Let us compare ftaħna ‘we opened’ and fɛtaħna ‘he opened us’, cf. Borg and Azzopardi (1997, 358–363). The stem domain is delimited by vertical lines. (22) i. |f V t V ħ Ø| n a T

    ii. |f V t V ħ| Ø n a T

    ς σ ς f Ø t a ħ Ø n a

    σ σ f ɛ t a ħ Ø n a|

    In (22i) the inflectional suffix -na is subtracted to yield the stem of the lexical form; the initial stem vowel is syncopated. In (22ii) there is no inflectional suffix to mark the 3msg form in the perfect; since the empty position is not scanned in the stem domain, initial stem V, being the head of the stem trochee, is maintained. If a V-initial object pronoun is concatenated to the stem, V-syncope applies, as in fetħu ‘he opened it-msg’ or fetħek ‘he opened you-sg’. (23) i. |f V t V ħ| T σ ς f ɛ t Ø ħ u

    u

    ii. |f V t V ħ| ɛ k T σ ς f ɛ t Ø ħ ɛ k

    In final position, the plural inflectional marker and the 3msg object pronoun have the same phonological shape. Thus, fetħu ‘they opened’ is analyzed as 3rd plural of fetaħ or as above.

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    179

    The particle of indirection is ‘-l’. If the object pronoun is indirectly concatenated to C-final stem, the syllabic structure is altered, e.g., fetħilna ‘he opened for us’ (Borg and Azzopardi 1997, 359). (24) |f ɛ t a ħ|Ø l Ø na → |f ɛ t a ħ| i l Ø n a → |f ɛ t a ħ| i l Ø n a In Maltese, a constraint prohibits a CRC cluster that includes a stem segment. In (24) the empty position separating the stem from indirection l is licensed as V to satisfy the constraint that an R segment be adjacent to a V vertex. Epenthetic i prevents the formation of this cluster and triggers syncope of preceding a. When at the lexical level the 3msg object pronoun is final, it has the same shape as the plural marker, u (in orthography). If the object pronoun is in internal position its (orthographic) shape is hu (where h in modern Maltese is interpreted as an empty position, cf. below). (25) i. ii.

    fetħu ‘he opened it-msg’(or: ‘they opened’) fetaħhulna ‘ he opened it-msg for us’

    The allomorphic choice for the object pronoun 1 depends whether it is final at the lexical domain or not; thus, the object pronoun 2, if any, must be visible at this level. In contrast, the negative particle has not yet been introduced at this level, being encliticized at the word level. (26) (ma) fetħux ‘he did not open it-msg’ (or: they did not open’) Thus, two strata are necessary to determine the correct allomorph of the 3msg object pronoun with C-final prosodic stems. 3.3.5.2. V-Final Templatic Stems In his contribution on Interaction between Modules in Lexical Phonology Odden (1993, 138) takes the case of “Maltese Arabic where Level 1 phonology needs to access Level 2 information.” To solve apparent paradoxes in syllabic structure of V-final prosodic stems, the author

    180

    Gilbert Puech

    proposes a solution by precompilation of allomorphs, which are then pinpointed according to the derivational context. As ironically said by Kiparsky (2011, 4) “a precompilation rule quacks like phonology but walks like allomorphy”. Relevant data are as follows. (27) i. ii.

    ʔ a r ai Øi ʔ Ø r ai Øi n a ʔ Ø r ai Øi l Ø n a iii. ʔ a r ai Øi ʃ

    [ʔ á r a] [ʔ r ā́ n a] [ʔ r ā́ l n a] [ʔ a r ā́ ʃ] (ma)

    qara ‘he read’ qrana ‘he read us’ qralna ‘he read for us’ qarax ‘he did not read’

    Notice that I make the choice of underlying length for stem-final vowels with reduction in word-final position, McCarthy (2005); cf contra Kiparsky (2011) and Wolf (2017) who contextually lengthen an underlying stem-final vowel. In (27i) the final coindexed empty position is extrametrical in word-final position. If in (27ii) the Object pronoun (direct or indirect construction) is introduced in the second cycle (Brame 1972, 1974) or at Level 2 (Odden 1993) the first initial vowel may not be syncopated since it is stressed (alternatively, trochee head) in the first cycle (Level 1). The derivation yields a wrong output. (28) 1st cycle / level 1 Stress 2nd cycle / Level 2 Stress

    ʔ a r ai Øi ʔára ʔ á r a i Øi n a ʔ à r ái Øi n a

    ‘he read’ ‘he read us’ *[ʔ à r á na]

    If, however, the object pronoun is introduced at Level 1, the stem-final vowel being no longer word-final, keeps its length. Thus, the representations are: (29) i. T σ σ ʔ a r ai Øi % [ʔ á r a]

    ii.

    T ς σ ς ʔ a r ai Øi n a % [ʔ r áː n a]

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    181

    As for C-final prosodic stems, preservation of the initial stem vowel in the negative form (ma) qarax ‘he did not read’ implies that the negation enclitic particle is introduced at level 2. (30)

    Level 1 : ʔ a r a Øi Level 2: ʔ a r ai Øi ʃ

    At level 1, the initial vowel is protected from syncope as trochee head; at level 2, due to the concatenated enclitic negation, the coindexed empty position is no longer extrametrical. The Trochaic Minimality constraint is complied with by the word-final trochee; the initial vowel, head of a (degenerate) trochee, is maintained. (31) Td

    T

    σ σ ς ʔ a r ai Øi ʃ [ʔ a r aː ʃ]

    3.3.6. Stress Assignment As shown in (3i), repeated for convenience below, Brame claims that stress is assigned to the antepenultimate vowel in the following context: (32) V → [1 stress] / ——— C0 V C V C0¹)] Yet, this rule fails to yield the correct result in the following crucial case: (33) 1st cycle Stress assignment 2nd cycle Stress assignment Syncope

    kɩtib+ɩt ‘to write’ Perfect-3fsg k ɩ́ t ɩ b ɩ t kítibit+u + Object pronoun 3msg k ɩ̀ t ɩ́ b ɩ t u ———— * k ɩ̀ t ɩ́ b ɩ t u / * k ɩ̀ t ɩ́ b t u

    182

    Gilbert Puech

    Stress is assigned on the antepenultimate initial vowel in the 1st cycle, and primary stress is reassigned in the second cycle on the antepenultimate stem vowel. If syncope applies to stem vowels only the result is * kɩt̀ ɩb ́ ɩtu, else the rule syncopates the vowel of 3fsg inflectional suffix -it, yielding * kɩt̀ ɩb́ tu. In both cases the result is wrong. In Hume (1994, 166) syncope is cyclical, which also yields the wrong result *kítbitu. In the present framework, the stem syllabic structure is determined at level 1, which includes all suffixes, except the enclitic particle of negation. At level 2, the representation of empty positions is converted: (34) i. Empty positions coindexed with preceding V are interpreted as length mark: C Vi Øi C V C → C Vː C V C, e.g., [bɩːrek] bierek ‘he blessed’; ii. Empty positions coindexed with following C are interpreted as C gemination: C V Øi Ci V C → C V CC V C, e.g,. [kɩsser] kisser ‘he smashed’; iii. Free (non-coindexed) positions are invisible. Thus, at Level 2, only full vowels have a visible syllabic projection: (35) 1st stratum i. σ ς σ ii. σ ς σ b ɩi Øi r ɛ k k ɩ Øi si ɛ r nd 2 stratum: σ σ σ σ b ɩː r ɛ k k ɩ ss ɛ r

    iii.

    ς σ ς k Øt ɩ b Ø t σ k t ɩ b t

    Stress is assigned at Level 2. As in Brame (1972) and Hume (1994), the position immediately preceding the %-edge is extrametrical. A final σsyllable is light iff it is immediately followed by an extrametrical position. Hence: (36) Stress Assignment Word-stress is assigned to the penultimate syllable σ if the final syllable

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles is ‘light’, else it is assigned on ultimate σ. i. Penultimate stress: σ σ k ɩ́ t ɛ b ii. Ultimate stress : σ σ (ma) k ɩ t ɩ́ b ʃ

    183

    σ σ σ k ɩ t b ɩ́ t u Ø σ k t ɩ́ b t

    3.4. Non-Templatic Stems In his comprehensive work on Loan Verbs in Maltese, Mifsud (1995) classifies verbs of non-Arabic origin in four major categories: i.

    Full integration to Semitic Maltese sound verbs (tri- or quadriradicals) ii. Full integration to Semitic Maltese weak-final verbs (V-ending) iii. Undigested Romance stems iv. Undigested English stems Mifsud (1995) includes a corpus of stems for each category and shows paradigms of conjugation. All inflectional affixes and object pronouns come from Arabic Maltese. The author also shed light on the adaptation of nominal forms to native Maltese. From the standpoint of synchronic grammar, the relevant distinction is between templatic stems and non-templatic stems. Both types of stems must satisfy the Trochaic Minimality constraint. First, I examine the case of loan-verbs whose stem has been integrated as templatic; second, the case of verbal or nominal stems whose syllabic structure deviates from canonical templates.

    3.4.1. Patterns of Incorporation as Templatic Stems Forms which have been fully assimilated behave as templatic stems; e.g., Arabic Maltese kisser ‘to smash-measure 2’ and qarben ‘to give Holy Communion’ compared with Romance pitter ‘to paint’ and bandal ‘to swing’ (Mifsud 1995, 262).

    184

    Gilbert Puech (37) i. 3msg 3fsg 3pl 1sg 1pl

    Arabic Maltese kɩ́ssɛr kɩ́ssrɛt kɩś sru kɩssɩŕ t kɩssɩ́rna

    ii. Loan stems ʔárbɛn pɩt́ tɛr ʔárbnet pɩt́ trɛt ʔárbnu pɩt́ tru ʔarbínt pittɩŕ t ʔarbínna pittɩŕ na

    bándal bándlɛt bándlu bandált bandálna

    The conjugation of bisyllabic loan-verbs is based on the different patterns found in Arabic Maltese for biradical V-ending prosodic stems, cf. Sutcliffe (1936, 118–123), e.g., feda ‘to redeem’ and fada ‘to trust’ (< Sic. fidari). (38) 3msg 3fsf 3pl 1sg 1pl

    i. fɛ́da fdɩ̄ t́ fdɛ́w fdɛ́jt fdɛ́jna

    (ma) fɛdɩ̄ ʃ́

    ii. fáda fdā́ t fdáw fdájt fdájna

    ma fadā́ x

    Stems in (37ii) and (38ii) behave as prosodic, i.e., a stem vowel is dropped in the appropriate context. Romance or English loans which are not assimilated to a quadriradical stem keep their shape throughout conjugation without vowel syncope, e.g., żviluppa ‘to develop’, antagonizza ‘to antagonize’ (cf. Borg and Azzopardi 1997, 380). In these examples, and in hundreds of verbs coined in modern Maltese, non-templatic stems include vowel(s) which in templatic and fully assimilated stems would be dropped.

    3.4.2. Paroxytone Stems Maltese regularly changed etymologically proparoxytone verbal or nominal forms into paroxytone stems. In an initial stage, proparoxytones are suppressed, and the stress pattern is reduced to a paroxytone, thus subduing it to the native phonological constraints. The processes involved are the same as those which have been observed for SM [Semitic Maltese]: (a) syncope of the

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    185

    short middle vowel and (b) stress shift, the latter, which is less common, giving rise to forms which are normally associated with the language of uneducated monolinguals.

    (a) vowel syncope It. órdina : prédica péttina cárica consídera (b) stress shift It. cálcola : lítiga émigra

    M. /órdna/ /pprī́tka/ /ppéttna/ /kkárga/ /konsîdra/

    ‘to order’ ‘to preach’ ‘to comb’ ‘to load (a gun)’ ‘to consider’

    M. /kkalkûla/ /llatîka/ /emîgra/

    ‘to calculate’ ‘to argue’ ‘to emigrate’

    Source: Mifsud (1995, 194–5), p. 16:

    [ī] = stressed lax long i

    [î] = nucleus made of stressed i + glide [y] [û] = nucleus made of stressed u + glide [w]

    3.4.3. Proparoxytone Stems So far, I claimed that Maltese forms never surface as stressed on an antepenultimate vowel. Yet, there are doublets, with an acrolect retaining etymological proparoxytone accentuation and paroxytone variants “which are normally associated with the language of uneducated monolinguals”. (39) Italian émigra ápplica áugura dísputa évita esámina lítiga pénetra

    M. Proparoxytone /ḗmigra/ /ápplika/ /áwgura/ /ddísputa/ /ḗvita/ /ezā́ mina/ /llîtiga/ /ppḗnetra/

    M. Paroxytone /emîgra/ /applîka/ /awgûra/ /ddispûta/ /evîta/ /zzamîna/ /llatîka/ /ppenḗtra/

    186

    Gilbert Puech It is interesting to note that the consciousness of this sociolinguistically distinctive tendency to eliminate proparoxytones may sometimes generate hypercorrect forms in which proparoxytones are actually created from paroxytones. Such is the case, for example, of the It. paroxytone noccióla ‘hazel-nut’ which was recently borrowed into Maltese in the sense of ‘hazel-nut (ice-cream flavor)’ and which is regularly pronounced as a proparoxytone (/nóččyola/). [Mifsud 1995, 203].

    In proparoxytone stems, the short penultimate vowel V̆ is not subject to syncope and may never be stressed; the antepenultimate vowel is obligatorily lengthened or followed by a CC cluster and stressed. My interpretation is that V̆ is associated to melodic elements but projects a semisyllable ς, not a syllable σ. Thus, in (39) the dipole representations is:

    (40)

    Higher register σ ς σ Vi Øi m V̆ g r Vi Øi IA I A ɛ̄ ́ m ɩ g r a

    Lower register σ σ σ V m Vi Øi g r Vi Øi IA I A y ɛ m ɩ́ g r a

    At the word-level, these forms are stressed as indicated above in (36i): stress is on the penultimate σ, projected by the antepenultimate vowel. Notice also that, unlike templatic stems, non-templatic stems allow CR clusters or hiatus, e.g., teorema ‘theorem’. The representation of vowels projecting semisyllabic ς, rather than fully syllabic σ is required in Arabic dialects as well. In Tunisian Arabic, for instance, a CRC stem is broken by an unstressed epenthetic vowel, Angoujard (1990, 89): (41) i. ii.

    t í k t b u ‘you-pl write’ tíkinsu ‘you-pl sweep’

    In (41i) the intervocalic CCC cluster is allowed; in (41ii) the formative vowel is stressed, since the vowel which breaks the CRC cluster may not be stressed. The epenthetic nucleus is thus represented as projecting a semisyllable ς, and not a full syllable σ.

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    187

    3.4.4. Geminate-Initial Stems Careful readers will have noticed several examples of stems whose first radical is a geminate consonant; other examples from English etymology: ibblakka isslajda

    ‘to black, to polish (shoes)’ ‘to slide’

    In historical perspective, the morphological process of initial gemination in underived verbal stems of foreign extraction dates back to pre-modern Maltese, Mifsud (1995, 158-68). Stumme (1904, 94) associated this feature with Sicilian influence since this dialect often doubles initial consonants. According to Mifsud: The major innovation of Maltese initial gemination lies surely in its distribution, that is in the fact that it is limited to verbs of foreign origin in a way that neither other classes of loan words nor SM [Semitic Maltese] verbs are affected by it. It is quite possible, however, that SM morphology itself was backing the development which was being carried through. [p. 166).

    In synchronic phonology, initial gemination is represented by an empty position coindexed with the initial consonant. ibblakka: isslajda:

    # Øi b i Ø l a Ø i k a # Øi si Ø l a y d a

    At the word level, the opening edge is interpreted by a prosthetic vowel, except if the preceding word in the same rhythmic phrase is vowel final.

    3.5. Conclusion Maltese Arabic shares syllabic and stress patterns with non-differential Levantine dialects, notwithstanding the adoption of Western Arabic morphological features which classify Maltese as Maghrebi. Soon cut off

    188

    Gilbert Puech

    from its Arabic background, Maltese, on the one hand, retained the constraint of Trochaic Minimality, which has been levelled out in continental Maghrebi and, on the other hand, developed its own patterns of integration of new vocabulary, from Romance, then English origin.

    4. LOSS OF EMPHATIC CONSONANTS IN MEDIEVAL MALTESE The earliest attestation of written Maltese is a poem which came down to us through a copy unexpectedly found among notarial documents dating back to 1585 but composed in the mid-15th century. The text, in Latin script, has been established by the poem's discoverers in a seminal publication: Peter Caxaro's Cantilena, a Poem in Medieval Maltese (Wettinger & Fsadni 1968). Variants have been proposed by these authors in 1983. Cohen & Vanhove (1991) undertook a linguistic analysis of the Cantilena and suggested philological revisions. Furthermore, in his book on The Jews of Malta in the Late Middle Ages, Wettinger (1985) published notarial documents written in Hebrew script. Nine texts in ‘Judaeo-Arabic’, found in the archives of Malta, were drafted between 1473 and 1484. According to Wettinger (1985, 155 and note 12, p. 188) these texts “could almost just as correctly be called Judaeo-Maltese as Judaeo-Arabic”. They attest the use of three Hebrew letters for emphatic consonants not only in Arabic words but also in words of Romance origin: (42) Hebrew Arabic IPA Examples Modern M. ‫ט‬ ‫ط‬ ṭ qunṭinṭ kuntent nṭr nutar juḡṭi jagħti ‫צ‬ ‫ص‬ ṣ nṣf nofs ṣḥh saħħa ‫֗צ‬ ‫ض‬ ḍ ajḍa = ukoll also ḫḍrh ħadra

    Gloss satisfied notary he gives half strength green

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    189

    Even before such prima facie evidence was published, Cowan (1966), among others, had postulated emphatic consonants mentioned in (42), and ṛ, for medieval Maltese by internal reconstruction. After the 16th century no Maltese spelling system used special symbols to note down emphatic consonants.1 By the end of the Middle Ages, emphatic consonants had been subtracted from the sound pattern with compensatory phonologization of back stem vowels; cf. Comrie (1991, 237).

    4.1. Compensatory Effects In (pre)modern Maltese, forms whose Arabic etymon had an emphatic consonant are characterized by stem vocalism a. Other stems have vocalism i by default, or u for some of them. Arabic roots are given after Aquilina's dictionary (1987 and 1990). Medieval forms are reconstructed; modern forms are orthographic. (43) Arabic root √fṣd √χbṭ √ħṣd √χṭf √qbḍ √mšṭ √nṣb √qrṣ √qṭr √rbṭ √ṭlb

    1

    Medieval Maltese faṣad χabaṭ ħaṣad χaṭaf qabaḍ mašaṭ naṣab qaraṣ qaṭar rabaṭ ṭalab

    Modern Maltese fasad ħabat ħasad ħataf qabad maxat nasab qaras qatar rabat talab

    Gloss to bleed to beat to reap to snatch to catch to comb to set a net to pinch to drip to tie to request

    Saada (1986), however, transcribes consonants coarticulated with back vowels as emphatic in her study of Maltese in Tunisia. This choice of transcription may have been influenced by Tunisian Arabic.

    190

    Gilbert Puech

    An emphatic consonant prevented ‘imaala’, i.e., fronting and raising of /ā/ to lax and diphthongized /ɪə/ (Cowan 1966; Borg 1976, Borg 1997, 271). Even more interesting is the split between two ū, noted ǔ and û by Vassalli (1796, XVIII, 1827, 11). The author describes the former as the “contraction of o, and of u”, while the latter is the “contraction of e, and of u”. In past participles, the stem-infixed vowel is ǔ for ‘back’ (formerly emphatic) stems, while it is û for ‘front’ stems. The two vowels are merged in Standard Maltese but maintained distinct up to now in Gozitan Maltese pausal forms (Borg 1977). For instance, verbs fasad ‘to bleed and fised ‘you spolié we have for 3msg past participle forms mifsud:’ Ar. root Vassalli’s script Orth. Gozitan M. Standard M. (44) i. √ f ṣ d mifsǔd mifsud [mifsoud̥] [mifsūd̥] ii. √ f s d

    mifsûd

    mifsud

    [mifseud̥]

    [mifsūd̥]

    Diphthongized realizations [oĭ] vs. [eĭ] of ī in pausal context are also attested by Vassalli (1827, 11) and in Bonelli (1897, vol. IV, 97*). (45) i. ii.

    √ ṭ l b taboip (l. 19)

    tabīb

    ‘doctor’

    √qss qasseis (l. 23)

    qassīs ‘priest’

    *

    Bonelli’s footnote: “In emphatic position, especially at the end of a sentence, the items bylli, dīn or similar, will be pronounced in the country byllei, dein etc.; bylli ma ġejtš? byllei? why you did not come, why?”. [the term ‘emphatic refers here to phrase focus, not to consonant properties].

    5. LOSS OF GUTTURALS IN MODERN MALTESE Maltese also inherited from Arabic a set of consonants produced with primary constriction in the posterior region of the vocal tract. According to McCarthy (1994, 191) “Standard Arabic and most modern Arabic dialects have retained the full set of gutturals usually reconstructed for ProtoSemitic: laryngeals ʔ and h; pharyngeals ħ and ʕ; and uvulars χ and γ”. This

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    191

    applies to (pre)modern Maltese. Notice, however, that modern Maltese glottal stop is the reflex of the voiceless uvular stop q, not the reflex of Arabic ‘hamza’. Agius de Soldanis (1750) and Vassalli (1796) took note of on-going changes in gutturals: persistent weakness of h, loss of χ merged with ħ, and of ɣ merged with ʕ. In the 19th century, complex processes of diphthongization and pharyngealization triggered by the pharyngeal approximant on adjacent vowels are attested. During the 20th century, ʕ was lost in almost all dialects, and vowel pharyngealization ceased being discriminant, except residually. As already observed, uvular stop q has been progressively replaced by laryngeal ʔ in mainstream Maltese, a change which also took place in many modern Arabic dialects.

    5.1. Description of Gutturals by A. De Soldanis In ‘Alfabeto Punico-Maltese’, Agius de Soldanis (1750) 2 lists 22 symbols. The following excerpts (p. 72–74) have been translated into English; modern orthographic forms have been added in square brackets: k

    [k] Grave, acute as Greek k, and more forced than q, e.g., Kaws ‘bow’; Kera ‘house rent’; [qaws], [kera]. gk [g] shall be pronouced instead of Hebrew Ghimel, and Greek Gamma γ,3 especially if it comes before a vowel as a consonant, e.g., Gkrieżem ‘throats’; [grieżem]. q [q] Thin, acute, is pronouced in the summit of the throat, e.g., Qolla ‘jar’; [qolla]. hh [ħ] Is pronounced with strong aspiration, e.g., Hhait ‘wall’; Hharbiʃc ‘to scratch’. If there is a dot on one of the h, then the aspiration should be more open, while always born from the throat with a

    2

    De Soldanis (1712–1770), born in Gozo, was an erudite librarian. He entitled the contribution he published in 1750 Della Lingua Punica, presentamente usata da Maltesi. 3 ‘Gimel’ is the third letter of consonantal alphabets in some Semitic languages. Its sound value in Phoenician is the voiced plosive [g]. The Greek letter ‘gamma’ is derived from it.

    192

    Gilbert Puech

    light or a strong push from the chest, e.g., Ḣhamar, donkey ~ stupid; [ħmar]. ch [χ] Is pronounced grave, hoarse in the summit of the throat, with a bit more force than preceding [hh], e.g., Chait ‘thread’; [ħajt]. h [h] Nicely aspirated, e.g., Hem ‘there’; with a dot on top, it should be pronounced with more breathing, but gently, e.g., Ḣem ‘trouble’; [hemm], [hemm]. gh [ʕ/ɣ] The most difficult letter, which is grave, and is pronounced in the middle of the throat, among modern Arabs and among PunicMaltese, e.g., Ghain ‘eye’. If on top of the g a dot has been noted, the pronunciation shall be deeper, and if more than one dot, the aspiration is growing, e.g., Ġhar ‘grotto’, G̈har ‘shame’, ¨G̈har ‘envious of’; [għar], [għar], [għer]. The author distinguishes different realizations of ‘gh’ (Aain) by diacritic dots: (46) Soldanis Ġhar G̈har ¨G̈har

    Gloss

    Arabic root

    cave √ɣwr shame √ʕjr he got jealous √ ɣ j r

    Vassalli (IPA) Modern spelling [ɣōr] għar [ʕār] għar [ɣār] għer

    Concerning h, Agius de Soldanis uses a diacritic dot to distinguish Ḣem ‘noise’ from Hem ‘there’, which may indicate that initial h was better preserved in nouns or verbs than in cliticized adverbs. In modern Maltese, intervocalic h is dropped: deheb, [dēb]) ‘gold’, except in dialects where h is realized as ħ: [deħeb]. There is no doubt that Agius de Soldanis was aware of dialectal differences between different varieties of Maltese pronunciations. The distribution of velar k and uvular q in his work differs from modern mainstream Maltese. The author records the following words in his dizionario (1750):

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles (47) A. de Soldanis page k kadìm 148 kasma 149 kaui 149 q qbir 167 Qemmùna 167 qelp 168 qlamar 168 qtieb 170 qul 170

    Modern orthography qadim qasma qawwi kbir Kemmuna kelb klamar ktieb kiel

    193

    Gloss old break strong big Comino dog calamary book he ate

    The alternation q ~ k, well spread in his time, is still attested in Great Harbour (Malta) and Rabat (Gozo). In my fieldwork in the 1980s, I recorded forms below in Rabat (near the hospital) and Xewkija (close to Rabat); cf. Puech (1994): (48) Orthography Gloss qalb ‘heart’ kelb ‘dog’

    Standard [ʔalb̥] [kɛlb̥]

    Rabat [qɑlb̥] [kælb̥]

    Xewkija [kɑlb̥] [kælb̥]

    5.2. Description of Gutturals by Vassalli In 1796 Vassalli published a Lexicon, preceded by a Preliminary Discourse to the Maltese Nation4 which provides us with reliable dialectal descriptions of gutturals.

    4

    In the Introduction, the author claims that Maltese is a legacy from several Semitic languages: Punic, Phoenician, Hebrew, Chaldean, Samaritan, Syriac, and Arabic. Moreover, he connects these substrata to Maltese dialectal variations. In subsequent work, however, Vassalli (1827) came to the conclusion that Maltese is, in fact, an offshoot from Arabic.

    194

    Gilbert Puech The following excerpts have been translated from Italian into English:5

    LIV

    h [h] To the symbol H, I have assigned an aspirated sound and called it He, such as Havn here, hynn there, hi she, ybleh silly. LXXIV Among the new symbols added, a majority was necessary to describe GUTTURAL sounds. LXXV ጸ [ħ] To the first guttural sound, called Hha, I assigned a symbol similar to an A compressed in this way ጸ. This sound is found in many Oriental languages, and it is very aspirated, profound and dry, like the Arabic ‫ح‬. LXXVI ⵀ [χ] The second guttural sound, which resembles an O with a perpendicular line down the middle, indicates a hoarse and almost hampered pronunciation. The appropriate sound is Arabic ‫ خ‬: come ⵀǐa my brother. LXXVII ∩ [ʕ] The third guttural sound, called Aajn, is represented by this symbol ∩, which I took from Phoenician, as it is found in the inscriptions, and modified it to better fit with the other letters. It describes a very guttural and slightly husky sound, common among the Oriental languages. Since it is often unpronounced at the end of a word, I marked this instance as ∩¯ to make it distinct; and, therefore, its presence is maintained in order to preserve the root of the word. LXXVIII ᴟ [ɣ] I wanted to describe the fourth guttural sound, which denotes a big, huskier and more guttural sound, with two Aajn united in this way ∩ ∩ , but in order to avoid confusion with the Latin letter m I depicted it as ᴟ.

    5

    Special thanks to Michelangelo Falco, who assisted me in translating the original text. I remain responsible for any error of translation or interpretation.

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    195

    LXXIX ₵ [q] There is another sound in our language common among Oriental languages, which is considered by some a guttural sound, and by others a palatal, that is formed in the roof of the mouth, like a K. Nevertheless, it differs for its sharpness of pronunciation, half palatal and half guttural, and produces a certain epiglottal sound, which is very difficult to describe. For this reason, I have included it among the guttural sounds. It is not a lowpitched sound, instead it is harsh and very high-pitched. The symbol that represents it, ₵, is Phoenician as well, but I gave it a better shape more fitting with the present font.

    5.2.1. Minimal Pairs In Grammatica della lingua Maltese, Vassalli (1827) gives lists of minimal pairs (p. 14–15). Examples below have been transcribed in IPA. Some words are obsolete in modern Maltese (MM): (49) i. k karkar kīəs klūbi krīb ʕakar joktor ħarrīək ii.

    ħ ħajjar ħallæ ħajt ħall ħarat ħarqa

    Gloss MM vs. to drag along karkar drinking glass kies ravenous klubi groaning krib viscous għakar it abounds joktor who prosecutes ħarriek to allure breaker, pile wall to untie to plough burn

    q qarqar qīəs qlūbi qrīb ʕaqar joqtor ħarrīəq

    χ ħajjar χajjar ħalla χallæ ħajt χajt ħall χall ħarat χarat ħarqa χarqa

    Gloss to rumble to measure courageous nearness to ulcerate it leaks who ignites

    MM qarqar qies qlubi qrib għaqar joqtor ħarrieq

    to let choose ħajjar to leave ħalla thread ħajt vinegar ħall to strip off leaves ħarat a strip of clothes ħarqa

    196

    iii.

    Gilbert Puech ħazen to show respect ħażen χazen to store ħɩlæ to become sweet ħila χɩlæ to waste baħħar to sail baħħar baχχar to perfume

    ħażen ħela baħħar

    ʕ ʕabbæ to load ʕalaq bloodsucker ʕâli high ʕâr shame ʕazel to choose ʕɩraq to sweat

    għabba għalaq għali għar għażel għereq

    ɣ għabba ɣabbæ għalaq ɣalaq għali ɣâli għar ɣâr għażel ɣazel għereq ɣɩraq

    to deceit to close expansive cave to spin (wool) to sink

    5.2.2. Dialectal Variation in Pre-Modern Maltese Vassalli perfectly knows that many speakers do not respect what is the ‘correct’ pronunciation of gutturals for him. In his introduction to the Lexicon (1796) he comments speech habits in different areas in the following terms: XVII If we want to explore the subtleties of this language (Maltese), and, so to say, carry out a fine-grained analysis, exploring its dialects, we would also find that they are like the related oriental languages, each with a special and varied inclination to one of these languages. Our language is usually divided in five dialects by the population, using these dialects we jokingly make ourselves incomprehensible to each other. They are named as follows in Maltese = Lsŷn tal blŷd, lsŷn tal ᴟawdeպ , lsŷn tar-rጸajjël t' ysfel, lsŷn tar-rጸajjël ta fǔq, lsŷn tarrጸajjël tan-nofs = Dialect of the city, dialect of the Gozo, dialect of the low villages, dialect of the high villages, and dialect of the middle villages. Each dialect has its own subdialect of a certain place, and from them it is possible to identify from which area you come from, since they have appreciable differences. Mainly they are distinguished by pronunciation, that is by the sounds: consonants, or vowels, or both.

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    197

    XVIII With the dialect of the towns, which I call the dialect of the harbour, since it is spoken in the towns by the main harbour, we intend to refer to the language of the new capital and its suburb, of the town called l'Isola - since it is a peninsula inside the harbour -, of Bermula, of Borgo-Santangelo, and of the castles around. In the dialect of these places which can be considered as one big town, subdialects can be distinguished: as a matter of fact, the citizens of Isola quite differ in their speech from the inhabitants of Bermula, and they differ from the people of Borgo-Santangelo, and they all differ from the people of Valletta … XIX The defect of this language can be recognized mainly through the lack of the sounds ⵀ ᴟ e ₵ [respectively: χ ɣ q], which are pronounced by the speakers of this dialect as ጸ ∩ e K [respectively: ħ ʕ k], without any real distinction: therefore, they are often confused in the discourse and one word is taken for another. A major part of the speakers naturally lacks these sounds because they did not acquire them in their childhood. Many have these sounds though, but they either abstain from using them believing to speak in a trendier way, or they use them in the wrong way. XXI Now we come to the dialects of the countryside of Malta. The one which is spoken (fyr-rጸajjël ta fǔq) in the high lands, that is in the West, is the purest dialect of Malta; the ancient capital, called li Mdìna with its suburb where a few barbarisms are more widespread than elsewhere is excluded. I cannot hear any defects in the guttural sounds … XXII Similarly, in the oriental villages of Malta called (r-rጸajjël t’ysfel) low villages, there is a good dialect, undamaged in the guttural sounds … XXIII Finally, despite sharing the mistakes of the neighboring areas the best Maltese pronunciation can be found in the middle villages. In this area, the guttural sounds are preserved in their integrity, as can easily be observed by those who have some knowledge of Oriental languages. The very aspirate sound of the root H at the end of the word

    198

    Gilbert Puech is pronounced as it is, like Ybleh6 silly, Ykreh7 ugly, Nebbyh8 who wakes up, which differs from Nebbyጸ9 who barks, though throughout the domain badly pronounced ጸ … I give Vassalli’s examples of ‘ideal pronunciation’ below in IPA: (50) Harbour Vassalli’s norm Modern orthography Gloss mʊχrɩɛt mɑħrɩ̄ ət moħriet ‘plough’ χlɩmt χolma ħlɩmt ħolma ħlomt ħolma ‘I dreamt about’ ’nχossni ɣɩrkān ’nħossni ʕɩrqān inħossni għarqan ‘I feel sweaty’ qaʕqa kaʕka kagħka ‘ring-cake’ jɩtqaʕweʃ jɩtkaʕweʃ jitkagħweġ ‘he wriggles Ò’ jħoqq jħokk iħokk ‘he rubs’ buqaʕwār bukaʕwār bukagħwar ‘black beetle’

    5.2.3. Allophonic Variation in Gutturals According to Vassalli’s observations and idealized norm, radical h is maintained in uncorrupted dialects in all positions. However, if h stands for the 3rd masculine object suffix, it may be realized as [ħ]; cf. Vassalli (1827, §24): The He, H, h merely denotes the aspirated and soft sound; such as ilkerha, u il-belha harbet mal ybleh ‘the ugly and the silly [female] fled with the silly [male]’; Bhı̌ ma mhejjma ‘spoiled animal’. The same sound is kept at the end of words when it is radical, e.g., ġieh ‘honor’, mweġġeh ‘honored’; blyieh, or tbelleh ‘he grew foolish’; ikreh ‘ugly’, or derived: kerreh, tkerreh. However, if word final h is an affixed pronoun, then it will be pronounced ħ …

    Vassalli’s examples in square brackets have been transposed into IPA: (51) i. [χallūħ] [χallīħ] 6

    ħalla-impr 2pl+Obj 3msg ħalla-impr 2sg+Obj 3msg

    ibleh. foolish; cf. belleh. ikreh: ugly; cf. kerah. 8 nebbieħ that makes one aware of sth.; cf. nebbaħ or nebbeh. 9 nebbieħ barker (animal that barks); cf. nebbaħ. 7

    leave him! leave her!

    ħalluh ħallih

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles ii. [fīħ]

    fi prep+Obj 3msg

    in it

    199 fih

    In final position, the 3rd person feminine singular and 3rd person plural are respectively /ha/ and /hom/, with variations in vowel quality which are irrelevant for the representation of /h/. When the stem ends in a guttural consonant, /h/ assimilates the place of articulation of the stem consonant (cf. §25): iii.

    [selaχχa] selaχ-pf-3sg pf+Obj-3fsg skin her! selaħha [fetaħħa] fetaħ-pf-3sg pf+Obj-3fsg open it! fetaħha

    To sum up, /h/ has four allophones: [h], [ħ], [χ] and zero. The 3rd person masculine singular object suffix has three allomorphs: /h/, /hū/ or /ū/, whose distribution depends on their position in the word. Sonorant /ɣ/ is realized as a voiceless uvular fricative [χ] when it is in word final position or followed by a voiceless consonant (cf. §28). (52) [aχsel] [ferraχχem]

    ɣasel-impr-2sg ferraɣ-pf-3sg+Obj3pl

    wash! cheer them!

    aħsel ferragħhom

    Pharyngeal /ʕ/ (cf. §17) has three allophones: [ʕ], [ħ] if followed by suffix -h, and zero in word-final position: (53) [samʕet] sema’-pf-3fsg ‘she heard’ semgħet [samaħħem] sema’-pf3msg+Obj-3pl ‘he heard them’ semagħhom [sama] sema’-pf3msg ‘he heard’ sema’ In conclusion, in 18th century Maltese, the sound pattern has a maximal set of six guttural consonants: q, χ, ɣ, ħ, ʕ, and h. However, some dialects have velar k rather than q; ɣ or zero for ʕ, or ʕ for ɣ; χ for ħ, or ħ for χ; ħ or χ or zero for h. The voicelessness of ɣ and ʕ in different contexts and the place assimilation of h preceded by a guttural, contributed to the loss of

    200

    Gilbert Puech

    identity for some of these sounds. Such variation induced predictable changes, which, indeed, became established in the 19th century.

    5.3. Gutturals in Modern Maltese Different sources contributed to the documentation on Modern Maltese in the 20th century. First, urban and rural dialects were documented by Bonelli (1897–1900) and Stumme (1904). Altogether, their descriptions are convergent, even if their perception of guttural sounds is somewhat different. Saada (1986) published ethnotexts recorded in the 1960s by residents in Tunisia from Maltese families. Her transcription of guttural sounds is almost the same as Bonelli’s. Vanhove (1991) described “the survival of [ʕ] in a Maltese idiolect ar Mtaħleb in Malta”. Schabert (1976) described conservative idiolects in which [ʕ] appears to be an onglide of pharyngealized vowels. Altogether, I call ‘modern’, as opposed to ‘contemporary’, all varieties which include a pharyngeal sonorant and/or pharyngealized vowels. Thus, ‘modern’ Maltese includes conservative Gozitan dialects which have kept [ɣ] but not [ʕ]; cf. Puech (1994, texts 8 to 10 from Għarb). See also Aquilina and Isserlin (1981).

    5.3.1. Bonelli: Archivio Glottologico Italiano Bonelli (1897) published Maltese idiomatic expressions, jingles and two traditional narratives recorded during a two-month stay in urban and rural areas of Malta and Gozo. He completed his study on “the Maltese dialect” in 1898 and 1900. His set of guttural sounds includes q, ʕ, ħ, h. The postvelar stop q is general and does not alternate with its mutated form ʔ. This reflects his informants’ pronunciation from Valetta and Rabat (Gozo). The pharyngeal sonorant ʕ is the reflex of both ʕ and ɣ. The pharyngeal fricative ħ is the reflex of both ħ and χ. From Bonelli’s transcriptions, it is not clear whether h should be granted full phonemic status. Whether h should be granted phonemic or not, it is present in instances where it is usual in the spelling system:

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    201

    (54) in final position (3 msg direct object after long or diphthongized vowel): p. 88: dufrejh his nails difrejh p. 98: ḥudowh (Gozo) they took him ħuduh i saqs ēh he asked him saqsieh - in internal stem position (alternating with stem final ħ): p. 89: kerha ugly-f. kerha cf. koroħ ugly-pl. koroh - in intervocalic position (direct object initial h) bdīet yssaqsīeha she began to ask her bdiet issaqsieha - in personal pronouns: p. 89: u hū ma … and he did not … u hu ma … u hī'a qaltlu, and she told him u hija qaltlu - in adverbs: p. 97: beq‘eu sejrīn hekk they had stayed baqgħu sejrin hekk Notice that Stumme (1904, 78) takes note of Bonelli’s retention of h but never uses it in his own phonetic transcriptions. The pharyngeal sonorant, marked by the reversed comma ‘symbol, is present in radical positions where it is expected: (55) i. - in first radical position: p. 88: ‘adda ‘he passed għadda š-‘andek? what do you have? x'għandek? na‘mlu we do nagħmlu p. 89 ‘aijat, he shouted għajjat ii. - in second radical position: p. 88 qa‘at he stayed qagħad p. 89 we‘da a vow wegħda - in third radical position: p. 88 ma sat‘ouš, they could not ma setgħux p. 89 sem‘ou they heard semgħu In Bonelli’s contributions, no vowel is transcribed as pharyngealized.

    202

    Gilbert Puech

    5.3.2. Stumme Maltesische Studien Stumme (1904) faithfully reports the dialectal variation between (post)velar q, maintained in urban areas, and the glottal realization ʔ in countryside dialects. He claims that the sound h is “totally lacking” (p. 78). Moreover, none of his informants made a distinction between pharyngeal ḥ (IPA ħ] and velar ḫ (IPA [χ]); nor between Arabic ‫( ع‬IPA [ʕ], transcribed as З) and ‫( غ‬IPA [ɣ]). On another hand, Stumme carefully analyzes vowel pharyngealization in relevant contexts (p. 79). 5.3.2.1. Dialectal Variants of q Post-velar stop q contrasts with (post)palatal k in texts from Valetta: (56) i.

    qalb

    heart

    vs.

    kelb

    dog

    Glottal stop ʔ contrasts with (post)palatal k in texts from countryside vs. towns: ii.

    ʔalb

    vs.

    kelb

    Only one k in texts from Victoria (Gozo), the contrast being supported by the vowel quality: iii. kalb (qalb) cf. kabdu fok fkar

    vs. for

    ké̜lb (kelb) qabdu ‘they caught’ fuq ‘upon’ fqar ‘poor-pl.’

    In Maltese, the change from q to ʔ has spread from peripheral towns and villages to Valetta (il-Belt) and its suburbs. It was generalized in the 20th century. However, in my own fieldwork in the 1980s, I still heard postvelar q in the Great Harbour area, and k instead of q or ʔ in Xewkija, a village close to Victoria (Gozo). It should also be noticed that in Standard Maltese some speakers use k for q (realized as a glottal stop) for some words; cf. Borg (2011, 27).

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    203

    5.3.2.2. Reflexes of h “The sound h is totally lacking in my texts” (Stumme 1904, 78). Its reflexes are:

    ii. iii.

    iv.

    v.

    (57) i.- no direct correspondence: p. 7 joqtólom he 's killing them joqtolhom fuq-râsom on their heads fuq rashom p. 9 î she hi - a glottal stop: p. 5 tara’ómš she does not see them tarahomx - għajn in radical post-consonantic position: p. 19 ké̜rЗa ugly-f kerha - a long or diphthongized vowel: p. 53 dê̜p / de̜ ́ ĕp gold deheb variants: dé̜’ep / dé̜Зe̜p - a glide: p. 27 raptûwom they tied them rabtuhom p. 47 idéĭja her two hands ideyha p. 5 ḥallîjom he left them ħalliehom - pharyngeal ḥ: p. 9 íkraḥ (the) ugliest ikrah p. 7 talbûŏḥ they asked him for talbuh P. 6 taḥḥom their tagħhom

    Stumme, moreover, notes that English h is pronounced ḥ, e.g., [ḥarri] for ‘Harry.’

    5.3.3. Pharyngeal Sonorant З and Pharyngealized Vowels Stumme (1904, 75) describes the sound transcribed by the glyph З (IPA [ʕ]) as “strongest throat pressure sound (arab ‫”)ع‬. If З immediately precedes radical or suffixal ī or ū, an ‘intrusive’ vowel is inserted; cf. Hall (2006). The intrusive nucleus and the high vowel form a diphthong. In other terms, the first element of the diphthong does not stand for the vocalization of sonorant

    204

    Gilbert Puech

    [ʕ] but for the phonologization of the vocalic transition between the pharyngeal sonorant and ī or ū: (58) Examples from Stumme's first text (Bočča: dialect of Valetta) tЗéĭt ʕīd-impf.3fsg she says tgħid tîЗeĭ tīʕ-1 sg my tiegħi Зóŭda ʕūd-noun.fsg (a piece of) wood għuda tîЗoŭ tīʕ-3 msg his tiegħu jisímЗoŭ sema’-impf-3 pl they hear jisimgħu Adjacent to З, low vowel a is kept constant: (59) i. ii.

    čáЗaq noun-collective Зámel ʕamel-pf-3msg Зámlu ʕamel-pf-3pl Зámlet ʕamel-pf-3fsg š Зámel what-ʕamel-pf-3 msg

    pebbles čagħak he made għamel they made għamlu she made għamlet What did he make? x’ għamel?

    З is obligatorily adjacent to a vowel; thus, a stem-initial vowel is not syncopated: iii. Зamílt ʕamel-pf-1sg cf. contra ktibt: kitib- pf-1sg

    I made I wrote

    għamilt

    Adjacent to З, a stem or suffixal mid-vowel is more open (I use IPA ɔ for Stumme's o̜, and IPA ɛ for e̜): (60) bɔ́Зɔt sémЗɛt

    noun sema’- pf-3fsg

    far she heard

    bogħod semgħet

    Stumme (1904, 79) describes some vowels as ‘Зain-retaining’ (Зainhaltig). These vowels, which are noted with a subscribed tilde, keep strong guttural pressure (starke Kehlpressung) during their whole length. They stand for З merged with a mid or low vowel:

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles (61) i. šâ̰mel š + ʕámel-pf-3msg what did he make? jâ̰mel ʕamel- impf-3msg he makes nâ̰mlu ʕamel-impf 1pl we make ii. milbɔ̰̂ t adverbial locution from far šɔ̰̂ l work-noun msg work

    205

    x' għamel jagħmel nagħmlu mil-bogħod xogħol

    A word-final stem vowel may be pharyngealized, but never a suffixal vowel: sɛ́ba̰ ‘seven’ sebgħa; cf. contra sémЗɛt (not *sémɛ̰t) semgħet ‘she heard’.

    5.4. Comparison with Tunisian Arabic A few years before his fieldwork in Malta, Stumme (1896) had published a grammar of Tunisian Arabic. Comparing Stumme's transcriptions for Tunisian Arabic and Maltese is enlightening. Tunisian A. (1896, 9) (62) smáʕ séma smáʕt smáĭt sémʕat sémʕet sémʕu sémʕoŭ

    Maltese (1904) sema’ smajt semgħet semgħu

    Gloss hear-pf. 3 msg 1/2 sg 3 fsg 3 pl

    Brame (1972, 60) claims that in modern Maltese a rule of “absolute neutralization” changes the ‘abstract’ sonorant ʕ into vowel a (cf. below 6.2). Stumme's transcriptions for Maltese, by contrast with Tunisian Arabic, prove that ʕ followed by long ī or ū triggered the diphthongization of the vowel. Thus, the path of change has not been the vocalization of the guttural sonorant (ʕ → a) but its deletion in the 20th century Maltese (survival in residual idiolects): (63) ‘hear-pf.3pl’ ū-diphthongization

    sémʕū (underlying long final vowel) sémʕoŭ

    206

    Gilbert Puech

    ʕ-deletion sémoŭ (ʕ is deleted after diphthong phonologization)

    5.5. Pharyngealization in the 20th Century Aquilina (1959) postulates 3 sets of vowels: Short a e i o u

    Long (unpharyngealized) aː eː iː oː uː

    Pharyngealized a ~ aʕ ~ aʕa: ʕ e ~ eʕ ~ eʕe: ʕ i ~ iʕ ~ iʕi: ʕ o ~ oʕ ~ oʕo: ʕ u ~ uʕ ~ uʕu: ʕ

    a̰ ḛ ḭ o̰ ṵ

    The author, however, adds this important comment (p. 18): “The above pharyngealized vowel are classified as special vowels to distinguish them from the unpharyngealized ones. Such differentiation is necessary to maintain the phonetic and historical individuality of the two sets; but it must be borne in mind that pharyngealization is so weakened that although it is dialectally perceptible in some of our villages and towns, it is hardly perceptible in others”.

    5.5.1. Modern Dialectal Pharyngealized Vowels Based on his fieldwork in the 1970s, Schabert (1976) analyzed two conservative varieties of Maltese, one from St Julian (fairly close to Valetta) and the other from the coastal village of Marsaxlokk. Like Aquilina (1959), Schabert postulates three sets of vowels (p. 16): short vowels i u

    æ

    o a

    pharyngealized vowels

    æ̣

    ọ ạ

    long vowels ī ū ɪ̄ə ō ǣ ā

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    207

    “Pharyngealization is realized in the following way: the pharyngealized vowel is phonetically longer than its nonpharyngealized counterpart (even in unstressed position), and during the whole length of the vowel or during a portion of its length the pharynx is slightly constricted”. According to Schabert (p. 18), it sounds as if a faint ʕ slips into part of the vowel. In words which start by a pharyngealized vowel there is no prosthetic glottal stop, but when pharynx constriction occurs in the first part an initial sound like [ʕaː] may be heard”.

    Schabert gives the following examples: (64) - stressed position (glissando towards a centralized unsyllabic vocoid) /fæ̣m/ [fɛ̰́ˑḛ̆m] ~ [fɛ̰ːm] fehem he understood /ʃọl/ [ʃɔ̰́ˑŏ̰l] ~ [ʃɔ̰ ́ ːl] xogħol work /ʔạd / [ʔá̰ˑă̰t] ~ [ʔa̰ ́ ːt] qagħad he stayed - unstressed position /æ̣lī́ʔi/ [ɛ̰ˑlɪ́ˑĕʔi] għelieqi fields /yoʔọd/ [jóʔɔ̰ˑt] joqgħod he stays /nạmlūh/ [na̰ˑmlúˑə̯ħ] nagħmluh ‘we do it-msg’

    Schabert’s description is of great interest but is not, in my opinion, representative of the present dialectal situation in the urban area to which St Julian belongs, and in the fisherman village of Marsaxlokk; cf. Puech (1994, text 43 and 44–50) and Azzopardi-Alexander (2011, 235–253). Finally, we shall mention the very careful description of an idiolect spoken in Mtaħleb (Malta) by Vanhove (1991). This idiolect attests the survival of ʕ and illustrates the complex relationship between vowel length and pharyngealization in the context of phonemic ʕ. See also Camilleri and Vanhove (1994) for a phonetic and phonological description of the dialect spoken in Mġarr (Malta).

    5.5.2. Gutturals in Contemporary Maltese In phonemic terms, contemporary Maltese includes two laryngeal obstruents: /ʔ/ and /h/; the latter may be expressed by a pharyngeal or postvelar voiceless allophone: [ħ, χ]; cf. Borg (1997, 259). Vowels are no

    208

    Gilbert Puech

    longer pharyngealized. We will distinguish two stages in contemporary Maltese. In more conservative idiolects, formerly pharyngealized vowels keep some degree of length even in unstressed position. In more innovative idiolects vowel length is maintained in stressed position only. For convenience, we will refer to għ and h (orthographic symbols) in stem initial, stem medial and stem final position. We will contrast two types of idiolects. Conservative idiolects (Lect A) may keep vowel length in unstressed vowels; innovative idiolects (Lect B) shorten an unstressed vowel. In stem initial position, we have the following forms: (65) i. ā́ mɛl āmɩĺ t ii. ɛ̄ ́ mes ɛ̄ mɩ́st

    Lect A ā́ mɛl amɩĺ t ḗmɛs ɛmɩ́st

    Lect B għamel għamilt hemeż hemiżt

    he did I/you-sg. did he fastened I/you-sg fastened

    According to Hume et al. (2009, 36–38), length is similar for an underlying long vowel and a short vowel adjacent to għ in stressed position: (66) tā́ ma tā́ ma taʃʃa tā́ ʃʃaʔ

    tagħma tama taxxa tgħaxxaq

    għama-imperf.3fsg noun fsg noun fsg għaxxaq-imperf.3fsg

    she grows blind hope tax she makes happy

    According to my own observations and to phonetic observations in Hume et al., a short vowel adjacent to għ is not lengthened in unstressed position: (67) i. nɔ́rbɔt nɔ́bɔt ii. tálap nɩĺ ap

    norbot nobgħod talab nilgħab

    rabat-imperf.1sg bagħad-impf.1sg talab-perf.3.msg nilgħab-impf.1sg

    I tie I hate he asked I play

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    209

    There are, however, other idiolects in which a short vowel adjacent to għ is lengthened in this position. Thus, Camilleri (2014, 60) gives /nilaːb/. According to Vanhove (1991), the long vowel attracts word stress, which yields [nilā́ p]. Notice also the following variation: (68) Hume et al. (2009) Camilleri (2014) lgħabt ‘I/you-sg played’ [lā́ pt] lgħabtu ‘you-pl played’ [lā́ ptu]

    [lápt] [lā́ ptu]

    In perfect conjugation is like that of ‘għ-medial’ verbs, e.g., xehed ‘to give evidence’ and xegħel ‘to switch on’. Plural imperfect forms, however, are kept distinct; cf. Camilleri (2014, 123). Hume et al. (2009, 42) evoke the question of a third degree of phonemic length (authors' emphasis). In any case, the actual length of vowels in different contexts depends on several factors, with variation in individual or dialectal speech habits. Main factors are (i) underlying representation, (ii) position in open or close syllable, (iii) word stress position, (iv) intonation pattern.

    5.6. Phonological Interpretation of Orthographic H and Għ In this contribution, I will overlook the residual role of h in stems. Relevant paradigms and alternations are commented in Camilleri (2014). Suffice it to say that, in modern Maltese, stem-h is most often assimilated to għ, or to ħ. My focus will be on the representation of h in suffixes and għ in stems.

    5.6.1. Orthographic h Orthographic h behaves as a consonant in object pronouns: (69) -ha (or -hie): 3fsg object

    -na (or -nie):

    1pl object

    210

    Gilbert Puech -hom:

    3pl object

    -kom:

    2pl object

    For instance. (70)

    i.

    kitibha kitibna

    ‘he recruited her’ ‘he recruited us’

    [kɩtɩ́ba] [kɩtɩ́bna]

    ii.

    kitibhom kitibkom

    ‘he recruited them’ ‘he recruited you-all’

    [kɩtɩ́bɔm] [kɩtɩbkɔm]

    If the object pronoun is V-initial, the stem vowel in open syllables is deleted: (71)

    i. ii.

    kitbek kitbu

    ‘he recruited you-sg’ [kɩ́tbɛk] ‘he recruited him’ [kɩ́tbu]

    In (72) the second stem nucleus is syncopated in intervocalic position, while an empty position blocks stem nucleus syncope in (71). Notice that in kitibna the suffix consonant is separated from the last stem consonant by an empty position, since a sequence ‘CC’ would be an OCP violation. Similarly, the representation of kitibha as */k i t i b · · a/, with two adjacent empty positions, would be an OCP violation. Thus, orthographic h may occupy a C-position but is not a consonant as phonological object. In intervocalic position, the empty space unit is occupied by a palatal or labial glide in agreement with the preceding vowel. According to Borg (1997, 275), the underlying long vowel is shortened in case of glide insertion: (72) i. k s ī h a → ii. y i ʃ t r ū h o m →

    [k s í y a] [yɩštrúwɔm]

    ksieha ‘he covered it-fsg’ jixtruhom ‘they buy them’

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    211

    When the 3msg object suffix is immediately preceded by a vowel and is word-final (or only followed by enclitic negation š), its allomorphic realization is ħ: (73) kitbuh ktibnieh

    ‘they wrote it-m’ ‘we wrote it-m’

    [k ɩ t b ū́ ° ħ] [k t ɩ b n ɩ̄ °́ ħ]

    This applies to stems with etymological h in word-final position: (74) kerah ‘ugly-msg’

    [k ɛ́ r a ħ], cf. kerha ‘ugly-fsg’

    In conclusion, orthographic h stands for a C-position whose vertex is empty. Its underlying presence is revealed by its effect on the syllabic structure and stress assignment, or by a glide preventing hiatus. In wordfinal position (disregarding the negative enclitic) it is represented by an allomorph ħ, an instance of Phonologically Conditioned Allomorphy.

    5.6.2. Digraph għ Sonorants ʕ and ɣ, represented in modern spelling by digraph għ, are etymological in many roots as 1st, 2nd, or 3rd radical. My focus will be on diachronic changes in stems whose one radical was ʕ or ɣ. I identify four stages, which correspond in synchrony to overlapping lects. I examine cases according to the position of the digraph. 5.6.2.1. Għ Adjacent to a (Mid)Low Vowel In lect A, ʕ and ɣ correspond to two distinct sonorants. In most dialects, however, they have been merged. Examples below are drawn from the verb għamel ‘to make’ for two forms in the perfect (3rd msg and 1/2 sg). Concerning the quality i ou e of the second stem vowel, suffice it to say that it depends on contexts and dialects; cf. għamel vs. għamel (75) Lect A: Lect B:

    għamel ʕámɛl ā̰́ m ɛ l

    għamilt Comment ʕ a m ɩ́ lt conservation of aproximant [ʕ] ā̰ m ɩ́ l t compensatory vowel pharyngealization

    212

    Gilbert Puech Lect C: Lect D:

    ā́ m ɛ l ā́ m ɛ l

    ā m ɩ́ l t length without pharyngealization a m ɩ́ l t loss of length in instressed vowel

    In the 19th-20th century, conservative lects A and B overlap; they are attested by Bonelli (1897–1900), Stumme (1904), Aquilina (1959), Schabert (1976), Vanhove (1991). Innovative lects C and D are representative of contemporary Maltese. 5.6.2.2. għ Adjacent to an Underlying High Vowel When initial għ precedes vowels ī or ū, a (pharyngealized) diphthong occurred in most dialects, including Standard Maltese: (76) i. [ái̯ d] għid ‘(religious) feast’ għ stands for etymological /ʕ/ [zái̯ r] żgħir ‘small’ /ɣ/ ii. [áu̯d] għud ‘wooden hook’ għ stands for etymological /ʕ/ [áu̯l] għul ‘ogre’ /ɣ/ The diphthong is kept in internal position: (77) i. [zái̯ ra] żgħira ‘żgħir-fsg’

    ii.

    [áu̯da] għuda ‘għud -fsg’

    5.6.2.3. Digraph għ Followed by h-Suffix Concerning għ as third radical, if the stem is followed by an object suffix starting by -h, the sequence ‘għ-h’ is realized [ħħ]: (78) i. bela’

    [bɛ́la] ‘he threw’

    ii.

    bɛlagħha [beláħħa] ‘he threw it’

    It should also be noticed that there are innovations in inflections, especially in the language of young people. For example, Fabri (2011, 99): (79) raha [rā́] ‘he saw her’

    or

    [ráħħa] on the model of (76ii)

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    213

    5.6.3. Predictive Phonology The loss of emphatic consonants in postmedieval Maltese transferred the burden of maintaining lexical contrasts to stem vowels only. Four centuries later, the loss of guttural consonants broke up regular morphophonemic alternations, inducing opacity in the sound pattern. In other words, there has been a trade-off between ‘less’ on the phonological side and ‘more’ on the morpho-phonological side. Fabri (2011, 99) makes the following prediction: Bringing in the acquisition perspective once again, another observation is relevant in this context. A diary of language development of my own son, Noah, shows clearly that he often omitted the glottal stop for quite a long time during his acquisition phase. Moreover, even when he learnt how to write at school, he would systematically omit the letter ‘q’, which represents the glottal, thus implying that he was not even aware of its occurrence. It is, therefore, not implausible to speculate that one way in which Maltese could change is the occurrence of the glottal stop, a change that also affects its phonemic status within the phonological system.

    If Noah’s children induce a sound pattern without any ‘guttural’ consonant the millenary cycle of transferring guttural load from consonants to vowels will have been completed.

    CONCLUSION In this contribution, I endorsed the view that Maltese is an offspring of Proto-Western Arabic. It shares with continental Maghrebi dialects morphological innovations which are discriminant for this group. However, Maltese maintained prosodic structures for syllabification and stress which are shared by Levantine pre-Hillalian non-differential dialects. Once this peripheral and isolated dialect was cut off from its Arabic roots, new vocabulary was borrowed from neighbor European languages. The loss of emphatic consonants in late Medieval Maltese, and the progressive loss of guttural consonants in modern times triggered substantial changes in Maltese phonology. This also explains why Maltese, once an Arabic dialect,

    214

    Gilbert Puech

    now sounds very differently from any dialect of the Arabic sphere. The development of Standard Maltese, as it emerged from the dominant urban dialect in the 19th century, contributed to giving a national status to Maltese. Eventually, bilingualism with Italian, then with English deeply had impacted the morpho-phonological profile of contemporary Maltese.

    REFERENCES Agius de Soldanis, Giovanni Pietro F. 1750. Della Lingua Punica presentemente usata da Maltesi & c. overro Nuovi documenti, li quali possono servire di lume all’antica lingua etrusca; stesi in due dissertazioni. Roma. Published by Joe Zammit Ciantar, Facsimile edition: Malta (2007). [On the Punic language currently used by Maltesi & c. or New documents, which can serve as a light to the ancient Etruscan language; written in two dissertations]. Anderson, John and Ewen, Colin J. 1987. Principles of Dependency Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Anderson, Stephen R. 1992. A-morphous Morphology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Angoujard, Jean-Pierre. 1990. Metrical Structure of Arabic. Dordrecht, Holland; Providence, RI, U.S.A: Foris Pubs. Aquilina, Joseph. 1959. The Structure of Maltese: a Study in Mixed Grammar and Vocabulary. Malta: The Royal University of Malta. — 1970. Papers in Maltese Linguistics. Malta: The Royal University of Malta. — 1987–1990. Maltese-English Dictionary, 2 vol., Malta: Midsea Books. Aquilina, Joseph and Isserlin, Benedikt S. J. 1981. A Survey of Contemporary Dialectal Maltese (Volume 1: Gozo). Leeds: University of Leeds. Azzopardi-Alexander, Marie. 2017. “The phonetic study of speakers along the Maltese-English continuum.” In Advances in Maltese Linguistics, edited by Benjamin Saade and Mauro Tosco, 193–223. Berlin: de Gruyter.

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    215

    Bonelli, Luigi. 1897–1907. “Il dialetto maltese.” Archivio Glottologico Italiano, serie gen., (Supplementi periodici). Vol. IV(I), Testi, A 1–5, pp. 53–98; Vol VI(I), Testi, B 1–10, pp. 37–70; Vol. VII(II), “Lessico”, 1. “Voci arabe”, pp. 1–68; Vol. VIII(II), “Lessico”, 2. “Voci romanze”, pp. 1–50. [“The Maltese dialect.” Italian Glottological Archive]. Breit, Florian. 2013. Formal Aspects of Element Theory. PhD Diss., University College London. Borg, Alexander. 1976. “The Imaala in Maltese.” Israel Oriental Studies VI: 191–223. — 1996. “On some Levantine Linguistic Traits in Maltese.” Israel Oriental Studies XVI: 133–151. — 1997. “Maltese Phonology.” In Phonologies of Asia and Africa, edited by Alan S. Kaye. Vol. 1: 245–285. Indiana: Eisenbrauns. — 2009. “Between Typology and Diachrony: Some Formal Parallels in Hebrew and Maltese”. In Zaphenath-Paneah: Linguistic Studies Presented to Elisha Qimron, 15-98. Ben-Gurion University of the Negev Press. Borg, Albert and Azzopardi-Alexander, Marie. 1997. Maltese: Descriptive Grammars. London, New York: Routledge. Brame, Michael K. 1972. “On the abstractness of Phonology: Maltese ʕ.” In Contributions to Generative Phonology, edited by Michael K. Brame, 22–62, Austin: University of Texas Press. — 1974. “The Cycle in Phonology: Stress in Palestinian, Maltese, and Spanish.” Linguistic Inquiry 5.1: 39–60. Brincat, Joseph M. 2011. Maltese and Other languages. Malta: Midsea books. Camilleri, Maris. 2014. The Stem in Inflectional Verbal Paradigms in Maltese. PhD Diss., University of Surrey. Cantineau, Jean. 1936–37. Etudes sur quelques parlers de nomades d’Orient, 2 volumes. Paris: Larose. [Studies on some dialects of nomads from the East] — 1939. “Remarques sur les parlers de sédentaires syro-libanopalestiniens. ” Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 40.1: 80–

    216

    Gilbert Puech

    88. [“Notes on the talk of sedentary Syro-Lebanese-Palestinians.” Bulletin of the Linguistic Society of Paris]. Chomsky, Noam and Halle, Morris. 1968. The sound Pattern of English [SPE]. New York: Harper & Row. Cohen, David. 1970. Le système phonologique du maltais. Aspects synchroniques et diachroniques. Eléments de linguistique arabe et sémitique. La Haye - Paris, Mouton, 126–149. [The phonological system of Maltese. Synchronic and diachronic aspects. Elements of Arabic and Semitic linguistics]. Comrie, Bernard. 1991. “Towards a History of Arabic Maltese.” Semitic Studies in Honor of Wolf Leslau. On the occasion of his eighty-fifth birthday, edited by Alan S. Kaye, 234–244. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Cowan, William. 1966. “Loss of Emphasis in Maltese.” Journal of Maltese Studies 3: 19–32. Fabri, Ray. 2011. “The language of young people and language change in Maltese.” In Variation and Change, the Dynamics of Maltese in Space, Time and Society, edited by Sandro Caruana, Ray Fabri, Thomas Stolz., 89–107. Berlin: Akademie Verlag. Feghali, Michel T. 1919. Le parler de Kfar ‘Abîda. Essai linguistique sur la phonétique et la morphologie d’un parler arabe moderne. PhD Diss., Université d’Alger. Paris: Editions Ernest Leroux. [The dialect of Kfar ‘Abîda. Linguistic essay on the phonetics and morphology of modern Arabic dialect]. Grech, Prosper. 1961. Are there any traces of Punic in Maltese? Journal of Maltese Studies 1, 130–146. Royal University of Malta. Hayes, Bruce. 1995. Metrical Stress Theory. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press. Hume, Elizabeth. 1994. Front Vowels, Coronal Consonants, and their Interaction in Nonlinear Phonology. New York: Garland Pub. Hume, Elizabeth, Venditti Jennifer, Vella Alexandra and Gett, Samantha. 2009. “Vowel duration and Maltese ‘għ’.” In Introducing Maltese Linguistics, edited by Bernard Comrie, Ray Fabri, Elizabeth Hume, Manwel Mifsud, Thomas Stolz and Martine Vanhove, 15–46. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    217

    Kiparsky, Paul. 2003. “Syllables and Moras in Arabic.” In The Syllable in Optimality Theory, edited by Caroline Féry and Ruben Florentius Hendricus Eduardus van de Vijver, 147–182. Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press. — 2011. Chains or Strata? The Case of Maltese. Ms, lingbuzz 001379. McCarthy, John J. 1986. “OCP Effects: Gemination and Antigemination.” Linguistic Inquiry 17.2: 207–263. — 2005. “The Length of Stem-final Vowels in colloquial Arabic.” In Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, edited by Mohammad Alhawary and Elabbas Benmamoun, 17–18: 1–26. Amsterdam: Benjamins. Mifsud, Manwe. 1995. Loan Verbs in Maltese, A descriptive and Comparative Study. Leiden, New York: E.J. Brill. Mori, Laura. 2009. The shaping of Maltese throughout the centuries. Linguistic evidence from a diachronic-typological analysis. Introducing Maltese Linguistics, edited by Bernard Comrie, Ray Fabri, Elizabeth Hume, Manwel Mifsud, Thomas Stolz and Martine Vanhove, 291–307. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. — 2011. “Linguistic variation in legal Maltese: EU directives compared to national implementation laws.” In Variation and Change, The Dynamics of Maltese in Space, Time and Society, edited by Sandro Caruana, Ray Fabri, Thomas Stolz, 109–127. Berlin: Akademie Verlag. MRLS: Maltese Language Resource Server. V3.2 (2016): http://mlrs. research.um.edu.mt/CQPweb/malti03/ Paggio, Patrizia and Gatt, Albert. 2018. The Languages of Malta (Studies in Diversity Linguistics 17). Berlin: Language Science Press. Preca, Annibale. 1904. Malta Cananea, ossia investigazioni filologicoetimologiche nel linguaggio maltese. Malte. Puech, Gilbert. 1994. Ethnotextes maltais. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. — 2011. “Syllabic structure and stress in Maltese.” In Variation and Change, The Dynamics of Maltese in Space, Time and Society, edited by Sandro Caruana, Ray Fabri, Thomas Stolz, 277–316. Berlin: Akademie Verlag.

    218

    Gilbert Puech

    — 2017. “Maltese kiteb vs. Tunisian (Sūsa) ktib.” In Advances in Maltese Linguistics, edited by Benjamin Saade and Mauro Tosco, 173–191, Berlin: de Gruyter. Russo, Michela. 2013. Constituants phonologiques et morphologies nonconcaténatives: Géminations et métaphonies dans les langues romanes. HDR (= Habilitation à Diriger des Recherches), diss., Université de Toulouse Le Mirail, France. [Phonological constituents and nonconcatenative morphologies: Géminations and metaphonies in Romance languages]. Russo, Michela and Ulfsbjorninn, Shanti. 2017. “Breaking the symmetry of geminates in diachrony and synchrony.” Papers in Historical Phonology 2: 164–202. Saada, Lucienne. 1986. “Maltais en Tunisie.” In Atti del congress internazionale di Amalfi, 5th–8th December 1983. [“Maltese in Tunisia.” In Proceedings of the international congress of Amalfi]. Samuels, Bridget D. 2011. Phonological Architecture. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Sauzet, Patrick. 1988. “Geminates and Constituency.” Constituent Structures, Papers from the 1987 GLOW, edited by Cardinaletti, Anna, Guglielmo Cinque, and Giuliana Giusti, 287–330. Dordrecht: Foris. Spagnol, Michael. 2011. A Tale of Two Morphologies, Verb Structure and Argument Alternations in Maltese. PhD Diss., University of Konstanz. Schabert, Peter. 1976. Laut- und Formenlehre des Maltesischen anhand zweier Mundarten, Erlanger Studien, Band 16, Erlangen: Verlag Palm und Enke. [Phonology and formal theory of Maltese based on two dialects]. Sutcliffe, Edmund, S.J. 1936. A Grammar of the Maltese Language, with Chrestomathy and Vocabulary. London: Oxford University Press. Stumme, Hans. 1904. Maltesische Studien: eine Sammlung prosaischer und poetischer Texte in maltesischer Sprache, nebst Erläuterungen. Leipzig: J. C. Hinrichs’sche Buchhandlung [reprint: Leipzig, 1968]. [Maltese studies: a collection of prose and poetic texts in Maltese, together with explanatory notes].

    Emergence of Maltese Morpho-Phonological Profiles

    219

    Talmoudi, Fathi. 1980. The Arabic Dialect of Sūsa (Tunisia). Göteborg: Acta universitatis Gothoburgensis. Tucker, Matthew A. 2013. Building Verbs in Maltese. PhD. Diss., University of California, Santa Cruz. Ulfsbjorninn, Shanti. 2014. A Field Theory of Stress. The role of empty nuclei in stress systems. PhD Diss., University of London. Vanhove, Martine. 1993. La langue maltaise. Etudes syntaxiques d’un dialecte arabe périphérique. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. [The Maltese language. Syntactic studies of a peripheral Arabic dialect]. — 1998 (ms.). De quelques traits préhilaliens en maltais. Paper presented at Peuplement et Arabisation au Maghreb Occidental (Dialectologie et Histoire). Madrid – Zaragoza: Casa Velazquez - Universidad de Zaragoza. [Some prehilalian features in Maltese]. — 2016. “From Maltese phonology to morphogenesis: A tribute to David Cohen.” In Shifts and Patterns in Maltese, edited by Gilbert Puech and Benjamin Saade, 1–15. De Gruyter. Vassalli, Michael A. 1791. Mylsen Phoenico-Punicum sive Grammatica Melitensis. Apud Antonium Fulgoni. — 1796. Ktŷb yl klŷm Mâlti, ’mfysser byl-Latǐn u byt-Taljânm, sive liber dictionum Melitensium. Roma. Reedited by Frans Sammut (2002): Lexicon ta’ Mikiel Anton Vassalli. Malta: SKS. — 1827. Grammatica della Lingua Maltese. 2nd edition. Malta: Printed for the Author. [Grammar of the Maltese Language]. Wettinger, Godfrey. 1985. The Jews of Malta in the Late Middle Ages. Malta: Midsea books. Wettinger, Godfrey and Fsadni, Michael. 1968. Peter Caxaro’s Cantilena. Malta: Lux Press. Wolf, Matthew. 2016. “Cyclicity and non-cyclicity in Maltese: Local ordering of phonology and morphology of OT-CC.” Harmonic Grammar and Harmonic Serialism. Equinox. [pre-publication (2011): http://ling.auf.net/lingBuzz/001319].

    In: The Emergence of Grammars Editor: Michela Russo

    ISBN: 978-1-53619-888-1 © 2021 Nova Science Publishers, Inc.

    Chapter 6

    SONORITY AND REDUPLICATION: AN ATTEMPT TO REDUCE THE SONORITY CONDITION TO A TEMPLATIC CONDITION Guillaume Enguehard Department of linguistics, University of Orléans, LLL UMR 7270 CNRS, Orléans, France

    ABSTRACT In this chapter, I argue that the implementation of sonority with melodic complexity makes it possible to reduce the Sonority Condition found in some reduplication mechanisms to a simple Templatic Condition. I apply this theoretical possibility to consonants and vowels in Gothic, Sanskrit, and Nakanai, and I show that the dimension of the reduplicative template can condition the sonority of the reduplicated segments: ‘large’ templates reduplicate more complex segments (less sonorous) and ‘small’ templates reduplicate less complex segments (more sonorous). These preliminary results provide an understanding of the possible theoretical bridges between sonority and templates.



    Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected].

    222

    Guillaume Enguehard

    Keywords: Sonority, Reduplication, Complexity, Templates, Length

    1. INTRODUCTION1 This article discusses the relationship between reduplication and sonority through some well-known examples where the nature of the reduplicated material is assumed to be conditioned by its position in the sonority scale illustrated in Table 1. Table 1. Schematic representation of the sonority scale low vowels > mid vowels > high vowels > sonorants > fricatives > stops Jespersen 1904, 187; Selkirk 1984, 112, i.a.

    This Sonority Condition on reduplication processes comes with a more widespread Templatic Condition whereby the reduplicated material is limited to a fixed number of segments. There are therefore at least two possible factors conditioning reduplication. Recent studies formalize them using two distinct theoretical concepts: e.g., skeletal positions and syllabic constituency in Steriade (1988), or prosody and sonority in Carlson (1997). I take this work in reverse by arguing that the Sonority Condition and the Templatic Condition could be unified. To do this, it is necessary to introduce some conclusions of Government Phonology (Kaye et al. 1985, 1990) such as the correlation between sonority, melodic complexity and spreading (Harris 1990). In the first section, I present some examples of reduplication processes conditioned by the sonority of consonants as well as the sonority of vowels. These examples suggest that the Templatic Condition is not sufficient to account for all reduplication phenomena. 1

    This article is an amended and extended version of a text previously published in Enguehard and Luo (2019). It presents data and ideas that do not appear in the original article. By convention, I use the transcription systems used by the authors from whom the other examples are taken. In reduplication examples, reduplicants are underlined.

    Sonority and Reduplication

    223

    In the second section, I approach the notion of sonority from the perspective of Government Phonology. I show how it is possible to capture sonority with melodic complexity and branchingness. Finally, in the last section, I show to what extent it is conceivable to reduce the Sonority Condition to a Templatic Condition. The results are not entirely satisfactory for those interested in modelling linguistic data, but they do provide an understanding of the possible theoretical bridges between sonority and templates.

    2. THE SONORITY CONDITION 2.1. Reduplication and Templates One of the first dichotomies that appear in the description of reduplication is the difference between complete and partial reduplication (Aoki 1963). The first consists of repeating all the segments of the stem (e.g., Nez-Perce q̓eyéx ‘chub’, q̓eyexq̓éyex ‘small chub’; Aoki 1963, 43), while the second is characterized by selecting only part of the segments of the stem (e.g., Nez Perce háˑcwal ‘son’, hahácwal ‘sons’; Aoki 1963, 42). A wellknown example of Mokilese (Austronesian, Micronesia) partial reduplication is given in (2). What is interesting to observe is the regular shape of the reduplicant, even when it selects only a part of the root segments. At first sight, one can object that the number of segments that are part of the reduplicant in (2a-c) is not regular: three segments in (2a), two in (2b), two or three in (2c). However, a generalization emerges from a more careful examination: if there are only two segments in the reduplicant, last of them is lengthened (e.g., paːpa, onnonop). Provided that long segments involve two positions in Autosegmental Theory (Goldsmith 1976, and more specifically McCarthy 1979), Mokilese reduplicants in Table 2 systematically contain three positions (see Levin 1985). This is what we call a template.

    224

    Guillaume Enguehard Table 2. Mokilese reduplication

    a.

    b.

    c.

    Root

    Progressive

    Gloss

    pɔdok

    pɔdpɔdok

    ‘to be planting’

    kasɔ

    kaskasɔ

    ‘to be throwing’

    pa

    paːpa

    ‘to be weaving’

    wia

    wiːwia

    ‘to be doing’

    onop

    onnonop

    ‘to be preparing’

    andip

    andandip

    ‘to be spitting’

    Levin 1985, 35.

    Unlike the Mokilese case, partial reduplication does not necessarily select the first segments of the root nor does it necessarily select contiguous segments. For instance, we find the English table-shmable and the Marathi saman-suman ‘luggage, etc’ (compare with saman ‘luggage’, Apte 1968). In both examples above, the selection of non-initial or non-contiguous segments can be explained by the presence of a segment belonging to the reduplicative morpheme that takes precedence over the segments of the root (see Alderete et al. 1999 for a typology of reduplications with fixed segmentism). This segment is [ʃm] in the English example and [u] in the Marathi example. We will leave this specific case aside in this article. Only partial reduplications where the nature of the reduplicated part apparently cannot be explained by a templatic constraint or the presence of a fixed segment will be discussed.

    2.2. Reduplication and the Sonority of Consonants The Gothic example in Table 3 is another case of partial reduplication with a variable number of segments in the reduplicant. The perfect forms show a prefix consisting of: i. a fixed segment , and ii. a reduplicated part of the initial consonants of the root. This reduplicated part can be made of zero (e.g., ái-áuk), one (e.g., tái-tōk) or two segments (e.g., skaí-skáiþ)

    Sonority and Reduplication

    225

    depending on the available material. Unlike the Mokilese case, these segments never get longer or shorter. Therefore, the number of positions included in the reduplicant does not seem to be always the same. If we look at the data in detail, we notice that the initial onset of the root is completely reduplicated if: i. it is empty or simple (3a), or ii. if it has a falling sonority (3b). However, if the initial onset of the root has a rising sonority, only its first member is reduplicated (3c). Table 3. Gothic reduplication

    a.

    b.

    c.

    Infinitive

    Perfect

    Gloss

    áukan

    ái-áuk

    ‘to add’

    tēkan

    tái-tōk

    ‘to touch’

    skáidan

    skaí-skáiþ

    ‘to divide’

    ga-staldan

    ga-stái-stald

    ‘to possess’

    grētan

    gaí-grōt

    ‘to weep’

    slēpan

    saí-slēp

    ‘to sleep’

    Enguehard and Luo 2019, 37–38 sec. Wright 1910, § 312.

    The difference between (3b) and (3c) is not directly related to the specific status of /s/ in consonant clusters (see Kaye 1992), since /s/ is found in both (3b) and (3c). We can therefore conclude that sonority conditions the reduplication of Gothic onsets. A provisional generalization is provided in Table 4. Table 4. Gothic reduplication selects segments up to the least sonorous member in the initial onset.

    226

    Guillaume Enguehard

    Sanskrit reduplication is very similar to that of the Gothic one. Simple onsets are completely reduplicated (5a), but complex onsets are not (5b, c): i. only the second member of complex onsets with a falling sonority is reduplicated (5b), and ii. only the first member of complex onsets with a rising sonority is reduplicated (5c). As in the Gothic case, this contrast between (5b) and (5c) is not directly related to the specific status of /s/, because /s/ can be found in both types of complex onsets. Table 5. Sanskrit reduplication

    a.

    b.

    c.

    Root

    Intensive

    Gloss

    pat

    paːpat-

    (paːpat-)

    ‘to fly, fall’

    gam

    gamgam-

    (janggam-)

    ‘to go’

    stan

    tanstan-

    (tanstan-)

    ‘to thunder’

    ɕcaut

    cauɕcut-

    (coɕcut-)

    ‘to drip’

    krand

    kan-i-krand-

    (kan-i-krand-)

    ‘to cry out’

    svap

    saːsvap-

    (saːsvap-)

    ‘to sleep’

    Enguehard and Luo 2019, 39 sec. Steriade 1988.

    A generalization based on sonority can therefore be formulated Table 6. The difference between Gothic and Sanskrit is that the former reduplicates everything to the least sonorous member of the initial onset, while Sanskrit reduplicates only the least sonorous member. Table 6. Sanskrit reduplication selects the least sonorous member in the initial onset.

    Sonority and Reduplication

    227

    2.3. Reduplications and the Sonority of Vowels The Sonority Condition also occurs in some reduplication mechanisms involving vowels. Sanskrit formation of the full grade is an example of vowel reduplication conditioned by the sonority hierarchy. When the first nucleus of the root is made of two vocoids (a vowel or a glide2), only the highest one is instanciated in the reduplicant (7b). Table 7. Sanskrit Reduplication

    a.

    b.

    c.

    Root

    Full grade

    Gloss

    pan-

    papan-a

    ‘to admire’

    pat-

    papat-a

    ‘to fly’

    smai

    sismay-a

    ‘to smile’

    yaj

    iyaj-a

    ‘to offer’

    baudh

    bubodh-a

    ‘to wake’

    vac

    uvac-a

    ‘to speak’

    Steriade 1988, 94.

    In terms of sonority, I suggest the generalization in Table 8, which is very close to the generalization on the reduplication of Sanskrit consonants proposed in Table 6. Table 8. Sanskrit reduplication selects the least sonorous member in the first nucleus. The Sonority Condition is not limited to Indo-European languages. It is also found in the Nakanai (Austrionesian, Papua New Guinea) reduplication illustrated in Table 9. In this language, reduplication can target two (9a, b)

    2

    u and i are realized by glides before another vowel. v behaves like a glide.

    228

    Guillaume Enguehard

    or one vowel segment in the root (9c, d). The reason why some reduplicants contain two vowels while others contain one vowel is beyond the scope of this article, but the reader can refer to Johnston (1980, 148–150) for a complete description, and the work of Carlson (1997) and Butska (1999) for a modelization of this aspect in Optimality Theory. What interests me in the Nakanai data is the nature of the vowel contained in the reduplicant when it is limited to a single vowel segment (9c, d). One can observe that the reduplicated vowel is the first vowel of the root when the second vowel is higher (9c), and it is the second vowel of the root when the first vowel is higher (9d). Table 9. Nakanai reduplication

    a.

    b.

    c.

    d.

    Root

    Gloss

    palopalo

    ‘wakening/baskets’

    milamila

    ‘salty’

    rovirovi

    ‘knowing’

    otaota

    ‘veins’

    paipati

    ‘floating’

    kaukavu

    ‘wearing lime on face’

    gaugapu

    ‘beads’

    keikedi

    ‘being careful’

    ababi

    ‘getting’

    ololi

    ‘digging’

    popou

    ‘sitting’

    bebeu-a

    ‘returning’

    papita

    ‘muddy’

    babeta

    ‘wet’

    mamota

    ‘vines’

    kakusa

    ‘shouting’

    Johnston 1980, 148–150.

    Sonority and Reduplication

    229

    In terms of sonority, the generalization can be formulated as Table 10. The most prominent difference between Sanskrit and Nakanai is that the former targets the least sonorous vowel while the latter targets the most sonorous vowel. Table 10. Nakanai reduplication selects the most sonorous vowel in the root.

    All the data presented in this section suggest a condition on reduplication mechanisms that is different from a simple templatic constraint. This condition has been modelled in studies such as Steriade (1988), Carlson (1997) and Butska (1999) with extra-syllabicity or peak hierarchy constraints. Both proposals admit that the Templatic Condition is not enough to capture the data in detail. I do not intend to be as exhaustive as the studies mentioned above in accounting for the details of the data. For this reason, I will not discuss this work in detail3. The contribution of this article is of a purely theoretical nature: I will show to what extent the Sonority Condition can be reduced in abstracto to a Templatic Condition if we consider the recent developments in Government Phonology. This reduction provides a way to account for the generalizations in Tables 4, 6, 8 and 10 with less theoretical concepts but it does not allow more detailed analysis of the data at this time.

    3. THE FORMALIZATION OF SONORITY 3.1. Sonority and Complexity The notion of sonority scale is used for other phenomena such as syllable structure (Selkirk 1984) and its correlates, i.e., lenition and fortition. The work of Lass 1984, Trask 1996, Lavoie 2001, Szigetvári 2008 and Ségéral and Scheer 2008 (i.a.) argue that the lenition path reflects the sonority scale 3

    See Enguehard and Luo (2019) for a discussion concerning the proposition of Steriade (1988).

    230

    Guillaume Enguehard

    in examples like Latin patrem > padre > peðre (> French père) ‘father’ (Lavoie 2001, 14). However, some weakening processes do not fall within the scope of the sonority scale. This is the case, for example, of debuccalization and deletion (e.g., peðre > *peɦre > père). Harris (1990) proposes a unification of sonority increase, debuccalization and deletion through a unary approach to phonological features. By admitting the principles of Element Theory introduced by Kaye et al. (1985, 1989), according to which the negative value of a feature is represented by the absence of this feature, he shows that lenition can always be represented by the loss of melodic material: either obstruction features (11a), or place features (11b) or both (11c). Thus, the lenition path does not only reflect a sonority scale, but also a complexity scale. Table 11. Unified representation of lenition processes a. Sonority increase

    b. Debuccalization

    c. Deletion

    padre > peðre

    padre > peɦre

    padre > père

    Harris 1990, examples are mine.

    By reducing the lenition path to a loss of features, Harris (1990) shows that the sonority scale can be interpreted as a possible manifestation of the complexity scale at the root node. That is to say, the lowest-sonority consonants (i.e., stops) contain two obstruction elements (12a), fricatives contain only one (12b), and sonorants do not contain any (12c).

    Sonority and Reduplication

    231

    Table 12. Sonority scale and complexity scale a. Stops

    b. Fricatives

    c. Sonorants

    Based on Harris 1990.

    A non-circular formalization of the sonority scale is therefore possible for consonants, but it does not seem to be possible for vowels at first sight. The hierarchy in Table 1 implies that the sonority of vowels depends on their height. Although the relationship between consonant obstruction and vowel height is obvious from an articulatory point of view, the latter is not captured by a complexity scale in the standard version of Element Theory (see Backley 2011): /i/, /u/ and /a/ have the same number of features. Even if we limit ourselves to the element |A| responsible for height, both mid and low vowels have a single element |A| Table 13. Thus, the complexity scale of vowels is not inversely proportional to their sonority scale. Table 13. Vowel complexity in Element Theory

    See Kaye et al. 1985, Harris and Lindsey 1995 and Bacley 2011.

    232

    Guillaume Enguehard

    Nevertheless, another unary approach to phonological features has from the beginning proposed a relationship between height and complexity: Particle Phonology (Schane 1984, Carvalho 1993, 1994). In this model, the higher is a vowel the more it contains |A|. Taking into account that recent developments by Carvalho and Faust (2019, unpublished) show that |A| is the representation of an unavailable gap on a given tier, this model supports the hypothesis that the equation “more sonorous = less complex” is held in the domain of vowels as well as in the domain of consonants. In conclusion, we obtain the complexity scale in Table 14 matching the sonority scale. Table 14. Complexity scale in Particle Phonology

    Adapted from Carvalho 1993, 1994 and Carvalho and Faust 2019.

    In summary, I have shown that the notion of sonority can be reduced to the notion of complexity both with regard to consonants and vowels. This is a first step to bring the Sonority Condition closer to the Templatic Condition (i.e., both rely on quantity), but the link between the number of features in a segment and the number of skeletal positions in a reduplicant is not yet explicit at this stage.

    Sonority and Reduplication

    233

    3.2. Sonority and Assimilation In their pioneering article on sonority, Hankamer and Aissen (1974) argue that there is a hierarchy between consonants that governs the direction of assimilation in Pāli. When comparing Sanskrit and Pāli, we observe that the consonant clusters of the former are reduced to geminates in the latter Table 15. A competition takes place between the two members of the cluster to find out which one of them takes precedence over the other. In any case, it is the lowest-sonority consonant that is maintained in the Pāli geminate. The other consonant is totally assimilated. What is interesting in this example is that sonority affects the spreading of a segment: less sonorous segments are more likely to spread than more sonorous segments. Table 15. Pāli assimilation

    a.

    b.

    Sanskrit

    Pāli

    Gloss

    takra

    takka

    ‘whey’

    śukla

    sukka

    ‘clear, white’

    karka

    kakka

    ‘a precious stone’

    kilbiṣa

    kibbisa

    ‘sin’

    Murray 1982, 165.

    I argue that this aspect of sonority is captured by the equation ‘more sonorous = less complex’. Autosegmental Theory governs the associations between autosegments by the Well-Formedness Condition (Goldsmith 1976, 48, Clements and Sezer 1982, 218) which stipulates that a P-bearing segment must be associated with a P-feature. It is in accordance with this principle that the empty positions of the templates proposed by McCarthy (1979) must be filled by association or propagation of segments, and the underspecified matrices of Archangeli (1984, 1988) must be filled by assimilation or default insertion. To paraphrase Aristotle, I will summarize this principle by saying that ‘phonology abhors a vacuum’.

    234

    Guillaume Enguehard

    This general tendency to fill empty slots is reflected in Harris’ treatment of assimilation. Since the more sonorous segments are less complex, and therefore contain more vacuum, they are natural targets of assimilation by more complex segments. Harris (1994, 14) describes English nasal homorganicity as “the unspecified segment acquiring the missing feature from its neighbour’. Thus, Pāli assimilation falls under the prediction of the Well-Formedness Condition: the highest-sonority member of the consonant cluster is an underspecified segment that acquires the missing features from its neighbor Table 16. I explain in the next section how it yields to total assimilation. Table 16. Pāli assimilation and segment complexity a.

    b.

    3.3. Sonority and Branchingness Autosegmental Theory represents the assimilation process through a feature branching into two skeletal positions. Considering that assimilation can be conditioned by sonority, the theory therefore makes it possible to establish a relationship between the sonority of a segment and the number of its position. However, this relationship is still too thin to allow us to avoid the notion of sonority in the reduplication mechanisms. At this stage, a

    Sonority and Reduplication

    235

    branching structure conditioned by sonority is only presupposed in cases where assimilation is attested on the surface. In recent decades, studies in Government Phonology have shown that branching structures are not transparent with regard to realization. For example, phonological geminates may not be realized as long segments but rather by a particular resistance to lenition. For instance, Somali differentiates between underlying single stops that are lenited in the intervocalic position (17a) and underlying stop geminates4 that are immune to lenition (17b). This work gives a particular status to branchingness: it is no longer the implementation of duration, but an abstract tool that can be realized sometimes by a long duration, sometimes by strength, and sometimes both. Table 17. Somali virtual geminates Base

    a. 1sg: -(a)t-Ø-aa

    b. 2sg: -(a)t-t-aa

    Gloss

    daqno

    [daqnaðaa]

    [daqnataa]

    ‘feel pain’

    kabbo

    [kabbaðaa]

    [kabbataa]

    ‘sip’

    ͡tʃoogso

    [t͡ʃoogsaðaa]

    [t͡ʃoogsataa]

    ‘stop oneself’

    Ségéral and Scheer 2001b, 323.

    In Luo and Enguehard (2019) and Enguehard and Luo (2020), we have pointed out that the theory is found with two independent devices that govern segment strength: branchingness and lateral relations (Ségéral and Scheer 2001a). The main purpose of our articles is to show that lateral relationships cannot be sufficient to account for the specific inalterability of geminates (see the mentioned articles for a detailed argumentation). Rather than being satisfied with two theoretical tools whose functions overlap, we take the position of generalizing branchingness to all cases of lenition and fortition. Our theory is based on the three postulates in Table 18: 4

    Gemination is confirmed by the morphology: the two parts of the geminate belong to different suffixes.

    236

    Guillaume Enguehard Table 18.

    a.

    Segments always branch onto each other's position

    b.

    Branching provides strength

    c.

    Contours diminish strength5

    This proposition stipulates that segments always spread to each other’s position in order to fill the vacuum mentioned above, but this spreading does not presuppose assimilation on the surface. Assimilation is only a parametric realization of these branching structures, and so is strength. In the Pāli example, the more complex segment automatically branches to the less complex segment (19a) without this spreading being necessarily realized by assimilation or phonetic duration. Then, the less complex segment has its realization inhibited by the fact that it shares its position with another segment (19b), see (18c). Finally, the branchingness of the more complex segment is realized by phonetic length (19c). There emerges a total assimilation. Table 19. Pāli assimilation and segment strength a.

    b.

    c.

    In more figurative terms, the main idea of this theory is that segments are competing for room to realize all their features. More complex segments need more space and they settle in their neighbors’ positions. This implies that less sonorous segments take up more space than more sonorous segments6. 5 6

    By ‘contours’, I mean configurations where a position is shared by several segments. Note that the notion of space used here is by no means synonymous with phonetic duration. On the contrary, the works of Allen 1973, Donegan 1978, Nathan 1989, Beckman et al. 1992,

    Sonority and Reduplication

    237

    4. DERIVING THE SONORITY CONDITION FROM BRANCHINGNESS

    4.1. ‘Large’ Reduplicative Templates Now that I have argued that sonority can be interpreted in terms of quantity (both melodic and skeletal), I show how to account for the reduplications illustrated in the first section using only the Templatic Condition. Consider the generalization on the Gothic reduplication repeated in (20a). Assuming that the sonority scale is related to virtual length7, we can propose the amended generalization in (20b). Table 20. a.

    Gothic reduplication selects segments up to the least sonorous member in the initial onset.

    b.

    Gothic reduplication selects segments up to the longest member in the initial onset.

    In representational terms, this generalization supposes that the reduplicative template can only be satisfied if it is filled by a branching segment. Assuming that consonants systematically branch to each other’s position in order to fill the vacuum, branching onsets always contain a branching segment. In (21a), the first segment that can satisfy the template is the second member of the branching onset, which is reduplicated with its left-hand neighbor. In (21b), the template is satisfied by the first member of the branching onset. Thus, there is no need to collect the following segments. In the last case where no branching segment is available, the reduplication selects a simple segment that spreads to fill the template. Kenstowicz 1996 and Parker (2002) suggest that more sonorous segments are longer than less sonorous ones. 7 Virtual length refers to branchingness, not phonetic duration.

    238

    Guillaume Enguehard Table 21. Gothic reduplication a.

    b.

    The same analysis can be proposed for Sanskrit reduplication, with the difference that it overrides the first segment if it is not able to satisfy the template on its own (22a) 8 . When the first segment is branching, the reduction does not need to look for a segment further (22b). Table 22. Sanskrit reduplication (consonants) a.

    b.

    The generalization on the reduplication of Sanskrit vowels being the same as the generalization on the reduplication of Sanskrit consonants, the autosegmental representation of this mechanism is also based on a “large” reduplicative template. In (23a) and (23b), i branches to the position of a, which is less complex, and it can therefore satisfy the reduplicative template. As for consonants, reduplication overrides segments that are not able to satisfy the reduplicative template.

    8

    The reduplication of rhymes is not represented in (22).

    Sonority and Reduplication

    239

    Table 23. Sanskrit reduplication (vowels) a.

    b.

    4.2. ‘Small’ Reduplicative Templates I now turn to cases where the reduplicative template is too narrow to host branching segments. This is the case of Nakanai. Assuming that sonority is related to virtual length, we can translate (24a) into (24b). Table 24. a.

    Nakanai reduplication selects the most sonorous vowel in the root.

    b.

    Nakanai reduplication selects the shortest vowel in the root.

    In representational terms, this generalization supposes that the reduplicative template of Nakanai cannot host a branching segment. In Table 25, more complex vowels spread to the position of less complex vowels at the V-place level. Thus, o is shorter than u in (25a), and a is shorter than i in (25b).

    240

    Guillaume Enguehard Table 25. Nakanai reduplication

    a.

    b.

    CONCLUSION To conclude, I argued that Government Phonology presents theoretical elements making it possible to reduce sonority to: i. a quantity of melodic features, and then ii. a quantity of skeletal positions. In doing so, I have shown that it is theoretically possible to reduce the Sonority Condition of some reduplication mechanisms to a simple Templatic Condition. I applied this theoretical possibility to consonants and vowels in Gothic, Sanskrit, and Nakanai. In these selected languages, we find processes that in the terms of my proposal imply the existence of reduplicative templates of different dimensions: ‘large’ templates that reduplicate longer segments (less sonorous) and ‘small’ templates that reduplicate shorter segments (more sonorous). This is what is expected if sonority is actually a matter of quantity. In practice, I cannot say that it is already possible to do without the notion of sonority since some phenomena that would deserve to be analyzed in detail have not yet found an explanation. This is the case of Ancient Greek, Klamath (Penutian, United States) and Georgian. In the example in (26), Ancient Greek displays a non-reduplication of initial consonant clusters that do not seem to be branching onset in metrics (26c).

    Sonority and Reduplication

    241

    Table 26. Ancient Greek reduplication

    a.

    b.

    c.

    Present

    Perfect

    Gloss

    erū-

    e-erū-

    ‘to protect’

    pemp-

    pe-pemp-

    ‘to send’

    krī-n-

    ke-kri-

    ‘to separate’

    pne-

    pe-pnū-

    ‘to breathe’

    spēr-

    e-spar-

    ‘to sow’

    h

    e-rru-

    ‘to flow’

    re-

    Steriade 1982.

    In the example in Table 27, Klamath reduplication is optional for the second member of consonant clusters with a great sonority distance (compare 27b and 27c). Table 27. Klamath reduplication

    a.

    b.

    c.

    Root

    Reduplicated

    Gloss

    sdagal-

    sda-sdagal

    ‘pick up a live object’

    tqeːw’

    tqe-tqeːw’

    ‘break with a blow’

    p’nandiːla

    p’na-p’nandiːla

    ‘bury underneath’

    q’laːj

    q’la-q’laːj-

    ‘little blueberries’

    pniaːk’-

    pi-pniaːk’-

    ‘little wild onions’

    q’lamc’

    q’a-q’lmac’-a

    ‘close the eyes’

    Steriade 1988.

    In the example in Table 28, Georgian does not reduplicate roots beginning with a non-harmonic consonant cluster (28c).

    242

    Guillaume Enguehard Table 28. Georgian reduplication

    a.

    b.

    c.

    Reduplicated

    Gloss

    ɣomɣoma

    ‘type of fish’

    pampali

    ‘fluctuation’

    pacxapucx-i

    ‘quick departure’

    rac’k’aruc’k’-i

    ‘to tinkle’

    rguli

    ‘young plant’

    mk’at’i

    ‘mould’

    Butskhrikidze and van de Weijer 2001, 44.

    There is still a lot of work to be done before we can achieve a unification of the Sonority Condition and the Templatic Condition. However, despite the practical weaknesses of my proposal, this article represents one more step towards the understanding of sonority in Government Phonology.

    REFERENCES Alderete, John, Beckman, Jill, Benua, Laura, Gnanadesikan, Amalia, Urbanczyk, Suzanne and McCarthy, John J. 1999. “Reduplication with fixed segmentism”. Linguistic Inquiry, 30.3: 327–364. Allen, William S. 1973. Accent and Rhythm: Prosodic Features of Latin and Greek: A Study in Theory and Reconstruction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Aoki, Haruo. 1963. “Reduplication in Nez Perce”. International Journal of American Linguistics, 29.1: 42–44. Apte, Mahadeo. 1968. Reduplication, Echoformation, and Onomatopoeia in Marathi. Poona: Deccan College Postgraduate and Research Institute. Archangeli, Diana. 1984. Underspecification in Yawelmani Phonology and Morphology. PhD diss., MIT.

    Sonority and Reduplication

    243

    Archangeli, Diana. 1988. “Aspects of Underspecification Theory”. Phonology, 5.2: 83–207. Backley, Philip. 2011. An Introduction to Element Theory. Edinburgh University Press. Beckman, Mary, Edwards, Jan and Fletcher, Janet. 1992. “Prosodic structure and tempo in a sonority model of articulatory dynamics”. In Papers in laboratory Phonology II: Gesture, Segment, Prosody, 68-86. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Butska, Luba. 1999. “Sonority constraints and Nakanai reduplication”. Toronto Working Papers in Linguistics, 16.2: 77–85. Butskhrikidze, Marika and van de Weijer, Jeroen. 2001. “On De-Affrication in Modern Georgian”. Linguistics in the Netherlands, 18.1: 41–51. Carlson, Katy. 1997. Sonority and Reduplication in Nakanai and Nuxalk (Bella Coola). Carvalho (Brandão de), Joaquim. 1993. “De quoi sont faites les voyelles ? Phonologie tridimensionnelle des particules et harmonie vocalique”. In De Natura Sonorum, edited by Bernard Laks and Marc Plénat, 65–100. Paris: Presses universitaires de Vincennes. [“What are vowels made of? Three-dimensional phonology of particles and vocalic harmony”. In Nature Sounds]. Carvalho (Brandão de), Joaquim. 1994. “What are vowels made of? The “No-rule” approach and particle phonology”. Studia Linguistica, 48.1: 1–27. [Linguistics Studies]. Carvalho (Brandão de), Joaquim and Faust, Noam. 2019. Getting features from structure: Contrast, harmony and the templatic representation of vowels. University of Paris 8. Clements, George N. and Sezer, Engin. 1982. “Vowel and consonant disharmony in Turkish”. In The Structure of Phonological Representations, edited by Harry van der Hulst and Norval Smith, 213– 255. Dordrecht: Foris. Donegan, Patricia. 1978. On the Natural Phonology of Vowels. PhD diss., Ohio State University. Enguehard, Guillaume and Xiaoliang Luo. 2020. “A note on the strength of vowels”. Acta Linguistica Academica, 67.1, 109–120.

    244

    Guillaume Enguehard

    Enguehard, Guillaume and Xiaoliang Luo. 2019. “Length and reduplication of branching onsets”. In Phonetics and Phonology in Action, edited by Jolanta Szpyra-Kozłowska and Marek Radomski, 33–46. Berlin: Peter Lang. Goldsmith, John. A. 1976. Autosegmental Phonology. PhD diss., MIT. Hankamer, John and Aissen, Judith. 1974. “The Sonority Hierarchy”. In Papers from the Parasession on Natural Phonology, edited by Anthony Bruck, 131–145. Chicago: Chicago Linguistic Society. Harris, John. 1990. “Segmental Complexity and Phonological Government”. Phonology, 7.2: 255–300. Harris, John. 1994. English Sound Structure. Oxford: Blackwell. Harris, John and Lindsey, Geoff. 1995. “The elements of phonological representation”. In Frontiers of Phonology: Atoms, Structures, Derivations, edited by Jacques Durand and Francis Katamba, 34–79. Harlow: Longman. Jespersen, Otto. 1904. Lehrbuch der Phonetik. Leipzig: B. G. Teubner. [Phonetics textbook]. Johnston, Raysmond L. 1980. Nakanai of New Britain: The Grammar of an Oceanic Language. Canberra: The Australian National University. Kaye, Jonathan. 1992. “Do you believe in Magic? The story of s+C sequences”. SOAS Working Papers in Linguistics and Phonetics, 2: 293–313. Kaye, Jonathan, Lowenstamm, Jean and Vergnaud, Jean-Roger. 1985. “The internal structure of phonological representations: A theory of charm and government”. Phonology Yearbook, 2: 305–328. Kaye, Jonathan, Lowenstamm, Jean and Vergnaud, Jean-Roger. 1990. “Constituent Structure and Government in Phonology”. Phonology, 7.2: 193–231. Kenstowicz, Michael. 1996. “Quality-sensitive stress”. Rivista di Linguistica, 9:157–187. [Journal of Linguistics]. Lass, Roger. 1984. Phonology: An Introduction to Basic Concepts. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Lavoie, Lisa M. 2001. Consonant Strength: Phonological Patterns and Phonetic Manifestations. [2014]. New York: Routledge.

    Sonority and Reduplication

    245

    Levin, Juliette. 1985. A Metrical Theory of Syllabicity. PhD diss., MIT. Luo, Xiaoliang, and Enguehard, Guillaume. 2019. “Strength is Length”. Acta Linguistica Academica, 66.4, 1–26. McCarthy, John J. 1979. Formal Problems in Semitic Phonology and Morphology. PhD diss., MIT Cambridge, Mass. Murray, Robert W. 1982. “Consonant Cluster Developments in Pāli”. Folia Linguistica Historica, 3.2: 162–184. Nathan, Geoffrey S. 1989. “Preliminaries to a theory of phonological substance: The substance of sonority.” In Linguistic Categorization, edited by Roberta Corrigan, Fred Eckman and Michael Noonan, 55–67. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Parker, Stephen G. 2002. Quantifying the Sonority Hierarchy. PhD diss., University of Massachusetts. Schane, Sanford A. 1984. “The fundamentals of particle phonology”. Phonology, 1:129–155. Ségéral, Philippe and Scheer, Tobias. 2001a. “Abstractness in phonology: the case of virtual geminates”. In Constraints and Preferences, edited by Katarzyna Dziubalska-Kołaczyk, 311–337. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Ségéral, Philippe and Scheer, Tobias. 2001b. “La Coda-Miroir”. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris, 96: 107–152. Ségéral, Philippe and Scheer, Tobias. 2008. “Positional factors in lenition and fortition”. In Lenition and Fortition, edited by Joaquim Brandão de Carvalho, Tobias Scheer and Philippe Ségéral, 130–172. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Selkirk, Elisabeth. 1984. On the Major Class Features and Syllable Theory. MA diss., MIT. Steriade, Donca. 1982. Greek Prosodies and the Nature of Syllabification. PhD diss., MIT. Steriade, Donca. 1988. “Reduplication and Syllable Transfer in Sanskrit and Elsewhere”. Phonology, 5.1: 75–155. Szigetvári, Péter. 2008. “What and where”. In Lenition and Fortition, edited by Joaquim Brandão de Carvalho, Tobias Scheer and Philippe Ségéral, 93-129. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.

    246

    Guillaume Enguehard

    Trask, Robert L. 1996. A Dictionary of Phonetics and Phonology. London: Routledge. Wright, Joseph. 1910. Grammar of the Gothic language. [1954]. Oxford: Clarendon Press.

    In: The Emergence of Grammars Editor: Michela Russo

    ISBN: 978-1-53619-888-1 © 2021 Nova Science Publishers, Inc.

    Chapter 7

    REPETITIONS, RESTS INSERTION AND SCHWA IN 16TH CENTURY FRENCH POLYPHONY: AN EMERGENT SUB-GRAMMAR IN FRESNEAU’S SONGS? Timothée Premat1,*, Sophie Chouvion2,† and Axelle Verner3,‡ 1

    2

    UMR 7023 SFL CNRS, University of Paris 8, France Department of Musicology, UMR 5317 IHRIM CNRS, Lyon 2 University, France 3 Singer (Mezzo-Soprano), CNSMD Lyon, France

    ABSTRACT This chapter is about constituents matching grammar in textsetting. If most traditional stanzaic French songs show textsetting configurations that are predictable given a widely spread grammar, it does not seem to be the case for Henry Fresneau’s songs. Indeed these 16th century polyphonic songs show a specific use of derivations of the text, rests insertion and final schwa elision. *

    Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected]. Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected]. ‡ Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected]. †

    248

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner Comparing Fresneau’s songs to others’, we try to establish if these matchings can be generated by the same grammar, or if Fresneau’s songs need a specific one. Using Optimality Theory, we show that most of Fresneau’s grammar can be implemented inside a wider diasystemic grammar, but that the final schwa elision in Fresneau’s songs requires the activation of new constraints. We propose to analyze it as a dialectalization of the textsetting grammar, and we outline a model for the emergence of this sub-grammar.

    Keywords: textsetting, constituents matching, French 16th century polyphony, dialectal grammar, final schwa

    1. INTRODUCTION This study is based on the analysis of 20 songs among the work of Henry Fresneau, compared with two control corpora, a small one comprised of songs similar to Fresneau’s, and a wider one, comprised of songs which do not belong to the same genre, form and time as Fresneau’s production 1 . Reading Fresneau’s songs, one may have the sense that it does not respect the usual grammar of French textsetting for constituents matching – this was, in fact, our first impression. Indeed, in Fresneau’s songs, one can find situations like (1), in which transformations have been applied to the text. (1) Fresneau’s song Ung Cordelier2 (a) Text as given by the metrics Ung cordelier home de bone mise avoit gaigné a je ne scay quel jeu3 (b) Text as sung by the superius Ung cordelier home de bone mise avoit gaigné a je ne scay quel jeu a je ne scay a je ne scay [je ne scay quel jeu

    1

    For their precious and generous feedback, we express our gratitude towards François Dell, JeanLouis Aroui, Romain Benini, and Joaquim Brandão de Carvalho. Special thanks go to Yolandi Ribbens-Klein for her amazing and generous help. All remaining errors and approximations are ours. 2 16th century titles are quoted as they are in the table of contents of the historical source. 3 ‘A Franciscan, elegant man,/had won at whatever game…’

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    249

    Other unusual situations include things like (2), in which the word-final schwa elision is not predictable based on the usual textsetting grammar. In (2b), elision of the final schwa of the second mamye would have been expected, but this is not what is suggested by the music (‘(ə)’ note an elided schwa and ‘ə’ a pronounced schwa). (2) Fresneau’s song Ung advocat dist a sa feme (a) Text as given by the metrics mamy(ə) or sa que jourons nous4 (b) Text as sung by the superius mamyə mamyə or sa que jourons nous Given that the processes illustrated by (1) and (2) are not free but constrained, modelling their specificity as being some kind of idiolectal or dialectal grammar is a tempting hypothesis. Our control corpus comprised of songs similar to Fresneau’s production refutes the idiolectal grammar hypothesis, since all the unexpected findings in Fresneau’s songs are also found in other songs from the same time and genre. On the contrary, the dialectal grammar hypothesis seems confirmed: (1) and (2) are allowed in Fresneau’s and similar composers’ songs, but seems prohibited in our wider control corpus. In this chapter, we only address some aspects of textsetting: the constituent matching constraints triggered by stanza periodicity; the repetitions and transformations of textual material (as in (1)); the locus of rest insertion; and the consequences of the latter two phenomena on final schwa elision (as in (2)). We intend to demonstrate that, despite the important surface differences between Fresneau’s songs and our wider control corpus songs, most of Fresneau’s specificity can be modelled using the same grammar, if this grammar is made sensitive to the ‘stanzaic/non-stanzaic’ parameter5. We use 4

    ‘So, my dear, what will we gamble?’ As will be explained in section 3, in this chapter, we use the word stanza not only for text description but also for music description. When a text has a stanzaic periodicity and that the music matched with this text have the same stanza-based periodicity, we characterize their setting as constituting a stanzaic song. 5

    250

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    Optimality Theory (abbreviated: OT) to do so. Allowance of (1), for instance, can be inferred from the non-stanzaic status of Fresneau’s songs, if deriving (1b) belongs to textsetting and not only to metrics. However, our wider textsetting grammar fails to predict the word-final schwa elision (as in (2)), though it is not erratic and can be properly predicted. Therefore, we need to create a sub-set inside the grammar, whose motivations remains speculative, and which acts like a dialectal deviation regarding the wider grammar. In the first section, we describe our corpora and the difficulties working on early music sources. In the second section, we address the general question of constituents matching and we expose briefly the linguistic, metrical and musical facts and theories we will be using. The third section is dedicated to what we call our ‘diasystemic’ constituents textsetting grammar, i.e., the grammar attested in our stanzaic songs control corpus, considered as paragon and diasystem of what is to be expected in French songs. The fourth section exposes the specificities of Fresneau’s constituents matching. Finally, the fifth section deals with modeling Fresneau’s constituents matching grammar and shows that some of the surface variation should not be managed by using a dialectal deviation of the grammar, but by modelling correctly the diasystemic grammar, while the final schwa elision remains unpredictable from this diasystemic grammar. Remarks on the preconditions of expression of these specificities lead us to outline a possible model for the emergence of this dialectal sub-grammar.

    1.1. Fresneau and His Work Fresneau’s work, published between 1538 and 1554, belongs to the style of the Parisian Song, in which the word Parisian has a stylistic and not a geographic meaning. The Parisian Song is defined in opposition to the Franco-Flemish style, which is more serious in the texts and rigorous in the composition than the Parisian Song. The Parisian Song is also a less

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    251

    homogeneous style, concerning both musical composition and textual registers (Bernstein 1978). Indeed, Fresneau used various stylistic devices in his compositions. If he composed some syllabic moments with strict synchronization between the voices, he seemed to have preferred a more complex writing, using a rather free imitative counterpoint, with or without syllabicity. All his songs were composed in four parts: superius, altus or contratenor, tenor and bassus. Due to the loss of one bassus book6, this voice is missing in 13 of our 20 songs. It should be noted that in this kind of 16th century polyphony, the voices are somehow independent: each voice, while participating in the general melodic and rhythmic form of the song, has its own structure. Concerning the texts, Fresneau used some courtly songs and numerous narrative texts, the latter being satirical and/or often about sexuality. The text seems to have an existence independent from the music: an autonomous metrical form can be established, different songs can be composed over the same text by different composers, and some texts are attested in a literary form independent from their music (for instance, the song Ung cordelier corresponds to Marot’s epigram D’un Cordelier). In any case, it seems that Fresneau always composed his music after the writing of the text, composing the music for a given text. It should be noted that Fresneau’s music never have a periodicity base on stanza periodicity in the text.

    1.2. Main Corpus and Control Corpora As stated above, we compare a main corpus of Fresneau’s songs with two control corpora. A list of all songs with their sources can be found in the appendix of this chapter.

    6

    The bassus book of the Difficile des Chansons. Second livre… edited by J. Moderne.

    252

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    Our main corpus comprises 20 songs out of the 24 songs and one motet attributed to Fresneau. The 4 remaining songs and the motet have been excluded, because they were not suitable for our methodology. 7 This Fresneau corpus is compared to two control corpora. The first one is designed to establish whether or not what we find in Fresneau’s work is specific, compared to what we usually find in others’ songs. The idea behind this control corpus is that general properties of textsetting are mainly constrained by the rhythmic structure of the language (as partially hypothesized by Dell and Halle 2009), and should thus be found in a more or less alike fashion in many different corpora. We call this common textsetting grammar the ‘diasystemic’ grammar, without making any assumption about whether this diasystemic grammar is embedded in a wider diasystemic grammar or if it is already wide enough to be the diasystemic grammar for all French songs. Regardless of the possibility for a wider diasystemic grammar than that of our control corpus, we consider our diasystemic grammar as being the unmarked form of French textsetting. In a relative vision of markedness (in the sense of a deviation from that was expected), we see no problem with the idea that, if one wants to assume a wider diasystemic grammar, ours would be a marked form of this wider grammar, but would still be the unmarked grammar for the songs it contains. This diasystemic control corpus is composed of 16 trouvère’s songs th (12 -13th century), 31 songs from the work of Guillaume de Machaut (14th century) and 21 songs from Jehan Chardavoine’s collection of voix de ville (16th century). In addition to this set of songs from the Middle Ages and the 16th century, we also considered the results of Dell’s investigations on French traditional songs (Dell 1989; 2003; 2015; Dell and Halle 2009). One important aspect to consider here is that Dell’s songs, like ours diasystemic songs, are stanzaic, both in text and in music. It means that stanza is a relevant constituent not only for metrics but also for music: both have a periodicity based on this constituent. We refer to this first control corpus,

    7

    The excluded songs are: Frere Jehan (in addition to the bassus, the altus is missing), the Fricassee, Trac trac trac and Le Jeu m’ennuye (we were unable to restitute their metrical form). The motet is written in Latin.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    253

    containing both ours and Dell’s analysis, as the ‘diasystemic control corpus’, with the precautions on embedded diasystems explained above. The second control corpus is designed to establish if the singularities we found in Fresneau’s work regarding the diasystemic control corpus are either specific to Fresneau’s writing, or to the genre of the Parisian song, or, to be more rigorous, possibly to a subset of songs within this genre. This corpus is comprised of 4 songs by Clément Janequin, one by Pierre Certon and one by Pierre Passereau. We refer to this control corpus as the ‘idiolectal control corpus’.

    1.3. Reading and Interpreting Sources To study textsetting on an early corpus, one cannot be dependent of the choices made by another scholar, because most music editions lack critical apparatus and clear labelling of editorial interventions. But working directly on the historical sources is not an easy thing to do either: in a printed historical source, a lot of elements requires interpretation. For instance, when there is large melisma in the music, it is most of the time quite impossible to determine the position of the syllables. Sometimes the printed sources seem to provide guidance information, such as ‘visual alignment’, which can be interpreted as a clue for textsetting. However, most of the time the historical source does not provide such visual alignment, as can be seen in the facsimile in Figure 1, where the text is printed with very few efforts made to locate each syllable under the right note. Our interpretation of syllables location is given in italics below the text of the facsimile. Apart from the positions of syllables in melismas, textual repetitions present another issue. Some textual repetitions are fully written in the text (the repeated segments are written twice), but others are only indicated by a bis sign . In this case, it is often very hard to know precisely which segment of the text should be repeated. The worst scenario is when both melisma and repetition are needed, as in Figure 1.

    254

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    In this example, despite the repetition sign, there are more notes to sing than syllables to pronounce, therefore a melisma is probably needed. In this case, the melisma would be on the G F E D, on the first syllable of the last word (the score is in key of C).

    Figure 1. Approximate facsimile of the altus score from the song Si vous la baizes comptes 158.

    Faced with these problems, we adopted a cautious approach. On Fresneau’s, Janequin’s, Certon’s, and Passereau’s songs, we established our own edition from the historical printed sources, and with clear labelling of the parts based on our own interpretations. On the trouvères’ and Machaut’s songs, we compared existing modern editions with the manuscript sources in order to locate and label the parts based on the interpretation from the editors, and to restitute the lectio of the source. On Chardavoine’s songs, we were able to establish our analysis right over the historical printed source, because this is a simpler music to read. Then, when we had annotated the properties of constituency structure for each song, we used only the parts whose edition was trustworthy to establish the general behavior of the textsetting. Next, we checked that the parts edited with interpretation were consistent with this analysis. If this reduced the extent of our empirical basis, it gave us in return a better insurance of scientificity, as we only use analyses that are attested in trustworthy parts. It turns out that, with regards to the specific properties we are studying in this chapter, there are very few nontrustworthy parts that cannot be consistent with the trustworthy parts.

    8

    ‘If you kiss her, win fifteen points’.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    255

    2. BACKGROUND: PROSODY, METRICS AND MUSIC 2.1. What Is Textsetting? We define textsetting as the way syllables from the text are matched with notes 9 . Matching syllables with notes also means matching their grouping structure and their prominence status. Following Kiparsky (2006), we use a three-module approach: ‘text’ is a module composed of a linguistic representation matched with a metrical pattern; this text module is matched with a music module. Studying textsetting entails investigating what the allowed and prohibited associations between syllables and notes are, including their grouping structure, and the organization of the grammar that regulates these associations. In the following subsections, we will detail some features of each module.

    2.2. The Textual Module The textual module is comprised by the matching between units from the linguistic representation and units from the metrical pattern10. Matching between these two representations is regulated by a grammar that we express using metrical rules. These rules define which matching is allowed and which is prohibited. When a prohibited matching is found, the line is considered as being ill-formed. In our formalization of the metrical rules for textsetting, we only use prosodic units of the linguistic representation. These prosodic units can transmit other type of information, such as syntactic information, assuring for instance some congruence between, on the one hand, syntactic and 9

    In this chapter, a note is an object that can be defined by the three following features: pitch, duration and position of its onset into the metrical structure of music. 10 In this chapter, unless otherwise stated, meter and metrical always refer to the special organization of language in poetry. We do not, for instance, use the word meter to refer to non-poetic features (as in metrical phonology). For music’s meter (alternation of strong and weak beats), the word meter is always specified by another word (e.g., musical meter).

    256

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    semantic information and, on the other hand, metrical and musical structure. Dell and Benini (2020) show, contrary to Hayes’ hypothesis (1989, 224), that purely phonological constraints would generate a partial description of metrics, at least for French. However, the syntactic restrictions they introduce do not seem to be crucial for our study of textsetting. Therefore, our analysis is mainly based on prosodic properties.

    2.2.1. Linguistic Representation: Phonological Phrasing and Schwa The features of the linguistic representation we will be using for the specification of our metrical grammar depend on prosodic phonology, especially on phonological phrasing (abbreviated to PHPH). Studying the prosody of a past state of a language requires a high degree of speculation. We adopt a solution similar to that adopted by Rainsford (2011, 270–272), who defined possible prosodic units. In reconstructing medieval French phonological phrases, he chose to posit a boundary after most lexical words. His possible phonological phrases are wider than the clitic group (for instance, both prenominal and postnominal adjectives belong to the same possible phonological phrase as their noun head), and are supposed to represent the domain of group stress assignment, with stress being located on the last non-schwa syllable of the phonological phrase. As predictability of the extent of group stress in French is not consensual, it should be noted that using these possible phonological phrases does not imply any claim about whether or not they can be restructured into largest phonological phrases (with a mechanism alike Nespor and Vogel’s (2007[1986], 179)) or if prominence contrast will eliminate some of these accents at the surface level (as suggested by Dell (1984, 89–90)), due to the principle of culminativity (Hayes 1995, 24). If one wants to consider the possibility of largest phonological phrases in French, our possible phonological phrases would become minimal phonological phrases. Even if these possible phonological phrases are enough to study constituents matching, they are not suitable for the prediction of 16th century word-final schwa elision. A close investigation of phonetic notations like that of Meigret (1550) shows that the major pattern is that final schwas seem to have been pronounced everywhere except before a vowel-initial word

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    257

    belonging to the same prosodic constituent. The relevant constituent is sometimes co-extensive to our possible phonological phrases but, most of the time, it is wider. In his synthesis on 16th grammarians, Thurot (1966[1881–1884], 166–167) notes that most grammarians prohibit final schwa elision before a semantic, syntactic, or prosodic break, which would be the final boundary of the constituent serving as domain for final schwa elision. However, despite the pattern observable in Meigret’s orthography and supported by other grammarians’ treatises, there are some irregular elisions of final schwas since the beginning of the 16th century, preluding to the contemporary situation in which most final schwas are elided when they are not retained by a consonantal cluster. On the contrary, systematic elision before a vowel-initial word is well attested where there is no prosodic boundary (Thurot 1966[1881–1884], 174–176). We will see that the constituent in which final schwa can be elided before a vowel-initial word is matched with a metrical constituent in poetry, thus preventing us to have to identify it in terms of purely prosodic phonology (i.e., of prosody outside metrics).

    2.2.2. Metrical Representation: Patterns and Association Rules Following the general outlook of generative metrics, we consider the units we identified in the linguistic representation to be matched with equivalent units in the metrical pattern. A metrical pattern is a virtual underlying rhythmic representation made by positions, in fixed number and locations. These positions have a prominence status, and they may imply different levels of grouping structure, as for English iambic pentameter, for instance (Kiparsky 1977). As it is a generative framework, a set of rules or constraints defines what are the allowed matches and mismatches between units from the linguistic representation and units from the metrical pattern. The non-allowed mismatches are supposed to be very rare or non-attested. The metrical patterns we are using have prominent positions only at the end of the hemistich (if there is a half-line structure) and of the line. Such metrical patterns are inspired by the one proposed by Verluyten (1989) and, more directly, by the one used by Aroui (2019) and by Dell and Benini (2020). The two meters more widely used in our corpus are the octosyllable

    258

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    and the decasyllable, the latter having a metrical break (caesura) often located between the fourth and the fifth position. We represent their metrical patterns in (3) using the following conventions: ‘ns’ means that the metrical pattern has n positions, ‘W’ is a non-prominent position (traditionally called ‘weak’ position), ‘S’ is a prominent position (‘strong’ position), ‘[]h’ marks the boundaries of a hemistich and ‘[]l’ the boundaries of a line. (3) Set of the more common metrical patterns for Fresneau’s corpus 8s [w w w w w w w s]l 10s (4/6) [[w w w s]h [w w w w w s]h]l Alongside this set of metrical patterns, a set of constraints defines precisely what the allowed matches and mismatches are, between positions and syllables, considering their prominence status, and between metrical constituents (h and l) and prosodic constituents. In this chapter, we will only explore the rules relevant for our study. They are position-to-syllable matching. In (4), we use lower-case sigma (σ) to represent a stress-less syllable and upper-case sigma (Σ) to represent a syllable that bears the stress of a possible phonological phrase (i.e., the last non-schwa syllable of a phonological phrase). (4) Position-to-syllable matching constraints: a. W → σ/Σ. Every non-prominent position has to be matched with a syllable, b. S → Σ. Every prominent position has to be matched with a syllable that can bear phonological phrase stress, c. σ → ⟨σ⟩/ _]h/l. A non-prominent syllable located at the end of a word whose prominent syllable (Σ) is matched with a prominent position (S) is not to be matched with any position (it is extrametrical), d. {σ, Σ} → W/_...(⟨σ⟩)]h/l. Only syllables that fulfill conditions for (4c) can be extrametrical; every other pronounced (see infra) syllable, regardless its prominence status, has to be matched with a position.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    259

    Figure 2 exemplify how these constraints are applied. The text is the second line of Fresneau’s song Ung jacobin [en prenant son repas] 11. Metrical Pattern Syllables Written text

    [[

    W

    W

    W

    S

    | σ La

    | Σ raye

    | σ a-

    | Σ voit

    ]h [

    W

    W

    W

    W

    W

    S

    ]h]l

    | σ du

    | Σ cul

    | σ tout

    | σ es-

    | σ chau-

    | Σ fe-

    ⟨σ⟩ e

    Figure 2. Matching between metrical pattern and linguistic representation.

    The constraints in (4a–b) regulate the fact that French lines have a constant number of ‘metrified’ syllables. (4b) regulates the fact that French lines have syllables that can bear a phonological phrase’s stress at the end of any metrical constituent. (4c) regulates the fact that variation in the length of French lines is very constrained, depending on whether or not they have extrametrical syllables at the caesura (a configuration traditionally called ‘epic caesura’, rare in our corpus), and/or at the rhyme (‘feminine rhyme’, as the last -e in eschaufee). Finally, (4d) regulates the fact that extrametrical syllables can only occur at the end of metrical constituents. The constraint in (4d) requires commentary: in versified texts, the domain in which a final schwa is elided before a vowel-initial word is identified as being the line and the half-line. In this sense, the final syllable of raye (/rɛjə/) is not matched with any metrical position, because it is elided by external sandhi before avoit (/rɛjə avwɛt/ → [rɛjavwɛt]). The example (5) below applies the principles of final schwa elision and extrametricality to three lines of Fresneau’s song “Encores ung coup je vous pry” (l. 6-8). We use the following conventions: ‘ə’ notes a word-final schwa pronounced and matched with a metrical position, ‘⟨ə⟩’ notes a word-final schwa pronounced but not matched with any metrical position, while ‘(ə)’ notes an elided word-final schwa (which is consequently not matched with a metrical position).

    11

    The translation of the first two lines would be: ‘A Dominican, while eating his lunch,/felt itches on his butt crack’. This song is about prohibition of anal scratches during lunch in a monastery.

    260

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner (5) l.6 Remuez vous faictez fondrə mon am⟨ə⟩ Arest un peu non las pourquoy Car la fureur də votr(ə) amour m’enflam⟨ə⟩12

    2.3. Music’s Grouping Structure Like most textsetting researchers, we use Lerdhal and Jackendoff’s Generative Theory of Tonal Music (1987) as a framework for analyzing music structure and prominences. For studying constituents matching, the relevant musical organization is what Lerdhal and Jackendoff call grouping structure. It should be noted that music grouping structure is not based on music’s metrical structure (i.e., the regular alternation of strong and weak beats and their hierarchical structure). Musical groups can start and end everywhere in the metrical structure of music. Grouping structure depends on relative rhythm (not relative to the musical meter, but to the local contrast of duration of notes) and pitch movement. In this chapter, we only address some aspects of the constituents matching between text and music that seemed less hazardous than others: the insertion of rests, and the iteration of a given music over different texts. These two aspects have important consequences for textsetting. Many other aspects can be studied, but they rely on a clear identification of music’s grouping structure; providing an explicit analysis of the grouping structure is not an easy task, even less so in early music. We often noticed that intuitions about grouping structure were not consistent between the authors of this paper and/or with Lerdhal and Jackendoff’s predictions. Using these intuitions as the basis of a rigorous analysis would represent a major bias. Therefore, we chose to work only on processes that imply an explicit tagging of the grouping structure in the source (rest insertion), and on processes that do not require clear and exhaustive identification of music’s grouping structure (the allowed transformation of the textual data). We also worked 12

    The whole song is direct speech from lovers in an intimate scene. A possible translation would be: ‘Move on! Make my soul melt/Stop a little! Oh no, why?/Because the violence of your love burns me’.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    261

    on the syllabic consequences of these two processes concerning the treatment of the final schwa.

    3. CONSTITUENTS MATCHING IN STANZAIC DIASYSTEMIC GRAMMAR In order to establish what we consider to be a diasystemic grammar of French constituents matching in textsetting, we will deal with the following points: the musical repetitions over the stanza, and stanza by stanza, which characterize stanzaic textsetting (3.1), the consequences it has on the selection of an appropriate target for constituents matching (3.2), and the derivation of the text from its metrified form to its surface form (3.3). Each of the elements analyzed has reached a high degree of consistency in our diasystemic control corpus.

    3.1. Musical Repetitions over the Stanza In a stanzaic text, different texts (organized strings of words) alternate from stanza to stanza. If a stanzaic text is set to music, music can have a periodicity based on the textual stanza. This is what we characterize as a stanzaic song, i.e., a song resulting from a textsetting process for which the stanza is a relevant unit. In this case, the different texts of the different stanzas alternate while being associated with the same music (organized strings of notes). This represents a major challenge for textsetting: matching the same music with different texts. As noted by Halle (2005), stanzaic textsetting imposes the iteration of the same string of notes in an approximatively identical form, i.e., in an equivalent form. He also points out that most of the time, textsetting is studied in stanzaic forms, for both text and music. What does not change from stanza to stanza is the meter and the positions of the metrical constituents’ boundaries. More precisely, when the stanza is written in a single meter, the meter is the same for every line in

    262

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    every stanza, and when the stanza is written in different meters (heterometric stanza), meters are in fixed location inside the stanza, and these locations are repeated from stanza to stanza. If the first stanza of a text has a metrical scheme ABAB, A being one meter and B another one, all the stanzas must therefore have the same ABAB metrical scheme. This principle, stated in the structural dimension of the stanza, suffers only one exception in our diasystemic control corpus. The trouvère’s song Bele Doette has a refrain that is augmented by one line after each one of the three last stanzas. When there are musical repetitions inside a heterometric stanza, these repetitions are congruent with the repetitions of the meters. For instance, if a stanza is composed of two different meters alternating in an ABAB scheme and that there is also periodicity in the music, the music is repeated with considerations for this ABAB scheme. It never happens, at least in our control corpora, that a music composed of two repeated phrases (α and β) will be mismatched with the meter’s repetition. For instance, the mismatch between a meter repetition ABAB and a music repetition ααββ or αββα are strictly prohibited. It can be expressed as follows: (6) STANZAIC REPETITION. In a stanzaic song, if strings of notes matched with an entire line are repeated, they must be repeated only on lines that match the same metrical pattern.

    Figure 3. Alternation of feminine and masculine lines in Machaut’s song Tels rit au main13.

    13

    ‘He laughs in the morning who weeps in the evening’; ‘If Fortuna loves it’s of distant love’.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    263

    Two remarks should be made about this principle. First, the oxytonic or paroxytonic status of the line (often called the masculine/feminine status in reference to the rhyme) is not always specified in the formal structure of the stanza. If so, a masculine line A can alternate with a feminine one A’, which would require the string of notes α matched with A to be derived in an equivalent string of notes α’ that matches A’ paroxytonic pattern and still respects textsetting constraints. This output is widely attested in our diasystemic control corpus, as exemplified in Figure 3 14 . As posttonic syllables are treated as being extrametrical in our analysis (see 2.2.2), α – α’ alternation is not an exception to (6) STANZAIC REPETITION15. The second remark is that in (6), we manipulate the object string of notes matched with entire line as if it was a natural object. In fact, we do consider that such strings of notes should be, at some level, one of the constituents of music’s grouping structure. As it is not a logical need that music has groups matched with a line, and as we explained in 2.3 that we had to be suspicious about our intuitions about music’s constituency, we will go back to this question at the end of this section, after having gathered other pieces of evidence to support this claim. The elements developed in this subsection can be summarized as follows: in a stanzaic song, the same music has to be sung over different prosodic structures. These prosodic structures have only one thing in common: they are well-formed instantiations of the same underlying metrical pattern.

    14

    Note that the song in Figure 3 comes from a Machaut’s song not included in our control-corpus, as the Machaut’s virelais of our control-corpus show fix location of the masculine/feminine status of the rhyme in the stanza. We have numerous trouvère’s examples, but they are not appropriate for illustration, since using them would require a lot of musicological explanations. 15 It should be noted that Dell (2003) documents cases in which this derivation does not seems to be allowed. In fact, the possible candidates he evaluates do not share the same metrical pattern as the original one: he tries to substitute the made-up lines (a) Malbrouck s’en va-t-au combat and (b) Malbrouck s’en va-t-a la guerr’ to the original (c) Malbrouck s’en va-t-en guerre (2003, 516). While (c) has 6 syllables matched with a metrical position and one extrametrical syllable (6s+ə), (a) and (b) have 7 syllables matched with a metrical position (7s). This is consistent with our analysis, as 6s(+ə) and 7s are different metrical pattern.

    264

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    3.2. Matching Groups While Text Changes As explained above, the metrical pattern is the only common denominator between all the prosodic structures of the different lines that can alternate under the same music. This common denominator is a very useful tool for textsetting. To reach a certain degree of matching between music and text constituents, it is enough to deal with the only common prosodic structure: the one constrained by the meter. Hence, the prediction is that breaks in music grouping structure will be allowed only at the end of a metrical constituent, to avoid these breaks falling at the middle of a word or of a clitic group (between a determiner and its head, for instance). In other words, music should not directly target prosodic constituents, but should target metrical constituents. In this regard, the only adaptation of the music from line to line should be masculine/feminine adaptations, as in Figure 3. (6) can therefore be included into a larger principle, given in (7): (7) TARGETED CONSTITUENTS (STANZAIC). In order to perform a steady constituent matching in stanzaic songs, music should only consider metrical constituents. In our control corpus, this principle is well attested, even though there are some slight exceptions. As noted above, it is not always easy to study the grouping structure of music, even more so in early music. However, some precise elements can be used in order to study reliable group boundaries, as for instance the position of rests. In our control corpus, a large majority of the rests are located only at the end of lines. The same aspect has been analyzed in a 16th century corpus, but from a different perspective: for Ouvrard (1981, 10), rest insertion16 at the caesura serves to make the in-line metrical structure audible. We do not agree with such a teleological and

    16

    The reader should note that in the expression rest insertion, rest stands for blank musical event (absence of note on a given amount of time) marking a group boundary and insertion stands for inserted by the textsetting between syllables of the text. By using this convenient periphrasis, we do not want to make any claim about how rests would be set up during the process of music composition.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    265

    surface-oriented approach, but we note that his documentation is very consistent with our claim about stanzaic French textsetting.

    Figure 4. Rest falling inside a metrical constituent, in Machaut’s song Dame mon cuer emportes.17

    Concerning the exceptions to this principle, we found three of them in the Machaut’s songs and one in the trouvères’ songs belonging to our control corpus. We will see shortly that they can be accounted for as being nonstructural. In Machaut’s cases, there is no clue about how to realize the conflict (a rest will fall inside a word), while in the trouvère’s case, the exception lays on the fact that there is extra rhythmic information. In anyway, they remain in strict minority. In our Machaut’s songs, our three counter-examples consist of the insertion of an eighth rest inside a metrical constituent, as illustrated in Figure 4, in the song Dame mon cuer emportes. The eighth rest falls inside the word honneur in the second line of the text. It should be noted that the majority of the rests used in this corpus are quarter rests, which are never inserted outside metrical boundaries. Our trouvère’s counter-examples came from the song Bele Doette, in which the first and the third lines of each stanza have the same music. In the Messine notation of this manuscript, thin rhythmic information is transcribed by the linking between the neumes. Therefore, in Figure 5, the rhythm of the two equivalent strings of notes is not exactly the same, even though the way this difference can be triggered by word boundary is unclear. Anyhow, it seems to operate at a level below the constituency level that is relevant for constituent matching.

    17

    ‘Because it [my heart] has [given itself to you] with so much loyalty/That only in your honor…’.

    266

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    Figure 5. Neumatic differences inside metrical constituents, in the trouvère’s song Bele Doette.18

    In any case, for the trouvère’s as for Machaut’s songs, performing these slight changes of rhythm do not seem to distort the underlying structure of the music and respect the feeling, for the listener, that the musical constituents are equivalent, with or without the changes. Hence, we consider them as having no structural implication (at least at the relevant level for constituents matching). We should also mention that artistic elaboration can consist of disrespecting constraints, in order to produce something that was not expected by the listener. In this regard, the very low number of counterexamples we found, and the fact that the value of these rests is always small, seem to confirm the general principle expressed by (7) TARGETED CONSTITUENTS (STANZAIC). In summary, to match different prosodic structures with the same musical grouping structure, the optimal solution is always to consider the metrical constituents rather than the prosodic constituents of each individual line. Doing this, composers make sure that the group boundaries in music are matched with boundaries present in all the lines. On the contrary, matching music’s grouping structure directly with the prosodic structure of one line would cause a large number of mismatches as prosodic structure is partly different from line to line and from stanza to stanza, and is therefore avoided.

    18

    ‘[She stands by the] windows’; ‘he remembers [her friend] Doon’.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    267

    3.3. Deriving the Metrified Form of the Text To prepare the comparison with Fresneau songs, we need to discuss the relation between the surface form of the text and its metrical structure. In our control corpus of trouvères’, Machaut’s, and Chardavoine’s songs, the surface text directly respects the metrified form of the text. By metrical form of the text, we mean: the text as formatted by the metrical rules and its metrical pattern(s), with no other modification. This corresponds to the way one usually reads a poem, line by line, without repetitions or omissions. In this case, units from the metrified form and the surface form are in linear one-to-one correspondence (linear bijection). The only exception to this linear bijection concerns the refrain. The metrified form of the text can also be derived in a somehow different surface form. This means that rules or constraints will provide the composer and/or the singer with possibilities to generate a surface form that is not identical to the metrified form. In this case, units from the metrified form and the surface form are not in one-to-one linear correspondence, because there can be cases of surjection (different units from the surface form correspond to the same unit in the metrified form), and/or of disrespect of the linearity (the units of the surface-form are not present in the same order as they are in the metrified form). Setting apart the refrain’s situation 19 , we did not find any case of surjection or disrespect of linearity in our trouvères’, Machaut’s, and Chardavoine’s control corpus. However, Dell (2003) gives examples of such cases in traditional French songs. He expounds that in some songs, what he calls the ‘concentrated text’ is transformed into an ‘unfolded text’, as in (8), where (8.a) is the ‘concentrated text’ and (8.b) the ‘unfolded text’: (8) (a)

    19

    a b

    Malbrouck s’en va-t-en guerre, Ne sais quand reviendra.20

    As mentioned above, refrains can be considered as an exception to this principle. If one wants to treat refrains as one iterated unit, then refrain is in surjection. However, this surjection respects refrain’s integrity and replicate the textsetting, as the different iterations of the refrain are to be sung over the same music. 20 ‘Malbrouck goes to war/[I] don’t know when he will come back’.

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    268

    (b)

    a Malbrouck s’en va-t-en guerre J r mironton tonton mirontaine K a’ Malbrouck s’en va-t-en guerre J’ b ne sais quand reviendra L b’ ne sais quand reviendra M b’’ ne sais quand reviendra M’ (Dell 2003, 514–515)

    The correspondence between his ‘concentrated text’ and ‘unfolded text’ and our metrified and surface forms is not exact, because his ‘unfolded text’ still represents in itself a well-formed instantiation of a metrical pattern: what the unfolded text has in surplus is always made of entire lines, and this surplus is strictly repeated stanza by stanza. What is more interesting for us is the fact that, in Dell’s examples, the music associated with repeated lines can change occurrence by occurrence inside the same stanza. In (8.b), the letters at the right of the lines are labels for the string of notes on which the line is sung. The apostrophe means that the string of notes is repeated as such, without any modification. For Dell, parallelism between musical and textual repetition is dominant in traditional French songs, even if it is sometimes disregarded or partial (as in 8). However, stanza by stanza, the music is regularly iterated: the stanza metrical structure [a r a’ b b’ b’’] is always associated with the musical grouping structure [J K J’ L M M’]. We also see here the confirmation of the principle stated in (7) above: different strings of notes can be instantiated over lines that have the same metrical pattern (as in a-J and b-L), but not the opposite (a-J and *r-J), while lines that have the same metrical pattern do not necessarily share the same music (as in b-L and b’-M). The matching constraint is therefore unilateral: the same string of notes requires the same metrical pattern, but the same metrical pattern does not require the same string of notes. One last thing should be considered about Dell’s concentrated and unfolded texts: his concentrated text misses the linguistic representation of the r line, while our metrified form of the text should always contain the linguistic representation of the material expressed on the surface form at

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    269

    least once. In fact, Dell never claims that his unfolded text is a relevant scale of underlying representation, and he does not establish it himself: the unfolded text is what is printed by editors, not what is established by the linguist or the musicologist. It still remains very interesting for us to notice that Dell’s examples of transformations of the text seems to target only entire lines, which, despite the conceptual difference between metrified form and ‘unfolded text’, confirms the TARGETED CONSTITUENTS (STANZAIC) principle stated in (7) above.

    3.4. The Status of the String of Notes Matched with a Metrical Constituent Before concluding this section, we have to go back to the status of the strings of notes associated with a line. As stated in 2.3, we are not confident about our ability to explicitly determine if a given string of notes is an actual constituent of the grouping structure of music. However, without relying on our intuitions, three pieces of evidence argue for the strings of notes matched with a line to be well-formed groups inside music’s grouping structure. First, combining the facts (a) that rests should form grouping boundaries at some level, and (b) that rests cannot be inserted everywhere in the line, but can be inserted at lines boundaries, seems to indicate that lines boundaries are matched with an equivalent boundary inside music’s grouping structure. Secondly, the fact that music’s iteration targets such strings of notes also argues in favor of the analysis of these strings of notes as constituents of music’s grouping structure. Thirdly, the fact that textual derivation only targets entire lines seems to indicate that there is no smaller music’s constituent available for this part of textsetting, which implies that the string of notes matched with a line is a constituent of music. Combining these three elements leads us to consider that these strings of notes matched with a line are actual constituents of music’s grouping structure. However, the relevance of half-line structure for textsetting is not that easy to establish. The detailed study of the 16 trouvères’ songs from our diasystemic control corpus made by the first author of this chapter (Premat

    270

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    2017) showed that music can have a grouping structure that corresponds to the metrical structure of a composed line, but can also ignore this half-line structure. In Premat’s corpus, 32% of the strings of notes associated with lines containing two hemistiches do not show any consistent group that can be matched with the first hemistich. Nevertheless, a larger number of these strings of notes have a consistent group that can be matched with the first hemistich (48%), and some of them even show the kind of masculine/ feminine alternation we mentioned, while these alternations never happen inside a hemistich. Other corpora show strong respect of the hemistich structure, as showed for instance by Ouvrard (1981). As the relevance of the hemistich’s structure seems to be uneven and/or parametric, we simply claim that it is implemented in stanzaic French textsetting as an available, but optional, target for textsetting. This optionality can be attributed to the BEGINNING FREE, ENDING STRICT principle (see de Castro–Arrazola 2018, 85–104), which states that constraints at the end of a constituent are stronger than inside and at the top of this constituent, or, in other words, that the higher a boundary is projected into the hierarchy, the stronger the constraints for matching at this boundary will be. In such a view, the hemistich’s boundary is located half-way between obligatory matching and non-significant matching rates. In English folk songs, on the metrical (and not on the purely textsetting) dimension and in a truly generative task, Hayes and Kaun (1996) document a quite similar situation: they find that hemistich boundaries are matched with phonological phrases boundaries with a roughly 1.6 times weaker rate than line-endings. The next best matched boundary, the dipod boundary, has a 2.5 times weaker matching rate than the hemistich boundary. In their corpus, as in ours, the BEGINNING FREE, ENDING STRICT principle seems to provide an appropriate modelling of this ambivalent relevance of the half-line structure. In summary, we have established three major features of constituents matching in stanzaic French textsetting. Firstly, when there is a musical repetition inside a stanza, it must be applied over lines that share the same metrical pattern. Secondly, when different texts are associated with the same music (which is necessary in stanzaic songs), constituents matching between text and music is usually not made by targeting directly prosodic

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    271

    constituents, but metrical ones. Thirdly, derivations from an underlying level of representation of the text to its surface form result in autonomous lines in the surface form that are associated with autonomous musical groups. The establishment of these three features has also allowed us to argue, without relying on our intuitions, that the strings of notes associated with a line should be constituents of music’s grouping structure, while it is not necessarily the case for the strings of notes associated with a hemistich.

    4. FRESNEAU’S CONSTITUENTS MATCHING In the following subsections, we will detail three aspects of Fresneau’s writing that cannot be predicted from the diasystemic principles discussed above. The first one is due to an extreme form of derivation from the metrified form to the surface form (4.1). The second one concerns the special behavior of the final schwa in Fresneau’s corpus caused by the derivation from the metrified form (4.2). The third one concerns the insertion of rests inside Fresneau’s songs (4.3).

    4.1. Deriving Fresneau’s Metrified Form of the Text Comparing Fresneau’s songs to our stanzaic songs control corpus, the major difference concerning constituents matching is the derivation from the metrified form of the text. One can think that such a derivation is not proper to textsetting, but we claim that it seems to be highly connected with the special realization that music induces and possibly with social aspects of music performance that are not the ones of poetry reading. We will first explain the two types of derivations from the metrified form that we found in Fresneau’s work, the one due to an intensive use of textual repetition, and the one due to voice’s repartition. Rests will be taken in consideration in subsection 4.3 below. At first look, what strikes is that in Fresneau’s songs, the metrified form of the text has to be restituted: it is not present as such in the surface form of

    272

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    the song. Most of the time, a work on isometry and location of rhymes allows us to identify what should have been the metrified form of the text. When the text is attested by a literary source elsewhere, the restituted metrified form can be confirmed, as in Fresneau’s “Ung cordelier”, which is in fact Marot’s epigram “D’un cordelier”, although there is some textual variation between the two versions. Consider in (9) the text of the first four lines, (9a) as edited in Marot (1550), (9b) as we restituted the metrified form from our version of the sung text, (9c) as deployed by the superius, and (9d) as deployed by the tenor. (9) (a) MAROT’S FORM Vn Cordelier d’une assez bonne mise Auoit gaigné à ie ne sçay quel ieu Chausses, pourpoint & la belle chemise, En cest estat son hostesse l’a veu. (b) FRESNEAU’S METRIFIED FORM Ung cordelier home de bone mise avoit gaigné a je ne scay quel jeu chaulses pourpoint & la belle chemise en cest estat son hostesse la veu21 (c) FRESNEAU’S SUPERIUS SURFACE FORM Ung cordelier home de bone mise avoit gaigné a je ne scay quel jeu a je ne scay a je ne scay je [ne scay quel jeu chaulses pourpoint & la belle chemise en cest estat son hostesse la veu son hostesse la veu (d) FRESNEAU’S TENOR SURFACE FORM Ung cordelier home home de bone mise de bone mise avoit gaigné a je ne scay a je ne scay quel jeu a je ne scay je [ne scay quel jeu chaulses pourpoint & la belle chemise en cest estat son hostesse la veu son hostesse la veu 21

    ‘A Franciscan, elegant man,/had won at whatever game/shoes, doublet and a nice shirt./His hostess saw him in this condition’.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    273

    In (9b-d), words in italic are subject to surjection: several elements of the surface form correspond to one element of the metrified form. The process, here, has an extent very different than that of Dell (2003) discussed above, because these repetitions do not target nor generate well-formed autonomous lines. There is also a difference between the voices, as the superius does not have the same repetitions as the tenor. Some repetitions are common to these two voices (fourth line), some are present only in the tenor (first line) and some are present in both, but in a different way (compare a je ne scay quel jeu from the superius to a je ne scay a je ne scay from the tenor). Hence, the derivation does not target entire lines. This derivation is very productive in Fresneau’s corpus, as in our idiolectal control corpus. A systematic evaluation of its potential targets reveals that they sometimes seem to have a metrical identity, but not necessarily. In our example, a je ne scay quel jeu is indeed an entire hemistich, but its integrity is not respected: the entire group is not repeated as a whole, but bit by bit. Linearity is not respected either, as there is concatenation in home de bone mise → home home de bone mise de bone mise, while quel jeu is not present all the way in a je ne scay quel jeu → a je ne scay Ø a je ne scay quel jeu a je ne scay Ø je ne scay quel jeu. Despite this apparent freedom, this derivation is not entirely free regarding metrics and prosody. A systematic study of the repetitions of Fresneau’s corpus and of our idiolectal control corpus shows that repetition has a very clear constraint on prosodic autonomy for both the input and the output: they must always be able to form a well-formed possible phonological phrase. Therefore, elements that cannot be the head of a clitic group will never be repeated alone or without their head, while their head can be repeated with or without its clitics, as for the omission of a in some occurrences of [a] je ne scay quel jeu. These factors are expressed in (10): (10) DERIV.REP. The derivation by repetition of a string of syllables from the metrified form to several iterations of this string of syllables into the surface form must have a possible phonological phrase for both input and output.

    274

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    The DERIV.REP. principle is a general one. It also predicts that there will be no units smaller than the phonological word that will be repeated, and we have counter-examples for this prediction. However, these counterexamples are very rare and, more importantly, they are stylistically marked. Consider the lines 5 and 6 of Fresneau’s song Tenot estoit en son cloz resjouy, given in their metrified form (11a), their surface form as sung by the superius (11b) and by the altus (11c). (11) (a) Metrified form au clouz entra puis s’en alla tenter le bon thenot du combat amoureulx22. (b) Superius surface form au clouz entra puis s’en alla tenter puis s’en alla tenter le bon thenot le bon thenot du com du combat amoureulx (c) Altus surface form au clouz entra puis s’en alla tenter le bon tenot le bon thenot du con puis s’en alla tenter le bon [tenot du com du combat amoureulx In (11), the composer plays on the phonetic identity between an autonomous word (con, ‘cunt’) and a prefix (com- in combat, ‘fight’). Doing so, he summons an independent word that was not present in the metrified form of the text. The humorous and bawdy effect is obvious. We do not think that this kind of rare exception to (10) DERIV.REP. is strong enough to ask us to modify the rule; and the exceptional status of the process here is probably part of its humor. Note that the condition on the output is still fulfilled. Other exceptions exist, in which even the surface form would normally not be a well-formed phonological phrase, as the insolated & tu in & tu seras cognee & tu seras & tu & tu seras23 (Sil est ainsy) or cela in cela ne leur est

    22

    At this moment of the song, a woman character is coming into a garden to flirt with a male character named T[h]enot. ‘She came into the closed place, then she tempted/the good Thenot with a ‘love fight’. 23 ‘And you will be punched, and you will be and you and you will be.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    275

    de merveille cela cela ne leur est de merveille24 (Naymes jamays ces veilles). These configurations are very rare. On a representative subset of 16 songs, they represent 3.44% of the 756 repetitions25. The cela cela repetition is quite regular in Fresneau’s songs, representing 38.46% of the ill-formed repetitions. As these configurations remains widely marginal, they represent another type of violation of (10) DERIV.REP. than that in (11), because while the repetition in (11) has a well-formed surface phonological phrase that is not a phonological phrase in the metrified form, these examples have a double violation: not only is their surface form not a phonological phrase of the metrified form, but their surface form is also ill-formed. There is one other type of derivation from the metrical form that could not exist in our diasystemic control corpus, nor in traditional French song, because they are monodic corpora: the unequal distribution of text between the voices. We already saw that the repetition can create an unequal repartition of the text, but in the cases studied, all the voices had a surface form for every syllable of the metrified form. We will now see that it is also possible for a voice not to realize linguistic material present in the metrified form. Consider lines 5 and 6 from the song Ung cordelier in (12), which came right after the previously quoted ones (see 9). The score in Figure 6 represents the sixth line of the text. (12) (a) METRIFIED FORM qui luy a dict vous rompes vostre veu non non respond soudain le bon recors26 (b) SUPERIUS SURFACE FORM qui luy a dict vous rompes vostre veu vous rompes vostre [veu

    24

    ‘This is not wonderful with them this this is not wonderful with them’. Both ill- and well-formed repetitions have been counted in a minimal way, by counting sequences of phonological phrases when they were present as such in the metrified form. For instance, in [Qu’ilz boucheront]1 [[qu’ilz boucheront]2 [le cul]3]4 [le cul]5 [le cul]6 [le cul]7 [[le cul]8 du voyre]9 [[qu’ils boucheront]10 le cul]11 [le cul]12 [le cul]13 (etc.) we did not count (10) since (11) directly repeat (4), a sequence present as such in the metrified form. (‘That they would plug the bottom of the glass’; Fresneau’s song Ung jacobin). 26 ‘Who said to him: You are breaking your vow/No, no answers suddenly the man’. 25

    276

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner non non respond soudain non non respond soudain le bon [recors (c) BASSUS SURFACE FORM qui luy a dict non non non non respond soubdain le bon recors le bon [recors

    As showed by the comparison between (12a,b) and (12c), the bassus misses more than half of the fifth line. Although one may choose to consider that the linguistic material vous rompes vostre veu in (12a) has been expressed in (12b), and therefore simply does not need to be expressed in (12c), we would like to emphasize three points: firstly, this process of unequal distribution of text among the voices targets the same units as the repetition, i.e., possible phonological phrases. Secondly it generates a very stylistically marked output, as for instance when figuring a dialogue (see Figure 6). Thirdly, as stated in 1.1., in 16th century polyphony, voices are still somehow independent: the combination of the different voices does not erase their individual structure, which means that the non-expression of linguistic material in a voice has to be managed somehow by the system.

    Figure 6. Stylistically marked output, figuring a dialogue, in Fresneau’s song Ung Cordelier.

    To this point, it remains unclear whether this unequal distribution of text between voices is an exceptional case (which is just in violation of wellformedness constraints), or if it is just a normal case of derivation. For now,

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    277

    we will temporarily unify repetition and derivation behind the following principle (which replaces (10) DERIV.REP): (13) DERIV.TARGET:PHPH. The derivation from the metrified form of the text to its surface form must have a possible phonological phrase for both input and output. This principle remains too weak: by allowing the distribution of the text between voices, it fails to prohibit text from the metrified form to be unrealized in all the voices. Managing unequal distribution as an exceptional violation of constraints will partly fix this problem.

    4.2. Dealing with the -ə in the Derivation As explained in section 2.2, posttonic syllables (which, in French, are necessarily word final and have a schwa as their nucleus) have a special status in both metrics and prosody: it is the only syllable to be regularly elided before a vowel-initial word and the only one, when not elided, that can be extrametrical. We have seen in subsection 2.2.2 that elided schwas do not have metrical representation. In our stanzaic songs control corpus, schwas are treated by the textsetting grammar as predicted by the metrical rules: the domain of their elision is the line. In Fresneau’s songs, however, the repetition-final schwa elision requires a special commentary. Basic hypotheses about their treatment would have been that (a) their elision in the surface form is computed following their elision status in the metrified form of the text, or (b) that their elision in the surface form is solely computed following surface context. This is not what happens in Fresneau’s songs. Consider the second line of (14), in Fresneau’s song Ung advocat dist a sa feme (‘ə’ note a non-elided schwa and ‘(ə)’ an elided schwa): (14) (a) METRIFIED FORM [Ung advocat dist a sa femə]

    278

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner mamy(ə) or sa quə jourons nous27 (b) SUPERIUS AND TENOR SURFACE FORM mamyə mamyə or sa que jourons nous […] (c) ALTUS SURFACE FORM mamyə mamyə mamyə or sa que jourons nous […]

    In deriving mamy(ə) into mamyə mamyə, the textsetting disrespects the elision status of the metrified form, because it computes it again over the surface level. But, when it comes to the end of the derivation, on mamyə or, elision seems to have been fixed: it is not computed again, even though both the metrified form and the surface contexts provide the conditions for elision.28

    Figure 7. Schwa elision in the repetition, in Fresneau’s song Ung advocat dist a sa feme.

    This type of configuration is in fact systematic in our corpus and should not be regarded as unstable or strange. We claim that this configuration can be treated by ranking three constraints. Two of them are usual MARKEDNESS and FAITHFULNESS to the input constraints: *HIATUS, resolved by elision in French, and input-output MAX-IO(σ) to avoid deletion of material from the underlying representation. The sense of these constraints here is that, while being sung, the surface form still needs to respect the core structure of 27 28

    ‘A lawyer says to his wife/So, my dear, what will we gamble?’ As showed in Figure 5, this passage is a syllabic style (one-to-one relationship between notes and syllables), which allows us to apply our analysis with a satisfying degree of confidence. If not all the occurrences of this phenomenon are that clear, it should be noted that all the occurrences can be analyzed in that way and that all the reliable occurrences can only been analyzed that way.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    279

    language, however it cannot miss linguistic material when this linguistic material is to be expressed in normal conditions. In this regard, sung text cannot have elided schwas before a consonant-initial word (*mamy(ə) mamyə), nor can it have retained schwas before vowel-initial words when it is the first occurrence of the word (*mamyə or), or when the first occurrence has been targeted by *HIATUS (*mamy(ə) or mamyə or). But, as showed by mamyə mamyə or, sung text replicates the treatment of elision of the first occurrence when it was before consonant-initial words. In this regard, what seems to be a persistence constraint can be expressed by a base-reduplicant MAX-BR(σ) constraint (McCarthy and Prince 1995). The parameters are: the base is always the first occurrence, others occurrences are reduplicant of the same initial base, and adjacency between base and reduplicant(s) is nonnecessary: while the base is always the left-most occurrence of the word, the right-most occurrences can be separated from their base by another reduplicant and/or by one or several other words. We propose the following constraints set: (15) (a) MAX-BR(σ). Assess violation for every syllable in the surface form of the base that is not in correspondence with a syllable in the surface form of the reduplicant. (b) *HIATUS. Assess violation for every immediate adjacency of vocalic syllable peaks in the surface form. (c) MAX-IO(σ). Assess violation for every syllable in the underlying representation of the metrified form that is not in correspondence with a syllable in the surface form. (d) Ranking: MAX-BR(σ) >> *HIATUS >> MAX-IO(σ) There is an obvious conflict between (15b) and (15c) when a final syllable that has no coda and which nucleus is filled by a schwa is located before a vowel-initial word. *HIATUS over-ranks MAX-IO(σ) and the final schwa is deleted. However, when the first occurrence of the word in the surface form (its base) does not match the criteria for *HIATUS, the following occurrences (reduplicant) also retain their final schwa, because MAX-BR(σ) over-ranks *HIATUS. Promotion of the predicted candidate by Eval is

    280

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    illustrated in tableaux 1–4, by absurd manipulations over the string of text mamye or sa que… in order to cover all the possible configurations. The evaluated output is located over the underscore. Table 1. Reduplicant evaluation in mamyə mamyə que mamyə mamy_ que mamyə ☞ mamy(ə)

    MAX-BR(σ)

    *HIATUS

    *!

    MAX-IO(σ) *

    Table 2. Reduplicant evaluation in mamyə mamyə or mamyə mamy_ or mamyə ☞ mamy(ə)

    MAX-BR(σ)

    *HIATUS *

    *!

    MAX-IO(σ) *

    Table 3. Reduplicant evaluation in mamy(ə) or mamyə que mamy(ə) or mamy_ que mamyə ☞

    MAX-BR(σ)

    *HIATUS

    mamy(ə)

    MAX-IO(σ) *!

    Table 4. Reduplicant evaluation in mamyə or mamyə sa mamy(ə) or mamy_ or mamyə mamy(ə) ☞

    MAX-BR(σ)

    *HIATUS *!

    MAX-IO(σ) *

    For this set of constraints to do the right prediction, it is important to note that MAX-IO(σ) targets the underlying representation of the word in the metrified form. This prevents (15) from making any reference to the elision status of the metrified form. Predictability from the diasystemic grammar and consequences of MAX-BR(σ) will be discussed in subsection 5.2. Another important element in deriving the metrified form by the repetition is the status of the line boundary. As stated in subsection 2.2.2, the line boundary protects posttonic syllables from elision regardless of what

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    281

    comes next. The same thing happens when the repetition’s target ends on a line boundary: all the posttonic syllables are still pronounced. Consider the bassus in Figure 8. The line Et mon penser plus ne fremyə29 is derived into Et mon penser plus ne fremyə Et mon penser plus ne fremyə. As the example given in Figure 8 is the first occurrence of this repetition, the constraints set stated in (15) makes the wrong prediction: it wants the -e of fremye to be elided, as it is before a vowel-initial word and has no previous occurrence to which MAX-BR(σ) could refer.

    Figure 8. Schwa elision in the repetition, in Fresneau’s song Jay la promesse.

    This behavior is a regular one: in our Fresneau’s corpus, all the configurations in which line ending words are repeated do protect their posttonic syllable from elision30. This enforces the hypothesis stated before, following which elision in the surface form cannot be computed only based on the surface form, but must mix elements from the surface form and from the metrified form in an optimal way. We therefore introduce a fourth constraint, which for the sake of FAITHFULNESS to the input imposes that line boundaries should also be targeted by the derivation: M AX-IO(]L). As MAX-IO(]L) will check if the line boundary is present while evaluating the base, it will cooperate with MAX-BR(σ) to instantiate it in each reduplicant.

    29 30

    ‘And my thoughts don’t shudder anymore’. The reader may have noted that in our example, rests are inserted in the repetition before consonant-initial words. Because of the lack of space in this chapter, the reader is asked to accept that we also have clear examples of rests inserted before vowel-initial words that always cause the final schwa to be pronounced.

    282

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner (16) MAX-IO(]L) Assess violation for every line boundary in the metrified form that has no realization in the surface form.

    In order to make the right prediction, these constraints are to be ranked in the following order: (17) MAX-IO(]L) >> MAX-BR(σ) >> *HIATUS >> MAX-IO(σ) In summary, we proposed an OT modelling for the treatment of the schwa elision at the end of repeated strings of syllable. This modelling uses information coming from the underlying representation of the word, from the metrified form of the text, and from the surface context.

    4.3. Rest Insertion As illustrated by Lerdhal and Jackendoff (1987, 43–44), rests play a major role in setting boundaries in the grouping structure, being very strong factors of differentiation. We established in our diasystemic control corpus of stanzaic French textsetting that rests location must coincide with metrical boundaries, which allow the grouping structure of music to always be synchronized with a constituent structure in the text. Inserting rests elsewhere would mean taking the risk that these rests would fall inside a clitic group or a word. Contrary to the songs of our diasystemic control corpus, Fresneau’s songs are not stanzaic. Some of Fresneau’s texts have a stanzaic structure (for instance, ‘Le cruel Mars’ is a quatrain), but Fresneau’s music does not have a periodicity based on stanza structure: stanza is only relevant for text, not for music nor textsetting. As his music is not stanzaic, the composer does not need to consider the problem of the alternating texts: each bit of music he writes is associated with only one precise text31. He can therefore perform 31

    We have only one exception to this principle, in the song ‘Ung Cordelier’, in which the first two lines and the two following lines share the same music.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    283

    a subtler matching between prosodic and musical constituents: he is able to insert rests at any phonological phrase boundary, disregarding whether they are matched with metrical ones. Figure 9 illustrates this in Fresneau’s song Tenot estoit en son cloz resjouy: the rest in the superius’ first bar is inserted inside a metrical constituent (the line is Katin avoit devers le clouz ouy32).

    Figure 9. Rests insertion in Fresneau’s song Tenot estoit en son cloz resjouy.

    The superius’ configuration in Figure 9 attests that Fresneau can insert rests at phonological phrases boundaries that are neither matched with a metrical boundary, nor located at the end of a repetition. However, most rests are inserted on metrical boundaries, on repetition boundaries, or on both, as in the bassus in Figure 9. This is probably due to the fact that, as rests cause strong differentiation (strong boundary in music’s grouping structure), they are preferably inserted over strong prosodic boundaries, which happen, most of the time, to be matched with metrical boundaries and/or with repetitions boundaries. The length of the rests in Figure 9 is not a relevant factor: contrary to what we saw about Machaut’s counter-examples for stanzaic textsetting, we have consistent quarter-rests insertions outside metrical and repetition boundaries. In addition, contrary to Machaut’s quarter rests, Fresneau’s rests never fall inside a clitic group. If rests can be inserted inside a metrical constituent without creating an ill-formed phonological phrase, the TARGETED-CONSTITUENTS (STANZAIC) principle stated in (7) must be modified for Fresneau’s songs. The same goes

    32

    ‘Katin had heard by the closed space…’

    284

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    for Janequin’s, Certon’s, and Passereau’s songs in our idiolectal control corpus. (18) TARGETED CONSTITUENTS (NON-STANZAIC). In order to perform constituents matching in non-stanzaic songs, music can consider prosodic constituents, disregarding whether or not they are matched with metrical constituents. This principle also works for what we saw with the derivation domain in 4.1, i.e., (13) DERIV.TARGET:PHPH. Therefore, we propose to implement rest insertion inside the derivation: both have the same input and output conditions, they happen at the same time, and rest insertion also has effects on the prosodic phonology of the linguistic material. In summary, we have seen that Fresneau’s derivation from the metrified form to the surface form of each voice has possible phonological phrases for direct input and output. The same goes for rest insertion: in Fresneau’s songs, rests can be inserted over possible phonological phrases boundaries not matched with metrical boundaries. Hence, we propose to implement rest insertion directly into the derivation, which in turn characterize the derivation as being part of textsetting instead of being a purely metrical device. We have also seen that direct targeting of possible phonological phrases in Fresneau’s corpus imposes a new set of constraints to deal with the phonological and metrical rules of final schwa elision, including a basereduplicant constraint. We will now evaluate whether this direct targeting of phonological phrases represents some kind of sub-grammar inside the general grammar of French textsetting, or if it is predictable from general principles and formal properties.

    5. PARTIAL TEXTSETTING GRAMMAR EMERGENCE In this final section, we attempt to provide an answer to the question of the status of Fresneau’s constituents matching grammar with regards to the

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    285

    grammar of our diasystemic stanzaic songs control corpus. When we first read Fresneau’s corpus, our basic hypothesis was that his textsetting grammar should be partially different from the grammar we knew for other songs. It would have represented some kind of sub-grammar inside a more general and widely represented grammar of French textsetting. In other terms, it would represent an idiolectal or dialectal specification inside the diasystemic grammar of French textsetting. The idiolectal hypothesis has already been refuted, as the corpus dedicated to control this parameter, comprised of Janequin’s, Passereau’s, and Certon’s songs, is always consistent with Fresneau’s corpus. In the first subsection (5.1), we argue that the dialectal grammar hypothesis is not the right hypothesis for the derivation from the metrified form and for rests insertion. Using the Optimality Theory formalism, we show that Fresneau’s constituents matching can be easily unified with the stanzaic one, as the choice of targets is in fact a parameter inferred from the stanzaic/non-stanzaic form of the song. However, in the last subsection (5.2), we show that this inferred parameter causes the apparition of aspects that were not predictable from the diasystemic textsetting grammar, concerning the treatment of final schwa elision in the derivation.

    5.1. Dealing with Inferred Parameters in an OT Model In the previous sections, we used general principles to deal with the input and output conditions of the derivation from the metrified form (textual repetition and rests insertion). These principles were stated as follow, in (7) for our stanzaic control corpus and in (18) for Fresneau’s songs: (7) TARGETED CONSTITUENTS (STANZAIC). In order to perform a steady constituents matching in stanzaic songs, music should only consider metrical constituents.

    286

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner (18) TARGETED CONSTITUENTS (NON-STANZAIC). In order to perform constituents matching in non-stanzaic songs, music can consider prosodic constituents, disregarding whether or not they are matched with metrical constituents.

    Comparison between these two principles clearly shows their motivation. (7) targets possible phonological phrases matched with metrical constituents, because in a stanzaic song they are the only steady and predictable prosodic units from line to line. In contrast, (18) can free itself from this restriction, because in a non-stanzaic song with no musical repetition over the text, there is no need to have something steady from line to line. This works for both the repetition and for the rests’ insertions, henceforth united in the derivation from the metrified form. Comparing (7) and (18) leads us to the hypothesis that the target parameters that differentiate them are in fact inferred from the form of the song. Following this hypothesis, we claim that (7) represents the optimal application of (18) on stanzaic songs, if we allege that the goal of this textsetting procedure is to provide each line of the song with the better constituency match possible. Indeed, as claimed by Hayes (2009, 53–55), textsetting does not follow only one goal, while (7) and (18) are ambiguous about what is or are their goals. Considering that textsetting tries to find the best possible match, it must try to target the smallest relevant unit while assuring that this unit is constant in all the different iteration of the same string of notes. As claimed by Hayes (2009), OT is a suitable model to express the pursuit of simultaneous goals, as, in our case, a good match for each line, but also the best match for every line matched with the same string of notes. Hence, (7) and (18) can be analyzed as different translations of the same constraints set, stated as follows: (19) (a) DEP(PHPH) Assess violation for every possible phonological phrase in the surface form that does not correspond to a possible phonological phrase in the metrified form.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    287

    (b) MAX(PHPH) Assess violation for every possible phonological phrase in the metrified form that does not correspond to a possible phonological phrase in the surface form. These two constraints are to be top-ranked, as DEP(PHPH) and MAX(PHPH) are only violated in rare marked stylistic events that are, as we suppose, due to the arbitrary will of the composer. Their relative ordering is unclear: configurations like com-combat violate only DEP(PHPH), while unequal text repartition between voices violates only M AX(PHPH). For these constraints to work, it should be specified that the two constraints apply for every voice (in order to prohibit unequal text’s distribution among voices), and that a string of notes can be applied over different texts without any major restructuration of its grouping structure. It should also be specified that the correspondence between input and output is not a bijective one (see 4.1). In the DEP direction (surface form compared to metrified form), EVAL has to promote an output that has an identical possible phonological phrase (with or without its clitics) into the metrified representation, while in the MAX direction (metrified form compared to surface form), EVAL has to promote an output that has at least one identical possible phonological phrase (with or without its clitics) into the surface form but can also have several of them. The same goes for stanzaic songs: in stanzaic songs, repetitions and rest insertion are prohibited outside metrical boundaries, because in the DEP direction, EVAL must promote an output for each line that would not cause a violation while iterating the same string of notes over the text of the different lines matched with this string. As stated before, (19) predict simultaneously repetitions, text distribution between the voices, and rest insertion. This should enforce the hypothesis by which derivation from the metrified form belongs to textsetting, merging linguistic material with musical material. The consequence of this approach is to consider that rest insertion may break a phonological phrase, as for instance if one was inserting a rest in home de

    288

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    bone mise33 → *home de [rest] bone mise, which would cause an ill-formed phonological phrase (*[home de]PHPH or *[de]PHPH). As for the repetition *home de home de, this rest insertion is rejected by EVAL on account of DEP(PHPH), since the surface phonological phrase (*[home de]PHPH or *[de]PHPH) has no correspondent in the metrified form (in which de is never the end of a possible phonological phrase, since it cannot be the head of a clitic group). Finally, it should be noted that there is a major difference in the selection of the optimal candidate between a usual phonological OT computation and our textsetting derivation from the metrified form. Indeed, in our case, when a derivation is chosen by the composer, there is always at least one other equally optimal candidate: the ‘do nothing’ candidate, which just reproduces exactly what was in the input. In that respect, (19) only express wellformedness constraints that define the set of acceptable candidates, i.e., of candidates that will not be considered ungrammatical and/or non-metrical (including what would be ‘textsetting metricality’) by the composer and/or the listeners and performers. Inside this set, (19) never promotes one candidate over another. Only the free will of the composer and/or external factors (as harmonic consistence between voices in polyphony) can make that choice. In summary, we showed that the derivation from the metrified form (including rest insertion) of Fresneau’s songs is not due to some difference in the grammar’s parameter setting but can be accounted for by using OT constraints in a diasystemic grammar. This approach does not need a reranking of constraints, which would have been the sign of a dialectalization. In this regard, despite significant differences in the extent of the set of optimal candidates, Fresneau’s constituents matching belongs to the same diasystemic textsetting grammar as our stanzaic songs control corpus, since what was target parameters in the non-OT approach can be inferred from the form of the song and does not need special textsetting rules or constraints.

    33

    ‘Elegant man’, literally: ‘man of good look’.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    289

    5.2. Emergence of Non-Predictable Constraint’s Ranking We showed that Fresneau’s textsetting grammar for derivation (including rest insertion) does not need to be accounted for by a special grammar. However, one of its consequences cannot be explained by the diasystemic grammar. Indeed, the treatment of the final schwa elision requires a surface-to-surface faithfulness evaluation, while our diasystemic grammar is only input-to-output and output-to-input oriented. We modelled this using a MAX-BR(σ) constraint. Leaving aside the line boundary MAXIO(]L) constraint, which is not relevant to this discussion, we recap MAXBR(σ) ranking: (15) (d)

    MAX-BR(σ) >> *HIATUS >> MAX-IO(σ)

    This MAX-BR(σ) constraint and its ranking are hardly predictable from the diasystemic grammar as attested by our corpus. It could be argued that Dell’s examples were based on that constraint set, but as showed in 5.1, stanzaic repetitions do not need MAX-BR(σ) to promote entire line repetition. We think that it would be an ad hoc patch to say that MAX-BR(σ) and its (15d) ranking were already there in the diasystemic grammar since, in fact, (19) predicts that MAX-BR(σ) is only relevant in corpora that do not instantiate the same string of notes over different texts. And, as exposed right above, from the perspective of the diasystemic textsetting, MAX-BR(σ) is not a more logical or natural solution than computing the elision solely at the surface level. Furthermore, MAX-BR(σ) is theoretically triggered by a morphological inflection or lexical derivation, which, to the best of our knowledge, are not processes usually implemented in textsetting or metrical grammars. Finally, in an acquisition’s perspective, assuming that MAXBR(σ) and its (15d) ranking were there the whole time without being decisive would force us to assume (a) that other French song traditions exist outside our control corpora, (b) that these other traditions express the conditions for MAX-BR(σ) decisiveness, and (c) that they treat it exactly as Fresneau does. If we agree with the plausibility of (a), (b) and (c) are suspicious to us, since they are speculative, and (c) can hardly be defended

    290

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    given that (15d) is not the only ‘natural’ solution that can be inferred from the prosodic parameters of French. Without this assumption, (15d) could not have been acquired by composers. However, if other corpora significantly widespread in diachrony were to confirm (15d), we would have to change our analysis. To the best of our knowledge, such data were not available at the time of this chapter’s writing. Rather than thinking that MAX-BR(σ) was ranked as in (15d) the whole time, we prefer to consider it as a constraint that emerged only in one or several subsets of textsetting grammar (represented in our corpora by Fresneau’s, Janequin’s, Passereau’s, and Certon’s songs), which are the only ones that express the conditions for MAX-BR(σ) decisiveness. The subsequent prediction is that other corpora, from a different time, musical style, and/or textual register, for instance, would have a different ranking for MAX-BR(σ), possibly neutralizing its effects if the constraint is low-ranked enough. This is to be confirmed by further research. We propose that when a derivation like Fresneau’s happens, the diasystemic grammar does not tell the composer what to do with the repeated posttonic syllables. In our case, the answer that has been found and that has been spread to our corpus of Parisian Song includes a MAX-BR(σ) constraint, ranked as in (15d). Its unpredictable dimension is to be explained by a random and/or arbitrary choice that has been made at some point and that has spread to a community. In summary, we consider that since (15d) is not predictable by logical inference from the diasystemic textsetting, it represents a specification of the textsetting grammar of a subset of songs, in our case defined as the (or as a subset inside the) 16th century’s Parisian Songs. We hypothesized that at some point, the conditions that forced composers to deal with the preconditions of MAX-BR(σ) decisiveness happened and that, in the case of our main corpus, the answer they found, and spread was somehow random or, at least, unpredictable. This subset inside the diasystemic textsetting grammar represents some kind of a dialectal grammar: it has decisive constraints ranking which is not present in the diasystemic grammar, but still shares common properties with the diasystemic grammar. It could only have emerged and spread when conditions for (15d) decisiveness were met, and

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    291

    at this moment it seems that a choice occurred, motivated by nothing else than randomness or by possible artistic elements.

    CONCLUSION In this chapter, we asked ourselves to what extent the constituents matching grammar of Henry Fresneau was different from a diasystemic grammar of French textsetting, established on stanzaic songs. Our basic hypothesis, motivated by surface observations, was that the difference was probably quite important. It could have been due to an idiolectal or dialectal specification of the grammar. In order to test that hypothesis, we focused on specific elements of constituents matching, the ones composing what we call the ‘derivation from the metrified form’, i.e., the textual repetition and the distribution of text among voices, and the locus of rest insertion. We first tried to characterize what we consider to be a diasystemic grammar of French textsetting, based on a widely used stanzaic and monodic form, from the Middle Age to the traditional 20th century French song. This grammar, grounded in properties of the language and in respect of the equivalence of musical groups over different stanzas (and sometimes over different lines inside the same stanza), only targets prosodic groups that were matched with metrical groups. This means that targeted elements for derivation were always consistent constituents of the metrical structure and that rests were only located on metrical boundaries. Then, we established what the corresponding treatment of these elements was in Fresneau’s, Janequin’s, Certon’s, and Passereau’s songs. It appeared that Fresneau’s songs did not behave like our diasystemic grammar would have predicted, as each process was able to directly target possible phonological phrases, regardless of whether or not they were matched with metrical constituents. We also saw that its direct selection of prosodic constituents caused an unexpected treatment of the elision of the final schwa. However, on all these points, we found that Janequin’s, Passereau’s, and Certon’s songs behaved exactly as Fresneau’s, therefore denying the idiolectal hypothesis.

    292

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    By comparing Fresneau’s derivation from the metrified form with that of our diasystemic textsetting grammar, we saw that their derivations were not so different: the choice of the derivation’s target parameter was automatically inferred from the stanzaic or non-stanzaic form of the song. We argued that an OT modelling would even deliver us from having to deal with this target parameter. Hence, we claimed that what gives a very different surface result is not a dialectal grammar of textsetting, but just the normal prediction concerning which output candidates the diasystemic grammar would accept to promote in non-stanzaic songs. However, we also argued that the consequence of this non-stanzaic derivation regarding the final schwas’ elision was not predictable on the basis of the diasystemic grammar, because the MAX-BR(σ) constraint was not necessarily a natural object for textsetting, and because equivalently predictable or worse solutions may have been chosen. We claimed that this MAX-BR(σ) constraint, and its ranking in Fresneau’s songs, do not belong to our diasystemic textsetting grammar, and we outlined a model for the emergence of this unexpected part of the grammar, considered as a dialectal innovation that can be expressed only under certain circumstances and that spread to a community of composers once it has been expressed. More research is needed to strengthen our analysis, such as looking for corpora that may have made a different choice regarding MAX-BR(σ) or looking to non-stanzaic monodic and stanzaic polyphonic songs in order to more strongly discriminate what is due to polyphony and what is due to the non-stanzaic form. Indeed, in this chapter, we treated the specificity of polyphony as only concerning unequal distribution of the text between voices, but polyphony may have deeper and stronger effects concerning textsetting, as setting different voices represents a more complex task than setting only one voice. Indeed, in non-homorhythmic polyphony, having to simultaneously synchronize different voices with the same metrical grid and to desynchronize the voices between themselves would create a number of conflicts. This dimension remains to be investigated.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    293

    REFERENCES Aroui, Jean-Louis. 2019. “Césure et paraphonologie en français, en grec et en latin.” [“Cæsura and paraphonology in French, in Greek and in Latin”]. Paper presented at the Séminaire de Métrique Générale, Paris, Sorbonne University, April 25. Bernstein, Lawrence F. 1978. “The “Parisian Chanson”: Problems of Style and Terminology”. Journal of the American Musicological Society 31.2: 193–240. De Castro-Arrazola, Varuṇ. 2018. Typological Tendencies in verse and their cognitive grounding. Utrecht: LOT. Chardavoine, Jehan. [1980]1576. Le Recueil des plus belles et excellentes chansons en forme de voix de ville, Paris: Claude Micard [Collection of the most beautiful and excellent songs in ‘voix de ville’. Paris: Claude Micard] [reprint in 1980 by Minkoff in Geneva]. Dell, François. 1984. “L’accentuation dans les phrases en français.” In Forme sonore du langage, edited by François Dell, Daniel Hirst, and Jean-Roger Vergnaud, 65–122. Paris: Hermann. [“Stress assignment in sentences in French”. In Sonorous form of language, edited by François Dell, Daniel Hirst, and Jean-Roger Vergnaud, 65–122. Paris: Hermann]. Dell, François. 1989. “Concordances rythmiques entre la musique et les paroles dans le chant. L’accent et l’e muet dans la chanson française.” In Le souci des apparences : neuf études de poétique et de métrique, edited by Marc Dominicy, 121–136. Brussels: Éditions de l’Université Libre de Bruxelles. [“Rhythmic alignement between music and lyrics in singing. Stress and mute e in French songs.” In A Matter of Appearances: nine studies of poetics and metrics, edited by Marc Dominicy, 121–136. Brussels: Editions of the Free University of Brussels]. Dell, François. 2003. “Répétitions parallèles dans les paroles et dans la musique des chansons.” In Le sens et la mesure. De la pragmatique à la métrique. Hommages à Benoît de Cornulier, edited by Jean-Louis Aroui, 499–522. Paris: Champion. [“Parallel repetitions in lyrics and music of songs.” In Meaning and measure. From pragmatics to metrics.

    294

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    Tributes to Benoît de Cornulier, edited by Jean-Louis Aroui, 499–522. Paris: Champion]. Dell, François. 2015. “Text-to-tune alignment and lineation in traditional French songs.” In On the Association of Music and Lyrics in Sung Verse, edited by Teresa Proto, Paolo Canettiri, and Gianluca Valenti, 183–234. Bern: Peter Lang. Dell, François, and Romain Benini. 2020. La Concordance chez Racine. Rapports entre structure grammaticale et structure métrique dans le théâtre de Racine. Paris: Classiques Garnier. [Correspondence in Racine’s work. Relationship between grammatical structure and metrical structure in Racine’s plays. Paris: Classiques Garnier]. Dell, François, and John Halle. 2009. “Comparing musical textsetting in French and English songs.” In Towards a Typology of poetic forms, from language to metrics and beyond, edited by Jean-Louis Aroui, and Andy Arleo, 63–78. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins Publishing Company. Halle, John. 2005. Text, Tune and Metrical Form. MS. Hayes, Bruce. 1989. “The prosodic hierarchy in meter”. In Rhythm and meter, edited by Paul Kiparsky, and Gilbert Youmans, 201-260. San Diego: Academic Press. Hayes, Bruce. 1995. Metrical Stress Theory: principles and case studies. Chicago/London: The University of Chicago press. Hayes, Bruce. 2009. “Textsetting as constraint conflict.” In Towards a Typology of poetic forms, from language to metrics and beyond, edited by Jean-Louis Aroui, and Andy Arleo, 43–61. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins Publishing Company. Hayes, Bruce, and Abigail Kaun. 1996. “The role of phonological phrasing in sung and chanted verse.” The Linguistic Review 13: 243–303. Kiparsky, Paul. 1977. “The Rhythmic Structure of English Verse.” Linguistic Inquiry 8.2: 189–247. Kiparsky, Paul. 2006. “A modular metrics for folk verse.” In Formal Approaches to Poetry: recent developments in metrics, edited by Nila Fiedberg, and Bezalel E. Desher, 7–49. Berlin/New York: Mouton de Gruyter.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    295

    Lerdhal, Fred, and Ray Jackendoff. 1987. A Generative Theory of Tonal Music. Cambridge: MIT Press. Marot, Clément. 1550. Traductions de latin en françoys, imitations, et inventions nouuelles, tant de Clement Marot, que d’autres des plus excellens Poëtes de ce temps. Paris: Estienne Groulleau. https://gallica. bnf.fr/ark:/12148/bpt6k707261 [Translations from Latin to French, imitations, and new compositions, from Clement Marot and others among the most excellent poets of this time. Paris: Estienne Groulleau]. McCarthy, John J., and Alan Prince. 1995. “Faithfulness and reduplicative identity.” In Papers in Optimality Theory, edited by Jill N. Beckman, Laura Walsh Dickey, and Suzanne Urbanczyk, 249–384. Amherst: GLSA. Meigret, Louis. 1550. Le trętté de la grammęre françoęze. Paris: Chrestien Wechel. https://gallica.bnf.fr/ark:/12148/btv1b8624665r. [Treatise of the French Grammar. Paris: Chrestien Wechel]. Nespor, Marina, and Irene Vogel. 2007[1986]. Prosodic Phonology. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Ouvrard, Jean-Pierre. 1981. “Les jeux du mètre et du sens dans la chanson polyphonique française du XVIe siècle (1528-1550).” Revue de Musicologie 67.1: 5–34. [“Interplay between meter and meaning in 16th century French polyphonic song (1528-1550).” Journal of Musicology 67.1: 5–34.] Premat, Timothée. 2017. Conflits et synergies des patrons structuraux dans la musique des trouvères: investigations sur l’interface entre musique, métrique et langue. Master thesis, University Jean Moulin Lyon 3. doi: 10.5281/zenodo.3612139. [Conflicts and synergies of structural patterns in the trouvères’s music: research on the interface between music, metrics and language. Master thesis, University Jean Moulin Lyon 3]. Rainsford, Thomas. 2011. “Dividing Lines: The changing syntax and prosody of mid-line Break in medieval France octosyllabic verse.” Transactions of the Philological Society 109: 265–283.

    296

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    Rosenberg, Samuel N., Margaret Switten and Gérard Le Vot. 1998. Songs of the Troubadours and Trouvères: an anthology of poems and melodies, New York/London: Garland. Schrade, Leo. 1956. The Works of Guillaume de Machaut. Monaco: Éditions de l’Oiseau-Lyre. Thurot, Charles. [1966]1881-1883. De la prononciation française depuis le commencement du XVIe siècle, d’après les témoignages des grammairiens. Paris: Imprimerie nationale, vol. 1 [About the French pronounciation since the beginning of the 16th century, based on the grammarians’ testimonies. Paris: National Printing, vol. 1]. [reprint in 1966 by Slatkine in Geneva]. https://gallica.bnf.fr/ark:/ 12148/bpt6k4617p. Verluyten, Paul. 1989. “L’analyse de l’alexandrin, Mètre ou rythme ?” In Le souci des apparences : neuf études de poétique et de métrique, edited by Marc Dominicy, 31–74. Brussels: Éditions de l’Université de Bruxelles. [“Analysing the alexandrine: meter or rhythm?” In A Matter of Appearances: nine studies of poetics and metrics, edited by Marc Dominicy, 31-74. Brussels: Editions of the Free University of Brussels].

    APPENDIX: CORPORA’S COMPOSITION Main Corpus: Fresneau’s Songs Our main corpus is comprised of 20 Fresneau’s songs. Our editions have been established directly on the historical printed sources. 1. 1538–1540. Le Parangon des chansons, vol. III, V and VII. Lyon: Jacques Moderne.  ‘Jay la promesse’ (1538, III, fol. 22),  ‘A bien compter’ (1538, III, fol. 28),  ‘Souspir d’amours’ (1539, V, fol. 5),  ‘Mignons qui suives’ (1539, V, fol. 9),  ‘Montez soubdain’ (1540, VII, fol. 21).

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …

    297

    2. 1544. Le Difficile des chansons, vol. II. Lyon: Jacques Moderne.  ‘Ung Cordelier’ (fol. 11),  ‘Ung Jacobin’ (fol. 12),  ‘Sil est ainsi’ (fol. 13),  ‘Si vous la Baizes comptes 15’ (fol. 17),  ‘Le mien esprit’ (fol. 17),  ‘Ung advocat dict a sa feme’ (fol. 18),  ‘Ung laboureur sa journee tost’ (fol. 19),  ‘Tenot estoit en son cloz resjouy’ (fol. 20),  ‘Ung compaignon joly’ (fol. 21),  ‘Encores ung coup je vous pry’ (fol. 22),  ‘Hellas la paix ce faict au lict’ (fol. 23),  ‘Naymes jamays ces vielles’ (fol. 24). 3. 1545. Dixhuytiesme livre contenant XXVIII chansons nouvelles. Paris: Pierre Attaignant.  ‘Peine & travail’ (fol. 6). 4. 1547. Vingt & ungiesme livre contenant xxv chansons nouvelles. Paris: Pierre Attaingnant.  ‘Œil importum’ (fol. 11). 5. 1554. Unziesme livre contenant XXII chansons nouvelles. Paris: Nicolas du Chemin.  ‘Le cruel Mars’ (fol. 4-5).

    Idiolectal Control Corpus Our idiolect control corpus is comprised of 6 songs. Our editions have been established directly on the historical printed sources. The songs are: 1. 1538–1540. Le Parangon des chansons, vol. III and VII. Lyon: Jacques Moderne.  Janequin, Clément. ‘Laras tu cela michaut’ (1538, III, fol. 17),  Passereau, Pierre. ‘Ce nest pas jeu’ (1538, III, fol. 26),  Certon, Pierre. ‘Aymer ne veulx’ (1540, VII, fol 5).

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    298

    2. 1544. Le Difficile des chansons, vol. II. Lyon: Jacques Moderne.  Janequin, Clément. ‘Une Deesse en ce temps cy’ (fol. 24). 3. 1545. Dixseptiesme livre contenant XXVIII chansons nouvelles. Paris: Pierre Attaingnant.  Janequin, Clément. ‘Ung jour catin’ (fol. 10). 4. 1554. Unziesme livre contenant xxii chansons nouvelles. Paris: Nicolas du Chemin.  Janequin, Clément. ‘Pleust à Dieu’ (fol. 20).

    Stanzaic Control Corpus Our stanzaic songs control corpus is comprised of 16 trouvères’ songs, 31 Machaut’s virelais, and 21 Chardavoine’s songs. For the trouvères’ songs, we consulted the edition of Rosenberg, Switten and Le Vot (1998), and compared it to the manuscripts (abbreviated in ms.). A description of each song can be found in Premat (2017, 117-139). Letters are used to refer to the usual label of the ms. for the trouvères’ studies, folio references refer to the ms., and page references to Rosenberg, Switten and Le Vot (1998).            

    ‘Amis, amis’ (i fol. 264r-v, p. 182–183) ‘Au nouviau tens’ (K fol. 401–402, p. 223–224) ‘Au renouvel du tens que la florete’ (K fol. 340-341, N fol. 164v165r, P fol. 188r–189v, X fol. 222rv, p. 207–208) ‘Bele Doette’ (U fol. 66r-v, p. 186) ‘Bele Yolanz’ (U fol. 64v–65r, p. 188–189) ‘Douce dame virge Marie’ (X fol. 268v, p. 220–221) ‘Enmi la rousee que nest la flor’ (K fol. 318, N fol. 152r, P fol. 166rv, X 200v-201r, p. 200–201) ‘Gaite de la tor’ (U fol. 83r-v, p. 191–193) ‘L’autrier m’iere rendormiz’ (V fol. 149r, C fol. 140r-v, p. 220–221) ‘L’autrier quant je chevauchoie’ (K fol. 376, p. 198–199) ‘L’on dit qu’amors’ (U fol. 47v, p. 211–212) ‘La douçours del tens novel’ (U fol. 58v-59r, p. 202-204)

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …    

    299

    ‘Lasse, pour quoi refusai’ (K fol. 343–344, N fol. 166rv, P fol. 177rv, X fol. 224r-v, p. 213–214) ‘Li chastelains de Coucy ama tant’ (K fol. 311–312, N 148r-v, P 162v–163v, X 197r-v, p. 225–226) ‘Trop sui d’amors enganez’ (P fol. 179r-v, X fol. 215r, p. 227–228) ‘Volez-vous que je vous chant’ (K fol. 314–315, N fol. 150r, X 199r-v, p. 195–196)

    i: BFN fr 12483. K: BNF fr 5198. N: BNF fr 845. P: BNF fr 847. U: BNF fr 20050. V: BNF fr 24406. X: BNF fr 1050. Our Machaut’s songs are 31 virelais. Schrade (1956) edition have been confirmed directly on the ms. fr 1584, usually considered as one of the most trustworthy sources, probably supervised by Machaut himself. Folio numbers refers to this ms. and page number to Schrade (1956).            

    ‘He dame de vaillance’ (fol. 482r, p. 29), ‘Loyaute weil tous jours meintenir’ (fol. 482r-v, p. 29), ‘Ay mi dame de valour’ (fol. 482v, p. 30), ‘Douce dame iolie’ (fol. 482v–483r, p. 30), ‘Comment qua moy lonteinne’ (fol. 483r, p. 31), ‘Se ma dame ma guerpi’ (fol. 483v, p. 31), ‘Puis que ma dolour agree’ (fol. 483v-484r, p. 32), ‘Dou mal qui ma longuement’ (fol. 484r, p. 33), ‘Dame, ie weil endurer’ (fol. 484v, p. 33), ‘De bonte, de valour’ (fol. 484v-485r, p. 34), ‘He dame de valour’ (fol. 485r, p. 34), ‘Dame, a qui m’ottri’ (fol. 485v, p. 35),

    Timothée Premat, Sophie Chouvion and Axelle Verner

    300

                      

    ‘Quant je suis mis au retour’ (fol. 485v, p. 35), ‘J’aim sans penser laidure’ (fol. 485v-486r, p. 36), ‘Se mesdisans’ (fol. 486r-486v, p. 36), ‘C’est force, faire le weil’ (fol. 486v, p. 37), ‘Dame, voſtre doulz viaire’ (fol. 486v-487r, p. 38), ‘Helas et comment aroie’ (fol. 487r-487v, p. 39), ‘Dieus, Biaute, Douceur, Nature’ (fol. 487v, p. 40), ‘Se d’amer me repentoie’ (fol. 488r, p. 41), ‘Je vivroie liement’ (fol. 489r, p. 42), ‘Foy porter’ (fol. 489v, p. 43), ‘Tres bonne et belle’ (fol. 489v-490r, p. 44), ‘Tuit mi penser’ (fol. 490r-v, p. 46), ‘En mon cuer a un descort’ (fol. 490v, p. 45), ‘Liement me deport’ (fol. 491v, p. 48), ‘Plus dure que un dyamant’ (fol. 491v-492r, p. 49), ‘Se ie ſouſpir parfondement’ (fol. 492r-492v, p. 51), ‘Dame, mon cuer emportez’ (fol. 492v, p. 50), ‘De tout sui si confortee’ (fol. [502v] 494v35, p. 53), ‘Dame, a vous sans retollir’ (fol. 74r-v, p. 54).

    Finally, the remaining songs are 20 songs from Johan Chardavoine’s ([1980]1576) collection.        35

    ‘Boniour m’amie, boniour mon heur’ (p. 255), ‘Cauerneuſe montaigne’ (p. 125), ‘Eſt-ce pas mort quand vn corps’ (p. 91), ‘I’ay tant bon credit qu’on voudra’ (p. 142), ‘Ie ſuis attaint ie le confeſſe’ (p. 62), ‘La piaſſe des filles’ (p. 260), ‘L’eſté chauld bouilloit’ (p. 86),

    A table of contents has been inserted after the fol. 493v; foliation between brackets include the table.

    Repetitions, Rests Insertion and Schwa …              

    ‘Ma petite colombelle’ (p. 67), ‘Mignone allons voir ſi la roſe’ (p. 5), ‘N’a doncques peu mon amitié’ (p. 82), ‘Or escoutez la chanson’ (p. 162), ‘Par ou faut il, pauure, que ie commence’ (p. 124), ‘Pour faire vn bon mariage’ (p. 227), ‘Souſpirs ardens’ (p. 126), ‘Suis-ie pas malheureux’ (p. 248), ‘Sus, ſus il nous fault’ (p. 258), ‘Vn temps fut que ie voulus’ (p. 121), ‘Vne brunette icy ie voy’ (p. 9), ‘Vne ieune fillette’ (p. 77), ‘Voſtre beauté excellente’ (p. 20), ‘Vostre eſprit recreatif” (p. 10).

    301

    In: The Emergence of Grammars Editor: Michela Russo

    ISBN: 978-1-53619-888-1 © 2021 Nova Science Publishers, Inc.

    Chapter 8

    LOCATIVE, PRESENTATIVE AND PROGRESSIVE CONSTRUCTIONS IN ATLANTIC LANGUAGES Maximilien Guérin* LLACAN (UMR 8135) CNRS, Paris, France

    ABSTRACT While Atlantic languages are genetically related, the many differences they display indicate that they have been diverging from each other over a long time. These differences show up clearly when one considers the distinctions expressed in the languages’ verb morphology and the markers used to convey such distinctions. However, most Atlantic languages do have a prototypical locative construction which can also be used as a presentative and/or progressive construction. The use of a locative construction to express progressive and/or presentative is not specific to the Atlantic family. Nevertheless, both the structure of this construction and the form of the marker associated with it can be regarded as a characteristic of this family, as both are shared by a large majority of Atlantic languages, but not attested in any language in contact with a member of the Atlantic grouping. In this chapter, I assume that the *

    Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected].

    Maximilien Guérin

    304

    aforementioned construction is inherited from Proto-Atlantic, and that its marker has grammaticalized from a previous demonstrative determiner.

    Keywords: locative, progressive, presentative, Atlantic languages

    ABBREVIATIONS ANAPH CL = COP = DEIC = DEM = DEP = DET = DF = DT = EMPH = EXCL = FOC = GEN = GER = HUM = INCL = INF = IPFV = LOC = LP = MD = N = NP = PFV = PL = POSS = POSTP

    = anaphoric; noun class marker; copula; deictic marker; demonstrative; dependency; determiner; definite; distal (deixis); emphatic; exclusive (pronoun); focus; genitive; gerundive; human (noun class); inclusive (pronoun); infinitive; imperfective; locative; locative phrase; medial (deixis); neuter; noun phrase/lexical subject; perfective; plural; possessive; = postposition;

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions … PREP PRF PRO PRST PX S SBJ SG TAM VD VP

    = = = = = = = = = = =

    305

    preposition; perfect; strong pronoun; presentative; proximal (deixis); subject pronoun; subject; singular; tense-aspect-mood; verbal dependency; verb phrase.

    1. INTRODUCTION The genetic distance between Atlantic languages is very great (Pozdniakov 2011). Thus, it is not surprising to find some significant differences among these languages with respect to the distinctions expressed by verbal morphology and in the markers which are used to convey these distinctions, more so if we take into account the fact that the historical processes which renew verbal morphology are relatively fast (Creissels 2006, 163). However, there is a verbal construction attested in all groups of the Atlantic family, which seems to be specific to this family. Nearly all Atlantic languages have a locative construction which can also be used as a presentative and/or progressive construction. The use of a locative construction to express progressive aspect is a relatively common phenomenon (Bybee et al. 1994, 129). It is attested in other Niger-Congo languages, including Godié (Kru), Tyurama (Gur), Maninka (Mande) and Lingala (Bantu), and also in unrelated languages such as Basque (isolate), Burmese (Sino-Tibetan, Tibeto-Burman), Thai (Tai-Kadai) and Mandarin (Sino-Tibetan, Sinitic) (Heine and Kuteva 2002, 97–99). The use of a locative construction to express progressive aspect is thus not confined to

    306

    Maximilien Guérin

    Atlantic languages. What is specific to these languages, however, is the structure of the construction and the form of the marker. The aim of this chapter is to compare the locative ~ presentative ~ progressive constructions in Atlantic languages, in order to show that these constructions are similar in most languages of the family, and thus likely to be inherited from Proto-Atlantic. The chapter is organized as follows. In Section 2, I introduce the classification of the Atlantic family. Section 3 offers a brief presentation of locative, presentative and progressive constructions. In Section 4, I describe the structure of such constructions in Atlantic languages, with examples drawn from languages belonging to each Atlantic branch and group1. Section 5 offers an analysis of the key marker of these constructions in Atlantic languages. I propose a general pattern for this marker using examples from languages belonging to each Atlantic group. Section 6 is a discussion about the origin of these constructions. First, I show that these constructions in Atlantic languages are inherited from Proto-Atlantic. I then propose hypotheses on grammaticalization and reconstruction2.

    2. THE ATLANTIC LANGUAGES In this chapter, I adopt the classification proposed by Pozdniakov and Segerer (forthcoming). In this view, the Atlantic family consists of two main branches called North and Bak. In addition, there are a few isolated languages or clusters (Gola, Limba and Sua) for which the authors could not find convincing evidence to include them in any group. The Mel languages (the former ‘South branch’ of Atlantic family) have been removed from this classification. Indeed, “there is to date no convincing evidence that the Mel languages should be put together with the other Atlantic languages in a single Niger-Congo branch” (Pozdniakov and Segerer, forthcoming). 1 Except Nalu group. 2 I would like to thank Konstantin Pozdniakov, Nicolas Quint, Charlotte Danino and Louise Esher for comments and critiques. All errors of course remain the responsibility of the author.

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    307

    Figure 1. The internal classification of Atlantic languages (Pozdniakov and Segerer, forthcoming).

    The sample of Atlantic languages used in this chapter has been selected to be representative of the family. All subgroupings listed in the Pozdniakov and Segerer’s classification are represented by one or more languages.

    3. LOCATIVE, PRESENTATIVE AND PROGRESSIVE CONSTRUCTIONS In this chapter, I discuss locative, presentative and progressive constructions in several Atlantic languages. A locative construction is a predicative construction which expresses a (spatial or temporal) location. This kind of construction usually uses a specific marker or copula, for instance ‘is’ in English: He is in the room; Peter is here. A presentative (or presentational) construction is a predicative construction “which introduces a topic or new topic of discourse” (Matthews 2007, 316)3, for instance in English, There was a man who was following me yesterday; Here comes the

    3 For a detailed presentation of presentational constructions, see Lambrecht (1994; 2000).

    Maximilien Guérin

    308

    sun; or in French, Voilà une personne qui arrive; Me voici. A progressive construction is a predicative construction which “views an action as ongoing at reference time” (Bybee et al. 1994, 126)4, for instance in English, I am reading your book; She is walking. In several grammars of Atlantic languages, the distinction between presentative and progressive constructions is not made clear, as some authors use English progressive sentences to translate forms which appear to be presentative in the Atlantic language. In this chapter, I reproduce the authors’ English translations.

    4. STRUCTURE OF THE CONSTRUCTIONS In Wolof, the same construction is used for non-verbal locative predicate (1a) and presentative utterances (1b). In both cases, the structure is identical: Subject (NP or strong pronoun) + Marker (bearing a deictic marker) + Locative or Verbal Phrase. (1) a.

    b.

    Wolof: Locative construction (Diouf 2009, 149) SBJ=Marker Locative Phrase Ma=a ng-i c-i néeg = b-i. PRO1SG=PRST-PX PREP-PX room = CLb-DF.PX ‘I am in the room.’ Wolof: Presentative construction (Diouf and Yaguello 1991, 38) SBJ=Marker Verb Phrase Ma=a ng-i sopp xale = b-ii! PRO1SG = PRST-PX like child = CLb-DEM.PX ‘It is I who likes the child!’

    The situation is similar in Cangin languages. In Laalaa, there is the following structure: Subject (NP or strong pronoun) + Marker (which 4 For a detailed presentation of progressive constructions, see also Comrie (1976, 32–40).

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    309

    consists of an optional deictic marker, a noun class marker and a second deictic marker) + Locative or Verbal Phrase (2a-b) (Dièye 2011, 185–188). In Noon, the structure is identical, except for the first deictic marker (3a-b) (Soukka 2000, 178–180, 237–238). In Palor, the structure is slightly different. In this language, the marker consists of a glottal stop [ʔ] followed by a deictic marker. There is also a dependency marker in final position5 (4a-b) (Alton 1987, 128–129). In Ndut, the structure is almost identical to that of Palor, except for the glottal stop (5a-b) (Morgan 1996, 104–107). (2) a.

    b.

    (3) a.

    b.

    Laalaa: Locative construction (Dièye 2011, 246) SBJ Marker Locative Phrase Mi y-uu ga kaan. PRO1SG CLy-PRST.PX PREP house ‘I am at home.’ Laalaa: Presentative construction (Dièye 2011, 186) SBJ Marker Verb Phrase Mi (i) y-uu tík cëen. PRO1SG PX CLy-PRST.PX cook dinner ‘I am cooking the dinner.’/‘It is I who cooks the dinner.’ Noon: Locative construction (Soukka 2000, 238) SBJ Marker Locative Phrase Kodu y-aa ga kaan. Kodu CLy-PRST.DT PREP house ‘Kodu is at home.’ Noon: Progressive construction (Soukka 2000, 180) SBJ Marker Mi y-ii PRO1SG CLy-PRST.PX ‘I am cooking.’

    Verb Phrase tík. cook

    5 The dependency marker appears in several kinds of dependent clauses. Such markers are attested in several Atlantic languages.

    Maximilien Guérin

    310 (4) a.

    b.

    Palor: Locative construction (Alton 1987, 128)6 SBJ Marker Koyso ’-e na. child: POSS1SG PRST-PX DEP ‘My child is here.’ Palor: Presentative construction (Alton 1987, 129) SBJ Marker Verb Phrase Ɓa ’-ín nexú ra. PRO3PL PRST-DT draw_water DEP ‘It is they who draw water.’

    (5) a.

    Ndut: Locative construction (Morgan 1996, 105) SBJ Marker Locative Phrase Mustafa ee filiɓ ota. Mustafa PRST.PX inside car ‘Mustafa is inside the car.’ b. Ndut: Presentative/progressive construction (Morgan 1996, 105) SBJ Marker Verb Phrase Mustafa ee nee ra. Mustafa PRST.PX sleep DEP ‘Mustafa is sleeping.’

    An equivalent structure is displayed by the presentative construction in Buy (6): Subject + Marker (which consists of a noun class marker and a deictic marker) (Doneux 1991, 60), and by the locative/presentative construction in Niamone Nyun: Subject (NP or strong pronoun) + Marker (which consists of an optional deictic marker, a noun class marker which can be reduplicated and a second deictic marker) + Locative Phrase (7) (BaoDiop 2013, 259–261). For these two languages, my sources do not mention verbal constructions with this kind of structure. Nevertheless, in Djifanghor Nyun, the same construction is used to form non-verbal locative predicates

    6 Alton (1987) does not give any example of a non-verbal locative construction with a prepositional phrase.

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    311

    (8a) and progressive utterances (8b). In this language, the marker bears a noun class marker (Quint 2015, 417). (6) Buy: Presentative construction (Doneux 1991, 60) SBJ Marker Úlì ó-ò. man CL-PX ‘This is the man.’ (7) Niamone Nyun: Locative/presentative construction (Bao-Diop 2013, 260) SBJ Marker Locative Phrase Siidi um-moo-bim Dakaar. Sidy PX-CL-DT Dakar ‘Sidy is in Dakar.’ (8) a.

    b.

    Djifanghor Nyun: Locative construction (Quint 2015, 417) SBJ Marker Locative Phrase Bu-jɔnkah-ɔ mbɔŋ raafɔ bu-nɔhɔm-ɔ. CLbu-manioc-DF CLbu.COP on CLbu-bench-DF ‘The manioc is on the bench.’ Djifanghor Nyun: Progressive construction (Quint 2015, 417) SBJ Marker Verb Phrase Min mɛŋ bi-feg Pidru. S1PL.EXCL CL.COP CL-see Peter ‘We can see Peter. (lit. We are seeing Peter.)’

    In Sereer too, the same construction is used to produce non-verbal locative predicates (9a), and progressive utterances (9b): Subject (strong pronoun) fused with the Marker (which consists of the human noun class marker and a deictic marker) + Locative or Verb Phrase (Renaudier 2012, 58–60).

    Maximilien Guérin

    312 (9) a.

    b.

    Sereer: Locative construction (Renaudier 2012, 60) SBJ-Marker Locative Phrase Me-x-e meen. PRO1SG-CL.HUM;SG-PX CL.LOC:DEM.PX ‘I am here.’ Sereer: Progressive construction (Renaudier 2012, 58) SBJ-Marker Verb Phrase Me-x-e ñaam-aa. PRO1SG-CL.HUM;SG-PX eat-IPFV ‘I am eating.’

    In Fula, the link between the locative construction and the progressive construction has been mentioned by several authors (Ard 1979; Miyamoto 1993). For instance, in Gombe Fula (Nigeria), the locative construction (10a) and the progressive construction (10b) display an almost identical structure (Ard 1979, 129–131): Subject (NP or strong pronoun) + Locative Marker (distal) + Locative or Verb Phrase. (10) a.

    b.

    Gombe Fula: Locative construction (Arnott 1970, 32) SBJ Marker Locative Phrase ’o ɗon nder gelle jooni. S3SG LOC.DT in town now ‘He is in the town now.’ Gombe Fula: Progressive construction (Arnott 1970, 282) SBJ-Marker Verb Phrase ’o-ɗon huw-a. S3SG-LOC.DT work-IPFV ‘He is working.’

    However, this formal similarity is not equally clear across the entire dialect continuum. In eastern dialects (such as Gombe Fula), two different pronoun paradigms are used in progressive utterances. The forms of the first paradigm consist of the subject pronoun fused with the distal locative marker ɗon (10b), while the forms of the second paradigm consist of the preposition

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    313

    ’e fused with the subject pronoun (Arnott 1970, 195). On the other hand, in western dialects (such as Futa-Toro Pulaar), both paradigms have fused. Indeed, the 1SG form miɗo (and in some dialects the 1PL.EXCL form) comes from the subject pronoun (mi) fused with the locative marker (ɗo), while all other forms seem to come from the preposition ’e fused with the subject pronoun (Ard 1979, 129). For instance, the 3PL form in Jolof Pulaar is heɓe (Ka 1986, 393). Nevertheless, in 1PL.INCL, 2SG and 2PL forms, it is difficult to separate the pronominal element from the preposition (Miyamoto 1993, 223). Moreover, these forms seem to have changed by analogy with the ɗo(n)- marker paradigm. For instance, in Futa Toro Pulaar, the 1PL.INCL form is eɗen, while the subject pronoun for this person is en (Sylla 1982, 74–76), contrasting with the expected form *e-en. Besides, non-verbal locative constructions which use a locative deictic marker (10a) do not appear to be attested in western dialects (Diallo 2014, 38). Thus, the link between locative constructions and progressive constructions is clear in eastern dialects, but less clear in western dialects. In Joola languages, locative and presentative/progressive constructions display identical structures. Joola Banjal has the following structure: Subject (NP or strong pronoun) + Marker (‘copula’ which consists of a vowel [u], a noun class marker and a deictic marker) + Locative or Infinitive Verb Phrase (introduced by a preposition) (11a-b) (Bassène 2006, 185–186, 231–234). In Kwatay, the structure is similar, but the form of the marker is different: the locative ‘copula’ consists of an element -end-, preceded by a noun class marker and followed by a deictic marker (12a-b) (Payne 1992, 58). (11) a.

    Joola Banjal: Locative construction (Bassène 2006, 231) SBJ Marker Locative Phrase Atejo u-m-u búsol y-aŋ y-a-y-u. Atejo COP-CL-PX behind CLe-house CLe-DF-CLe-DF ‘Atejo is behind the house.’ b. Joola Banjal: Presentative/progressive construction (Bassène 2006, 132)

    Maximilien Guérin

    314

    SBJ Marker Atejo u-m-u Atejo COP-CL-PX ‘Atejo is working.’ (12) a.

    b.

    (Infinitive) Verb Phrase ni bu-rokk. PREP INF-work

    Kwatay: Locative construction (Payne 1992, 51) SBJ Marker E-sabun i CLe-well CLe.DF.MD Locative Phrase y-end-u hágila e-nuuf i. CLe-COP-MD behind CLe-house CLe.DF.MD ‘The well is behind the house.’ Kwatay: Progressive construction (Payne 1992, 58) SBJ Marker (Infinitive) Verb Phrase Bú-suus b-u b-ond-u ti ka-neyu. CLb-leaf CLb-DF.MD CLb-COP-MD PREP INF-fall ‘The leafs [sic] are falling.’

    In Manjaku languages, the situation is similar. In Mankanya, the progressive construction displays the structure: Subject (NP or strong pronoun) + Marker (locative ‘copula’) + Infinitive Verb Phrase (introduced by a preposition) (13) (Trifkovič 1969, 117–119). In Pepel, the locative construction displays the same structure (14) (Ndao 2011, 171–172). In these languages, the copula wo does not bear a noun class marker or a deictic marker. (13)

    Mankanya: Progressive construction (Trifkovič 1969, 118) SBJ Marker (Infinitive) Verb Phrase Ba wo ţi p-jan. S3PL COP PREP INF-hunt ‘They are hunting.’

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions … (14)

    315

    Pepel: Locative construction (Ndao 2011, 171) SBJ Marker Locative Phrase Músa wo şë o-féerú. Musa COP PREP CLo-market ‘Musa is in the marketplace.’

    In Balant Kentohe, the situation is similar to that of Manjaku languages: Subject (NP or strong pronoun) + Marker (locative ‘copula’) + Locative or Verb Phrase (15a-b) (Wilson 1961, 152; Doneux 1984, 74). (15) a.

    b.

    Balant Kentohe: Locative construction (Wilson 1961, 161) SBJ-Marker Locative Phrase Ŋ-ka Bsaaw. S1SG-COP Bissau ‘I am, live at Bissau.’ Balant Kentohe: Progressive construction (Wilson 1961, 152) SBJ-Marker Verb Phrase Bë-ka tooh-a’. S3PL-COP go-INF ‘They are going up.’

    In Tenda-Jaad languages, the situation is slightly different. While there is a link between locative and progressive constructions, the structure of these constructions is quite different from that found in the Atlantic languages I have discussed so far. For instance, in Bedik, there is the following structure: Locative or Infinitive Verb Phrase followed by an adposition + Pronominal Subject (16a-b) (Ferry 1991, 24–26). In Badiaranke, the structure is similar. The only differences are the absence of the adposition and the presence of a copula bearing the subject index (17ab) (Cover 2010, 126–132). Thus, in Tenda-Jaad languages, the structure is comparable to that attested in Manjaku languages, but word order is reversed. A more detailed study would be needed in order to determine the precise structure of these constructions.

    Maximilien Guérin

    316 (16) a.

    b.

    (17) a.

    b.

    Bedik: Locative construction (Ferry 1991, 26) Lúŋɔ̀ ɛ̀mé. there S1SG ‘I am there.’ Bedik: Progressive construction (Ferry 1991, 26) Ù-ŝas láŋ ɛ̀wɔ́. INF-speak_on S3SG ‘He is speaking.’ Badiaranke: Locative construction (Cover 2010, 132) Fe paadiyã k-ə̃. PREP room:POSS3SG COP-S3SG ‘S/he is in his/her room.’ Badiaranke: Progressive construction (Cover 2010, 127) Aamadu ŋka Binta ka-safiŋ-e kǝ-bə̃ leetar. Aamadu and Binta INF-write-INF COP-S3PL letter ‘Aamadu and Binta are writing a letter.’

    In Bijogo, it seems that there is no link between locative, progressive and presentative constructions. The locative construction usually uses the verb ko (to be, be located in) (18a) (Segerer 2002, 34–41). The progressive construction uses the verb te (to stand) (18b) (Segerer 2002, 273). The presentative construction uses a marker originating from grammaticalization of the imperative form of the verb joŋ (to see) with the andative suffix: njam < *n-joŋ-am (IMP.2SG-see-AND) (18c) (Segerer 2002, 215). (18) a.

    b.

    Bijogo: Locative construction (Segerer 2002, 34) Ɲo-ok eti-bɛnɛ. S1SG.PF-be_located PREP-face ‘I am in front.’ Bijogo: Progressive construction (Segerer 2002, 273) Ɲe-te n-kpay. S1SG.PFV-stand VD-make_palm_wine ‘I am making palm wine.’

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions … c.

    317

    Bijogo: Presentative construction (Segerer 2002, 215) Njam bapɔr eri Bisaw. PRST boat CLe:GEN Bissau ‘Here is the boat from Bissau.’

    The structures of locative and presentative/progressive constructions of Atlantic languages I have examined are summarized in Table (1): Table 1. Structure of locative and presentative/progressive constructions in several Atlantic languages Branch Group

    Language

    Subject Marker

    North

    Wolof Buy Niamone Djifanghor Bedik Badiaranke Fula Sereer Laalaa Noon Palor Ndut Mankanya Pepel Banjal Kwatay Kentohe Bijogo

    NP/S =a ng-DEIC NP/(S) CL-DEIC NP/S DEIC-CL-DEIC S CL.COP (other construction)

    Wolof Nyun

    TendaJaad FulaSereer Cangin

    Bak

    Manjaku Joola Balant Bijogo

    Locative Phrase LP (?) LP LP

    NP/S DEIC LP (NP)/S -CL.HUM-DEIC LP NP/S (DEIC) CL-DEIC LP NP/S CL-DEIC LP NP/S ’-DEIC DEP (?) NP/S DEIC LP NP/S wo (not enough data) NP/S wo LP NP/S u-CL-DEIC LP NP/S CL-end-DEIC NP/S ka LP (other kind of construction)

    / Verb Phrase / / / /

    VP (not enough data) (not enough data) VP

    / / / / / / / / / / /

    VP VP VP VP VP DEP VP DEP PREP INF-VP

    (not enough data) PREP INF-VP PREP INF-VP VP

    5. MARKERS OF THE CONSTRUCTIONS The form of the marker of the locative, presentative and/or progressive constructions is similar in most Atlantic languages. Comparing languages belonging to all branches of the family, I propose the following general structure:

    Maximilien Guérin

    318

    Amalgam

    Subject

    Marker

    Link S

    DEIC 1

    Base CL

    DEIC 2

    Figure 2. Structure of the locative-progressive marker in Atlantic languages.

    The marker can be fused with the subject pronoun. The marker usually consists of a deictic marker, which can be used as a link with the subject pronoun, and a base, which consists of a noun class marker and a (second) deictic marker. The noun class marker usually agrees with the subject, and deictic 1 usually agrees with deictic 2. In Laalaa, the marker displays exactly this structure. The subject is either a noun phrase (19a), or a strong pronoun (19b). The noun class marker agrees with the subject (19a) or matches the human noun class if the subject is a personal pronoun (19b). Deictic 2 is identical to the deictic marker of the definite determiner, that is to say -aa for distal (19a) and -ii for proximal (19b).7 Deictic 1 is optional in verbal predicate utterances. It agrees with deictic 2 as follows: e for distal (19a) and i for proximal (19b) (Dièye 2011, 185–186). In Noon, the structure is almost identical. There are only two differences: no deictic 1, and a third marker -um (near addressee) is possible for deictic 2 (Soukka 2000, 178–179). (19) a.

    Laalaa (Dièye 2011, 186) Oomah-c-aa (e) c-aa neh ga tua. child-CLc-DF.DT DT CLc-DT sleep PREP hut:CLw-DF.DT ‘The children are sleeping in the hut.’

    7 Due to dissimilation, the proximal morpheme -ii becomes -uu when it is suffixed to the noun class marker y- (Dièye 2011, 186).

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions … b.

    Mi

    (i) y-uu PRO1SG PX CLy-PRST.PX ‘I am cooking the dinner.’

    tík cook

    319 cëen. dinner

    In Palor, the structure is slightly different. The subject is either a noun phrase (20a), or a strong pronoun (20b). The marker does not display any noun class marker, but a consonant [ʔ]. Nevertheless, this consonant can be compared with the onset of the indefinite determiner of the human noun class: ’o. Deictic 2 is identical to the deictic marker of the definite determiners, that is to say -ín for distal (20a) and -e for proximal (20b). The marker ’e may be fused with singular personal pronouns, resulting in the loss of the glottal consonant and in regressive assimilation of the final consonant of the pronoun (20b) (Alton 1987, 128–129). In Ndut, the structure is almost identical. A third marker -a (medial) is possible for deictic 2. Moreover, the glottal consonant is missing, but the vowel of the proximal or medial deictic is long (Morgan 1996, 104–107). One may suppose that this is a case of compensatory lengthening resulting from the loss of the glottal plosive. (20) a.

    b.

    Palor (Alton 1987, 129) Tedox-a ’-ín ten fan-fa ra. shepherd-CLø-DF.PX CL-DT milk cow-CLf.DF.PX DEP ‘It is the shepherd who is milking the cow.’ Fe-e yaaɓ ɗa. PRO2SG-PX be_hungry DEP ‘It is I who is hungry.’

    In Sereer, the subject is a strong pronoun in the first and second persons (21a), or a pronominal index in the third person (21b). The (necessarily human) noun class marker agrees in number and is fused with the subject pronoun (21a-b) (Renaudier 2012, 59). Deictic 2 is identical to the deictic of definite determiners, that is to say -e for proximal (most common form) (21a) and -aa for distal (21b) (Faye 1982, 39–40). There is no deictic 1.

    Maximilien Guérin

    320 (21) a.

    b.

    Sereer Me-x-e PRO1SG-CL.HUM;SG-PX ‘I am eating.’ O-w-aa PRO3PL-CL.HUM;PL-DT ‘They are working.’

    ñaam-aa. (Renaudier 2012, 58) eat-IPFV njaal-aa. work-IPFV

    (Faye 1982, 39)

    It is notable that the singular human noun class marker is not -x, but -ox. I assume that the initial vowel must have fused with the final vowel of the first and second person pronouns, and been reanalyzed as a third person pronominal index. Then, the pronominal index a- (3PL) became o- in most dialects by analogy with the 3SG form. This hypothesis explains the pronominal index o-, attested nowhere else in Sereer grammar, and the change of vowel in the 1SG pronoun. Table 2. Origin of locative pronouns in Sereer

    SG

    PL

    Pronoun mi wo Ø in nuun a-

    1 2 3 1 2 3

    Marker -oxe

    -we

    Amalgam *mi-oxe *wo-oxe *Ø-oxe *in-we *nuun-we *a-we

    → → → → → →

    *meexe *wooxe *oxe *inwe *nuunwe *awe

    → → → → → →

    mexe woxe oxe inwe nuunwe owe

    In Fula, the marker does bear no noun class marker or deictic 1. The subject is either a noun phrase (22a) or a subject pronoun (22b). In eastern dialects, deictic 2 is identical to the distal locative marker ɗon (22a-b), while in western dialects it is identical to the proximal locative marker ɗo (Ard 1979, 129–130). In Pulaar, this deictic marker is identical to the deictic marker of the demonstrative determiner (Sylla 1982, 45–50). (22) a.

    Gombe Fula (Arnott 1970, 282–283) Hoore ’am ɗon head POSS1SG DT ‘My head is aching.’

    naaw-a. ache-IPFV

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions … b.

    321

    ’o-ɗon huw-a. S3SG-DT work-IPFV ‘He is working.’

    In Niamone Nyun, the subject is either a noun phrase (23a) or a strong pronoun (23b). The noun class marker agrees with the subject (23a), or matches the human noun class if the subject is a personal pronoun (23b). It fuses with the subject pronoun (23b). Deictic 1 is identical to the proximal deictic marker of the demonstrative determiners, i.e., in- (23a-b) (Bao-Diop 2013, 259–261)8. Deictic 2 is similar to locative markers, i.e., bim for distal (23a) and na for proximal (23b) (Bao-Diop 2013, 237–238). Deictic 1 does not agree with deictic 2; only the proximal deictic marker in- is attested, regardless of deictic 2 (23a-b). In Djifanghor Nyun, the situation is similar, although the elements cannot be easily separated. Deictic 1 is usually identical to the proximal deictic marker of the demonstrative determiners, but the marker is shorter and seems to be less regular than Niamone Nyun ones. Deictic 2 is often a marker -ŋ, which plausibly corresponds to the truncated form of a locative marker. For instance, the marker mbaŋ can be analyzed in this way: m- (PX) + ba (CLba) + -ŋ (PX). It should be noted that the paradigm contains several idiosyncrasies and that the forms cannot be easily analyzed (Quint 2015, 413). (23) a.

    b.

    Niamone Nyun (Bao-Diop 2013, 260, 74) Siidi um-moo-bim Dakaar. Sidy PX-CLu-DT Dakar ‘Sidy is in Dakar.’ F-um-moo-na? PRO2SG-PX-CL.HUM;SG-PX ‘Are you there?’

    8 The vowel harmonizes with the noun class vowel. Moreover, if the noun class consonant is occlusive, the nasal consonant place of articulation assimilates to the noun class consonant. If the noun class consonant is fricative, the vowel is nasalized, and the nasal consonant is lost (Bao-Diop 2013, 146).

    Maximilien Guérin

    322

    In Buy, the subject is either a noun phrase (24a), or a strong pronoun (24b). Deictic 2 is identical to the deictic marker of the demonstrative determiners, i.e., -o for proximal (24a) and -k for distal (24b) (Doneux 1991, 60). The vowel of the marker can be compared to the singular human noun class marker o-. Nevertheless, the presentative marker differs from the demonstrative marker in its tone pattern: úlì óò (this is the man) ~ úlì òo (this man). Note also that the marker does not contain a deictic 1. (24) a.

    b.

    Buy (Doneux 1991, 60) Géndéŋ ó-ò. night CL.HUM;SG-PX ‘This is the night.’ Náàn ó-òk. PRO3PL CL.HUM;SG-PX ‘Here they are.’

    In Joola Banjal, the subject is either a noun phrase (25a) or a strong pronoun (25b). The noun class marker agrees with the subject (25a), or matches the human noun class if the subject is a personal pronoun (25b). Deictic 2 is identical to the proximal deictic marker of the demonstrative determiners, i.e., u- for distal (25a), -e for proximal (25b), and -ua for medial (Bassène 2006, 231–234). Deictic 1 does not agree with deictic 2, but appears identical to the distal deictic marker of demonstrative determiners. Nevertheless, another analysis can be proposed. The presentative marker matches a truncated form of the demonstrative determiner. For instance: j-au-j-u (CLj-DEM-CLj-DT) ~ u-j-u (DEIC-CLj-DT); Ø-a(x)u-m-e (CL.HUM;SG-DEM-CL.HUM;SG-PX) ~ u-m-e (DEIC-CL.HUM;SG-PX). However, this analysis is not possible for the plural human noun class: g-au-m-e (CL.HUM;PL-DEM-CL.HUM;PL-PX) ~ u-bug-e (DEIC-CL.HUM;PL-PX). The situation is similar in Joola Fonyi (Sapir 1969, 71).

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions … (25) a.

    b.

    323

    Joola Banjal (Bassène 2006, 231–233) Ji-iba j-a-j-u u-j-u CLj-knife CLj-DF-CLj-DF DEM-CLj-DT ni e-vvañ y-a-y-u. PREP CLe-kitchen CLe-DF-CLe-DF ‘The knife is in the kitchen.’ Ínje u-m-e tiyaŋ ni-robo-e. PRO1SG DEM-CL.HUM;SG-PX outside S1SG-sit-TAM ‘I am sitting outside.’

    In Kwatay, the subject is either a noun phrase (26a), or a strong pronoun (26b). The noun class marker agrees with the subject (26a), unless the subject is a personal pronoun. In this case, the noun class marker is omitted and the locative/presentative marker fuses with the pronoun (26b). Deictic 2 is identical to the deictic marker of demonstrative determiners, i.e., -ondu for medial (most common) (26a), -onde for proximal (26b) and -onda for distal (Payne 1992, 58). Note also that the marker does not contain a deictic 1. (26) a.

    b.

    Kwatay (Payne 1992, 58) Bú-suus b-u b-ond-u ti ka-neyu. CLb-leaf CLb-DF.MD CLb-DEM-MD PREP INF-fall ‘The leafs are falling.’ Ínj-end-u tu bu-ñoofo. PRO1SG-DEM-MD PREP INF-eat ‘I am eating.’

    In Wolof, the subject is either a noun phrase (27a), or a strong pronoun (27b-d). Deictic 2 is identical to the deictic marker of definite determiners, i.e., -i for proximal (the most common) (27a) and -a for distal (27b). It can also be identical to the deictic marker of deictic demonstrative determiners, i.e., -ii or -ile for proximal (27c) and -ee or -ale for distal, or to the marker of anaphoric demonstrative determiners. 9 The marker does not contain a 9 For an exhaustive list of Wolof determiners, see Fal et al. (1990, 20), Cissé (2007, 56–57), Diouf (2009, 173) or Guérin (2011, 111).

    Maximilien Guérin

    324

    noun class marker, but instead has an element ng. Anaphoric demonstrative determiners display a structure CL-oo-CL-DEIC (27e) (Fal 1999, 52–53), i.e., a form which contains the noun class marker twice. Yet in the presentative marker, the first occurrence is ng-, but the second occurrence is -g-: ng-oog-DEIC (27d). This indicates that ng is likely to derive from the noun class marker g-10. The alternation g ~ ng at the beginning of the word may be the result of a morphophonological phenomenon, a case of consonant alternation by prenasalization. (27) a.

    b.

    c.

    d.

    e.

    Wolof (Diouf 2009, 149; Diouf 2003, 357, 51, 340) Ma = a-ng-i c-i néeg =b-i. PRO1SG = DT-CL-PX PREP-PX room = CLb-DF.PX ‘I am in the room.’ Sama jabar = a-ng-a c-a waañ = w-a. POSS1SG wife = DT-CL-DT PREP-DT kitchen = CLw-DF.DT ‘My wife is in the kitchen.’ Omar = a-ng-ale di dem. Omar = DT-CL-DEM.DT IPFV go ‘This is Omar who is leaving.’ Aw doj = a-ng-oo-g-ule IDF:CLw pebble= DT-CL-DEM.ANAPH-CL-DEM.ANAPH.PX c-i sa wetu tànk. PREP-PX POSS2SG side:GEN foot ‘This is a pebble beside your foot.’ Mën = nañoo tëkkale can = PRF:S3PL:VD compare léeb= y-oo-y-ule… tale =CLy-DEM.ANAPH-CLy-DEM.ANAPH.PX ‘One can compare these tales…’

    Deictic 1 is usually identical to the distal marker a. Nevertheless, in 3SG, 1PL et 3PL forms, three variants are attested: either the vowel a of the marker 10 This noun class contains, inter alia, toponyms and tree nouns (Guérin 2011, 76).

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    325

    fuses with the final vowel of the pronoun (moo ngi; noo ngi; ñoo ngi), or the final vowel -u of the pronoun is replaced by -i, i.e., a proximal marker (mi ngi; ni ngi; ñi ngi), or the vowel a of the marker is missing (mu ngi; nu ngi; ñu ngi) (Church 1981, 62–63). In Manjaku languages, the subject is either a strong pronoun (28), or a noun phrase (29). Unlike the languages discussed so far, the marker does not seem to display the structure proposed in Figure (2). Indeed, in Mankanya or Pepel, the marker is an irregular verb wo. One possible interpretation is that w- is a noun class marker and -o is a deictic marker, but this hypothesis is not consistent with the grammar of these languages. If w- is a noun class marker, it should correspond to the noun class marker u-. In Pepel, this class contains, inter alia, tree nouns (as does the noun class g- in Wolof) (Ndao 2011, 66). In Mankanya, this class contains, inter alia, animal nouns (Trifkovič 1969, 75). Besides, -o does not correspond to Manjaku deictic markers. In Mankanya, the deictic markers of demonstrative determiners are -i (proximal) and -uŋ (distal) (Trifkovič 1969, 81; Gaved and Gaved 2007, 15). In Pepel, these markers are -i (proximal) and -u (distal) (Ndao 2011, 96). (28)

    Mankanya (Trifkovič 1969, 118) Ba wo ţi p-jan. S3PL COP PREP INF-hunt ‘They are hunting.’

    (29)

    Pepel (Ndao 2011, 171) Músa wo şë Musa COP PREP ‘Musa is in the marketplace.’

    o-féerú. CLo-market

    Thus, in Manjaku languages, the marker of locative and progressive constructions has a different structure to that proposed in Figure (2). However, the marker of presentative construction displays a comparable structure. In Mankanya, presentative is expressed by reduplication of the demonstrative determiner, which consists of a noun class marker and a

    Maximilien Guérin

    326

    deictic marker (30) (Gaved 2007, 13). In Pepel, it is expressed by a postposed deictic marker (31) (Ndao 2011, 201). (30)

    (31)

    Mankanya (Gaved 2007, 13) Ba-buk naan CLba-child POSS1SG ‘These are my children.’ Pepel (Ndao 2011, 201) Í-ñi o-wul CLí-tooth CLo-dog ‘These are the dog’s teeth.’

    bik-i CLba-PX

    bik-i. CLba-PX

    i. PX

    In Balant Kentohe, as in Manjaku languages, the marker has a different structure to that proposed in Figure (2). In this language, the marker is a verb ka, which does not consist of a noun class marker and a deictic marker. In Tenda-Jaad languages, the situation is similar. In Badiaranke, the marker is a verb (ya)k, which does not consist of a noun class marker and a deictic marker (32). In Bedik, there is no specific marker. Locative and progressive are expressed by the choice of subject pronoun and the preposition (33). (32)

    Badiaranke (Cover 2010, 132) Fe paadiyã k-ə̃. PREP room:POSS3SG COP-S3SG ‘S/he is in his/her room.’

    (33)

    Bedik (Ferry 1991, 26) Ù-ŝas láŋ INF-speak on ‘He is speaking.’

    ɛ̀wɔ́. S3SG

    Forms of the locative and presentative/progressive markers of Atlantic languages discussed in this study are summarized in Table (3):

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    327

    Table 3. Form of the locative and presentative/progressive constructions in several Atlantic languages Branch

    North

    Group

    Language

    Amalgam Subject S

    Wolof

    Wolof

    PRO-

    NyunBuy

    PRO

    Bak

    Manjaku

    Branch

    Joola Group

    Buy Niamone Djifanghor Bedik Badiaranke Pulaar Sereer Laalaa Noon Palor Ndut Mankanya Pepel Banjal Language

    Balant Bijogo

    Kwatay Kentohe Bijogo

    TendaJaad FulaSereer Cangin

    PROPRO

    Marker Link DEIC 1 DF.DT (/PX) DEM.PX DEM.PX

    Base CL

    DEIC 2

    CL.LOC?

    DF/DEM

    CL.HUM;SG?

    DEM

    SUJ

    LOC

    SUJ

    LOC

    no marker marker displaying a different structure SPROCL.HUM PRO (DEIC 2) SUJ PRO SUJ PROCL.HUM;SG? PROCL.HUM;SG? marker displaying a different structure marker displaying a different structure PRO DEM.DT? SUJ Amalgam Subject Marker S Link Base DEIC 1 CL PROSUJ marker displaying a different structure marker displaying a different structure

    LOC (DEM) DF DF DF DF DF

    DEM

    DEIC 2 DEM

    In summary, in most Atlantic languages, the marker of locative and presentative/progressive constructions displays the same structure: DEIC1CL-DEIC2. Only Tenda-Jaad, Manjaku, Balant and Bijogo languages display a different marker. In most languages, deictic 2 is identical to deictic markers of demonstrative or definite determiners; the exceptions are Fula and Nyun languages, in which deictic 2 is identical to locative markers. Deictic 1 is much less common. It is a fossilized marker identical to proximal (Nyun) or

    328

    Maximilien Guérin

    distal (Wolof, Joola) markers of demonstrative or definite determiners; except in Laalaa, where it agrees with deictic 2. The noun class marker agrees with the subject in Nyun, Joola and some Cangin (Laalaa, Noon) languages. In Sereer, the human noun class marker is used, and agrees in number with the subject. In some Cangin languages (Palor, Ndut) and in Buy, the marker is fossilized and resembles the human noun class marker. In Wolof too, the marker is fossilized, but is entirely distinct from the human noun class marker. In Fula, the noun class marker is absent. If the subject is a pronoun, it is often a strong pronoun. In some languages, this pronoun fuses with the marker (Wolof, Niamone Nyun, Sereer, Palor-Ndut, Kwatay), while in other languages, it is an independent word (Buy, Djifanghor Nyun, Laalaa, Noon, Joola Banjal). Fula is the only language which uses a weak subject pronoun in the constructions discussed here.

    6. ORIGIN OF THE CONSTRUCTION 6.1. A Genetic Inheritance Most Atlantic languages have a locative construction which can be also used as a presentative and/or progressive construction. The structure of these constructions and the form of the marker resemble each other across languages. Moreover, comparative study of the form of the marker is consistent with the actual classification. Thus, the languages that do not display any marker (Bedik, Badiaranke, Mankanya, Pepel, Kentohe, Bijogo) belong to specific groups of the Atlantic family (Tenda-Jaad, Manjaku, Balant, Bijogo). Furthermore, within a group, the languages display very similar markers. For instance, in Joola languages, the marker agrees in noun class with the subject and bears a deictic marker identical to that of demonstrative determiners. These observations indicate that these constructions have the same origin. The fact that these constructions are

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    329

    attested in both branches (North and Bak) suggests that this is an ancient construction, dating back to Proto-Atlantic. While typological convergence or language contact appear unlikely, neither possibility can be excluded without considering the other languages of the region. I focus here on languages in contact with Atlantic languages, namely:    

    Mande languages: Soninke, Manding (especially Mandinka) and Jalonke; Casamance Creole (Portuguese-based Creole spoken in Casamance); Zenaga (Berber language spoken in the south of Mauritania); Mel languages: Kisi, Mani (also called Bullom) and Temne.

    In Soninke, the locative copula wá (34a) also has the function of imperfective marker (34b) (Creissels 2015, 2–4). The word háayí is used as presentative (35a) or progressive marker (35b) (Diagana 1995, 386–388). However, these markers do not correspond to the Atlantic markers. The copula wá is likely to be derived from the verb wàrí (see) (Creissels 2015, 6–7), and háayí is clearly derived from the verb háayí (look) (Diagana 1995, 386–388). (34) a.

    b.

    (35) a.

    Soninke (Creissels 2015, 3–4) Múusá wá Moussa COP ‘Moussa is in the room.’ Ó wá táaxú-nú 1PL COP sit-GER ‘We will sit on the mat.’

    kónpè-n room-DET

    dí. in

    dàagó-n mat-DET

    kànmá. on

    Soninke (Diagana 1995, 387; Diagana 2013, 169) Lémínè-n háayí. child-DET PRST ‘Here is the child.’

    Maximilien Guérin

    330 b.

    À háayí rágè-né yà. 3SG PRST perform_ablutions-GER FOC ‘He is performing his ablutions.’

    In Mandinka, the locative copula bé (36a) is also used as a progressive marker (36b) (Creissels and Sambou 2013, 139–145). Presentative is expressed by félé (37a) or háyíná(ŋ) (37b) (Creissels and Sambou 2013, 151–152). However, these markers do not correspond to the Atlantic markers, as they are clearly derived from homonym verbs meaning ‘look’ and ‘see’. The origin of the copula bé is harder to determine, possibly a lexical verb (Kastenholz 2003; Babaev 2011), but whatever its origin, it displays no similarity with the demonstrative determiners ñǐŋ/wǒ or the locative adverbs jǎŋ (PX)/jěe (DT) of modern Mandinka (Creissels and Sambou 2013, 194–197, 311–313). (36) a.

    b.

    (37) a.

    b.

    Mandinka (Creissels and Sambou 2013, 139, 144) Yír-óo be síl-ôo dáala. tree-DET COP path-DET on_the_edge_of ‘The tree is on the edge of the path.’ Yír-óo be boy-óo la. tree-DET COP fall-DET POSTP ‘The tree is falling.’ Mandinka (Creissels and Sambou 2013, 151) Í lá dómór-ôo féle! 2SG GEN food-DET PRST ‘Here is your meal!’ A-té le háyíná kew-ó-lu ñáato. 3SG-EMPH FOC PRST man-DET-PL ahead ‘There he is at the head of the men.’

    In Jalonke, there does not appear to be any connection between locative, progressive and presentative constructions. Locative is usually expressed by juxtaposition of both elements (38a) (Lüpke 2005, 133–134). Progressive is

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    331

    usually expressed by the suffix -ma, which certainly derives from the homonym postposition (38b) (Lüpke 2005, 122–123). Presentative is expressed by the marker jεε (38c), which can be derived from the proximal demonstrative determiner ji (Lüpke 2005, 134). Thus, this last construction displays some similarities with Atlantic presentative constructions. Nevertheless, it differs in that it must contain an obligatory focus marker, the deictic marker is fossilized, and it cannot form an autonomous utterance. (38) a.

    b.

    c.

    Jalonke (Lüpke 2005, 122, 133–134) Biniir-εε taabal-na fari. bottle-DF table-DF on ‘The bottle is on the table.’ A dii-na xun-na S3SG child-DF head-DF ‘She is shaving the child’s head.’ Banxi nan jεε… house FOC PRST ‘There is a house.’

    bii-ma. cut-IPFV

    In Casamance Creole, the locative construction usually contains the copula sá (39a), from the Portuguese verb estar (Biagui 2012, 188–189). The progressive construction contains the imperfective marker na (39b) (Biagui 2012, 160). There is also a construction called ‘gerundive’ by Quint (2000a, 264), expressed by the locative copula and the preposition na (39c), which is likely to derive from the Portuguese contracted form na ~ em-a (inthe) (Quint 2000a, 204–205). According to Quint (2000a, 265), the imperfective marker originates from the gerundive construction. The preposition na grammaticalized into an imperfective marker owing to the loss of the copula. Finally, the marker of the presentative construction consists of an emphatic marker a- and a locative li (PX) or la (DT) which can be reinforced by a second locative (39d-e) (Biagui 2012, 260–261). These forms are highly reminiscent of Atlantic markers. However, their structure and origin are different. Unlike Atlantic markers, the Casamancian presentative marker is placed before the subject. Moreover, in Casamancian

    Maximilien Guérin

    332

    the presentative construction has no connection with locative or progressive. Indeed, in (39e) the progressive feature is expressed by the imperfective marker na, rather than the presentative marker, and this marker is not derived from a demonstrative determiner. Furthermore, the locative markers of the presentational construction come from Portuguese adverbs ali (here) et alá (there) (Quint 2000a, 219). The element a- is likely to have the same origin, but it tends to be reanalyzed as an emphatic marker (Quint 2000a, 219). This marker comes from the Portuguese preposition a (to) (Quint 2000a, 162), which has grammaticalized into an emphatic marker, conceivably on the model of Mandinka emphatic markers (37b) (Quint 2000b, 47–48). (39) a.

    b.

    c.

    d.

    e.

    Casamancian (Biagui 2012, 160, 214, 260, 269) Pidru ku Mariya sá na Peter with Mary COP PREP ‘Peter and Mary are in the house.’ I na kumé karna di S3SG IPFV eat meat of ‘He is eating some pork.’ Pidru sá na kantá. Peter COP PREP sing ‘Peter is singing.’ A-li Pidru li. EMPH-PX Peter PX ‘Here is Peter.’ A-lé-m na kusñá. EMPH-PX-S1SG IPFV cook ‘I am cooking.’

    kasa. house purku. pork

    In Zenaga, the presentative construction contains a copula äđ and a neuter demonstrative pronoun bearing a deictic marker (40a-b) (TaineCheikh 2010, 364–365). The copula is formally identical to the proximal singular masculine demonstrative determiner (Taine-Cheikh 2010, 363). Thus, these forms present some similarities with the Atlantic markers. However, they do not display the same structure and they do not appear in

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    333

    the same context. Indeed, unlike Atlantic languages, the noun phrase is placed after the marker. Moreover, in Zenaga, this marker is not used in locative or progressive constructions. Finally, the copula äđ can be used to express identification, while Atlantic markers are only used to express localization. (40) a.

    b.

    Zenaga (Taine-Cheikh 2010, 364–365) Äđ-äyđ Kumbä. COP-DEM.N.PX Kumba ‘This is Kumba.’ Äđ-ān iʔym-än. COP-DEM.N.DT camel-PL ‘That (over there) are camels.’

    In most Mel languages, there does not appear to be any connection between locative, progressive and presentative constructions. This is the case in Kisi (Childs 1995) or in Mani (Childs 2011). Nevertheless, the situation in Temne is quite similar to that found in Atlantic. In Temne, the same marker is used in presentative (41a-b) and progressive constructions (41c) (Bai-Sheka 1991). It consists of a noun class marker and a deictic marker. The noun class marker agrees with the subject (41b-c) or matches with the human noun class if the subject is a personal pronoun (41a). The noun class marker may fuse with the subject pronoun (41b). The deictic marker is identical to the deictic marker of demonstrative determiners, i.e., -ε for proximal (41a) and -aŋ for distal (41b-c). Thus, as in Atlantic languages, the marker displays the same structure as the demonstrative determiner. However, its syntactic position is different. In Atlantic languages, the marker is placed between the subject and the verb, while in Temne, it is placed after the verb (41c). (41) a.

    Temne (Bai-Sheka 1991, 121–122) Minɛ ɔw-ɛ. PRO1SG CL.HUM;SG-PX ‘Here I am.’

    Maximilien Guérin

    334 b.

    c.

    Kə-gbɛngbɛ k-ak-aŋ. CLk-chili PRO.CLk-CLk-DT ‘That is a chili.’ Ká-gbɛngbɛ kə fúmpɔ k-aŋ. CLk.DF-chili PRO.CLk fall CLk-DT ‘The chili is falling.’

    To sum up, most Atlantic languages have a locative ~ presentative ~ progressive construction. The structure of these constructions and the form of the marker display strong similarities from one language to another. Because a link between locative, presentative and progressive constructions is relatively common cross-linguistically, one possibility is that these similarities constitute an areal phenomenon. However, none of the other Senegambian languages displays equivalent constructions. Only Temne, the most northern Mel language, has a marker which is formally similar to Atlantic markers. There are two possible explanations for this difference between Temne and other Mel languages. Either Temne is not a Mel language but an Atlantic language (this hypothesis is improbable, in view of current knowledge about the family), or Temne acquired this construction due to contact with Atlantic languages11. Temne is a vehicular language (in Sierra Leone), which places it in a situation conducive to borrowing; this fact tends to support the second hypothesis. Thus, the locative ~ presentative ~ progressive construction attested in Atlantic languages is clearly shown to derive from Proto-Atlantic.

    6.2. Grammaticalization and Reconstruction Hypotheses In several Atlantic languages, the marker discussed here is formally similar to demonstrative determiners. Grammaticalization of demonstratives into locative copulas is attested in many languages around the world (Heine and Kuteva 2002, 108–109). In other Atlantic languages, the marker is

    11 I thank Konstantin Pozdniakov for suggesting this hypothesis to me.

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    335

    formally similar to definite determiners. Grammaticalization of demonstrative determiners into definite determiners is attested in many languages around the world (Heine and Kuteva 2002, 109–111). In all Atlantic languages that display such constructions, the marker is used both as a locative copula and as a presentative or progressive marker. The use of a locative copula as a presentative marker (Gelderen 2011, 133), or the grammaticalization of such copulas into progressive markers (Heine and Kuteva 2002, 97–99) is attested in many languages around the world. I therefore propose the following grammaticalization path: Demonstrative (→ Definite) → Locative copula (→ Presentative) → Progressive In Joola languages, the demonstrative grammaticalized into a locative copula. In Cangin languages and Sereer, it first grammaticalized into a definite determiner. In many languages, grammaticalization has resulted in the demonstrative fossilizing. Initially, it had to agree in noun class with the subject, as is still the case in Nyun, Joola and certain Cangin (Laalaa, Noon) languages. In Sereer, its agreement is limited to number; the human noun class has become the only available noun class, probably due to its frequency. In Palor-Ndut, Buy and Wolof, the marker is completely fossilized. It matches the singular human noun class, except in Wolof where the marker’s origin is uncertain. Later, the locative copula assumed the function of presentative marker or grammaticalized into a progressive marker. Based on the data provided in (§5), I propose the following reconstruction for the Proto-Atlantic marker: *DEIC1-CL-DEIC2. Deictic 2 matches the deictic marker of demonstrative determiners. Determining the form of Deictic 1 is harder, because it is absent from most languages. Nevertheless, it is attested in four different groups (Wolof, Nyun, Cangin, Joola). This indicates that it was most probably present in Proto-Atlantic. In this proto-language, it appears that Deictic 1 was identical to or agreed with Deictic 2, and that the noun class marker agreed with the subject noun class. The fact that the noun class marker has become fossilized (with the human

    336

    Maximilien Guérin

    noun class form) is probably due to the over-representation of human subjects in the discourse. Finally, if the subject is a pronoun, it is a strong pronoun.

    CONCLUSION Most Atlantic languages have a locative ~ presentative ~ progressive construction. This construction displays the same structure and the same kind of markers in nearly all Atlantic languages (the only known exceptions being the Tenda-Jaad, Manjaku, Balant and Bijogo groupings). In these Atlantic languages, the structure of the construction is: Subject (NP or strong pronoun) + Specific marker + Locative or verb phrase The form of the marker is: DEIC1-CL-DEIC2. The noun class marker usually agrees with the subject, and deictic 1 usually agrees with deictic 2. The use of a locative construction to express progressive and/or presentative is not unique to the Atlantic family. Nevertheless, the structure of these constructions and the form of the marker can be considered to be characteristic of this family, as they are common to a large majority of Atlantic languages, but are not attested in any language in contact with Atlantic languages. I therefore conclude that this construction is inherited from Proto-Atlantic, the marker having grammaticalized from a demonstrative determiner. As genetic distance between Atlantic languages is very great, the grammars of these languages display significant diversity. However, my comparative study shows that, despite this diversity, one predicative construction at least is common to most languages of the family. Furthermore, a comparative study of the form of the marker gives results which are fully consistent with the most recent classifications of Atlantic languages; languages that do not display any marker belong to the same groups and, within a given group, all languages display very similar markers.

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    337

    Classifications of Atlantic languages are based on a limited set of elements: lexicon, noun classes, consonant mutation, verbal extensions or pronominal systems (Pozdniakov and Segerer, forthcoming). The present chapter shows that a comparative study of morphosyntactic constructions is also relevant for the classification of these languages. More generally, I conclude that a comparative study of morphosyntactic constructions is highly relevant in historical linguistics, and that such constructions should be more systematically taken into account in order to refine and falsify the available genetic classifications of the world’s languages.

    REFERENCES Ard, Josh. 1979. “A comparative and historical study of locative-based periphrastic verbal forms in Fula dialects”. Studies in African Linguistics 10. 2: 119–158. Arnott, David W. 1970. The Nominal and Verbal Systems of Fula. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Babaev, Kirill. 2011. “On the reconstruction of some tense/aspect markers in Proto-Mande.” Journal of Language Relationship 6: 1–24. Bai-Sheka, Abou. 1991. “Prédication non verbale en temne / Non-verbal predication in Temne.” Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere 26: 113–126. [“Non-verbal predication in Temne.” Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere]. Bao Diop, Sokhna. 2013. Description du baynunk guñaamolo, langue minoritaire du Sénégal : analyse phonologique, morphologique et syntaxique / Description of Baynunk guñaamolo, minority language of Senegal: phonological, morphological and syntactic analysis. PhD diss., Inalco and Université Cheikh Anta Diop. Bassène, Alain-Christian. 2006. Description du jóola banjal (Sénégal) / Description of Jóola banjal (Senegal). PhD diss., Université Lumière Lyon 2. Biagui, Noël Bernard. 2012. Description générale du créole afro-portugais parlé à Ziguinchor (Sénégal) / General description of Afro-Portuguese

    338

    Maximilien Guérin

    Creole spoken in Ziguinchor (Senegal). PhD diss., Inalco and Université Cheikh Anta Diop. Bybee, Joan, Revere Perkins and William Pagliuca. 1994. The Evolution of Grammar: Tense, aspect, and modality in the languages of the world. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Childs, G. Tucker. 1995. A Grammar of Kisi. Berlin: De Gruyter. Childs, G. Tucker. 2011. A Grammar of Mani. Berlin: De Gruyter. Cissé, Mamadou. 2007. Dictionnaire Français-Wolof / French-Wolof dictionary. Paris: L’Asiathèque. Comrie, Bernard. 1976. Aspect. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Cover, Rebecca T. 2010. Aspect, Modality, and Tense in Badiaranke. PhD diss., University of California. Creissels, Denis. 2006. Syntaxe générale, une introduction typologique [General syntax, a typological introduction, Vol. 1 : categories and constructions]. Paris: Lavoisier. Creissels, Denis. 2015. “Copulas originating from ‘see/look’ verbs in Mande languages.” Paper presented at the Symposium Areal patterns of grammaticalization and cross-linguistic variation in grammaticalization scenarios, Mainz. Creissels, Denis, and Pierre Sambou. 2013. Le mandinka: Phonologie, grammaire, textes [Mandinka: Phonology, grammar, texts]. Paris: Karthala. D’Alton, Paula. 1987. Le Palor : esquisse phonologique et grammaticale d’une langue cangin du Sénégal suivi d’un lexique et de textes transcrits et traduits [Palor: phonological and grammatical sketch of a Senegalese cangin language followed by a lexicon and transcribed and translated texts]. Paris: CNRS Éditions. Diagana, Ousmane M. 1995. La langue soninkée : Morphosyntaxe et sens [The Soninke language: Morphosyntax and meaning]. Paris: L’Harmattan. Diagana, Ousmane M. 2013. Dictionnaire soninké-français (Mauritanie), Nouvelle édition revue et augmentée [Soninke-French dictionary (Mauritania)], New revised and enlarged edition. Paris: Karthala.

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    339

    Diallo, Abdourahmane. 2014. “Constructions copulatives en peul / Copulative constructions in Fula.” In La transmission culturelle: L’exemple du peul [Cultural transmission: The example of Fula], edited by Ursula Baumgardt and Abdourahmane Diallo, 25–42. Paris: Karthala. Dièye, El Hadji. 2011. Description d’une langue Cangin du Sénégal : le laalaa (léhar) [Description of a Cangin language of Senegal]: Laalaa (Lehar). PhD diss., Inalco and Université Cheikh Anta Diop. Diouf, Jean-Léopold. 2003. Dictionnaire wolof-français et français-wolof [Wolof-French and French-Wolof dictionary.] Paris: Karthala. Diouf, Jean-Léopold. 2009. Grammaire du wolof contemporain, Édition revue et complétée [Grammar of contemporary Wolof], Revised and enlarged edition. Paris: L’Harmattan. Diouf, Jean-Léopold and Marina Yaguello. 1991. J’apprends le wolof Damay jàng wolof [I learn Wolof]. Paris: Karthala. Doneux, Jean Léonce. 1991. La place de la langue buy dans le groupe atlantique de la famille kongo-kordofan [The place of the Buy language in the Atlantic group of the Kongo-Kordofan family]. PhD diss., Université Libre de Bruxelles. Fal, Arame, Rosine Santos, and Jean Léonce Doneux. 1990. Dictionnaire wolof-français suivi d’un index français-wolof [Wolof-French dictionary followed by a French-Wolof index]. Paris: Karthala. Faye, Souleymane. 1982. Morphologie du verbe sérère [Morphology of the Serer verb]. Dakar: Centre de Linguistique Appliquée de Dakar. Ferry, Marie-Paule. 1991. Thesaurus tenda : Dictionnaire ethnolinguistique de langues sénégaloguinéennes (bassari, bedik, konyagi) [Tenda thesaurus: Ethnolinguistic dictionary of senegaloguinean languages (Bassari, Bedik, Konyagi)]. Paris: Peeters. Gaved, Timothy. 2007. Un article sur la grammaire de mancagne [An article on the grammar of Mancagne]. Dakar: SIL Sénégal. http://www.sil.org/resources/archives/42699. Gaved, Timothy and Margaret Gaved. 2007. Le nom en mancagne [The noun in Mancagne.] Dakar: SIL Sénégal. http://www.sil.org/resources/archives/42698.

    340

    Maximilien Guérin

    Gelderen, Elly van. 2011. The Linguistic Cycle. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Guérin, Maximilien. 2011. Le syntagme nominal en wolof : une approche typologique [The nominal phrase in Wolof: a typological approach]. MA diss., Université Sorbonne Nouvelle – Paris 3. Guérin, Maximilien. 2016. Les constructions verbales en wolof : Vers une typologie de la prédication, de l’auxiliation et des périphrases [Verbal constructions in Wolof: Towards a typology of predication, auxiliation and periphrasis]. PhD diss., Université Sorbonne Nouvelle - Paris 3. Heine, Bernd, and Tania Kuteva. 2002. World Lexicon of Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Ka, Fary S. 1986. Les formes verbales du pulaar et leur emploi systématique de la conjugaison verbale [The verbal forms of Pulaar and their systematic use of the verbal conjugation]. Bulletin de l’Institut Fondamental d’Afrique Noire 46B, 3/4: 379–427. Kastenholz, Raimund. 2003. “Auxiliaries, grammaticalization, and word order in Mande.” Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 24.1: 31–53. Lambrecht, Knud. 1994. Information structure and sentence form: Topic, focus and the mental representations of discourse referents. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Lambrecht, Knud. 2000. Prédication seconde et structure informationnelle: la relative de perception comme construction présentative [Second predication and information structure: the relative of perception as a presentative construction]. Langue française 127: 49–66. Lüpke, Friederike. 2005. A grammar of Jalonke argument structure. PhD diss., Radboud Universiteit Nijmegen. Matthews, Peter H. 2007. Concise Oxford Dictionary of Linguistics, 2nd edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Miyamoto, Ritsuko. 1993. “A Study of Fula Dialects: Examining the Continuous/Stative Constructions.” Senri Ethnological Studies 35: 215– 230. Morgan, Daniel R. 1996. Overview of grammatical structures of Ndut: a Cangin language of Senegal. MA diss., University of Texas.

    Locative, Presentative and Progressive Constructions …

    341

    Ndao, Dame. 2011. Phonologie, morphologie et structures syntaxiques du pepel / Phonology, morphology and syntactic structures of Pepel. PhD diss., Inalco and Université Cheikh Anta Diop. Payne, Stephen. 1992. Une grammaire pratique (avec phonologie et dictionnaire) de kwatay (parler du village de Diémbéring, basse Casamance, Sénégal) [A practical grammar (with phonology and dictionary) of Kwatay (dialect of the village of Diembering, lower Casamance, Senegal)]. Dakar: SIL. Pozdniakov, Konstantin. 2011. Les langues atlantiques [Atlantic languages]. In Dictionnaire des langues [Dictionary of languages], edited by Emilio Bonvini, Joëlle Busuttil and Alain Peyraube, 20–23. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France. Pozdniakov, Konstantin, and Guillaume Segerer. To appear. Genealogical classification of Atlantic languages. In The Oxford guide to the Atlantic languages of West Africa, edited by Friederike Lüpke. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Quint, Nicolas. 2000a. Grammaire de la langue cap-verdienne: Étude descriptive et compréhensive du créole afro-portugais des Îles du CapVert [Grammar of the Capeverdean language: Descriptive and comprehensive study of the Afro-Portuguese Creole of the Cape Verde Islands]. Paris: L’Harmattan. Quint, Nicolas. 2000b. Le cap-verdien: origines et devenir d’une langue métisse [Capeverdean: origins and future of an Afro-Portuguese language]. Paris: L’Harmattan. Quint, Nicolas. 2015. Le système des classes nominales en nyun de Djifanghor [The nominal class system in Djifanghor Nyun]. In Les classes nominales dans les langues atlantiques [Nominal classes in the Atlantic languages], edited by Denis Creissels and Konstantin Pozdniakov, 407–443. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe Verlag. Renaudier, Marie. 2012. Dérivation et valence en sereer: Variété de Mar Lodj (Sénégal) [Derivation and valence in Sereer: Variety of Mar Lodj (Senegal)]. PhD diss., Université Lumière Lyon 2. Sapir, J. David. 1969. A Grammar of Diola-Fogny. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

    342

    Maximilien Guérin

    Segerer, Guillaume. 2002. La langue bijogo de Bubaque (Guinée Bissau) [The Bijogo language of Bubaque (Guinea-Bissau).] Louvain: Peeters. Soukka, Maria. 2000. A Descriptive Grammar of Noon: A Cangin Language of Senegal. Munich: Lincom Europa. Sylla, Yèro.1982. Grammaire moderne du pulaar [Modern Grammar of Pulaar]. Dakar: Les Nouvelles Éditions Africaines. Taine-Cheikh, Catherine. 2010. “The role of the Berber deictic and TAM markers in dependent clauses in Zenaga.” In Clause-Linking and Clause-Hierarchy, edited by Isabelle Bril, 355–398. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Trifkovič, Mirjana. 1969. Le mancagne : étude phonologique et morphologique [Mancagne: phonological and morphological study]. Dakar: Institut Fondamental d’Afrique Noire. Wilson, W. André. 1961. A. “Outline of the Balanta language.” African Language Studies 2: 139–168.

    In: The Emergence of Grammars Editor: Michela Russo

    ISBN: 978-1-53619-888-1 © 2021 Nova Science Publishers, Inc.

    Chapter 9

    PARADIGM FUNCTION MORPHOLOGY APPLIED TO THE SOUTHERN FINNIC DIALECT NETWORK Jean Léo Léonard* Dipralang EA 739, Montpellier 3 University, France

    In memoriam Kaido Torop

    ABSTRACT This chapter provides a survey of competing taxonomies for Finnic inflectional systems, based on the combination of Paradigm Function Morphology and Templatic & Particle Phonology. We apply our syncretic model to diasystemic analysis for Finnish and Estonian dialects, with several case studies (Carelian Isthmus Finnish, Kihnu Estonian, etc.), yet also considering the standard varieties for these two reference languages. The Chapter points mainly at two relevant questions, both for FinnoUgrian linguistics and general typology in morphology and phonology: *

    Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected].

    344

    Jean Léo Léonard what does the comparison of Finnic Inflectional Taxonomies (IT) teach us about the typology of inflection systems in the World’s languages? How can (or should) theoretical challenges on morphological complexity be addressed with different models from theoretical linguistics, when handling dialect variation? We suggest the apparent complexity of the Finnic IT can be accounted for by parsimonious sets of MPR (Morphophonological Rules) and diasystemic implicational graphs of stem variation (RSS: Rules of Stem Selection) and exponent affixation or fusion (RE: Rules of Exponents). This reductionism turns complexity into its dialectic counterpart: simplexity, which is required for any endeavor to unravel (apparently) overwhelming intricacy in linguistic systems. Once a simplexity model has been contrived and designed to address morphological overwriting in a language or a linguistic domain, even the most intricate dialect phenomenology can be easily handled.

    Keywords: Finnic, Finnish, Estonian, inflectional morphology, phonology, diasystem

    ABREVIATIONS ablat abes ades allat comtv elat ECP ess gen gvt ines ill Kh lic MPR nom

    ablative abessive adessive allative comitative elative Empty Category Principle essive genitive government inessive illative Kihnu dialect licencing Morphophonological Rules nominative

    Paradigm Function Morphology … ptv IC ICT ICC RE RR RSC S SE SF SRE VH W

    345

    partitive Inflectional Class Inflectional Class Taxonomy Inflectional Class Construction Rules of Exponence Realisational Rule Rules of Stem Choice (as superscript) Strong (grade) Standard Estonian Standard Finnish Specific Rules of Exponence Vowel Harmony (as superscript) Weak (grade)

    Symbols { } default (or unmarked category); ⌐ excluding, all but…

    1. INTRODUCTION: METHODS AND GOALS 1.1. Methods In this article I will attempt to survey the structural interplay between typological parameters of inflectional morphology in various areas of the Finnic diasystem, using PFM (Paradigm Function Morphology: Stump 2001, 2015) as a heuristic model on the one hand, and a templatic CVCV framework (Scheer 2005, 2011, 2012, 2015) for the description of MPR (Morpho-Phonological Rules) on the other hand. To make my main point clear from the outset: with Southern Finnic, we will be dealing with the archetype of what the present volume is aiming at: morphophonological rules embedded in grammar –to put it in five words only. Few languages in

    346

    Jean Léo Léonard

    the world show intricacy of MPR and RSC (Rules of Stem Choice) to such an extent. In fact, languages ‘standardly’ known as fusional (French or Gallo-Italic dialects in the romance area, Gur languages in the Niger-Congo stock, etc.) hardly match the level of morpho-phonological fusion observed in Estonian and its dialect network –except perhaps Livonian, another Finnic language, spoken in the Southernmost area of the Finnic domain. Here, MPR have ruled for centuries, before they eventually bowed before the structural obviousness of RSC (Rules of Stem Choice), out of deletion and compensatory lengthening (resulting in Q3 or third degree of quantity, as we will see in section 3). There can hardly be an array of RSC in synchrony without a MPR ‘heritage’ in diachrony, licensing the forms available today in the grammars of Estonian dialects and Livonian. This is ‘good news,’ for the sake of both General Morphology and General Phonology (which are more twin brothers or sisters than foes plotting on their own to make new patterns emerging in languages, through space and time). Therefore, as always in grammar, what is first needed is a clear-cut Inflectional Class Taxonomy (ICT). I will implement taxonomic proposals for inflectional classes as suggested in Viks (1992 [nd], 2000a–b, 2001, 2003), taking also into account proposals from Blevins (2007), Erelt et al. (1993), Viitso (2003), and Baerman (2014) for the Võro dialect. Moreover, the intricate relation of inflection patterns with lexical morphology (see Kaasik 2015 for Standard Estonian) will be considered to some extent.

    1.2. Goals This survey of competing taxonomies for Finnic inflectional systems will therefore point mainly at two relevant questions, both for Finno-Ugrian linguistics and general typology: 1. What does the comparison of Finnic inflectional taxonomies teach us about the typology of inflection systems in the World’s languages?

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    347

    2. How can (or should) theoretical challenges on morphological complexity be addressed with different models from theoretical linguistics (Baerman et al. 2015, Léonard 2014)?

    1.3. Theoretical Scope PFM (Paradigm Function Morphology) is a theoretical model from the field of Word and Paradigms in morphology, which advocates a threefold modular division between Rules of Stem Choice, accounting for the formation of stems and stem alternations or suppletion on the one hand, as opposed to Rules of Exponence (RE), accounting for affixal concatenation, on the other hand. Sets of Morpho-Phonological Rules (MPR), indeed, come as a third component, and work as a separate, autonomous, yet organically integrated module (Stump 2001). This standpoint applies broadly to diachronic drifts: for instance, in North-Western Finnic languages (Finnish and its dialect network), morphophonological rules (MPR) are still overt and straightforwardly visible. They account for many sets of alternating stems on the basis of syllabic structure out of Coda Licensing (Kaye 1990), triggered by (former) inflectional suffixation (i.e., suffixal concatenation). Southern Finnic languages such as Estonian and Livonian have integrated the MPR module into the lexical component, through Rules of Stem Selection, due to a strong trend to suffixal deletion or merging –or fusion of the morphological exponents. Instead, Rules of Exponence of more or less heavy resilient suffixes still strongly undergo Morphophonological Rules in adjusting the juncture of stems selected in the Rules of Stem Choice component in the lexicon. Moreover, if the initial trigger was indeed Suffixal Coda licensing, in Southern and Eastern Finnic, this process has shifted cyclically to a suffixal Coda Government of the thematic onset, as below, for SF (Standard Finnish) as opposed to the Southern Ostrobotnian dialect (Southwestern Finland) in Figure 1, for the lexical item joki ‘river’ in Finnish. In short, licensing processes substantially enrich or modify the inner structure of segments, through lateral interaction (from the right to the left of the word),

    348

    Jean Léo Léonard

    whereas government processes impoverish or delete (through government proper) the inner structure of segments, i.e., prosodic slots in the word template.

    Figure 1. CVCV/Government and Coda licensing Model for SF nominal inflection (IC 8*).1

    In terms of intersegmental processes, or segmental interaction patterns, licensing processes enrich the feature matrix of segments (here, through approximation of the intervocalic velar unvoiced stop by the suffixal coda), whereas government impoverishes or deletes feature matrices or segments2. I will now attempt to describe parsimonious sets of Rules of Stem Choice (henceforth, RSC) combining with Rules of Exponence (henceforth, RE) and Morphophonological Rules (henceforth, MPR). How do the units generated in these three components of the inflectional system select and/or combine the various units available in the verbal template? Standard ‘received’ or ‘reference’ descriptions agree with complex sets of Inflectional Classes (henceforth, IC), highly MPR – driven for both Standard Finnish and Estonian.

    1

    IC 8* reads as ‘Inflectional Class 8: additional subclass (*)’, according to ICT defined by the Nykysuomen Sanakirja (Reference dictionary for Standard Finnish), edited by Sadeniemi and Vesikansa et al. [1951] 1980. 2 See http://sites.unice.fr/scheer/ for an abundant bibliography on this issue.

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    349

    As Ülle Viks [nd] points out, Inflectional Classes are but constructs designed by linguists, out of taxonomic traits. Their total number can vary from a handful to over a hundred for the same language, according to ‘the art of lumping or splitting’ or ‘the art of (skipping) details.’ Therefore, the main issue in framing an ICT lays in the purpose: either practical, as with the compilation of a dictionary and didactic textbooks, or theoretical, from the standpoint of General Morphology. This chapter focuses more on the latter than the former. I will revisit these classifications, or ICT proposals, from the standpoint of taxonomic criteria retrievable from a PFM approach. In other words, I will address the following issues: how can Finnic inflectional class taxonomy be accounted for by specific RSC combined with RE? With what effects and consequences do criteria combine in the making up of this taxonomy? How do these patterns contribute to a general theory of Inflectional Class Construction (ICC)? What are the building bricks making up these IC? How far are they predictable and regular? How do IC and morphosyntactic series (grammatical or core cases and number for nouns and adjectives, person and number for verbs) interact? How do these interactions rank hierarchically in a general framework? These are but a few of the questions we will try to address in this chapter, using PFM as a taxonomic compass, and CVCV phonology as adobe bricks to build up this modest ICT house. Any house needs a roof, and in this case, the roof is provided by the diasystemic approach (see implicational graph, Figure 2 below), in order to test the robustness of the whole construction.

    2. THE PFM (PARADIGM FUNCTION MORPHOLOGY) FRAMEWORK APPLIED TO FINNIC DECLENSION In order to illustrate PFM representations, I will use a lexeme from Inflectional Class 10* (IC 10*, according to NS: XII-XVI) in Standard

    350

    Jean Léo Léonard

    Finnish (SF) –IC ÕS 17 in Standard Estonian3): Finnish nominative singular pata / genitive singular padan, Estonian nom. sg. pada / gen. sg. paja ‘cauldron, pot.’ Analysis will focus on SF paradigms for this lexeme, which shows low entropy, but also slight qualitative gradation of the fortis/lenis segmental (not prosodic) type: Block I: 1. RSC10*: Stem X1S (PATA, σ {Case: {nom, ptv, Ill, ess}, Number: {sg})  < pata,  > 2. RSC10*: Stem X2S (PATA, σ {Case ⌐{ nom, acc}, Number: {pl})  < pato,  > 3. RSC10*: Stem X3W (PATA, Case { }, Number: {sg})  < pada, σ > 4. RSC10*: Stem X4W (PATA, σ {Case { }, Number: {pl})  < pado, > The set of rules above for SF declension reads as follows: Block 1: Rules of Stem Choice, for number and case agreement: 1. IF stem X1S Meaning stem 1 (stem = X1) undergoing a qualitative gradation alternation of the strong type, prosodic strength being conveyed by the S exponent (X1S)4. THEN a form such as X1S is expected, such as defined by a set of morphosyntactic and morphosemantic features for the abstract lexeme PATA: (PATA, σ {Case: {nom, ptv, Ill, Ess}, Number: {singular}). The corresponding realisation is therefore pata, as a structural, thematic chunk of the combinatoric for this lexical item. The pata stem is declared as a

    3

    ÕS stands for Õigekeelsussõnaraamat, i.e., the reference dictionary of Standard Estonian, published in (2013). 4 In rows (iii) and (iv), aW exponent reads as a weak form of the stem (as in pada, pado).

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    351

    realisational form matching (symbol ) the set of morphosyntactic and morphosemantic features below: {Case: { nom, ptv, Ill, Ess}, Number: {singular} The next rule reads as follows, as far as the last descriptive component is concerned:

    2. RSC10*: Stem X2S (PATA, σ {Case {ptv, ill, ess, comtv}, Number: {pl})  < pato,  > IF the stem pato occurs in the paradigmatic function tables (i.e., any matrix of inflectional data of a language L), then it will account for a subset of plural stem realisations for grammatical and semantic cases from the list {ptv, ill, ess, comtv}.

    3. RSC10*: Stem X3W (PATA, { })  < pada, σ > IF stem X3W is of the weak type, the allomorphic stem pada occurs, then it will necessarily combine with all categories for singular not included in the previous singular set (i) above. This stem can therefore be defined as the default combinatory unit for the residual taxonomic range of this inflectional class, for number singular. The last row reads as follows: 4. IF the realizational stem pado, described as a MPR conditioned weak stem 3 (noted therefore X4W) occurs in the paradigmatic function tables, then it will count as the default paradigm function for all plural stem realizations not accounted for by RSC X2S (row ii) Let us now turn to the block of Rules of Exponence, for declensions in IC 10*for Standard Finnish: Block II(a): Rules of Exponence (RE), for singular agreement:

    352

    Jean Léo Léonard 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

    RE: X10* σ {Case {nom}, Number{sg}}  X1S  < pata, σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {ptv}, Number{sg}}  X1Sa  < pataa, σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {ill}, Number{sg}}  X1San  < pataan, σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {ess}, Number{sg}}  X1Sna  < patana, σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {gen, acc}, Number{sg}}  X3Wn  < padan, σ> RE: X10* σ {Case {ines}, Number{sg}}  X3Wssa  < padassa, σ> RE: X10* σ {Case {elat}, Number{sg}}  X3Wsta  < padasta, σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {ades}, Number{sg}}  X3Wlla  < padalla, σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {allat}, Number{sg}}  X3Wlle  < padalle, σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {ablat}, Number{sg}}  X3Wlta  < padalta, σ> RE: X10* σ {Case {abes}, Number{sg}}  X3Wtta  < padatta, σ >

    NB: S = Strong grade; W = Weak grade, here used qualitatively instead of quantitatively (ex. Above RE(i) X1S  < pata > versus RE(v) X3Wn  < padan >, with obvious coda licensing). For Standard Estonian (SE), I’ll use these abreviation only for quantitative gradation (Q1-3; Q = Quantity). Block II(b): Rules of Exponence (RE), for plural agreement: 1. RE: X10* σ {Case {ptv}, Number{pl}}  X2Sja  < patoja, σ > 2. RE: X10* σ {Case {gen}, Number{pl}}  X2Sjen  < patojen, σ> 3. RE: X10* σ {Case {ill}, Number{pl}}  X2Sihin  < patoihin, σ> 4. RE: X10* σ {Case {ess}, Number{pl}}  X2Sina  < patoina, σ>

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    353

    5. RE: X10* σ {Case {cmtv}, Number{pl}}  X2Sineen  < patoineen, σ > 6. RE: X10* σ {Case {nom, acc}, Number{pl}}  X3Wt  < padat, σ> 7. RE: X10* σ {Case {ines}, Number{pl}}  X4Wissa  < padoissa, σ> 8. RE: X10* σ {Case {elat}, Number{pl}}  X4Wista  < padoista, σ> 9. RE: X10* σ {Case {ades}, Number{pl}}  X4Willa  < padoilla, σ> 10. RE: X10* σ {Case {allat}, Number{pl}}  X4Wille  < padoille, σ> 11. RE: X10* σ {Case {ablat}, Number{pl}}  X4Wilta  < padoilta, σ> 12. RE: X10* σ {Case {abes}, Number{pl}}  X4Witta  < padoitta, σ> 13. RE: X10* σ {Case {instr}, Number{pl}}  X4Win  < padoin, σ> Interestingly enough, the comitative and the instructive fall under the paradigmatic field of plural stems X2S and X4W, although they are both underspecified for number, so that empty brackets, expressing a default trait, apply to the corresponding forms Comitative patoineen, Instructive padoin, as described in representations Block I(2) and Block I(4) above. Any reader used to the standard way of analysing Finnic morphology may wonder why exponents are presented as lumps (-ja, -jen, etc.), instead of elementary units: e.g., ptv pl: X2Sja  < patoja>, gen pl: X2Sjen  < patojen>, ill pl: X2Sihin  < patoihin>, ess pl: X2Sina  < patoina>, cmtv pl: X 2Sineen  < patoineen>, instead of -j-a, -j-en, -i-hVn, i-na, -ine-en, with -i- for plural, -a as an allomorph for ptv, -hVn for illative, -nA for essive and -ne-Vn for cmtv + clitic.poss3. This ‘lumping’ representation of morphemes, instead of the traditional analytic procedure, is typical of Realisational Rules (RR). Because PFM is a declarative model, nothing

    354

    Jean Léo Léonard

    would otherwise impede enumerating morphemes analytically uphill in the description, defining units one by one, in terms of SRE (Specific Rules of Exponence), as in (SRE 14-16 below). We have decided against this option here, preferring to apply RR, which better match the phonology/morphology interface, accounting for realisational outputs rather than morphemic inputs. 14. SREi: σ {Number{pl}  i} 15. SREj: σ {Case{cmtv}  ne} 16. SREk: σ {Clitic {poss}  Vn} This chain being conflated into a row such as (i)^(ne)^(Vn)MPR 2 NB: see (ii) below for a description of MPR 2. Nevertheless, lumping (realizational) chains of the Word and Process type (see Karlsson 1986, and especially Karlsson 1977, following Hockett 1954) better captures the concatenative processes than the traditional Word & Paradigm description. Block III: Major MorphoPhonological Rules (MPR) in SF: To exemplify the third block, I suggest applying MPR at stem level and/or at the juncture with exponents: 17. A broad constraint of Vowel Harmony (VowHarm of the palatovelar type, i.e., PAL, strongly stem-driven): MPR 1 : √Nucleus{PAL /i, e/{ })} Suff < Vn > VowHarm Suggesting that a default subsystem of neutral vowels is embedded in the Palatal Harmony system, as /i,e/ may be lexically underspecified. 18. A progressive stem vowel assimilation for illative, or possessive 3rd person cliticization, typically interactive at RSC & RE levels): MPR 2 : < Vj # < Vk > >  < Vj < Vj > ># 19. A more specific vowel dissimilation through labialisation for low vowel stems, such as in IC 10*, also of the juncture type RSC & RE:

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    355

    MPR 3 : < VLow, velar, illabial< ViPL > >  < VLow, velar, labial< ViPL >>. One might object that our RSC are somewhat far fetched or not relevant for a so called ”agglutinative” language such as SF: a mere lenition MPR on the pata stem, giving pada as an output, should be enough. Nevertheless, if this were the case, we would further need to explain how secundary weak stems, such as those found in South-Eastern Finnish (Savo) should be handled –the weak stems resulting from consonant dropping and further diphthongization of the consecutive long vowel: pata+C > pada- > pada- > paa- > poa- (> pua-, pua’a)5, as opposed to pata-, pato- ‘strong’ stems. This leads us to the diasystemic ”roofing” component of this chapter. We argue that dialectical variation helps to conspicuously account for and test the complexity of formative rules in any language, especially to test such broad typological properties as ‘agglutinative’. South-Eastern Finnish (e.g., the Eastern part of the Isthmus of Carelia) RE: X10* σ {Case {nom}, Number{sg}}  X1S  < pata, σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {gen, acc}, Number{sg}}  X3Wn  < poa(n),σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {ines}, Number{sg}}  X3Wssa  < poas(sa), σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {elat}, Number{sg}}  X3Wsta  < poast(a), σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {ades}, Number{sg}}  X3Wlla  < poal(la), σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {allat}, Number{sg}}  X3Wlle  < poalle, σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {ablat}, Number{sg}}  X3Wlta  < poalt(a), σ > RE: X10* σ {Case {abes}, Number{sg}}  X3Wtta  < poatta, σ > The phenomena found in South-Eastern Finnish dialects strongly advocate in favor of a RSC analysis, considering the fabric of ICT and the extensive complexity of ICT thoughout the diasystem, rather than surveying only the standard language. Moreover, the weak grade reflex -d- for coronal stops in Standard Finnish is notoriously known as the product of artificial and normative levelling –it is straightforwardly borrowed from Swedish– rather than as a native reflex. We’ll therefore proceed further in exploring 5

    See Kettunen 1940, map 65, available online at http://kettunen.fnhost.org/html/kett065.html.

    356

    Jean Léo Léonard

    the diversity of solutions found in the Southern Finnic languages from a diasystemic standpoint, focusing first on Standard Estonian (SE), then on the Kihnu dialect.

    3. MODELING INFLECTIONAL CLASS SYSTEMS IN SOUTH EASTERN FINNIC LANGUAGES Remes (2009) provides an interesting account of nominative versus genitive singular stem patterns in standard Estonian, typical of the main trends available in this system, from an Item and Process standpoint, summed up below in Box 16: Box 1. Remes’ model revisited and expanded for ICT of SE Default forms, with syncretic stems for both nom & gen sg: maa ‘country’, pesa ‘nest’, saba ‘tail’, pere ‘family’, õnnetu ‘unhappy’, aasta ‘year’. Alternation patterns, according to the following subsets, for NOMINATIVE : GENITIVE SG forms: Desinential stem vowel alternation: nimi : nime ‘name’. Templatic alternation: Intensive7: lapsik : lapsiku ‘childish’, teos : teose ‘work, (published) volume’, ilus : ilusa ‘beautiful’, kuulus : kuulsa ‘well known, famous’, peegel : peegli ‘mirror’, harakas : haraka ‘magpie’, neljas : neljanda ‘fourth’, jalg : jala ‘foot’, Q³ keel : Q² keele ‘language, tongue’, rikas : rikka ‘rich’, Q² võõras : Q3 võõra ‘guest, stranger, foreignor’, kannel : kandle ‘Finnic harp’. NB: exponents Q2 and Q3 refer to prosodic quantity 2 (long) and 3 (extralong). Extensive8: pime : pimeda ‘dark, blind’, ese : eseme ‘thing’. Qualitative gradation patterns: Introflection: sada : saja ‘hundred’, tuba : toa ‘room’, murre : murde ‘dialect’ Introflection and desinential alternation: mägi : mäe ‘hill’, tegu : teo ‘act’.

    6

    I have revisited and modified Remes’ terminology in order to make it compatible with the modeling used to frame the implicational graph below (Figures 2 and 7). 7 i.e., templatic contraction, with consecutive stem ‘ghost’ vowel alternation. 8 i.e., expansion (with either an alternating semi-derivational augment, or a ‘ghost’ augment (according to the French term).

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    357

    I suggest considering that alternations such as kallis : kalli ‘dear, expensive’, opposing a consonantal stem to a vowel stem are above all qualitative. Such pairs can be defined as (Stem) Desinential C versus Desinential V, akin to the ‘intensive’ or the ‘introflexive type’ (ex. kallas : kalda ‘shore’, nom. Sg : gen. sg.), albeit not properly identical to this parameter, as these thematic units are more external than those involved in introflection proper. I also suggest adding two parameters –mostly active in the suffixal domain– to this list: a. Suffixal C alternation: esimene : esimese ‘first’, vaikne: vaikse ‘quiet’. The same suffixal -n-/-s- alternation exists in Finnish and in most Finnic languages. The property suffix -ne/-s(e) can be considered derivational, or at least of derivational origin (with adjectival and diminutive, i.e., evaluative, semantic features). b. Suffixal V alternation: `lind: `linde ‘bird’ (Nominative Sg: Partitive Pl; NB: hence, the diacritic ` stands for an extralong quantity, i.e., Q3, according to usual conventions among Estonian linguists). Here -e is not an intensive stem vowel (in this case, -u would be the proper stem vowel, in nom. sg.), but rather a suffix, occupying the nucleus slot. Moreover, as a partitive plural vowel, -e is an analogical splinter9, from the 22nd and other IC paradigms. Following an Item and Process approach, we can postulate, as a working hypothesis for Standard Estonian IC lumping, that the seven processes ranked in the implicational graph below account for most of SE declension inflectional classes.

    9

    See Dubert–Garcia (2014) for a definition of this term. In short, a splinter is an inflectional fragment which spreads from one cell or paradigm to others, as with the velar marker in verb inflection in Catalan.

    358

    Jean Léo Léonard

    Figure 2. An implicational graph for inflectional patterns in Standard Estonian, inspired by Haspelmath’s implicational graph design: see Haspelmath (1997) and Hienonen (2010).

    These patterns can be ranked according to an implicational graph10, as in Figure 2, in which the default pattern stands as an external option, dominating an intricate square-shaped network of patterns –templatic versus 10

    See Haspelmath (1997) and Hienonen (2010) for implicational graphs applied to semantic mapping rather than inflectional patterns. We nonetheless feel intellectually indebted to these contributions.

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    359

    qualitative, and introflexive versus desinential. Qualitative patterns may qualify as intensive or not, while templatic patterns may in turn qualify as extensive or not. The former may cumulate with desinential alternations, whereas the latter may expand (as extensive) or shrink (through introflection). Not only do these structural options account for most of the complexity in stem alternations in Estonian: they combine and interact throughout the whole Southern Finnic dialect network (i.e., Estonian and Livonian). The roof-shaped figure at the center of the graph has undergone ‘structural reforms’ in most Estonian dialects; it is densely interactive, reconfigurating its links, according to mechanic (i.e., phonological) or analogical constraints (metatypy). In contrast, in the same way as the default parameter at the top of the graph, the suffixal alternation parameters, at the bottom of the graph, are more robust and stable –and fairly predictable–, although it is clearly connected to intensive and introflection and desinential marking.

    4. MODELING THE PROCESSES FROM MPR When referring to templates and templatic parameters, we denote prosodic/metric CVCV or ONON (Onset-Nucleus) grids (see Angoujard 2006), such as in the representations below in Figure 3 (not the morphological template in itself). Intensive patterns flow from ECP (Empty Category Principle), introflexion from Coda Licensing, prosodic ‘overstrength’ from Compensatory Lengthening. Figures 3–5 provide analysis of the rhythmic grids of the realized forms from the principal parts11 relevant here, i.e., nominative vs. genitive vs. partitive or ill sg. An example of Templatic alternation proper, yielding introflexive realizations as phonological outputs, with melodic interaction (hinted at here with phonological primitives or elements, such as {U} for Labial & Dorsal vs. {A} for Low. The next set of representations, in Figure 4 applies for Viks’ IC S 18 e (1992): tuba : toa: tuppa ‘room’ (nom : gen : ill. sg). 11

    i.e., the representative or exemplary paradigms in any inflectional system.

    360

    Jean Léo Léonard

    In the lower diagram, the numbers 1, 2, 3 read according to the encoding of onsets (index 1), nuclei (index 2) and code (3) in Declarative Phonology (Angoujard 2006), hinting at the intricacy of alternating stems for a short default stem such as tuba ‘room’ (nom sg, Q1), a compressed and introflected stem such as `toa (gen sg, Q3) and a long stem such as `tuppa (ill sg, Q3).

    Figure 3. CVCV model applied to Viks’ IC S 22/e: lind ‘bird’. Templatic configurations and processes12.

    Figure 4. Templatic configurations and processes: CVCV and phonological primitive interaction model applied to Viks’ IC S 18 e: tuba ‘room’.

    12

    Inflectional classes for Estonian are labeled here according to the standard taxonomy, designed by Viks in her reference morphological dictionary of Standard Estonian, i.e. IC S 22/e (Viks 1992, 195): nom sg `lind : gen/acc sg linnu : ptv sg `lindu : ptv pl `linde[id ‘bird’.

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    361

    Figure 5 provides an analysis of templatic processes of the extensive type, based on IC A 2 nom sg tihe : gen/acc sg tiheda ‘dense’: These representations enhance the intricacy of processes involved in inflection patterns. Not only do taxonomic traits such as intensive, templatic, introflexive, desinential make up a complex set of inflectional strategies of the Item and Process type: they are hierarchically embedded within each IC, as shown in Tables 1 and 2 below.

    Figure 5. Templatic configurations: CVCV and phonological primitive interaction model applied to Viks’ IC A 2: tihe ‘dense.

    5. INTRICACY OF THE ITEM AND PROCESS MODEL PARAMETERS Table 1 accounts for IC S 22/e (Viks 1992,195), according to principal parts such as nom sg `lind : gen/acc sg linnu : ptv sg `lindu : ptv pl `linde ‘bird’. The >> signs in the upper cells denote hierarchical trends for this item of the CVSC(V) type (S stands for Sonorant, and (V) for a ‘ghost’ or deletable thematic nucleus). Table 1. Main Item and Process parameters involved in inflectional patterns for `lind ‘bird’ in SE Morphosynt. nom sg gen/acc sg ptv sg ptv pl

    Realisations `lind linnu `lindu `linde

    Intensive >> yes

    Templatic >>

    Introflexive >>

    Desinential >>

    yes yes yes

    362

    Jean Léo Léonard

    Table 2. Main CVCV Government Phonology parameters involved in inflectional patterns for `lind ‘bird’ in SE Morphosynt. nom sg gen/acc sg ptv sg ptv pl

    Realisations `lind linnu `lindu `linde

    Intens [+ECP]

    Templatic

    Introflx

    Desinential

    [+Gvt] [-ECP] [+Lic]

    Prosody marked default marked marked

    Figure 6. The interplay of stems, exponents and correlated phonological processes in SE.

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    363

    An even more complex allomorphic dynamics unfolds as a graph, accounting for thematic space according to a cascade model in Figure 6 for the CVCV item jõgi ‘river’ (IC 21 according to Viks’ ICT), in Standard Estonian. From the nominative form jõgi, in the upper part of the graph, the adjective jõgine is derived (right of the diagram), horizontally, as a mere lexical shift –not an inflectional one. The tree splits vertically in two, with the prosodic Strong Grade Q3 form `jõe, for gen sg, with introflection, on the left, as opposed to the jõge form, for ptv sg, with stem vowel alternation (-i  -e). This full template stem of the CVCV type may concatenate, in turn, with -sid suffixation for ptv plural jõgesid, or with the more general formative -de giving gen pl jõgede, which also works as an oblique plural stem jõgede-, as in the last item at the bottom of the graph jõgedesse. But it can also undergo further strengthening, without desinential suffixation, as in `jõkke (Q3) ill sg (lower, on the right). From a PFM standpoint, stems listed in the graphs rank as in Table 3 (Xn…). Nevertheless, they all result from morphonological processes such as primary gradation (Strong X1 vs. Weak X2 through C elision: jõgi vs. jõein nom pl, ill 2, etc.), stem vowel height alternation -i/-e (X1 jõgi : X3 jõge) and gemination (X4 `jõkke), as pointed out in the graphs, Figure 6. In PFM, Morphophonological Rules (MPR) are listed separately from the stems (RSC) and affixes (RE). The shorter the inventory of processes of this kind, the better. Here is a parsimonious set of MPR for SE, which matches the processes enumerated in the diagrams in Figure 6. Table 3. Stem selection for jõgi in SE, in relation with data in Figure 6

    nom gen ptv ill.1 ill.2 13

    Standard Estonian (IC S 21) Singular Stem jõgi X1 `jõe X2 jõge X3 `jõkke X4 jõesse13 X2

    Plural jõed jõgede jõgesid jõgedesse

    Stem X2 X3 X3 X3

    ill 1 & 2 are free variants for illative: either through Strong/Weak stem alternation (`jõkke), also called ‘short illative’ in Estonian grammar, or through suffixal concatenation on the weak stem (jõe-sse), called ‘long illative’.

    364

    Jean Léo Léonard Box 2. A parsimonious set of MPR (Block III) for SE 1. MPR 1: Weakening 2. MPR 1/a: Vowel Elision 3. MPR 1/b: Consonant Elision 4. MPR 2: Strengthening 5. MPR 2/a: Gemination 1 (Q2) 6. MPR 2/b: Gemination 2 (Q3) 7. MPR 3 : Thematic Vowel alternation14

    In a system such as Estonian, ‘routine’ MPR which would be ranked high in the hierarchy of another Finnic language, like Vowel Harmony (VH) in Finnish (see Block III above), may be ranked lower, or be completely absent from the system. In some Estonian dialects, e.g., Kodavere (the Eastern dialect, on the shore of the Peipsi lake), MPR such as those enumerated above may be assigned fine-grained specification, or they can be embedded in specific RSC (as resilient vowel harmony activated from -e stem vowels on specific exponents, in Kodavere).

    Figure 7. A Conflated or Reductionist Implicational graph for inflectional patterns in Standard Estonian.

    14

    i.e., Stem vowel alternation.

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    365

    Nevertheless, the entangling of morphophonological processes as in Box 2 is more the rule than the exception, as we saw from data in Figure 6 and Table 3. Most of the time, a bundle of such parameters is involved in the same IC, as in Tables 1 and 2. Moreover, we still face a twofold challenge: on the one hand, to reduce the number of inflectional classes, on the other hand, to unify both taxonomic components (nominal & adjectival inflection verbal inflection). We must accept the idea that we have to pick the most relevant parameter out of a hierarchy, in order to work out a stable, reductionist (i.e., anti-atomistic) taxonomy, which would reliably account for general patterns, and to some extent, for the learnability of these intricate Finnic IC systems. The next implicational graph makes an attempt at such a broad IC taxonomy according to the Item & Process standpoint. We could consider them as ‘macro-IC’. These macro-classes amount to five, instead of twenty-six (according to ÕS 2013, the latest edition of the Standard Estonian reference dictionary), listed as IC taxonomic classes A to E. However, some additional subclasses (B’, D’, E’) may increase the number of IC in this new model. Macro-IC from A to E labels rank as primary, i.e., dominant patterns, whereas sub-classes from B’ to E’ can be considered as specifications or secondary instantiations of the previously mentioned major patterns (A to E), in Figure 7. In the next section, we will see how SE declension IC can be reduced to a set of five macro-classes.

    6. NOMINAL AND ADJECTIVAL IC (DECLENSION) IN ÕS 2013: A LUMPING TAXONOMY FOR SE Table 6 shows an attempt to apply the major procedural categories configurated in Figure 7 to the ÕS 2013 grid. The list starts with the default IC labeled as A, which is syncretic, showing generalized isomorphy between the three principal parts taken into account here for RSC: SE pesa, elu, pere, ohutu, sõna, without any modification of the stem, nor of the prosodic structure (plain CVCV). The same isomorphy occurs for the prosodic variant

    366

    Jean Léo Léonard

    of the A macro-class here labeled AS: all forms have the extralong quantity Q3: SE `voodi, `koi, `idee. In contrast, the B macro-class accounts for qualitative stem alternation, either of the intensive type (SE seminar : seminari; tühi : tühja, etc.), or through stem vowel alternation, as in SE süli : süle. The AS macro-class is entirely of the intensive type, with strong gradation. Subclasses such as BS & D alternate rhythmic templates and prosodic quantity: `leib / leiva / `leiba. Throughout the table, macro-classes unfold or combine in intricate patterns, which all come under the handfull of MPR listed in Box 2 above, the implicational parameters in Figure 6, and the CVCV parameters in Table 2 (e.g., ECP obviously accounts for intensive templates, as the original stem shows up as an allomorphic full stem when Coda Licensing had been diachronically triggered by a C or CV exponent, as in Figure 1 above). Table 6. A reductionist taxonomy for SE declension, based on ÕS 2013 ICT IC A

    AS

    B

    Nom sg. pesa elu pere ohutu sõna `voodi `koi `idee seminar tühi padi puri Nom sg. õpik süli

    Gen sg. pesa elu pere ohutu sõna `voodi `koi `idee seminari tühja padja purje Gen sg. õpiku süle

    Part. sg. pesa elu peret ohutut sõna `voodit `koid `ideed seminari `tühja `patja `purje Part. sg. õpikut süle

    Translation ‘nest’ ‘life’ ‘family’ ‘safe’ ‘word’ ‘bed’ ‘moth’ ‘idea’ ‘seminar’ ‘empty’ ‘pillow’ ‘sail’ Translation ‘textbook’ ‘lap’

    Paradigm Function Morphology … IC BS

    BS& D B&C

    C C’ D D’

    D’S E E’

    367

    Nom sg. `õnnelik

    Gen sg. õnneliku

    Part. sg. `õnnelikku

    Translation ‘happy’

    `koer `hein `külm `suur `poiss `riik `põu `leib `number oder vaher tanner küünal mõte ase liige kallis rukis jõgi kallas nägu tuba sõda `uus käsi katus harjutus oluline soolane

    koera heina külma suure poisi riigi põue leiva `numbri odra `vahtra `tandri `küünla `mõtte aseme l`iikme `kalli `rukki `jõe k`alda `näo `toa `sõja uue `käe katuse harjutuse olulise soolase

    `koera `heina `külma `suurt `poissi `riiki `põue `leiba `numbrit `otra `vahtrat `tandrit küünalt mõtet aset liiget kallist rukist jõge kallast nägu tuba sõda `uut `kätt katust harjutust olulist soolast

    ‘dog’ ‘hay’ ‘cold’ ‘great, big’ ‘boy’ ‘state, nation’ ‘breast’ ‘bread’ ‘number’ ‘barley’ ‘maple’ ‘soil’ ‘candle’ ‘thought’ ‘place’ ‘member’ ‘dear’ ‘rye’ ‘river’ ‘shore’ ‘face’ ‘room’ ‘war’ ‘new’ ‘hand’ ‘roof’ ‘drill’ ‘essential’ ‘salty’

    In fact, almost all these IC turn out to be a microsystem of hierarchized and embedded taxonomic criteria. To take this point into consideration, we could further develop a ‘cascade model’ of embedded IC, with a set of implicational rules. Its shape would look like the diagrams in Figure 6. Nevertheless, this will not be necessary within the scope of the current research, which is intended as a preliminary study for diasystemic modelling of Finnic declension from the standpoint of two current theories from the fields of inflectional morphology (PFM) and autosegmental phonology (CVCV Theory). In order to strengthen the diasystemic component in our

    368

    Jean Léo Léonard

    approach, we will now apply the ICT resulting from this contrastive approach to a specific case study: declension in the Kihnu dialect. This dialect is spoken on an island located in the Gulf of Riga, 14 km off the coast of Pärnu, and displays structural traits shared both by Western and Southern Estonian dialects.

    7. DIASYSTEMIC IC SHIFTS, ACCORDING TO A LUMPING TAXONOMY: SE VS. KIHNU The Kihnu dialect, as compared to SE, provides good examples of several universal trends in ICT framing in languages. IC shifts (henceforth ICS) are the principal mechanism at play. In sum, an IC in one dialect matches a different one in the standard variety, or in other dialects (ex. B > D, or D’), or a simple IC may merge with another, resulting in entangled and complexified types (ex. B > B&D > B&C), i.e., there is a tendency to reinforce already existing trends such as introflection. Moreover, in the case of Kihnu vs. SE, a trend to neutralize Q3 prosodic gradation appears, along with a trend to neutralize complex taxonomic patterns, merging separate IC as in the shift B, D > A. Last, but not least, a third (fine-grained) trend emerges, to specify or unspecify D patterns (D’ > D, D’ > D’&B). Table 7 enumerates these Inflectional Class Shifts (Kihnu data in bold fonts; shaded cells or IC enhance diasystemic contrasts); the last column to the right highlights the main processes accounting for variation. The survey of IC in a peripheral dialect vs. the standard variety indicates that dialect differences go far beyond mere phonological isoglosses. Indeed, any dialect survey of morphological variation should take into account mechanisms of Inflectional Class Shifts (i.e., ICS), based on a model for Inflectional Class Taxonomy (i.e., ICT). We dare say, based on the Finnic evidence, that these ICS are as relevant and overwhelming for the design of dialect divisions and the understanding of any diasystem as vowel or consonant shifts in traditional dialectology. To give a few examples of how this diasystem fragment works here, the default macro-class A remains as inert in the Kihnu dialect (hence, Kh) as in SE, except for palatal vowel harmony, lost in the

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    369

    former, but preserved in the latter: SE & Kh pesa/Kh pesä. The intensive type B (SE tühi: tühja vs. Kh tühjä does not vary either, except for vowel harmony, which also constrains stem vowel alternation, as in SE & Kh süli: süle, with stem vowel -e in Kh like in in SE, instead of -õ for velar stems, as in nom sg SE `õnnelik vs. Kh `õnnõlik, gen sg SE õnneliku vs. Kh õnnõliku, etc. Instead, a lexeme such as püri ‘sail’ has a bare stem in -e (purje) in SE vs. a derived -ut stem in Kh purjut, making the B class shift to the D class in Kh. All the discrepancies show fine-grained typological differentiation of ICT, fostered by local MPR, and a striking resilience of a major Finnic MPR enumerated above, in Block III (row 17), which dominate subsequent rules as defined for SE (and its dialects) in Box 2 (rows 1-7 of declarative MPR). Table 7. Comparing IC exemplars in SE and the Kihnu Island dialect

    SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE

    IC A

    AS

    A B

    B D B A BS BS

    Nom sg. pesa pesä elu elu pere pere kivi kivi sõna sõna `voodi säng `koi koi tühi tühi padi padi puri purjut süli süle `õnnelik `õnnõlik `koer

    Gen sg. pesa pesä elu elu pere pere kivi kivi sõna sõna `voodi sängü `koi koi tühja tühjä padja padja purje `purju süle süle õnneliku õnnõliku koera

    Part. sg. pesa pesä elu elu peret peret kivi kivi sõna sõna `voodit `sängü `koid koid `tühja `tühjä `patja `patja `purje purjut süle süle `õnnelikku `õnnõlikku `koera

    Gloss ‘nest’ ‘life’

    Diasystemic default (Nothing happens/no IC shift)

    ‘family’ ‘stone’ ‘word’ ‘bed’

    ‘empty’

    Other lexeme (IC B) Default prosodic grade Idem (& VH)

    ‘pillow’

    Idem

    ‘sail’ ‘lap’

    Derivation ICS B>D ICS B > A

    ‘happy’

    Idem

    ‘moth’

    ‘dog’

    370

    Jean Léo Léonard Table 7. (Continued)

    Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE Kihnu SE

    IC B(S) BS D’ BS BS

    Nom sg. koer `hein ein `külm külm `suur

    Gen sg. koera heina eenä külma külmä suure

    Part. sg. `koera `heina `eina `külma `külmä `suurt

    BS & D B&C BS B&D BS B B (& C) B&C

    suur `leib leib `poiss poiss `riik riik `numbõr küünal

    suurõ leiva leva poisi poesi riigi riigi `numbri `küünla

    `suurt `leiba `leibä `poissi `poissi `riiki `riiki `numbõrt küünalt

    küünal mõte mõtõ liige liige kallis Nom sg. kallis rukis rugi jõgi

    `küündlä `mõtte `mõttõ l`iikme l`iikme `kalli Gen sg. `kalli `rukki rugi `jõe

    küünält mõtet mõtõt liiget liiget kallist Part. sg. kallist rukist rugi jõge

    jõgi kallas kallas tuba

    `jõe k`alda k`alda `toa

    jõgõ kallast kallast tuba

    tuba sõda sõda `uus

    tua `sõja sõja uue

    tuba sõda sõda `uut

    C C’ D

    A D’

    Kihnu SE Kihnu SE

    D’ & B D’

    Kihnu SE Kihnu SE

    D D’ D’S

    Gloss ‘hay’

    ICS B > D’

    ‘cold’

    Idem (& VH)

    ‘great, big’

    Idem (& e>õ)

    ‘bread’

    ICS BS&D > B&C

    ‘boy’

    ICS BS > B&D

    ‘state’

    Idem

    ‘candle’

    Idem

    ‘thought’

    Idem (& e>õ)

    ‘member’

    Idem

    ‘dear’ Gloss ‘rye’

    ICS D > A

    ‘river’

    IC specification D’ & B

    ‘shore’

    Idem

    ‘room’

    IC specification D(’)

    ‘war’ ‘new’

    Default pros. grad. Resyllabation & prosodic grad. neutr.

    Paradigm Function Morphology … IC Kihnu D’ & C SE D’S Kihnu D’ SE E Kihnu Source: Leas & al. 2016.

    Nom sg. uus käsi käsi katus katus

    Gen sg. uiõ `käe käe katuse katusõ

    Part. sg. uut `kätt kätt katust katust

    371

    Gloss ‘hand’ ‘roof’

    Idem & prosodic grad. neutr. Idem

    Shaded cells point at particularly relevant discrepancies between the Kihnu and the standard variety, which should be tested for their relevance as morphophonological isoglosses (a set of variables often missing from linguistic atlases)15.

    CONCLUSION AND PROSPECTS The research presented in this chapter attempted to address what we could call the Epistemological Reciprocity Principle: any empirical investigation in linguistics should fulfill the following basic conditions:  

    What can a language L bring to the development and (Popperian) falsification of linguistic theory? What can linguistic theory bring to the practical description and understanding of a language L?

    In other words, linguistics should serve the advancement of our knowledge of language, just as languages should serve the theoretical and practical advancement of linguistics. Therefore, subcomponents of theoretical linguistics should cooperate, rather than compete or exclude one another. This chapter is the result of a long term reflection of the author, a linguist initially trained in phonology, who has realized over time that he has spent most of his efforts examining morphological facts since the beginning 15

    No wonder Singh and Desrocher (1996) wittily called morphophonology ‘Trubetzkoy’s Orphan’, a couple of decades ago. Nevertheless, Saareste’s Estonian linguistic atlas (1955a) displays a lot of valuable information in this field, although unsystematically, as far as ICT is concerned.

    372

    Jean Léo Léonard

    of his trajectory in theoretical linguistics. Morphological and phonological theory should cooperate more, and one way of doing so is to associate declarative models, such as CVCV and PFM. They do not always blend easily but can nonetheless highlight various facets of intricate phenomena, and in doing so further both Theory and Reference Grammars. We saw how PFM turns out to be a heuristic tool to investigate combinatorics between three sets of rules: RSC (stems), RE (affixes) and MPR (phonological processes). Although this threefold division between morphological layers may seem trivial, it is not. On the horizon lays the diasystemic approach of what we have called here “Inflectional Class Shifts” (ICS), based on the circuit of taxonomic parameters in the implicational graphs designed in Figures 2 and 7. PFM happens to be fairly flexible and handy to make such an attempt. Especially, the mingling of CVCV templatic criteria with ICT prerequisites points at encouraging results for the description of ICS within a diasystem. Parcimony also helped much here. Lumping helps, as we saw with the downsizing of twenty six IC to five or eight ICT parameters. Moreover, unification can be achieved, in spite of the heterogeneity of IC mechanisms and criteria, between nouns and adjectives on the one hand, and verbs on the other hand, as pointed out in a seminal paper by the Estonian linguist and Võro writer Iva Sulev (2010). Among the next tasks to perform in the future, I would suggest applying the CVCV/PFM model sketched out here to the whole Southern Finnic diasystem, in relation with Votic and Livonian. Last, but not least, the more attemps we make at cross-mediating theoretical models from the distinct realms of Morphology and Phonology, which naturally never give up the fight to preserve their ‘own sovereignty’ over empirical data, the more we’ll discover, as in the famous tale by Hans Christian Andersen, that the King’s clothes may not hide much, and that what stands behind the curtain of reality is much less uncanny than what we had been led to believe. Many ‘agglutinative’ languages behave like the Finnic languages: some enhancing the inner diversity of their lexemes in a drift towards a Word & Paradigm type, like in Estonian, some preserving their Item & Arrangement agglutinative shape, like in Finnish. In the same way, in Niger-Congo languages, some may look very agglutinative (many

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    373

    Bantu languages), some may turn out to be very fusional (Gur and Voltaïc languages), whereas some end up looking more like isolating languages (Kru languages). In these cases, as in Finnic, the interplay of CVCV constraints and threefold PFM sets of rules (RSC, RE & MPR) play their tricks all along evolution, with the help of two mainly opposing factors: the arrow of time (evolution) on the one hand, and the economy of competing systemic patterns according to universal constraints of parsimony and iconicity on the other.

    REFERENCES Angoujard, Jean–Pierre. 2006. Phonologie declarative. Paris: CNRS. Arppe, Antti. 2006. Frequency Considerations in Morphology, Revisited Finnish Verbs Differ, Too. In A Man of Measure. Festschrift in Honour of Fred Karlsson in his 60th Birthday, edited by Mickael Suominen, Antti Arppe, Anu Airola, Orvokki Heinämäki, Matti Miestamo, Urho Määttä, Jussi Niemi, Kari Pitkänen, K., Kaius Sinnemäki. Special Supplement to SKY Journal of Linguistics, Volume 19/2006, 175–189. Turku: Linguistic Association of Finland. Baerman, Matthew. 2014. “Covert systematicity in a distributionnally complex system.” Journal of Linguistics: 50, 1–47. Baerman Matthew, Dunstan Brown, and Greville Corbett G. 2015. Understanding and measuring morphological complexity. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Bonami, Olivier, and Gregory Stump. 2016. “Paradigm Function Morphology”. In The Cambridge Handbook of Morphology, edited by Andrew Hippisley, and Gregory Stump, 449–481. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Blevins, James. 2007. “Conjugation Classes in Estonian,” Linguistica Uralica 43–4: 250–267. [Uralic linguistics]. Erelt, Mati, and alii. 1993. Eesti keele grammatika, Tallinn: Keele ja Kirjanduse Instituut. [Estonian grammar].

    374

    Jean Léo Léonard

    Haspelmath, Martin. 1997. Indefinite pronouns. Oxford: Oxford Studies in Typology and Linguistic Theory. Hienonen, Heini. 2010. “The implicational semantic map for Veps indefinite pronoun.” Linguistica Uralica. 46.4: 281–292. [Uralic linguistics]. Hockett, Charles F. 1954. “Two Models of Grammatical Description”. Word 10: 210–231. Iva, Sulev. 2010. “Grade Alternation in Võro South Estonian.” Lingüística Uralica. 46.3: 161–174. [Uralic linguistics]. Kaasik, Reet. 2015. Sanamoodostus. Tartu:Tartu ülikooli Kirjastus. Karlsson, Fred. 1977. “Eräistä morfologian teorian ajankohtaisista ongelmista.” Sananjalka 19: 26–56. [“Some of the current problems in the theory of morphology.” Sananjalka]. Karlsson, Fred. 1983. Suomen kielen äänne- ja muotorakenne. Helsinki: WSÖY. [The sound and form structure of the Finnish language]. Karlsson, Fred. 1986. “A Paradigm-Based Morphological Analyzer.” In Papers from the Fifth Scandinavian Conference of Computational Linguistics. 95–112. Helsinki: University of Helsinki Publications 15. Kaye, Jonathan. 1990. “Coda Licensing.” Phonology. 7.2: 301-330. Kettunen Lauri. 1940. Suomen murteet III A. Murrekartasto. Helsinki: Suomalaisen Kirjallisuuden Seura. Leas Reene, Reti Könninge, Silvi Murulauk, Ellen Niit, Karl Pajusalu, and Jüri Viikberg 2016. Kihnu sõnaraamat. Kihnu Kultuuri Instituut, Eesti Keele Instituut, Tartu Ülikooli eesti ja üldkeeleteaduse instituut. Kihnu– Pärnu–Tallinn–Tartu: Eesti Keele Sihtasutus. Léonard, Jean Léo 2017. “Classes flexionnelles et diasystème: notes d’un terrain totonaco-tepehua.” In Iñaki Gaminde lagunarterik hara (Festschrift for Iñaki Gaminde), edited by Iglesias, Aitor, and alii. Bilbao: Universidad del Pais Vasco. [“Inflection classes and diasystem: notes of a totonaco-tepehua fieldwork.” In Iñaki Gaminde friends (Festschrift for Iñaki Gaminde)]. Léonard, Jean Léo, and Alain Kihm 2010. “Stem formation in Chiquihuitlán Mazatec (Otomanguean).” In Workshop on Morphology and Formal Grammar, 17ème Colloque International HPSG, July 7-10 2010, Paris (available on http://csli-publications.stanford.edu/).

    Paradigm Function Morphology …

    375

    NS: Nykysuomen Sanakirja (Reference dictionary for Standard Finnish). ÕS 2013. Eesti õigekeelsussõnaraamat 2013. (Reference dictionary for Standard Estonian). Tallinn Eesti Keele Sihtasutus. Remes, Hannu. 2009. Muodot kontrastissa suomen ja viron vertailevaa taivutusmorfologiaa. Oulu: Acta Universitatis Oluensis B90. Rosenberg, Taimi. 2004. Hargla noomeni muutmine. EFOT 5. Tallinn: Tallinna Pedagoogikaülikooli. Sadeniemi, Matti, and Joukko Vesikansa [1950] 1980. Nykysuomen Sanakirja. Porvoo: WSOY. [Dictionary of Modern Finnish]. Samvelian, Pollet 2008. “La conjugaison objective en erzya (mordve): une approche réalisationnelle.” Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris. 53.1: 333–361. Saareste, Andrus.1955a. Väike eesti murdeatlas/Petit atlas des parlers estoniens. Uppsala: Travaux de l'Académie Royale Gustave Adolphe 28. [Väike eesti murdeatlas / Small atlas of Estonian dialects]. Saareste, Andrus. 1955b. “Kielen muutosten leviämisen ja leviämisrarojen luonteesta Virossa.” Virittäjä 59:19–41. Scheer, Tobias. 2004. A lateral theory of phonology. Vol 1: What is CVCV, and why should it be? Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Scheer, Tobias. 2012. A Lateral Theory of phonology. Vol. 2: Direct Interface and One-Channel Translation. A Non-Diacritic Theory of the Morphosyntax-Phonology Interface. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Scheer, Tobias. 2011. A Guide to Morphosyntax-Phonology Interface Theories. How Extra-Phonological Information is Treated in Phonology since Trubetzkoy's Grenzsignale. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Scheer, Tobias. 2015. Précis de structure syllabique. Accompagné d'un apparat critique. Lyon: ENS Editions. Singh Rajendra, and Richard Desrochers, eds. 1996. Trubetzkoy’s Orphan. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Stump, Gregory T. 2001. Inflectional Morphology. A Theory of Paradigm Structure. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Stump, Gregory T. 2015. Inflectional Paradigms. Content and Form at the Syntax-Morphology Interface. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Tanning, Salme. 2004. Karski murrak. Tallinn: Eesti Keele Instituut.

    376

    Jean Léo Léonard

    Tuomi, Tuomo. 1972. Suomen kielen käänteissanakirja [Reverse Dictionary of Modern Standard Finnish]. Hämeenlinna: SKS. Viks, Ülle. 1992. Väike vormisõnastik, Tallinn: Keele ja Kirjanduse Instituut. Viks Ülle. [nd]. Muuttüübid ja ÕS 2013 Tallinn: www.emakeeleselts.ee/ omakeel/2015_2/06.pdf. Viks, Ülle. 2001. Muuttüübid eesti sõnastikes. – Leksikograafia seminar: Sõna tänapäeva maailmas. Eesti Keele Instituudi toimetised 9, 157– 185.Tallinn: http://www.eki.ee/teemad/tyybijutt.html. Viks, Ülle. 2000a. Eesti keele avatud morfoloogiamudel. – Arvutuslingvistikalt inimesele (toim T. Hennoste). Tartu Ülikooli üldkeeleteaduse õppetooli toimetised 1. Tartu, 9-36. http://www.eki.ee/ teemad/avatud_mrf.html. Viks, Ülle. 2000b. “Kuidas tekib sõnastikukirjesse grammatika.” Keel ja Kirjandus 7, 486-495. http://www.eki.ee/teemad/kirjegeneraator.html. Viitso, Tiit Rein. 1981. Läänemeresoome fonoloogia küsimusi. Tallinn: Keele ja Kirjanduse Instituut. [Questions of Baltic Finnish phonology]. Viitso, Tiit Rein. 2003. “Structure of the Estonian language: Phonology, morphology and word formation. In Estonian language. Linguistica Uralica supplementary series, Vol. 1, edited by Mati Erelt, 9–129. Tallinn: Estonian Academy Publishers. Viitso, Tiit Rein. 2007. “Livonian Gradation: Types and Genesis,” Linguistica Uralica 43: 45–62.

    In: The Emergence of Grammars Editor: Michela Russo

    ISBN: 978-1-53619-888-1 © 2021 Nova Science Publishers, Inc.

    Chapter 10

    PLAUTDIETSCH: A REMARKABLE STORY OF LANGUAGE MAINTENANCE AND CHANGE John te Velde1,* and Nora Vosburg2,† 1

    Department of Languages and Literatures, Oklahoma State University, Stillwater, OK, USA 2 German Department, St. Olaf College, Northfield, MN, USA

    ABSTRACT Like other diasporic languages, Plautdietsch (Mennonite Low German) has undergone changes as a result of many linguistic environments. It is documented as a spoken variety among Mennonites in Europe (Germany, Poland, Ukraine, Russia), South America (Argentina, Brazil, Bolivia, Paraguay, Belize), and North America (USA, Canada, Mexico). While the varieties differ in certain aspects, they have been and still are mutually intelligible despite the geographic distances. Today, Plautdietsch is spoken as a primary language as well as a heritage language. * Corresponding Author’s E-mail: [email protected]. † We are very grateful to the many informants in Kansas and Oklahoma who spent hours with us providing speech samples and insights into their use of Plautdietsch. Thanks also to Howard Foote for valuable information on Oklahoma Mennonite history and to two anonymous reviewers for many very helpful comments.

    378

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg We will present data from two particular Mennonite groups, one in Oklahoma, the other in Kansas, who split their trajectories over 100 years ago; yet, their Plautdietsch varieties display a surprising resemblance. This, we argue, represents a typical feature of Plautdietsch.

    Keywords: Plautdietsch, syntax, phonology, (language) change, (language) maintenance, (language) contact

    1. INTRODUCTION Plautdietsch is a language spoken by many Mennonites throughout the world. As is typical for languages of (formerly) religiously persecuted groups, it is geographically very dispersed, with some distant groups remaining in contact with others, and some not. Ethnologue estimates 447,360 speakers of Plautdietsch across Europe and the Americas (https://www.ethnologue.com/language/pdt 1 ), with speakers ranging from monolingual to multilingual, dominant to heritage, and young to old. In this chapter, we present a history of Plautdietsch to the present that shows how this language and its speakers have changed and what has remained stable over time. We call it remarkable for many reasons: Plautdietsch exemplifies a historical (and in many parts of the world contemporary) case of the consequences of linguistic isolation, but it also shows that language change and contact are inevitable, despite the greatest efforts to prevent them. In more recent times, it exemplifies the consequences of social changes on language and its people; this we illustrate on the basis of two Mennonite groups who came to the US over 100 years apart, yet show remarkable parallels undergoing language shift. In §2, we address the migrational background of the so-called Russian Mennonites, i.e the ancestors of both US groups, from the 16th century until their settlement in the United States, and how living circumstances have changed. These changes had a direct impact on how Mennonites could execute their spiritual and social lives. For many Mennonites, these two aspects are intimately related where faith informs every part of daily living. Once certain domains are not tightly 1

    Accessed January 8, 2019.

    Plautdietsch

    379

    embedded in a spiritual order anymore (e.g., education, politics, work), horizontal (local) ties become looser and vertical (national) ties become stronger (Salmons 2005). This in turn opens the pathway to language shift towards the surrounding majority language. The historical background of Mennonites from a social perspective is an important base for the historical background of the linguistic development of Plautdietsch (§3). Through a closer look at phonetic, phonological, morphological, syntactic, and lexical features, we explain the inherently diverse character of Plautdietsch as a consequence of its non-standardization as an oral medium and the vast variety of source dialects. Together with ever-changing contact language environments, the developmental stages of Plautdietsch are characterized by mixing and borrowing. One example of this unique character is the definite article paradigm of Plautdietsch as documented by Quiring (1928) in comparison with the Middle Low German and Middle Dutch of the time. Finally, in §4 we present a linguistic sketch of Plautdietsch as it is spoken in North America (Canada, USA, Mexico) today. In this section, we draw on previous studies, but also our own field data from two communities in the US, i.e., Kansas and Oklahoma. In a comparative study, we contrast similarities and differences to previously documented varieties in Europe (Siemens 2012) and Canada (Cox et al. 2013) with a particular focus on the sound systems. We also show that especially on the level of morphology and syntax, we see a great stability between the historic and the modern varieties of Plautdietsch, where the typical West Germanic parameters are kept. However, we present some Plautdietsch-specific examples of periphrastic do, and discuss the role of English in examples of VP ellipsis and case syncretism. We conclude this section with two studies on syntactic variation and innovation, one on dependent clauses (Kaufmann 2015) and the other on wh-questions (Hopp et al. 2018). While this chapter presents an overview of previous research on Plautdietsch from different perspectives, it also demonstrates the gaps in research on this widely spoken, divergent but similar West Germanic variety. We therefore hope to set the stage for further (comparative) research on Plautdietsch and its speech communities.

    380

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    2. THE HISTORICAL BACKGROUND OF MENNONITE MIGRATIONS AND CHANGES IN THEIR LANGUAGE USE In order to understand the linguistic maintenance on the one hand and changes on the other that today set Plautdietsch apart from other West Germanic varieties, it is necessary to be familiar with the Mennonites’ motives for several relocations and their history. We will explore these developments in more detail in §2.1, and provide an overview of the social changes that Mennonite communities underwent throughout the centuries in §2.2. These social changes had a direct effect on changes in language use.

    2.1. Mennonite Migrations The many movements of the Mennonite people present a complexity of cultural, economic, political and religious forces that has often been the central focus of Mennonite historical literature (see e.g., Brandt 1992, Epp 1993, Moelleken 1987, Sawatzky 1971). As an initial overview, Table 1 summarizes the major historical events of both Mennonite communities under closer scrutiny in this chapter, i.e., the so-called Russian Mennonites who later settled in North America. Table 1. Historical overview of Mennonite migrations 1st half of 16th C

    2nd half of 16th C 1786 1789, 1804 1870 1874-1880

    Birth of Anabaptist movements; settlement of Mennonites in the Netherlands, Northern Germany and Belgium Religious persecution under Charles V. Mennonite migration to Vistula Delta, Poland Recruitment efforts through Russian colonization agent Georg van Trappe Formation of Mennonite colonies Chortitza and Molotschna in Ukraine Enforced russification movement under Alexander II. Mennonite migration to North America; two locations: 1) Settlements in Eastern and Central Kansas, USA 2) Settlements in Manitoba, Canada

    Plautdietsch 1)

    1892

    2)

    1890 1916 1922 1970stoday

    381

    Mennonites from Kansas participate in the second land run in north-central and southwest Oklahoma Outgrowth of Manitoba settlements; formation of further settlements in Saskatchewan, CA School Attendance Act in Canada Canadian Mennonite migration to Mexico (mainly Chihuahua province) Mexican Mennonite migration to southwestern Kansas

    2.1.1. Mennonite Migrations in Europe and Former Russia The Mennonites are one of various Anabaptist groups that formed as a religious splinter group from the Protestant movement in Europe in the 16 th century. Their belief system is strongly based on the word of the Bible. The main tenets include adult baptism and the re-baptism of baptized children (hence the terms Anabaptist and Wiedertäufer, literally ‘re-baptizers’). Additionally, they practice strict pacifism and do not engage in worldly activities.2 The Mennonites’ name originated from their leading preacher Menno Simons who led his believers to Friesland (Epp 1993). Once the religious persecution intensified its repressive measures, many Mennonites decided to migrate to the Vistula Delta in West Prussia (today Poland) in the second half of the 16th century (Epp 1993). After over a century, farmland in the growing community of Mennonites was more difficult to purchase, and prices rose considerably. Many families decided on another migration further eastward to Russia (today Ukraine) with the promise from Catherine the Great to be excluded from any military service, and be granted autonomy in their settlements (Sawatzky 1971). In 1789, they founded Chortitza and in 1804 Molotschna as the two mother colonies in Russia. Subsequent settlements such as Bergthal and Kleine Gemeinde were created in the following years. When the Russian nationalist movement under Tsar Alexander II. endangered the autonomous lifestyle of the Mennonites, the next migration 2

    The separatism from worldly matters results from the dogma of two kingdoms, one on Earth and one in Heaven. However, as shown by Driedger and Kraybill (1993), many Mennonite congregations in the US (merged as the Mennonite Church USA) have moved away from the twokingdom theology and instead practice a faith of ‘one kingdom under Christ’ in which all matters must adhere to the same moral standard. This, in turn, implies an active involvement in, e.g., politics and work towards social justice.

    382

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    wave began between 1874 and 1880. This time, they departed from Molotschna to the United States, and from Chortitza and its neighboring colonies Bergthal and Kleine Gemeinde to Canada (Penner 1976). It is here that the history of the Mennonites in Kansas and the Mennonites in Oklahoma splits, thus in what follows, we will provide a separate trajectory for each of the two communities.

    2.1.2. Historical Background of Mennonites in Kansas Those Mennonites coming from Chortitza, Bergthal and Kleine Gemeinde followed recruitment efforts of the Canadian government to settle along the US-Canadian border in Manitoba. When the communities increased in size due to on-going immigration, many Mennonites bought land in Saskatchewan beginning in 1890. The growing Canadian nationalist sentiment that arose before and during World War I endangered some of the Mennonites core beliefs, thus a new wave of migration, this time to Mexico, began in 1922. Mexico, mainly Chihuahua province, provided a space for a new beginning, since its president Obregón granted the Mennonites the same freedoms as previously enjoyed in Canada. Additionally, they were able to purchase farmland at fair prices (Hedges 1996). Although Mennonites were able to live according to their own spiritual standards in Mexico, they faced economic hardship throughout the 20th century. In the late 1970s, the first migration began to the United States, mainly Texas and Kansas; it is still ongoing today. For western Kansas, Keel (2006) estimates that around 5,000 Mennonites including family members lived in the area west of Dodge City in 2005, and these numbers can be expected to be higher today since migration is ongoing and most families are doing well. 2.1.3. Historical Background of Mennonites in Oklahoma As mentioned earlier, the great immigration wave to North America took place between 1874 and 1880. During this time 18,000 Mennonites left Russia for North America, of which 5,300 Mennonites of different congregations settled in eastern Kansas by the end of 1874. Kansas was one

    Plautdietsch

    383

    major destination due to efforts of railroad companies to populate land along the tracks. Once the Kansas communities had grown in size, land became scarce and too expensive. In 1892, north-central and southwest Oklahoma were opened for settlement, and 25,000 people took part in this second land run, during which some Mennonites obtained land as well. More migration followed in the next years, and new Mennonite settlements emerged (Penner 1976).

    2.2. Social Changes in Mennonite Communities The linguistic origins of today’s Plautdietsch are found in varieties of Low German spoken in the geographic locations where the Mennonites resided (for more detail, see §3). From the very beginning of their existence, Mennonites have been religiously persecuted by other Christian denominations. When the repercussions grew more intense in the Netherlands, Mennonites moved away from urban centers and tended to live in more rural areas. Due to this environment, they engaged more intensively in farming for self-sustenance (Sawatzky 1971), a practice that persists in Mennonite communities around the world until today. This can be considered the first step towards the social and linguistic isolation of Mennonites, which later included having their own autonomous education and political organization, and practicing endogamy. During the time in the Vistula Delta, a triglossic pattern developed among Mennonites. While Dutch continued to be used in church and education as the high variety (H-variety), Plautdietsch emerged as their ingroup low variety (L-variety), and Polish and German were used as external varieties (E-varieties). Cox (2015) describes this development as a result of growing religious persecution that contributed to the formation of a group identity. According to Siemens (2012), this era can be considered the womb of Plautdietsch as a Dutch/Low German-based language with influences from Low Prussian (for more detail, see §3).

    384

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    While triglossia persisted in Russia, the H and E varieties changed in that now the Luther translation of the Bible was used for church and education, thus a shift from Dutch to German occurred. 3 The E variety changed as a natural consequence of the change in linguistic environment from Prussian to Russian and Ukrainian (Cox 2015). Although Russian and Ukrainian played subordinate roles among the Mennonites (Moelleken 1987), both varieties left lexical traces in Plautdietsch mainly in the areas of food and farming (Siemens 2012). Not only the language situation but also their community organization changed. The first two settlements of Chortitza and Molotschna in Russia had a so-called colony organization that was maintained across subsequent settlements, i.e., one main road along which stretches of farmland were distributed to the communities’ families. The houses were built directly adjacent to the farmland, and each family had a small garden for growing vegetables and fruits and keeping small animals. Each colony had a oneroom school and a church at its center (Sawatzky 1971). This colony organization enforced the social isolation of Mennonites and contributed to strengthening the self-perception of themselves as a people instead of a religious group. For those Mennonites who migrated to North America, the newly formed settlements followed the same organization as the Russian model colonies, and the Mennonites were granted the same privileges as originally in Russia (Moelleken 1987). Former settlements were in essence transferred from Russia to Canada (Manitoba, Saskatchewan) and the United States (Kansas) which enabled an unchanged situation of social compartmentalization (Fishman 1980) and the maintenance of triglossia between the H, L, and E varieties (Cox 2015). In Kansas and later in Oklahoma, however, the colony organization did not last long and families moved further apart to own their own larger farms. One informant reports that already by the turn of the century, Mennonites 3

    While Epp (1993) dates this shift in the beginning of the 19 th century, i.e., after the Mennonites had left the Vistula Delta, an anonymous reviewer remarked that it took place around the end of the 18th century during their stay in Poland when the Mennonites lost contact with The Netherlands, replaced the Dutch Bible in church by the German Bible and started using German in their schools.

    Plautdietsch

    385

    lived interspersed with non-Mennonites in Oklahoma as a consequence of the land runs. Additionally, the new distribution of land encouraged the owning of larger properties than in Russia, and thus did not provide a base for the traditional colony organization. Nevertheless, the language situation as well as the concept of community self-sufficiency remained essentially unaffected (Penner 1976). Penner (1976) reports a switch from German to English in education and church between the years 1930 and 1946, depending on the congregation (while the Herold Mennonite Church began their Sunday school in English in the 1930s, the first entry of English in the church chronicle (Gemeindebuch) is found in 1945). As is often the case, Plautdietsch remained the language in the home even after the switch in the local school and church, but once Mennonites started to go to public schools, English usually became the dominant language (p. c. with Howard Foote). Another important change towards the surrounding majority culture happened when Oklahoma Mennonite men were drafted during World War I. Instead of moving once again, many Mennonites accepted the terms of service, while others accepted them conditionally, insisting on not fighting. A smaller percentage refused any engagement which could lead to suffering abuse at the hands of military officials (Penner 1976). In contrast, the Mennonite settlements in Canada continued with the close-knit organization and opposition to any concessions on their beliefs much longer than their fellow Mennonites in Kansas. When they faced the equal threat of the introduction of English into their educational system with the legislation of the School Attendance Act in 1916, a shift to English was to be avoided under all circumstances. As a consequence, the most conservative Mennonites moved to Mexico and essentially rebuilt their colonies in this new environment. Spanish as the new E variety had no significant effect on the new immigrants. Mainly the men learned Spanish language skills for work and trade purposes, whereas women learned little to no Spanish at all (Hedges 1996, Moelleken 1987). Today, we see important differences between the communities in western Kansas and Oklahoma that can be attributed to their separate timelines of immigration to the US and subsequent changes in their social structures. For Oklahoma, Penner (1976) reports that Mennonites largely

    386

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    adapted to the US culture by practicing industrial farming beyond the traditional Mennonite one-family farm. Industrialization in turn has made farming with fewer laborers possible and attracted many Mennonites to work in urban areas. Many Mennonite congregations have disappeared due to sinking member numbers4, and the abandonment of German as well as Plautdietsch by the younger generations, with some maintenance remaining only in older generations, is a consequence of these developments. In western Kansas, however, language shift is in its initial stages. The community is prospering and memberships in different churches grow through the ongoing immigration from Mexico and Canada. Many Mennonites from Mexico have undergone significant lifestyle changes with settlement in Kansas. Instead of the colony settlements, they have opened the closed infrastructure and live interspersed with non-Mennonites (USAmericans and other immigrants). Although many Mennonites continue as members of Old Colony churches, there are numerous young modern Mennonite churches, most of them founded in the US. The majority of Mennonites have abandoned the strict traditional clothing and are not identifiable as being Mennonite purely by looks. Their children go to public schools and have adapted English as their primary language for the most part. Most spouses in their thirties and forties use English along with Plautdietsch as their language of communication (Vosburg 2019). This new linguistic and social situation that diverges sharply from their former life in Mexico is reflected in the modern Mennonite churches: German is no longer used, and even Plautdietsch plays a peripheral role, limited to certain special occasions, such as the visit of a guest pastor or certain events. Since the social compartmentalization of language has collapsed, the triglossic situation between German (H-variety), Plautdietsch (L-variety) and English (E-variety) does not continue. However, the traditional churches maintain Plautdietsch and German in their service. This is a remarkable effort, considering the fact that their members are also fluent in English. 4

    Nevertheless, there are exceptions. One informant reported a stable membership in his church, the Church of God in Christ, Mennonite (Holdeman). Penner’s (1976) report is based on a variety of churches that all expose the same tendencies.

    Plautdietsch

    387

    2.3. Summary and Conclusion In this section, we have explored the linguistic consequences of the social changes in two Mennonite communities. While Mennonites have for centuries lived isolated, set themselves apart from the rest of the world, and followed their community-internal rules and organization, these structures are now mainly dissolved in the United States. Thus, in Kansas and since 1892 in Oklahoma, Mennonites from different Russian communities or congregations often had contact with or even transferred to a different congregation, if their life situation demanded this. In Oklahoma this kind of mixing was frequently necessary because of the manner in which land was dispersed through the land runs and lotteries, starting in 1889. Most Mennonites did not venture south into Oklahoma until after the second land run in 1892 – and they did not actively participate in the 1892 Land Run because of the violence often resulting from this manner of land settlement. Even though they were not directly involved in this land run, they often were not able to remain in the same group that they or their ancestors had associated with. Along with this development, we see the breakup of previous social compartmentalization (Fishman 1980) that supported triglossia between Dutch/German, Plautdietsch and varying external varieties. With the loss of the division of social realms, the foundation for linguistic separation crumbled. This happened much earlier for the Oklahoma group, and we see it happening now in the southwestern Kansas group. Processes that have influenced this development cannot be purely defined by community-internal changes, but can be placed within larger changes of regional structures shifting to state or national structures. One example is the change from private to public education in both Mennonite communities, as shown in Figure 1.

    388

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    National religious organization(s)

    State Department of Education

    Local congregations

    Local schools, School Board

    (vertical ties)

    (horizontal ties) Figure 1. Examples for vertical and horizontal ties in a community (Salmons 2005,135).

    Salmons (2005) defines this shift from local to national structures as verticalization and provides evidence for parallel developments among Germanic varieties spoken in communities throughout the United States, independent of religious affiliation. In conclusion, whereas Hedges (1996) describes the maintenance of the triglossia in Mexico as “the result of specific processes of maintenance efforts situated in a specific social, economic, and political context” (p. 335), in the US these contexts have largely changed with regard to lifestyle, schooling, work, and church, both for the Oklahoma and the Kansas group. However, these changes happened on two different timelines.

    3. HISTORICAL BACKGROUND AND DEVELOPMENT OF PLAUTDIETSCH In this section we trace the linguistic development of Plautdietsch as it evolved out of several varieties of Dutch and Low German, as spoken in the 16th century. We show that a considerable diversity prevailed in northwestern Europe at the level of spoken usage, with Dutch and the Low German of the Hanseatic League offering closely related yet distinct written forms used in formal settings. They played little role, however, in the lives of most Mennonites, for as noted in the previous section, many were

    Plautdietsch

    389

    illiterate or otherwise had little need in their daily lives for written language. Thus, Plautdietsch was born out of a spoken usage which in the first two centuries of its evolution at least was little influenced by a written language, either Dutch or Hanseatic Low German or Standard German. This situation began to change slightly in the mid-nineteenth century. The changes and developments that the varieties of Dutch and Low German spoken by the Mennonites underwent when the Mennonites left their original homelands and settled in a new linguistic setting will be the focus in this section.

    3.1. The Linguistic Situation in 16th Century Northern Europe The initial followers of Menno Simons lived primarily in two areas of the German Empire5: Flanders and Friesland. The dialects or varieties of Low German (in the broad sense) spoken in these areas were all descendants of West Germanic and classified as ‘Low’ and thus had not been affected by the High German Consonant Shift (see §4). It is useful for understanding the development of Plautdietsch to know some general similarities and differences between these varieties. Quiring (1928, 42) makes the following statement about the origins of the language spoken by the Mennonites in Russia: Die Mundart von Chortitza ist, wie auch die anderen Mundarten der Mennoniten in Rußland, eine Mischmundart. Sie wird also so, wie sie gegenwärtig in Rußland lebt, im Ausgangsgebiet der Kolonisten heute nirgends gesprochen. Die ersten Ansiedler kamen aus verschiedenen Dialektgebieten Westpreußens und es wird sich in der neuen Heimat, im Großen und Ganzen wenigstens, die Mundart der Mehrheit durchgesetzt haben. Für die Entwickelung unserer Mundarten ist die noch in Holland im 16. Jahrhundert erfolgte und äußerlich zum Teil auch heute noch bestehende Spaltung der Mennoniten in Alt Vlamen, Vlamen und Friesen von Bedeutung gewesen. [The dialect of Chortitza is, like the other dialects of Mennonites in Russia, a mixed one. That means that it is not spoken in its current form anywhere else outside of the region occupied by the original colony in Russia. The first settlers came from different dialectal regions in West 5

    The official name of the empire was the “Holy Roman Empire of the German Nation.”

    390

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg Prussia, and we can roughly assume that the dialect of the majority became dominant in the new home. Important for the development of our dialects was the split of Mennonites into Old Flemish*, Flemish and Frisians, as it occurred in the Netherlands in the 16th century and partially continues to exist today.] (*those who left Flanders and settled in Friesland)

    Some additional background information is useful for understanding what Quiring points out about this linguistic diversity that was maintained to some degree well into the 19th century, in some areas even later. In the 16th century the original homelands of the Mennonites in northern Europe were populated by descendants of several Germanic groups; the largest of these were the Franks (which had several sub-groups), the Saxons and the Frisians. All three of these groups spoke distinct dialects; Frisian was arguably distinct enough at one time to have had the status of a separate language. Only the Frisians were able to resist the advance of the Franks in the 8th and 9th centuries and maintain their independence, both politically and linguistically. By the time of the Reformation, however, the Frisians and their language had lost some of this status with Dutch becoming the administrative language and Frisian being maintained in oral usage (though in the 19th century it regained administrative status).6 Of significance for the understanding of the development of Plautdietsch (PD) are primarily two facts: i.

    ii.

    6

    Certain phonological and lexical features can be identified in PD as either Frisian, Saxon, or Franconian in origin. The language of Menno Simons was fundamentally Frisian, though in his writings he intentionally used almost as much Low German as his local variety, Frisian-Dutch, to make his writing more widely accessible (Niebaum 2006). The closer contact of these dialects with each other after migration to West Prussia required some leveling and accommodation - the differences between Middle Saxon on the one hand, and Middle Low Franconian on the other from the centuries prior to the

    Thanks to an anonymous reviewer for this information on Frisian.

    Plautdietsch

    391

    founding of the Anabaptist movement had remained well enough intact to require this linguistic adaptation. Nevertheless, some colonies developed a blended variety with features from the original language that can be identified in the speech of their descendants yet today. All of the varieties spoken by the early Anabaptists could be considered “Low German” in the broadest sense of the word; they thus had many fundamental features in common. Yet, the Mennonite settlers in the Vistula River Delta in the late 16th century were a linguistically diverse people, particularly at the outset of their movement. It is therefore not surprising that once they began to interact with each other in their new-found closer proximity, it was necessary to come to terms on what variety of Low German should be used, and for what purpose. The solution for their formal usage in worship, formal documents, schooling, etc. was Dutch, which all of the educated amongst them had learned in their former homeland. Many Mennonites – the exact or even a rough percentage is unknown – were illiterate and thus had a command of only the spoken language in their community. Dutch remained the formal language of the literate for the duration of their stay in West Prussia and for several decades after migration to Russia began (but see fn 3). The language of everyday interaction for all Mennonites remained some spoken variety of Dutch, which at the time was closely related to the Low German varieties throughout the North German Plain, including West and East Prussian7. Once settled in the Vistula Delta, the Mennonites began to adapt their speech to the local varieties of Low German (West and East Prussian); however, for some groups and in particular the older generation, this adaptation was limited. Quiring (1928, 46) asserts, based on his sources, that the Mennonites who spoke a Frisian variety maintained their language to a recognizable extent for over two hundred years; it played a significant role 7

    Both West and East Prussian were varieties of Low German and thus the term Niederpreußisch ‘Low Prussian’ applies to both varieties. The term Hochpreußisch ‘High Prussian’ derived from the Mittelhochdeutsch ‘Middle High German’ spoken by the Teutonic Knights who were called into this area during the Crusades to defend it against the non-Christians to the east – some of whom were Prussian!

    392

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    in the formation of the eventual Chortitza variety in Russia. For this maintenance to have been possible, a critical mass of the youngest generation did not sufficiently adopt the speech of the surrounding Prussians in some colonies. Eventually, enough phonological shifts occurred in the PD of the majority so that a type of koine was formed out of which came the distinctiveness of today’s PD. This somewhat unique variety was different enough from all the source dialects and varieties that it had a status of its own, to the extent that a direct connection to its sources was often lost. This is not the case, interestingly, in the word Plautdietsch, which can be directly traced to platt ‘low’ that underwent only a very characteristic shift, diphthongization, becoming [aʊ] in most varieties (alongside [ɑ] and [ɔ], see Burns 2015). Much the same can be said about Dietsch: it stands apart from Deutsch (German) and Duits (Dutch), possibly from the unrounding of [œy] to [iː], to produce Dietsch.8 Despite these changes, the word is transparently related to German, Low German and Dutch, but with enough differences to stand on its own as a unique name for the Mennonite variety. These are just two examples of vowel shifts that occurred during the time the Mennonites lived in the Vistula Delta. Along with these was a general lowering of vowels before /r/ and (other) velars. Among the consonants, a very characteristic shift occurred in the environment of a front vowel or [j] or [l], namely palatalization. These shifts and many more will be explored in more detail below. These changes in the sound system of the evolving Mennonite dialect were not always uniform or all-pervasive, but it is clear that contact with West Prussian (WP), a very eastern variety of Low German spoken in this area by the non-Mennonites, played a significant role. West and East Prussian speakers also did not live in linguistic isolation; they themselves had regular contact with speakers of Slavic varieties, of Yiddish and of Baltic-Finnic varieties. Whether the evolving PD ever influenced the local, 8

    An alternate source is Middle Dutch Diets, which already had the unrounded vowel; both Dutch sources would have required [s > ʃ]. On the other hand, we have [ʃ] in Plattdütsch (Low German), but no unrounded vowel. In Old English the word was theodisc, and theodiscus was used to refer to Germanic languages.

    Plautdietsch

    393

    dominant WP is a question that has been neglected in the research. What has been determined and agreed upon is that two fundamental differences between PD and Low German/Dutch, and between PD and WP came out of this contact situation: i) PD never gained the status of a regional dialect of Low German which was used in a specific geographic location, and ii) speakers of PD, in contrast to speakers of Low German, developed their own unique ethnic identity – called a ‘cult language’ by Siemens (2012, 31) – whereas speakers of Low German have an identity based primarily on their citizenship (see §2 for more detail on the formation of Mennonite group identity). These differences can be seen on the phonological level; as Nieuweboer states it (1998, 130), present-day PD, which had its beginnings in the Vistula Delta, is not a descendant of one specific “proto-PD” dialect but of a number of dialects with different phoneme systems. The Mennonites did not settle in this area as a single group but came in waves from different countries or parts of countries. The same migration pattern held true in the settlement of the two colonies in Russia, out of which smaller colonies or communities were established. Linguistic diversity was inherent in this development. As we will see below in §4, linguistic diversity is still apparent in the PD spoken in North America today.

    3.2. Phonetic and Phonological Changes in the Formation of PD 3.2.1. The Vowel System In order to accurately capture the changes in the PD sound system, it would be necessary to have a record of the varieties of Dutch spoken by the Mennonites when they began their migration to the Vistula Delta. Such a record does not exist for the obvious reason that these were spoken varieties not used for writing; the Mennonites who were literate used the local written Dutch of the time for this purpose. According to most experts on the language spoken by the Mennonites while living in the Low Countries, their spoken usage probably resembled Middle Low German (MLG) – as documented, for instance, in Schiller and Lübben’s (1875)

    394

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    Mittelniederdeutsches Wörterbuch – as much or more than it did the Dutch used in formal documents at this time. Schiller and Lübben compiled their dictionary on the basis of documents from the period 1350–1600, which thus includes the period of the Mennonite migration to West Prussia. Although the texts they used do not necessarily reflect the spoken language of this period, they give us one close approximation of the Low German varieties spoken by the Mennonites before they began their migration eastward. Another is, of course, the written Dutch of the day. The following list provides some examples from the Schiller and Lübben dictionary in comparison with Dutch of the time (Middle Dutch, MD, examples from the Historische woordenboeken of the Instituut voor de Nederlandse Taal available at http://gtb.inl.nl) and with PD, Dutch and Standard German of today. The most striking feature of this list is the similarity between MLG and MD. Schiller and Lübben (1875) state that all varieties of MLG, which for them included MD, were mutually intelligible. Table 2. Examples from Schiller & Lübben dictionary of Middle Low German (MLG) in comparison with Middle Dutch (MD), Plautdietsch (PD), Dutch (D) and Standard German (SG) MLG acht alleen/allein bedde drinken geven helpen melk rennen suster twelf/twalf/twolf

    MD achte allene bedde drinken geven helpen melc/melke rennen suster twalaf/twalef/twalof

    PD acht auleen Bad drintj jäwe halpe Maltj rane Sesta twalw

    D acht alleen bed drinken geven helpen melk rennen zuster twaalf

    SG acht allein Bett trinken geben helfen Milch rennen Schwester zwölf

    ‘eight’ ‘alone’ ‘bed’ ‘to drink’ ‘to give’ ‘to help’ ‘milk’ ‘to run’ ‘sister’ ‘twelve’

    The same was likely to have been true though to a lesser degree when the Mennonites spoke with their new neighbors in West Prussia, who were speakers of Low Prussian (of both the West and East varieties). Low

    Plautdietsch

    395

    Prussian had its own unique characteristics. A record of how it was spoken at the time of the Mennonites’ arrival is no longer readily available. However, there is a dictionary compiled in the mid-19th century by H. Frischbier (1882) from other dictionaries of Low Prussian that gives us some idea. In the preface to this dictionary (p. iv), the author comments on the methodology and objectives of his work: Wohl keine Provinz unseres großen Vaterlandes besitzt auch nur annähernd einen ähnlichen Reichtum an Idiotismen wie gerade Ost- und West-Preußen. Infolge der zahlreichen Einwanderungen deutscher Kolonisten fast aller Stämme während der Ordenszeit und später, begegnen wir hier den verschiedenartigsten Wortbildungen, den mannigfachsten dialektischen Formen. Die Berührung und Mischung der Ansiedler mit den slavischen und litauischen Nachbarn, wie sie seit Jahrhunderten bestanden, und der gleich alte Verkehr mit überseeischen Nationen hat ferner dazu beigetragen, der Mundart eine Färbung zu geben, die frappiert, aber auch interessiert; ja Funken jener längst erloschenen Sprache der heidnischen Ureinwohner des Landes blitzen hin und wieder in einzelnen Wörtern auf, und diese bilden eine weitere Eigentümlichkeit preußischer Mundart. Diese Wortformen zurückzuführen auf ihre Anfänge, erschien mir als ein notwendiges Erfordernis für ein Preußisches Wörterbuch; es sind daher in dem vorliegenden Werke für die etymologische Klarstellung der betreffenden Wörter die in Betracht kommenden fremden Sprachen und die deutschen Mundarten nach Bedürfnis herangezogen und nach bestem Wissen und Können verwertet worden. [Probably no other province of our great fatherland possesses a similar wealth of idioms that even comes close to that of East and West Prussia. In the process of numerous migrations of German colonists from nearly all regions during the time of the Order [of Teutonic Knights] and later, we encounter here the most diverse word constructions and the most numerous dialectal forms. The contact and mixing of the settlers with the Slavic and Lithuanian neighbors, as they existed for centuries, and the equally old association with oversea nations contributed further to giving the dialect a coloring that amazes but also stirs interest; indeed, sparks of a long extinguished language of the heathen original inhabitants of the land shimmer now and then in individual words, and these form a further peculiarity of the Prussian dialect. Taking these word forms back to their beginnings seemed to me to be a necessary challenge posed by a Prussian dictionary. The foreign languages and German dialects have therefore in the present work been drawn upon according to need for the etymological clarity of the relevant words and have been utilized with the upmost knowledge and ability.]

    396

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    The complex origins of Low Prussian, especially the influence of the contact languages mentioned and the somewhat mysterious, or in any case, unresearched or undocumented Old Prussian9 – made even more mysterious with the word heidnisch ‘heathen’ – led to the indisputable conclusion that Low Prussian differed quite significantly from the other MLG varieties spoken in northwestern Europe. We can safely conclude that a major source of the changes that occurred in the MLG varieties spoken by the Mennonites can be found in Low Prussian itself, apart from the other languages that the Mennonites had contact with that had previously altered Low Prussian: Lithuanian and the Slavic varieties. All of these languages and varieties, but primarily Low Prussian – assuming the Mennonites associated in daily life more with people of Germanic than of other origins – forged the PD that was brought to North America in the 19th and early 20th centuries.

    3.3. Specifics of Language Shift in the Mennonite Low German Varieties 3.3.1. Vowel Shifts Though some linguists argue that it is not possible to directly trace the development of the PD vowel system from Dutch or MLG, Siemens (2012) makes a concerted effort to do just that. He begins with the following types of vowel shifts: (1) The distributionally conditioned vowel shifts forming PD, according to Siemens (2012, 79) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

    9

    Lengthening in open syllables /i/-umlaut, as in Middle High German, causing the shift /a/ > /e/ Lowering when a non-nasal or a velar consonant follows Velarization of vowels before /l/ Diphthongization of /o/ to /oa/, and /e/ to /ea/ before vocalized /r/ Diphthongization of /o/, /ø/ to /oɐ/, /øɐ/, and /e/ to /ea/ before /g, k/

    An anonymous reviewer commented that “there is confusion with term Old Prussian, which also was a Baltic language related to Lithuanian, for which still historical texts and a dictionary exist.”

    Plautdietsch

    397

    He continues with the explication of the following shifts which are not distributionally conditioned unless so indicated (for some phonemes the IPA symbol is indicated for clarity): (2) Other major vowel shifts outlined by Siemens (2012, 82–88) 1. MLG ‘a’ > PD ‘au’: plaut, daut, Kaut (SG platt, das(s), Katze ‘flat’, ‘that’, ‘cat’) 2. MLG ‘ë’ [ɛ] > PD ‘ā’: wajch, sass, Brat (SG weg, sechs, Brett ‘way’, ‘six’, ‘board’) 3. MLG ‘i’ > PD ‘e’: enn, Medd, hette (SG in, Mitte, Hitze ‘in’, ‘mid(dle)’, ‘heat’) 4. MLG ‘u’ > PD ‘o’ except before {nd, nt, ng, gg, kk}: stomm, kromm, Storm (SG stumm, krumm, Sturm ‘mute’, ‘crooked’, ‘storm’) 5. MLG ‘o, u’ before {g, k} > PD ‘oa’: koake, jebroake, jeloage (SG kochen, gebrochen, gelogen ‘cook’, ‘broken’, ‘lied’) 6. MLG ‘ö’ [œ] < ‘o’ undergoes unrounding and shifts to PD ‘ā’: Statja, Ratja, Tjap (SG Stöcke, Röcke, Köpfe ‘sticks’, ‘skirts’, ‘heads’); there are notable exceptions such as: derch, tjemm(s)t (SG durch, komm(s)t ‘through’, ‘come’ [2/3SG]) 7. MLG ‘ü’ [ʏ] < ‘u’ collapses with a lowered ‘i’ to PD /e’: denn, derch, mell (SG dünn, durch, Mull ‘thin’, ‘through’, ‘mill’); some exceptions are: Barscht, Darscht, Wartel (SG Bürste, Durst, Wurzel, ‘brush‘, ‘thirst‘, ‘root‘) 8. The umlaut ‘ü’ [ʏ] > PD ‘i’, but not before nasals followed by a dental or velar, but as is evident in the examples, PD, like other WGmc dialects, in contrast to SG, has never had many front rounded vowels: Bridgj, Midj, tridj (SG Brücke, Mücke, zurück, ‘bridge’, ‘mosquito’, ‘back’) 9. MLG ‘â’ [aː] > PD ‘ō’ [oː] as in Schop, Mot, Grot, gohne (SG Schaf, Maß, Gräte, gehen, ‘sleep’, ‘measure’, ‘bones’, ‘go’) 10. The various varieties of ‘ê’ [eː] (there are four in MLG) collapsed into PD ‘ee’ as in Breef, leef, Tjleet (SG Brief, lieb, Kleid, ‘letter’, ‘dear’, ‘dress’)

    398

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg 11. The old, long MLG ‘ô’ [oː] > PD ‘oo’ [oʊ]: doone, goot, Hoot (SG tun, gut, Hut, ‘do’, ‘good’, ‘hat’) 12. Parallel to the shift in 11 is the unrounding of MLG ‘ö’ [ø] to PD ‘ee’: heede, bleede, meed (SG hüten, bluten, müde, ‘heed’, ‘bleed’, ‘tired’)

    The examples above clearly illustrate that through these changes in the vowel system, PD took on a distinct sound, one that could not be confused with either Dutch, MLG or the German of the time. A useful generalization is that front rounded vowels disappeared – though [y] reappeared to some extent in the Chortiza variety – and more diphthongs were created. Thus, through their vowel system alone the speakers of PD had a unique identity, one that cannot be traced back directly to the MLG vowel system. For this reason some linguists argue that it is misguided to establish the inventory of vowel phonemes on the assumption that they came about through the same set of shifts or alterations that occurred in the evolution of today’s Low German (to various degrees in the different varieties of Low German). More will be stated in §4 about the vowel system of PD today in its various varieties.

    3.3.2. /r/-Vocalization and Its Effects on PD Vowels and Consonants Already in MLG times the lowering of /i/ and /u/ to /e/ and /o/ in combination with /r/  [ɐ] occurred; in PD /r/-vocalization caused the disappearance of /r/ in final position, according to Siemens (2012, 79). This lowering was not all-pervasive, and thus did not by itself bring about a change in PD phonology, since it occurred only in final position, in complementary distribution with /r/ followed by a vowel. Thus, we have Dea ‘door’ vs. Deare (SG Türen, ‘doors’). The orthography simply does not capture this fact10.

    10

    Siemens (2012, 79) states that there are more spelling systems for PD than there are writers of PD (!), but this particular phonological rule is consistently indicated in the transcriptions of PD. The fact that it has been does not, however, provide sufficient support for [ɐ], the phonetic realization through /r/-vocalization, being a phoneme. See further discussion below.

    Plautdietsch

    399

    Moreover, the manner in which vowel changes occurred in combination with /r/-vocalization is quite complex: lowering also usually did not occur if /r/ was preceded by a long vowel and followed by a nasal: PD Stern, Twerm, Korn (SG Stern, Zwirn, Korn, ‘star’, ‘yarn’, ‘corn’). If followed by a dental, /r/ disappeared: PD hed, Ped, Wot (SG hörte, Pferd, Wort, ‘heard’, ‘horse’, ‘word’). Siemens (2012, 73–74) grants /ɐ/ and, for reasons of unification also /ə/, the status of a phoneme, citing the minimal pairs verr+e [fɛrə]: fer+e [fərə] ‘before the’, ‘for the’; with this assumption he breaks new theoretical ground. Further research is required to precisely determine the phoneme inventory of PD. A far more pervasive change in the consonant system occurred with palatalization. The source of palatalization was quite undoubtedly the contact with Slavic varieties to the east, though Siemens (2012, 94) points out that some of the resulting sounds did not exist in the Slavic languages in contact with the PD speakers. He proposes that the Baltic languages are responsible, but he points out that the Dutch varieties the Mennonites spoke upon arrival in the Vistula Delta also exhibited forms of palatalization. It is quite clear that the maintenance of the Dutch diminutive marker -je contributed to the spread of palatalization, which generalized quite widely to the environment (not necessarily just the post-position) of the palatal vowels /i, e, ea/ (whether long or short), and /l, n, r, w/. Thus we have the following examples of PD palatalization, contrasting with their Dutch and German cognates, where the spelling represents the palatalized form of /k/, as heard in those varieties of PD that, according to Siemens (2012), were most affected by contact with the surrounding Slavic languages. More on palatalization follows in §3.5 and §4; for simplicity’s sake, we indicate just one type of palatalization here:

    400

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg Table 3. Palatalization in Plautdietsch (PD)11 in comparison to Dutch (D) and Standard German (SG)

    PD Tjäatj Tjoatj tjanne tjlien Voltj lintje

    D keuken kerk kennen klein volk link-

    SG Küche Kirche kennen klein Volk link-

    ‘kitchen’ ‘church’ ‘to know’ ‘small’ ‘folk/people’ ‘left’

    Tjanne indicates that palatalization preceded the lowering of /e/ to /a/, since /a/ would not have induced palatalization. This suggests that palatalization was a very early sound change, since vowel lowering began already in the Vistula Delta. This one data point (presumably there are others like it) might provide evidence for the hypothesis that palatalization was a process that began already in the Dutch environment and was retained at least until the PD speakers had sufficient contact with speakers of Slavic languages. Some linguists, such as Lasch (1914) and Klein (1985) claim that Old Saxon had a strongly palatal pronunciation of /k/. Thus, the Mennonites who spoke the varieties of Dutch deriving from Old Saxon might well have had a tendency to palatalize from centuries earlier. Again we see how the earliest features of the Mennonites’ language carried through to influence later developments. The details of how this carry-through occurred cannot unfortunately be laid out due to lack of a historical record. We have relied here quite heavily on Siemens’ (2012) documentation and analysis for two reasons: i) It is written in German and may therefore not be readily accessible to many linguists; ii) It is the most recent study, and Siemens takes prior sources into careful consideration. Nevertheless, Siemens probably does not have the final word on the PD sound system, which has always been problematic. Part of the problem is the diversity of the sources mentioned above. Although we may have good historical records of West Germanic varieties such as the various varieties of Franconian, Old 11

    As noted by an anonymous reviewer, palatalization also occurs in Frisian: tsjerke [tɕɛrkə] ‘church’.

    Plautdietsch

    401

    Saxon and Frisian, as well as of the descendants of these up to the time of the Mennonite migration to the Vistula Delta, equally reliable sources for what shifts and variations occurred during the sojourn in the Vistula Delta and subsequently on the Russian steppe do not exist. Quiring (1928) provides one of the earliest records of PD, but focussing primarily on the Chortitza colony. Numerous other studies date from roughly this period and the later decades, but none from the period spent on the Russian steppe beginning in 1789 and the departure from the steppe beginning in 1874. It is possible that some forms of variation occurred during this time, whether it was the continued individual development of the two most commonly assumed varieties, Chortitza and Molotschna, or the inverse, a levelling of some features of these two varieties, a good possibility given their close proximity. Nieuweboer (1999, 130) agrees, based on his study of recordings from 1928 to 1995, that the division of PD into these two varieties is largely correct. He also points out that the modern varieties of PD have a large number of allophones, indicating that their variability may date back to the original languages spoken by the first Mennonite settlers and need not be explained by the mixing of the first PD dialects in the daughter colonies. What has transpired more recently, as will be confirmed by our own data in §4, can be characterized as a mixing and borrowing between the two, as well as new innovation in certain more isolated areas. Nieuweboer’s (1999) presentation of the sound system used in the Altai dialect of PD, for instance, reveals some new developments since 1917. Sawatzky (1986) documents cases of lexical borrowing from the Molotschna variety by Chortitza speakers; unfortunately, a detailed discussion of how this affected the sound system of their speech is lacking.

    3.4. Plautdietsch Morphology in the Developmental Stage When describing PD morphology, it is useful and consistent to compare it with Dutch and German morphology, since both of these languages, first Dutch then German, served as the “official” language for formal purposes (worship, education, business, etc.). It is general knowledge amongst

    402

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    scholars that Dutch was undergoing a shift from a morphologically based case and gender marking system to one that was more analytical (e.g., use of van ‘from’ in place of genitive morphology) or biological (e.g., using de for both masculine and feminine). With this shift comes deflection in case markers, much of which was present already in the 16th century when the Mennonites left their original homelands for the Vistula Delta. It is very difficult if not impossible to determine with certainty, however, how much Dutch of this time influenced the local varieties, or vice versa. There never was a Dutch equivalent of Martin Luther who consciously and systematically modeled written Dutch on Dutch of the street. Thus, we cannot determine whether the Dutch varieties spoken by the Mennonites before leaving for Prussia, which formed the basis of the PD that evolved there, had a morphology that resembled the written Dutch of the day. Undoubtedly, in its case system it was a morphologically “reduced” form of Dutch, just as spoken varieties of German of the time were – and are today. Even the written Dutch of the 17th century was already significantly deflected when compared to its earliest form (which used Latin as a model), see de Korne and Rinkel (1987, 31). According to Epp (1993, 86) a transition from Dutch to German occurred in the language of worship between 1820–184012. By this time a well-established standard written German existed (since mid-18th century). The adoption of this language in worship and other formal spheres of life undoubtedly meant that the Mennonites needed formal instruction, not just for learning German morphology. The historical record has documented the employment of teachers brought in from Germany for this purpose 13 . Undoubtedly there was considerable unevenness in the transition from Dutch to German. For some, German was adopted as a prestige language while others looked at this as smugness. There is insufficient documentation of PD as it existed in the 19 th century to draw solid conclusions about its morphology; the closest record was 12

    An anonymous reviewer remarked that the change from Dutch to German occurred earlier, i.e., around the end of the 18th century, when the Mennonites lost contact with The Netherlands, replaced the Dutch bible in church with the German Bible and used German in their schools. See also fn 3. 13 Another reason was to thwart the influence of Russian.

    Plautdietsch

    403

    created by Quiring (1928), but almost exclusively of the Chortitza variety – which was the most conservative at that time. Given the growing influence of German on PD in the 19th century, German morphology undoubtedly contributed to changes in PD morphology. Quiring documents some case forms from German. We return to this point in the next section where we consider PD morphology as it exists today in the North American varieties. To conclude our discussion of PD morphology in the developmental period, we compare Lasch’s paradigm of definite (demonstrative) articles from Middle Low German (MLG, roughly 12th–17th centuries) with Quiring’s (1928) paradigm for PD: Table 4. Paradigm of definite articles in Middle Low German (MLG) and Plautdietsch (PD) a.

    MLG definite articles (Lasch 1914, 218) Masc Fem Nom dê, di(e) dü̂, dê, di(e) Gen des der(e) Dat dem(e), den der(e) Acc den(e) dû̈ , dê, di(e) PD definite articles (Quiring 1928, 92) Masc Fem Nom dê dê Dat dē̜m dê Acc dē̹n dê

    b.

    Neut dat des dem(e), den dat

    Plural dê, di(e) der den dê, di(e)

    Neut daut daut daut

    Plural dê dê dê

    The phonetic symbols are taken directly from the sources. Quiring (1928, 50) explains what sounds they represent as follows; we assume the symbols are the same in both sources: 



    The circumflex is used for the ‘closed articulation’ of the long vowels; ‘ê’ thus approaches the sound of in North German ‘See’ or ‘Tee’. ‘ē̜ ’ was pronounced like North German geben ‘give’ and Leben ‘life’. Whether this pronunciation was any different from today’s SG geben and Leben is not clear; any difference is doubtful, as SG

    404

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg pronunciation of vowels has been largely based on North German practice. However, in today’s SG there is no distinction between ‘ê’ and ‘ē̜ ’ in open syllables; both are [eː].

    Clearly, PD morphology was a somewhat reduced form of MLG morphology, having lost the genitive completely and the dative-accusative distinction in the neuter and feminine, as well as in the plural. On the other hand, PD morphology indicates a degree of leveling, resulting in less ambiguity with the elimination of multiple forms for the same gender/pluralcase combination. In these cases of reduction and simplification PD resembles Dutch of the time. Franck (1910) provides the following definite articles for Middle Dutch (MD), representing the written Dutch of the 13th through the 15th centuries (compare also Van Loey (1980) for the forms of definite articles in MD): Table 5. Paradigm of definite articles in Middle Dutch (MD) (Franck 1910,182)

    Nom Gen Dat Acc

    Masc die, de dies, des dien, den dien, den

    Fem die, de dier, der dier, der die, de

    Neut dat dies, des dien, den dat

    Plural die, de dier, der dien, den die, de

    Undoubtedly the Dutch varieties spoken by the Mennonites when they began their migration to West Prussia reflected, as dialects, the remarkable deflection that had taken place in MD. It is thus not surprising to see that the PD recorded by Quiring, which as he argues had remained essentially the same for hundreds of years, does not have the same number of definite articles and has lost the genitive. As with the sound system, PD has a clearly distinct paradigm of definite articles that sets it apart from either MLG or MD. Much more can be said about PD morphology, its verbal, adjectival and nominal morphology, but we leave those details for another study. The

    Plautdietsch

    405

    morphology of the definite articles suffices as evidence of the unique character of PD, the feature that we wish to underscore in our presentation.

    3.5. Lexical Changes in the Developmental Stage: Borrowings from Contact Languages In line with what we have been presenting and arguing about PD phonology and morphology, lexical changes through borrowing from contact languages was very limited, whether in West Prussia or Russia. The separateness of their lifestyle, from daily life to Sunday worship, did not require a high degree of interaction with group-external individuals or organizations. In addition, once the Mennonites entered Russia, interaction with the native population, both Russian and Ukrainian, was kept to an absolute minimum, not only because the Mennonites lived in largely selfsufficient villages, they also did not hold their outside neighbors in high regard. Epp (1993, 92–93) discusses just five words that were borrowed from Russian, Ukrainian and German but mentions that there are many more. Siemens (2012, 203–219) lists and provides details on Low Prussian (13 examples), Baltic (18), West Slavic (approx. 50), East Slavic (over 100) and other borrowings. He also includes a list of borrowings from Dutch, even though Dutch was the native language of the Mennonites before their migration to the Vistula Delta. His reasoning is that they differ from the words used in the local variety of Low German spoken in the Vistula Delta and thus were borrowings to this region. Most lexical items listed in both works are nouns and belong to the classes food (e.g., Beklezháun < Russian baklažan ‘tomato’), technical equipment (e.g., Pesetjel < Lithuanian posėkelis ‘sledge’), or daily household items (e.g., Diwán < Russian divan ‘couch’). If we assume that PD had upwards of 50,000 lexical items that can safely be classified as native to the language at the point the Mennonites left the Vistula Delta for Russia (once the developmental stage, as it is called here, had generated a distinctive spoken language), then the percentage of

    406

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    borrowings was well under 1%. Of course, this does not take into consideration which words had the highest frequencies, but such measurements are impossible to determine. We can only speculate that borrowings were generally used less than native words. In any case, the borrowings themselves were not a significant factor in the formation of either the phonology or morphology of PD, but the contact with speakers of Baltic and Slavic, as discussed above, caused certain shifts. We thus should not dismiss certain phonetic features and phonological processes induced by or inherent in these contact languages. One that has been discussed quite extensively is the influence of the Russian palatalized /t/ which quite certainly influenced the pronunciation of PD speakers who were conversant in Russian. This influence may be one factor in some speakers favoring the pronunciation [tjoatj] over [kʲoakʲ] ‘church’, or [tjinja] over [kjinja] ‘children’, for instance. We will return to this discussion in §4 where data from current speakers in Kansas and Oklahoma will be analyzed.

    3.6. The State of Plautdietsch Syntax in the Developmental Stage The research literature gives very little help with determining any significant changes occurring in the syntax of the varieties of MLG spoken by the Mennonites during their time in West Prussia or on the Russian steppe, mostly because this kind of research requires substantial texts, and these are lacking. It is not until the 20th century that we have sufficient texts and transcripts of oral production necessary for syntactic analysis. In §4 we take up the body of research by Kaufmann (2015), who provides in-depth analyses of changes occurring in PD syntax as spoken by colonies or communities in South America, Mexico and Texas in the past couple of decades. If we use the earliest texts provided by Mennonites, those from the early 20th century (Quiring 1928), as a document of PD as it was spoken on the Russian Steppe, we have no basis for assuming there was significant variation in the pillars of PD syntax, which are the same for all of continental West Germanic: i) the vast majority of main clauses are verb-second (requiring verb raising), with a variety of elements in the left periphery

    Plautdietsch

    407

    (subjects, adverbs, VP-arguments, etc.), ii) embedded clauses are verb-final, with only limited extraposition to the right of the right sentence bracket; differences in the ordering of elements in clause-final verb clusters is the primary area with dialectal variation. It is not until quite recently that we find V3 in main clauses and V2 in embedded clauses. Further discussion of the variation in today’s PD will be taken up in §4. In this section we simply note that such variation was much more limited in PD prior to the migration out of Russia. In brief, there is no convincing reason to believe that PD in whatever form, in whatever colony, underwent any major syntactic shifts that would resemble the comparatively large phonological or even the very minor morphological changes discussed earlier. From the earliest times until very recently (see Wiese 2013, te Velde 2017, and sources cited by them for discussion of recent changes) all varieties of West Germanic have remained syntactically stable over time. The variation in PD verb clusters evident today can also be found historically, and it exists in dialects of German. Similar variation is also possible even in standard (written) Dutch. PD has always offered more syntactic flexibility than any of the related standard languages, according to Siemens (2012, 197–199), who provides three constructions that PD has either preserved from earlier periods or adopted from Slavic languages or Yiddish. The first is the use of negation with the complementizer bit which in SG requires the addition of ‘mehr’: Etj bliew, bit etj die nich seeh (SG Ich bleibe, bis ich dich nicht mehr/*nicht sehe ‘I’ll stay until I no longer see you’)14. The second is double, or even triple negation as in: Tjeena weet nuscht nich (SG *Keiner weiß nichts nicht =Keiner weiß etwas ‘No one knows anything’), and the third, various types of impersonal constructions, which in SG are now outdated, such as: Mie ohnd aul waut (SG Ich ahnte schon etwas ‘I sensed something’) 15 . The 14

    For further discussion see Duden (2009: §1443) where it is pointed out that if the reading of bis is the same as solange ‘as long as’ with an anterior reading of the main clause, then the embedded clause may have negation without mehr ‘more’. 15 Further research is required to determine whether today’s speakers of PD use expressions like this one more commonly than today’s speakers of SG use similar expressions, such as Mir schwant etwas, which states something very similar and also requires a dative subject. Dative subjects are not foreign to contemporary SG, as in Mir ist kalt, ‘I’m cold’, but they are generally holdovers from an earlier time.

    408

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    hypothesis that PD has preserved centuries-old constructions rather than borrowed them from Slavic or Yiddish is supported by the sociolinguistic fact that the Mennonites lived apart, in self-contained, tight-knit communities, as discussed in §2.

    3.7. Summary and Conclusion In this section we considered the historical development of PD linguistic features, concluding that this variety, as a descendant of West Germanic, acquired a unique status setting it apart from Dutch, German, and other varieties of Low German. PD has always been a spoken variety. The lack of standardization in any respect has its roots in the low rate of literacy of its speakers in the early years, but also in the fact that it served the purpose of communication in daily life and not in formal spheres, where Dutch and German filled the need. In this state of affairs, PD never had the chance to become standardized, neither its pronunciation nor its spelling, and was always in the shadow of these other dominant languages16. This role as a spoken variety is one additional reason why its phonetics and phonology remained in flux, why, for instance, there are so many allophones of some phonemes, and why the pronunciation did not stabilize as much over time in tight-knit speech communities as would be the case in speech communities that emulate a spelling pronunciation, as has been the case in the history of German.

    16

    Although MLG became the language of the Hansa and thus achieved a level of standardization for several centuries, the Mennonites never used MLG for formal purposes as they did written Dutch and German, since the Hansa went into decline in the late 17 th century and thus its language never achieved the status of the other two. For further discussion see Epp (1993).

    Plautdietsch

    409

    4. A LINGUISTIC SKETCH OF PLAUTDIETSCH AS SPOKEN IN NORTH AMERICA TODAY In this section we present some recent developments in PD, in the attempt to identify their underlying sociolinguistic and formal factors. We first present a comparison of the consonant systems of PD and Standard German in order to establish a baseline for understanding how PD differs from German, despite the long-lasting language contact. Further, we describe differences between European PD and its North American forms, based on a comparison of Siemens (2012) and Cox et al. (2013). Finally, we show in more detail differences and similarities between the two Plautdiesch varieties in western Kansas and Oklahoma.

    4.1. A Basic Comparison of the Consonant Systems of Plautdietsch and Standard German As a starting point for describing the PD of today in North America, it is useful to first of all consider how it stands apart from SG, which is the language that from the early to mid-19th century until emigration from Russia exerted the most influence on PD (recall the introduction of formal German instruction in the mid-19th century Russian colonies, see §2.2 and §3.4). Thereafter its influence continued to a significant degree – it was still the formal language of the Mennonites in Oklahoma until at least WWI, and later in some more isolated areas. In Oklahoma, English has replaced German, and the same shift is underway in Kansas (see §2.2). By contrast, German is still very much the formal language in South American and Canadian settlements. In South America the adoption of Spanish has progressed much more slowly, with the rate and degree dependent on many factors, see Cox (2013). Because of the complexity of the migration patterns and the factors influencing sound shifts, we will focus on certain aspects of the sound systems for illustration purposes. We will see that yet today there are differences between PD speakers whose ancestors lived in the Chortitza

    410

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    colony, from which PD speakers in Canada came, and those whose ancestors lived in the Molotschna colony, from which the Mennonite emigrants came to Kansas and later generated the Oklahoma Mennonite settlements. Before we focus on those differences, we need to be reminded of the most fundamental difference between SG and PD (which falls in the same category as Dutch, English, Frisian, and all Low German varieties) from the very beginning, which is the lack of any consonant shifts that were part of the High German Consonant Shift (referred to commonly as the Second Sound Shift, SSII) that occurred between 500 and 800 CE. During SSII, the following consonants shifted (ignoring the precise environments for simplicity’s sake): Table 6. High German Consonant Shift with Plautdietsch and Standard German examples (HG=High German17) WGmc p



    HG pf/ff

    PD18 Piep, Peat

    SG Pfeife, Pferd

    ‘pipe, horse’

    t



    ts/ss

    Strot, twee

    Straße, zwei

    ‘street, two’

    k



    kx,x

    Kaun, Käk

    K(h)anne, K(h)uchen

    ‘can, cake’

    d



    t

    Däa, doone

    Tür, tun

    ‘door, to do’

    --ð/θ



    d19

    dree, daut

    drei, das

    ‘three, the’

    Some other salient features of PD, preserved from the Dutch and Low German varieties spoken initially by the Mennonites, include the following: 

    PD [j] occurs where SG [g] occurs (see Table 7).

    The shift of k  /kx/, indicated in orthography with , occurred only in the ‘highest’ HG varieties, such as Swiss German. 18 As noted earlier, PD has no standard orthography. We will use the orthography of Thiessen (2003) in the remainder of this study, unless otherwise noted. For examples from western Kansas PD we will diverge from Thiessen with the notation of palatal [kj] rather than [tj] in order to avoid misrepresentation, but maintain all other features, e.g., Thiessen’s spelling of infinitive -e despite the fact that Kansas PD uses -en. 19 This last shift was more pervasive than the others, affecting the entire Germanic-speaking area of the continent but not the area north of the English Channel. Thus, it provides an isogloss separating PD from English. 17

    Plautdietsch  

    411

    PD [f,v] occurs where SG [b] occurs, as in PD Foawen vs. SG Farben ‘colors’. Final devoicing does not occur categorically as in SG, or has become phonemic.

    Thus, past participles have a je- instead of a ge- prefix; these features are also evident on some infinitives and nouns: Table 7. Correlation of [j] and [g] in Plautdietsch (PD) and Standard German (SG) PD jebuare jefroare jejäwe jebroake

    SG geboren gefroren gegeben gebrochen

    ‘born’ ‘frozen’ ‘given’ ‘broken’

    PD tjriee sinje Jebäd Jäjend

    SG kriegen singen Gebet Gegend

    ‘get’ ‘sing’ ‘prayer’ ‘region’

    Knowing the effect of SSII on German is useful for the analysis of today’s PD: whenever PD is spoken with a German pronunciation that resulted from SSII, we have evidence that the PD speaker has been influenced by German. This does not include borrowings from SG, such as Zelt ‘tent’ or Zent ‘cent’ which are pronounced with an initial /ts/, an affricate that would not otherwise occur, since it resulted from SSII. As mentioned in §3, SG was learned to an ever-greater extent by the Mennonites in Russia for several reasons. It is not surprising that SG has had an effect on their pronunciation and borrowing. We will see a few examples of this below.

    4.2. Features of the Plautdietsch Sound System as Realized in North American Varieties In the past 50 or more years a considerable amount of research has focused on the various varieties of PD (spoken mainly by descendants of the Chortitza colony) that are being maintained in North America. Cox et al.

    412

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    (2013) provide a detailed sketch of a variety as spoken in an Old Colony Mennonite settlement in Saskatchewan. Moelleken (1987, 1993) compares features of the varieties spoken in British Columbia and Mexico, and Brandt (1992) gives us a detailed description with extensive word lists of the Mexican variety. We hope to show that, as predicted on the basis of the histories of the Kansas and Oklahoma settlements outlined in §2, there are noticeable differences yet today between these varieties of PD that can be traced back to the Russian colonies from which the settlers came: Old Colony or New Colony20. In the next section we turn to a comparison of Old Colony PD with “European PD” for the purpose of highlighting features of Old Colony PD, from which the PD spoken in southwestern Kansas stems.

    4.2.1. Comparing Old Colony and European Plautdietsch The vowel phonemes of PD that Siemens (2012, 89) lists are: {ɐ, ə, e, o, i, u, ā, ē, ō, ī, ū, ee, oo, ei, au, ea, oa}. His consonant phonemes listed on p. 91 are: {p, b, t, d, tj, dj, k, g, f, w, s, sch, z, zh, jch, j, ch, g, h, m, n, nj, ng, l, r, lj}. If we compare Siemens’ (2012) analysis of PD, for which he uses data from the varieties spoken in Germany and elsewhere in Europe, with the sketch of Old Colony PD presented by Cox et al. (2013), some interesting differences come to light. We will begin with this comparison on the assumption that the German varieties that Siemens documents are the most neutral in the sense that they have not come in contact with any nonContinental Germanic language since the migration out of Russia. In Table 8 we list differences between the inventory of PD phonemes as analyzed by Siemens (2012) and Cox et al. (2013); below the table are discussion points on the comparisons.

    20

    An additional complexity with connecting the Oklahoma PD varieties with a source colony arises with the fact that some PD speakers are descendants of Mennonites who settled in Volhynian colonies and had no substantial contact with either the Old or the New Colony.

    Plautdietsch

    413

    Table 8. Comparing the inventories of PD phonemes in Siemens (2012) and Cox et al. (2013) Siemens /ə/ and /ɐ/ are phonemes /ā/ (=/a:/), but no /a/ /tj/, /dj/, /nj/, /lj/ /lʲ/ attested word-finally /ç/ and /x/ listed separately /ts/ occurs word-initially (onset) /oo/ listed, realized as [oʊ] four other phonemic diphthongs no triphthongs listed

    Cox et al. /ə/ and /ɐ/ not listed (no discussion), see 1 only /a/ listed, but with discussion, see 2 /kj/, /gj/, /lj/, see 3 /lj/ attested word-finally, see 4 /ç/ and /x/ listed separately, see 5 /ts/ assumed as an onset, see 6 /oo/ not listed (nor /oʊ/) eleven other phonemic diphthongs, see 7 six triphthongs listed, see 8

    Discussion points: 1. Siemens’ assumption about the phonemic status of /ə/ and /ɐ/ breaks new ground; it is based on the observation that [ɐ] results from the lowering of /e/ in certain environments. Although he assumes that the phonological rule of r-vocalization applies in words like Dea vs. Deare ‘door, doors’ and those ending in /ar/, he states that it does not apply to /er/ when the following consonant causes lowering to [oa], as in woare ‘become’, related to SG werden. It also does not apply in Born, Storm, Korf ‘fountain, storm, basket’. This evidence thus weakens the assumption that postvocalic /r/ is always realized as [ɐ], the rule in SG, as seen in e.g., Sturm [ʃtʊɐm] ‘storm’, Korb [kɔɐp] ‘basket’. However, other minimal pairs in PD showing rvocalization as in SG are: wea – weare(n), SG war – waren ‘was – were’, Foat – foaren, SG Fahrt - fahren ‘drive – to drive’, schwoa – schwierig SG schwer - schwierig ‘difficult/hard – difficult/complex’. Regarding Siemens’ position on /ə/: it is a theory-internal assumption waiting for proof. 2. Cox et al. state that /a/, like /i, y, e, o, u/, may also have “quantitative” (length) distinctiveness. 3. Siemens’ (2012, 90ff) treatment of palatalization is very detailed. The most fundamental difference from Cox et al. is the assumption

    414

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    4.

    5.

    6.

    7.

    8.

    that through palatalization /k/ becomes /tj/, which also eliminated the palatal /gj/ assumed by Cox et al. Both Siemens and Cox et al. give Baulj /baʊlʲ/ ‘bellows’ as an example; only the latter claim that in Canadian Old Colony Plautdietsch it contrasts with Baul /baʊl/ ‘ball’. The general assumption for German among phonologists is that there is one phoneme /ç/ that undergoes lowering to [x], an allophone, after back vowels and /a/. It appears that scholars have to date not made this same assumption for PD. Cox et al. list /ts/ as the onset for Zohl (SG Zahl, ‘number’) and similar words. Siemens (2012, 91) does not assume any phonemic affricates for PD, but he does point out that the combination [ts] occurs in loan words from SG (pronounced as an affricate), as well as in the PD numbers zastich, zewentich ‘sixty, seventy’. Our informants use säwentich with [z], as opposed to the [ts] attested by Siemens (2012, 113). The other diphthongs that Siemens lists are /ee/ realized as [eə], /ei/, realized as [aɪ], /au/, realized as [aʊ], /ea/, realized as [ɛɐ]. Cox et al. list eleven phonemic diphthongs: /ia /, /ya /, /eɪ /, /ea/, /eɔ /, /əɪ /, /əʊ /, /aʊ /, /oa /, /ua /, /uɪ /. This list does not include exact equivalents of Siemens’ /ee/ and /ei/, though /ea/ and /eɪ/ are very close. Most notably, it posits several diphthongs that are unaccounted for by Siemens. Siemens does not discuss any triphthongs; Cox et al. list these: /əɪa/ in/bəɪa/ Beea ‘beer’, /əʊɪ/ in /jəˈrəʊɪ/ Jerooj ‘movement’, /eəɪ/ in /veəɪ/ Wäaj ‘roads’, /iəɪ/ in /viəɪ/ Weaj ‘cradle’, /aʊɪ/ in /paʊɪ/ Pauj ‘paw’, /oəɪ/ in /boəɪ/ Boaj ‘mountains’.

    Cox et al. (2013, 224) provide the vowel phonemes and examples in Figure 2:

    Plautdietsch

    i

    415

    y e o ə

    ʊ

    ɪ ɔ

    ɛ /i/ /ɪ/ /y/ /e/ /ɛ/

    /bit/ /bɪt/ /byt/ /bet/ /bɛt/

    Biet bitt buut Bät Bett

    ‘a bite’ ‘bites’ ‘builds’ ‘a bit’ ‘a tub’

    a /a/ /ə/ /ɔ/ /o/ /ʊ/

    /bat/ /bəˈdit/ /bɔt/ /bot/ /bʊtst/

    bat bediedt Bott bodt butzt

    ‘until’ ‘means’ ‘bid’ ‘bathes’ ‘bumps’

    Figure 2. Chart of Old Colony PD vowel phonemes (Cox et al. 2013, 224).

    The consonant phonemes and examples they give are the following: Table 9. Old Colony PD consonant phoneme inventory (Cox et al. 2013, 222)

    Plosive Nasal Affricate Fricative Trill Approximant Lateral approximant

    Bilabial p b m

    Labiodental

    f

    v

    Alveolar t d n ts s z r l

    Palatoalveolar

    tʃ ʃ

    ʒ

    Palatal

    Velar

    kj

    k

    g ŋ

    x

    ɣ

    gj ɲ

    ç j lj

    Glottal Ɂ

    h

    416

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg Table 9. (Continued)

    /p/ /b/ /m/ /f/ /v/ /t/ /d/ /n/ /ts/ /s/ /z/ /r/ /l/

    /poa/ /boa/ /moats/ /foa/ /voa/ /jɪ.ˈtoa/ /doa/ /ˈnoa.nɪç/ /tsol/ /ˈma.sa/ /zot/ /roa/ /lot/

    Poa Boa Moatz foah woah Jitoa doa noanich Zohl Massa Sot roa lot

    ‘pair’ ‘bear’ ‘March’ ‘Drive!’ ‘true’ ‘guitar’ ‘there’ ‘nowhere’ ‘number’ ‘knife’ ‘seed’ ‘Cry!’ ‘late’

    /kj/ /gj/ /ɲ/ /ç/ /j/ /k/ /g/ /ŋ/ /x/ /ɣ/ /tʃ/ /ʃ/ /ʒ/

    /kjoakj/ /ˈtɪ.gja/ /ˈɛ.ɲa/ /ˈhɛ.ça/ /joa/ /koa/ /goa/ /ˈhʊ.ŋa/ /ˈpra.xa/ /dreɔ.ɣa/ /ˈkʊ.tʃa/ /ʃoap/ /ˈbʊ.ʒa/

    Kjoakj tigja Enja hecha Joah Koa goa Hunga Pracha Dröaga Kutscha schoap Buzha

    /lj/

    /baʊlj/

    Baulj

    ‘bellows (N)’

    /Ɂ/ /h/

    /Ɂoam/ /hoa/

    oam Hoa

    ‘church’ ‘eager’ ‘ends’ ‘higher’ ‘year’ ‘car’ ‘cooked’ ‘hunger’ ‘beggar’ ‘carrier’ ‘chauffeur’ ‘sharp ‘tousled head of hair’ ‘poor’ ‘hair’

    The differences between the Siemens (2012) and Cox et al. (2013) inventories stem in part from differences in methodology and theory, but that is not the case with the lists of diphthongs and triphthongs. The greater number of diphthongs and the existence of triphthongs in Old Colony PD follow from the hypothesis that contact with another language will lead to greater volatility in a sound system. Another contributing factor is the lack of a standard orthography, which would have made the standardization of PD phonology feasible. For us the main issue is that both language contact and lack of standarization increase the challenges of the documentation, description and explanation of the new variety. Although we cannot take on the challenges of explanation here, we will in the remainder of this section address how the PD spoken in Kansas and Oklahoma compares and contrasts with what Siemens and Cox et al. have documented for their respective varieties.

    Plautdietsch

    417

    4.2.2. The Sounds of the PD Spoken in Kansas and Oklahoma Today A comment of at least two of our informants in Oklahoma has been that even amongst the speakers within their community there are noticeable dialect differences21. This fact follows directly from the settlement history: The Mennonites who came to Oklahoma from Kansas did not all live in just one or two colonies in Russia (or were not descendants of just one or two). Although they tended to travel with the people they lived with there, once they arrived it was not typically possible to maintain the same groupings (see §2 on the dissolution of organizational structures). Nevertheless, it is apparent from our interviews that some, possibly most, of the features that distinguished their group are still present in their speech. Research is ongoing. For the southwestern Kansas Mennonites, a similar model of community mixing can be observed. While a vast majority of immigrants came from Mexican colonies, there is also a considerable number of Mennonites from Canada, or other US states who are all descendants of the Russian Old Colony Mennonites, but vary in how long their families stayed in Canada or Mexico. Two generalizations can be confidently made: 1) The set of sound features in the varieties of PD spoken in Kansas and Oklahoma that are similar is far larger than the set of those that are different, and 2) the set of differences stem to this day from the different colonies: Chortitza vs. Molotschna. Among some of the more noticeable sound differences between the Oklahoma and Kansas varieties of PD are the following: 1. The degree and manner of palatalization: for instance, our informants pronounce ‘I’ (Dutch ik, SG ich) in several ways: [ɪk, ɛkj, ɪtʃ, ɛtʃ]. Words that in West Prussian days began with a palatalized /kj/ are today palatalized as [tj] by Oklahoma PD 21

    Probably somewhat less surprising in one respect was the comment of a PD speaker in Oklahoma who had grown up in a Mennonite, PD-speaking community in Nebraska. When she heard a recording of a PD-speaker from Fairview, Oklahoma, she claimed she could only make out a few words. We suspect that the lack of intelligibility had more to do with the way PD has been maintained by some Midwestern speakers and the shifts that are occurring than with differences between PD varieties stemming from pre-North American periods.

    418

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg speakers, descendants of the Molotschna colony, whereas in western Kansas the palatalization has remained as [kj] amongst descendants of the Chortitza colony. Thus, we hear /tjoatj/ and /tjinja/ in Oklahoma, but /kʲoakʲ/ and /kjinja/ ‘church’, ‘children’ in Kansas. 2. /r/-realization: in both Kansas and Oklahoma, initial or postconsonantal /r/ before a stressed stem vowel is uniformly realized as [r] (voiced alveolar trill). In post-vocalic position /r/ is realized as either [ɐ], as we saw earlier, or if preceded by a syllable boundary or [ɐ], as [ɹ] (voiced alveolar approximant) in western Kansas (see § 4.2.2.1 below). Further research is needed to determine whether /r/ is ever realized as [ɽ], a retroflex tap, as in Mexico, which may be a feature of a Dutch variety, preserved in an isolated West Prussian community and brought to Mexico, as argued by Moelleken (1993).

    4.2.2.1. R-Vocalization Supporting the discussion in §3 and subsequent claims about /r/vocalization, all of our speakers consistently employed this phonological rule, or for whatever reason pronounced [ɐ] in final position or preceding a consonant in words that in the equivalent SG words have in the orthography but are also pronounced [ɐ]. Some of the pronuncations we have documented are the following: Table 10. PD where SG has or [Vr], both realized as [ɐ] or [Vɐ] PD [bɛtɐ] [hɔɐ̯t] [lɛɪdɐ] [me:ɐ̯] [piət]

    bäta hoat leida meea Peat

    SG [bɛsɐ] [haɐ̯t] [laɪdɐ] [me:ɐ̯] [pfɛ:ɐ̯t]

    besser hart leider mehr Pferd

    ‘better’ ‘hard’ ‘unfortunately’ ‘more’ ‘horse’

    Plautdietsch

    419

    Table 11. Environments where /r/ is realized as [r] in western Kansas [rutn̩] [ˈfrɔɪ.ʃtɪkj] [fɐ.ˈrɛzn̩] [jɛ.ˈɣrʏlt] [ˈoʊn.drʌ] [bə.ˈʃri:vn̩]

    Rüten Freestitj ve’reise jegrült aundre be’schriewe

    ‘window pane’ ‘breakfast’ ‘to take a trip’ ‘frightened, scared’ ‘other’ ‘to describe’

    Table 12. Environments where /r/ is realized as [ɹ] in western Kansas [ˈfoɐɹn̩] [jə.ˈʃtaɹ.wən] [ˈɪɹ.jənt.wɔt] [dʌɹç] [bə.ˈzaɹjn̩]

    foahre jestorwe irjend’waut derjch be’sorje

    ‘to drive’ ‘died’ ‘something’ (indef.) ‘through’ ‘to take care of’

    4.2.2.2. Rounded Front Vowels One very salient feature of PD is the comparatively limited inventory of rounded front vowels; in this respect it patterns with MLG and today’s Low German. The one notable exception is [y], heard primarily in the Chortitza variety, cf. Epp (1993, 78), who does not include a source for this vowel and states that it can sometimes be heard in other varieties in alternation with the rounded back [u]. Thus, some speakers in one colony say e.g., [du:], [ju:], [hu:s], ‘you’, ‘of you-pl’, ‘house’, while others in the same colony say [dy:], [jy:], [hy:s]. Thiessen’s (2003) dictionary, documenting the Old Colony/Chortitza variety, lists only dü, jü, Hüs with the indicating [y:], while Zacharias (2009) lists only du but with the pronunciation indicated as [dy], likewise Hus with [hys]. Zacharias uses the spelling of the Low German Bible. The authors have indicated to us (p.c.) that their lexicon was designed and written with the Old Colony Mennonites in Latin America in mind. As with many aspects of PD, the state of high vowels illustrate the variation and lack of standardization that exists to this day, which might be increasing with the on-going influence of more recent contact languages.

    420

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    In the Oklahoma variety of PD we have documented, the words du, Hus, ut, nu (‘you’, ‘house’, ‘out’, ‘now’) and similar words are pronounced with [u:].22 To date, we do not have any documented words pronounced with [y] in this variety. We cannot conclude, however, that this variety has no front, rounded vowels. So far we have recorded at least two instances of /ø/ and /œ/, in Tjröse 23 ‘cows’ and Töpptje ‘pot’. Thiessen (2003) has Toppje without the umlaut, presumably indicating a back, rounded vowel. By contrast, in the Kansas variety we have very clear documentation of the front, rounded [y:] in the words rut, Minuten, jegrult, Hus and buten (‘out’, ‘minutes’, ‘scared’, ‘house’, ‘outside’). Our data thus correspond with what is predicted by the origins of the speakers: The Kansas speakers, as descendants of the Chortitza Colony, have the phoneme /y/ listed in the Cox et al. (2013) inventory, while the Oklahoma speakers, as descendants of the Molotschna Colony, do not and use /u/ instead, as documented by Siemens (2012), whose data come from descendants of this colony as well. 4.2.2.3. Diphthongs and Triphthongs A much-studied feature of PD is the somewhat larger inventory of diphthongs than either Dutch or German, likely a result of contact with numerous languages. Going beyond these, Cox et al. (2013) document several triphthongs as well. We turn in this section to a comparison of these elements as presented by Cox et al. with what we have documented in western Kansas and Oklahoma. The inventory of phonemic diphthongs presented by Cox et al. are as follows:

    22

    Dume ‘thumb’ is pronounced by at least one Oklahoma speaker with [oʊ], indicating not only lowering but also diphthongization. Siemens (2012) and Thiessen (2003) both document /u/ [u:] in this word. Further research is needed to determine whether this one data point is part of a larger shift. If so, it would indicate the need for a reassessment of the entire phoneme inventory in Oklahoma. 23 As noted below, this word is not in any PD dictionary and thus seems to be a coinage of the Oklahoma speakers of PD (or of a particular community).

    Plautdietsch

    421

    Table 13. Phonemic diphthongs in Canadian Old Colony PD (Cox et al. 2013, 225) /ia / /ya/ /eɪ / /ea/ /eɔ /

    /bia/ /bya/ /beɪd/ /bea/ /ˈbeɔ .ɣən/

    Bia Buua beid Bäa Böagen

    ‘pillow case’ ‘builder’ ‘both’ ‘berry; pear’ ‘bow’

    /əɪ / /əʊ / /aʊ / /oa / /ua/ /uɪ/

    /bəɪd/ /bəʊd/ /baʊs/ /boa/ /vua/ /fuj/

    beed Bood Bauss Boa wua fuj

    ‘Bid!’ ‘shack’ ‘boss’ ‘bear; drill’ ‘where’ ‘Yuck!’

    It is pointed out that other studies of Canadian PD have different inventories, and that there are allophones of these. For instance, the /a/ offglide is sometimes reduced to [ə], and /uɪ/ is restricted to a single word fuj ‘Yuck’. The phonemic triphthongs they have documented are: Table 14. Phonemic triphthongs in Canadian Old Colony PD (Cox et al. 2013, 226) /əɪa/ /əʊɪ/ /eəɪ/

    /bəɪa/ /jəˈrəʊɪ/ /veəɪ/

    Beea Jerooj Wäaj

    ‘beer’ ‘movement’ ‘roads’

    /iəɪ/ /aʊɪ/ /oəɪ/

    /viəɪ/ /paʊɪ/ /boəɪ/

    Weaj Pauj Boaj

    ‘cradle’ ‘paw’ ‘mountains’

    Our documentation of diphthongs and triphthongs in western Kansas has produced the following inventory: Table 15. Diphthongs in western Kansas PD /ia/ /ya/ /eɪ/ /ea/ /aɪ/ /ɔɪ/ /oa/ /oʊ/ /ua/ /ui/ 24

    /bia/ /bya/ /beɪd/ /bea/ /tvaɪ/ /bɔɪd/ /kjoakj/ /ʃoʊl/ /vua/ /fui/

    Bia Buua beid Bäa twee beed Kjoakj School wua fuj

    ‘pillow case’ ‘farmer’ ‘both’ ‘berry; bear’ ‘two’ ‘bid’ ‘church’ ‘school’ ‘where’ ‘Yuck!’

    with the allophones [ɪa, ɪɐ, iɐ] with the allophones [yɐ, yə] with the allophone [ɛɪ] with the allophones [eɐ, ɛa, ɛɐ] with the allophone [œɪ] with the allophone [æʊ] with the allophone [uɐ] with the allophone [yi]24

    Some speakers pronounced fuj with [ui], others with [yi]. Which is the phoneme has not yet been determined with certainty.

    422

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg Discussion points: 1. We have indicated certain allophones involving the variation between [e] and [ɛ] in the onset of the allophone. Cox et al. (2013) do not discuss any allophonic variation of this kind, but it is noteworthy that they list no phoneme with the onset /ɛ/ (though they do assume that both /e/ and /ɛ/ are phonemes). 2. There is a noticeable tendency amongst the western Kansas speakers to use fronted allophones of these phonemes, as noted with fuj. It also occurs with School, which one speaker pronounced [ʃæʊl], and with beed, which most speakers pronounce as [bɔɪd] but at least one pronounced it [bœɪd]. For more on fronting in PD, see Burns (2015). 3. We have no [eɔ] or [ea], but instead [eɐ]; all are possible allophones of /ea/. We also have no /əɪ/ but instead [ɛɪ], a possible allophone, though we assume that both /e/ and /ɛ/ are phonemes.

    The triphthongs we have documented differ quite significantly from those in Canadian Old Colony PD. They are: Table 16. Triphthongs in western Kansas PD [ɪʊa] [ɪoa] [ɛɪɐ] [ɔɪɐ] [oaɪ] [ɛɐɪ]

    in Buak in Doag in Eia in sea in Boaj in Wäaj

    ‘book’ ‘day’ ‘eggs’ ‘very’ ‘hill, mountain’ ‘way, path’

    We are not yet certain whether all of these are phonemic; the last one is very close to the triphthong/eəɪ/that Cox et al. (2013) document. Otherwise, only one of our triphthongs appears to be identical to a triphthong in Canadian Old Colony PD, namely /ɛɪɐ/. The source of the differences remains to be determined. It might be due to inner-group variation, or to the

    Plautdietsch

    423

    contact situation the Kansas Mennonites experienced in Mexico. A larger data sample is needed from various communities to answer this question.25 There are very few differences between the diphthongs and triphthongs documented (so far) in Oklahoma PD and those in Kansas. Worth noting is the raising of /o/ to /u/ for emphasis, as in the pronunciations [jua] for joh ‘yes’, and [dua] for doa ‘there’ in Oklahoma. As in Kansas, Oklahoma PD speakers also sometimes front [o] to [ø] or [ɔ] to [œ], the latter in Töpptje ‘pot’, noted above. Similarly, /ɑ/ is sometimes realized as /æ/ or /ɛ/, as in [hɛdə] for haude. Another part of the story of rounded front vowels is the sometimes accompanying or otherwise independently conditioned lowering of an accented vowel (when compared to SG; whether lowering actually occurred depends on the source language, which could have been one of several different WGmc varieties, as outlined earlier). Additionally, the vowels are also sometimes diphthongized: Table 17. Examples of diphthongized vowels in PD PD [məɪd] [jrəɪn] [əɪvɐ] [nəɪdɪç] [məɪbəl] [ʃəɪn]

    meed jreen äwa needijch Meebel scheen

    SG [my:də] [gʁy:n] [y:bɐ] [nø:tɪç] [mø:bəl] [ʃø:n]

    müde grün über nötig Möbel schön

    ‘tired’ ‘green’ ‘over’ ‘necessary’ ‘furniture’ ‘beautiful, pretty, nice’

    4.2.3. Plautdietsch Morphology For illustrating the state of PD morphology today we will once again use the definite articles. A comparison with the MLG and MD definite articles (Table 4) shows that today’s PD is on the one hand not as rich, but on the other, it indicates a leveling that has simplified the morphology, making it more regular and predictable. The definite articles provided by Thiessen (2003) are: 25

    Underscoring this point is the fact that Cox et al. (2013, 222) base their phoneme inventory on the speech of just one individual representing a small community.

    424

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg Table 18. PD definite articles (Thiessen 2003, xix)

    Nom Acc Dat

    Masc dee den dem/den

    Fem dee dee dee

    Neut daut daut dem/daut

    Plural dee dee dee

    Our own set of definite articles varies only slightly from Thiessen’s (2003) and are virtually identical to the set provided by McCaffery (2008), who includes both dän and däm for both the accusative and dative of the masculine, a practice found in other sources as well. The use of instead of spells out a pronunciation of the articles in the masculine accusative and dative that is distinct from the SG den and dem, which are pronounced with a long, tense [e:]. The PD is pronounced [ɛ]: Table 19. Kansas and Oklahoma PD definite articles

    Nom Acc Dat

    Masc de dän/däm/de dän/däm/de

    Fem de de de

    Neut daut daut daut

    Plural de de de

    In a comparison with the definite articles provided by Quiring (1928) listed in Table 4b, repeated below as Table 20, it is evident that today’s PD has not changed during the more than 140 years of residence in North America. Table 20. PD definite articles in Quiring (1928, 92)

    Nom Dat Acc

    Masc dê dē̜m dē̹n

    Fem dê dê dê

    Neut daut daut daut

    Plural dê dê dê

    The existence and availability of these definite articles says little about how frequently they are put to use. In the usage of the PD speakers in Oklahoma, dän and däm rarely occur. Their frequency is higher among the

    Plautdietsch

    425

    southwest Kansas speakers, as we would expect, given the difference in the state of maintenance and hence proficiency between the two groups. This form of breakdown in proficiency – reflected in a weakening in the role of case morphology for marking grammatical function – is not surprising, given the high level of proficiency in English of the Oklahoma PD speakers. Loss in proficiency must be kept distinct from case syncretism per se, however. Rosenberg (2003) documents case syncretism in contact situations with Russian, which in stark contrast to English, has very rich case morphology (for more discussion on case syncretism in German varieties, see Bousquette 2020). Further research is needed into whether case syncretism is occurring in the PD spoken in the American Midwest, or whether attrition is the cause of lower frequency found with certain case morphemes. Supporting the syncretism position is the fact that the western Kansas speakers, who are also highly proficient in English but much more proficient in PD than the Oklahoma speakers, also use the reduced case forms in the accusative and dative in Table 19.

    4.2.4. Maintenance and Change in the Syntax of Plautdietsch Our data from the Oklahoma and Kansas PD speakers indicate convincingly that West Germanic (WGmc) syntax has been maintained almost perfectly, despite the separation of more than 200 years from a continental WGmc speech environment, that is, from the time the Mennonites left West Prussia. The main parameters of this syntax are: 1. V2 main clauses, requiring finite verb raising to second position out of an OV base 2. Verbal complements (infinitives, participles, particles) in final position in main clauses 3. Verb cluster in final position in embedded clauses (with Vfin sometimes preceding other verbal elements as in Dutch) Data that support the maintenance of V2 main clauses are:

    426 (3) a.

    b.

    c.

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    dependent infinitive in final position Mien Haund es gaunss … my hand is completely ‘My hand has become completely stiff.’ wh-question Woa learsd du daut? Where learned you that? ‘Where did you learn that?’ fronted temporal adverb Nu kaunst du dien Famielje Now can you your family ‘Now you can describe your family.’

    stiew stiff

    woarde. become

    beschriewen. describe

    A feature of PD syntax that is also found in other dialects of WGmc and North Germanic is the use of verb-third with certain fronted adverbials or discourse connectives. We have documented the following constructions, among others: (4) a.

    b.

    V3 with a fronted temporal adverbial Enn dee tachentijch he deede en in the eighties he did in ‘In the eighties he preached in English.’ V3 with a fronted discourse particle Soo etj deed met daut halpe. so I did with that help ‘So I helped with that.’

    Enjlisch English

    predje. preach

    4.2.5. Periphrastic Do Dialects of West Germanic are known for their more extensive use of periphrastic do than SG, see Weber (2018) for a recent investigation. His research shows that Northern German dialects have a much greater frequency of periphrastic do in embedded clauses, and Southern German dialect speakers prefer using periphrastic do in main clauses; central dialects have this do-form in both types of clauses. According to Duden, the prescriptive grammar of SG, the only acceptable form of periphrastic do is the one that occurs with a fronted infinitive, as in these generic examples:

    Plautdietsch (5) a.

    b.

    Periphrastic do in SG Tanzen tun wir wenig dance do we little ‘We dance little nowadays.’ Lesen tue ich gerne read do I gladly ‘I like to read in the evening.’

    427

    heutzutage. nowadays am on-the

    Abend. evening

    Our informants generated a considerable variety of constructions with periphrastic do in both main (V2 or V3) clauses and in embedded clauses. First, some examples from the western Kansas variety: (6) a.

    b.

    c.

    d.

    e.

    Periphrastic do in western Kansas PD V2 main clause, present Ekj doo Kjinja too’seehnen. I do children to-see ‘I look after kids.’ V3 main clause, past Enn soo ekj deed fresch moaken fa de Kjinja. and so I did fresh make for the children ‘And so I freshened up for the kids.’ V2 main clause with prepositional complement Ekj do en Buak läsen toom nodem op’paussen. I do a book read to-the after-them out-look …embedded V-final clause, present … wan dee büte späle doone. when they outside play do ‘I read a book while looking after them, when they play outside.’ V-final embedded, present (Enn dan huppst de Pogg rüt to de Band) and then hops the frog out to the band waut doa deit späle. which there does play ‘And then the frog jumps out towards the band that is playing there.’ Causative construction in embedded clause Ekj jleich to läsen wan ekj de Kjinja büten I like to read when I the children outside spälen doo. play do ‘I like to read when I let the kids play outside.’

    428

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg (Continued)

    (7) a.

    b.

    c.

    Periphrastic do in Oklahoma PD V-final embedded, past … woa etj deed opp’wausse. where I did up-grow ‘…where I grew up.’ V1, V2 main clause, present A: Deist du uck a besstje koake? do you also a bit cook A: ‘Do you cook a little, too?’ B: ‘He eats!’ V2 main clause, past Dee deede dee Boom auf’schniede. they did the tree off-cut ‘They cut down the tree.’

    B:

    He he

    deit does

    äte! eat

    In his study of West Texas PD, Kaufmann (under review) presents data to support the argument that constructions like (6d) and (7a) involve verb phrase raising, sometimes accompanied by Topicalization. We will not take up the question of what dislocations occur (if any) in these particular constructions but only note that verb clusters are highly variable in the dialects of today’s WGmc languages. Even in standard Dutch, there is (acceptable) variation between V1-V2-V3 and V3-V2-V1. With respect to the functional and discourse features of periphrastic do, we will only state that our data do not support one or the other analysis conclusively. For instance, van der Horst (1998) argues that periphrastic do in Dutch originated in causative constructions such as (6e), but other studies such as Cornips (1998) point to habitual actions in a variety of Dutch, i.e., Heerlen Dutch, as in (7b), while others, for instance Nuijtens (1962, 155) argue that periphrastic do in Dutch offers an advantage for handling complex verbs such as opp’wausse in (7a).26 Similar to Cornips, Nieuweboer (1999) observes that Altai Plautdiitsch uses periphrastic do in habitual events but also with inchoative verbs like

    26

    Nuijtens gives these examples from Dutch: kopjeduikelen ‘to turn somersaults’, bokspringen ‘to (play) leapfrog’, zandhappen ‘to bite the dust’, stofzuigen ‘to vacuum’ and states, “Is het bijv. duikel kopje of kopjeduikel; spring bok of bokspring…” [Is it e.g., duikel kopje or kopjeduikel; spring bok or bokspring] (1962, 155).

    Plautdietsch

    429

    oopmoake (‘to open’). Additionally, he discusses the effects of intense language contact with Russian, i.e., periphrastic do occurs frequently with phonologically adapted Russian verbs that are lexical borrowings into Plautdietsch, and is even obligatory for those that are not adapted to the target language. This, he argues, can be attributed to an avoidance strategy: the conjugation of do instead of the lexical verb. His approach thus resembles Nuijtens in parts. Looking at Plautdietsch varieties in the Americas, Kaufmann (under review) also finds the use in habitual (but also in progressive) contexts. Additionally, he presents data where periphrastic do is used in its indicative form to mark subjunctivity in certain conditional clauses. From this brief summary, it becomes clear that periphrastic do differs per variety, but also shares some features. More data must be collected for Plautdietsch before it can be determined which analysis gains support. Another parameter of Continental WGmc syntax, Topicalization to the left periphery (of elements other than wh-items), is very difficult to document amongst the Oklahoma PD speakers, another potential sign of attrition. Amongst the PD speakers in western Kansas, a common type of Topicalization involves periphrastic do with a fronted infinitive, which as noted earlier is the most acceptable form of periphrastic do in SG as seen in (5): (8) a.

    b.

    c.

    Topicalization of non-wh-items fronted infinitive, with periphrastic do Neie doo ekj väle Dach. sew do I many day ‘I sew many days/often.’ fronted inf+complement, with periphrastic do Dee Praising Worship leide daut the praising worship lead that ‘They led the praising workshop.’ fronted inf. VP with periphrastic do Vleijcht sinje fe ons eensjemol maybe sing for us sometimes ‘Maybe the youth will sing for us sometimes.’

    deede did

    deit does

    see. they

    dee the

    Discussion points on Topicalization and periphrastic do

    Jügend. youth

    430

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg 1. All three of the constructions in (8) suggest that for whatever reason (to be left for future research) infinitives, with and without complements, along with adverbs which sometimes occur without subject-verb inversion (V3 in (6b)), are preferred over other elements for Topicalization. 2. At least one speaker preferred to use a resumptive pronoun, such as daut in (8b), generating a left-dislocated infinitival element. This strategy is also common in SG, Standard Durch, and Frisian. 3. As (8b) indicates, PD is a verb-final language: the complement of the verb precedes the verb head. 4. We do not assume it is a coincidence that the combination of periphrastic do and Topicalization is the most common construction with Topicalization. What syntactic and pragmatic factors underlie this construction involves a more extensive investigation than can be undertaken here.

    4.2.6. The Role of English as the Dominant Language We have documented numerous constructions that appear very similar if not identical to English constructions employing VP ellipsis with periphrastic doone (9a-b) or with senne (9c): (9) a.

    b.

    c.

    VP-ellipsis A: Hee deede daut drintje. B: Wie deede he did that drink we did A: ‘He drank that.’ B: ‘We did, too!’ Enn Texas daut wausst seea seea enn daut in Texas that grew very very and that noch emma. yet still ‘In Texas, it grew a lot, and it still does.’ (A: Und sie leben alle noch?) B: Joh, and they live all yet yes A: ‘And they are all living yet?’ B: ‘Yes, they are.’

    uck! too deit does

    dee they

    send. are

    It is easy to analyze such constructions as copies of their English equivalents, but undoubtedly there are constraints on the use of such constructions in PD, just as there are in English. Formalizing these

    Plautdietsch

    431

    constraints potentially involves assumptions about PD grammar beyond the syntax of the main clause, such as pragmatic factors. Also in the category of possible English influence is the use of accusative pronouns for subjects as a default in the Oklahoma variety, whereas PD (and SG) default to nominative: (10) a.

    b.

    Use of accusative pronouns A: Etj woa stoawe! Etj woa stoawe! I will die I will die A: ‘I’m going to die! I’m going to die!’ B: ‘Me, too!’ Mien Brooda enn mie, wie musste my brother and me we must ‘My brother and me, we had to fetch water.’

    B:

    Wota water

    Mie me

    uck! also

    hoohle. fetch

    As with case syncretism and attrition discussed earlier, VP ellipsis and default case could be related to a process of attrition, but also to general case simplification or syncretism, which has historical precedents in WGmc grammar (see Bousquette 2020, Salmons 2018). Unique to the PD speech communities in North America (north of the US-Mexican border), however, is the surrounding dominant language English. If VP ellipsis and accusative case default do not occur in the PD variety spoken in Mexico – a topic not yet addressed in the literature – then an English influence in whatever form, including a shift in the direction of English main clause syntax and the consequent shift in the case morphology, might be the source of these syntactic features. This is a topic for future research.

    4.2.7. Syntactic Variation and Innovation in North American Plautdietsch It would not be surprising if evidence of syntactic variation and innovation could be found that suggests at least the beginnings of some kind of syntactic shift, or what might look like a shift but is only the exploitation of options available in the broad framework of WGmc. Kaufmann (2015, 118) presents data that could be used to support either the former or the latter, depending on how they are analyzed. Some examples are given in (11):

    432

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    (11) a.

    b.

    Examples from West Texas PD of Verb Phrase Raising with Topicalization in embedded clauses kos nich sehen daut ik ha en nüet Kleid can not see that I have a new dress an (USA-22; f/15/Engl) on ‘Can’t you see that I have a new dress on?’ wann der dät den sine Arbeit dann kaun if he does the his homework then can her … ice cream eten (USA-77; f/42/MLG) he ice cream eat ‘If he does his homework, then he can have … ice cream.’

    This construction type, which has a dependent clause with a finite verb in second position like a main clause, occurs in 53 of the 59 tokens of embedded/dependent clauses – either a complement, conditional or relative clause – in which the complement occurs after a finite verb (with no dependent verb). Kaufmann points out that dependent clauses of these kinds with a raised verb represent only 3.2% of his tokens from all speakers of PD in South and North America; thus, there are very few violations of the OV parameter for dependent clauses for which WGmc is known. However, if the data from the West Texas PD speakers is considered alone, the percentage is 8.4%. Kaufmann (2015, 121) concludes: “The informants in the United States show by far the highest share of the non-verb-final variant (8.4% of their tokens…)…. Much contact with SHG [Standard High German], as in the Paraguayan colonies, correlates with very few non-verb-final tokens; hardly any contact with SHG, as in the US-American colony, correlates with a much higher number of nonverb-final tokens.”

    This correlation does not, of course, lead us directly to the cause. Kaufmann initially argues against equating the operation that raises the finite verb to second position in main clauses with the one that raises the verb in embedded clauses, calling the embedded clause variant “superficial V2.” He presents an analysis that involves verb-projection raising and scrambling. Both of these operations are typical of main clauses in WGmc languages, but only scrambling is also possible in embedded clauses. In the end he

    Plautdietsch

    433

    comes to the conclusion, however, that the higher the percentage of V2 clauses in a variety of PD, the higher the likelihood that “superficial V2” will be reanalyzed as “structural V2.” Just how this reanalysis occurs precisely is not spelled out, but it is clear that Kaufmann sees the beginnings of a parametric shift in the North American variety of PD. We have recorded the same tendency. A small percentage of our speakers’ dependent clauses also indicate verb raising. We should note, however, that verb raising in dass (‘that’)-clauses and weil (‘because’)-clauses (occasionally also obwohl (‘although’)-clauses) occurs in colloquial German within the Germanspeaking countries, especially in contemporary urban vernaculars (in other verb-second languages also). There is a rich body of research on this, e.g., Freywald et al. (2015). Another study that explores syntactic variation in Plautdietsch and English in western Kansas is Hopp et al. 2018. They looked at wh-movement in simple questions and complex questions, i.e., across clause boundaries, in both languages, employing a production and a judgment task, and found that variation correlated with the age of onset of the contact language English. Speakers displayed three options for complex wh-movement: 1. long-distance: ‘Where do you think John is?’ 2. medial wh (scope-marking): ‘What do you think where John is?’ 3. medial wh (copy wh):‘Where do you think where John is?’ The results showed a split of all speakers into two groups: late learners of English and early learners of English (heritage group). Crucially, while speaker groups did not differ in target production of simple questions (matrix and embedded), they showed group effects for the complex questions. The majority of all complex questions were target-like; however, all medial whquestions in English were produced by late learners of English, and all medial wh-questions in Plautdietsch were produced by heritage speakers of Plautdietsch. Since Plautdietsch licenses medial questions, but English does not, transfer between languages would predict a higher occurrence of medial questions in the late learner group, independent of the language, and no (or

    434

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    low) occurrence in the heritage group, due to English dominance. The group results, however, show that medial wh only surfaces in the less dominant language. Hopp et al. (2018) attribute these effects to derivational complexity and argue that the processing of complex wh-movement is reduced through the mechanisms of medial wh-movement, while simple questions do not pose such complexity in processing on the speaker. This recent study enters new territory for Plautdietsch, and further research for comparison is necessary to determine the role of the contact language for such complex constructions.

    CONCLUSION The evolution of Plautdietsch out of a Dutch/Low German base beginning in the late 16th century demonstrates a number of properties of language per se and the speech community served by a language. The unique history of the Mennonites as a separatist religious community who left their original speech environment and lived largely apart provides an interesting demonstration of how language can be maintained largely intact, serving this or that purpose. Equally clear from the study of PD, however, is the inevitability of language change. Even though the Mennonites lived in tightly structured villages and led a lifestyle that did not require substantial interaction with non-PD-speaking people, the limited encounters with these people left a mark – at first a very small one – on their language. More noticeable changes in their ethnic language occurred once the Mennonites began integration with the surrounding non-Mennonite, non-PD-speaking people. This process did not occur in Russia; the surrounding environment and people were never perceived as compatible with their own. The situation changed when the Mennonites settled in Kansas in 1874, less so with the other settlements. The differences between Kansas (later Oklahoma) on the one hand, and the other settlements in the Americas on the other are due to social changes that occurred in the US (and Canada), such as the introduction of English as the medium for education, military service, and discrimination against their German heritage. Those Mennonites who came to Canada left

    Plautdietsch

    435

    the country before these changes could affect their communities, and settled in Mexico. For these reasons, SG has been learned to a much greater extent in the non-North American Mennonite groups, whereas in North America English – also a WGmc language – has been adopted as the standard language. Parallel to this linguistic change is the founding of new religious groups as a substitute for or complement to the traditional Mennonite religious groups such as the Kleine Gemeinde. Predictably, the most noticeable linguistic changes have occurred in North America. Where the Mennonites have lived the longest with the greatest breakdown in their speech community, these changes are the greatest, namely in Oklahoma. But even in communities that were founded just 40 or 50 years ago – in western Kansas and Seminole, Texas – a few changes can already be identified. The prospects for the future survival of PD in North America depend, therefore, on the extent to which new arrivals from places like Mexico, where the maintenance of PD has been stronger, are able to refresh the existing PD usage, or on efforts, which are just beginning in Seminole, to undertake a conscious, overt maintenance program. More extensive instruction in SG would help maintain certain properties of WGmc syntax and phonology that lie at the basis of PD. However, this instruction could also lead to an ever greater adoption of SG into PD; evidence of this process can already be documented. Regardless of the direction that PD takes, it will for many decades, even centuries to come offer a rich area for linguistic research.

    REFERENCES Bousquette, Joshua. 2020. From bidialectal to bilingual: Evidence for multistage language shift in Lester WJ ‘Smoky’ Seifert’s 1946-1949 Wisconsin German recordings. American Speech, 1–30. Brandt, Carsten. 1992. Sprache und Sprachgebrauch der Mennoniten in Mexiko. Marburg: N. G. Elwert Verlag. [Language and language use of the Mennonites in Mexico. Marburg: N.G. Elwert Press].

    436

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    Burns, Roslyn. 2015. The Plautdietsch Vowel Shift Across Space and Time. Journal of Linguistic Geography 3.2, 72–94. Cornips, Leonie. 1998. Habitual doen in Heerlen Dutch. In DO in English, Dutch and German. History and present-day variation, edited by Ingrid Tieken-Boon van Ostade, Marijke van der Wal & Arjan van Leuvensteijn, 83–102. Amsterdam: Stichting Neerlandistiek VU. Cox, Christopher. 2015. The Resilient Word: Linguistic Preservation and Innovation among Old Colony Mennonites in Latin America. Journal of Mennonite Studies 31: 51–74. Cox, Christopher, Jacob M. Driedger & Benjamin V. Tucker. 2013. Mennonite Plautdietsch (Canadian Old Colony). Journal of the International Phonetic Association 43.2: 221–229. de Korne, Annet & Tineke Rinkel. 1987. Cursus zestiende – en zeventiende – eeuws Nederlands. Groningen: Wolters–Noordhoff. Driedger, Leo & Kraybill, Donald. 1993. Mennonite Peacemaking. From Quietism to Activism. Scottdale, PA: Herald Press. Duden. Die Grammatik. 2009. Edited by Matthias Wermke et al. Mannheim: Bibliographisches Institut GmbH Dudenverlag. [The grammar]. Epp, Reuben. 1993. The story of Low German & Plautdietsch: tracing a language across the globe. Hillsboro, KS: Reader's Press. Fishman, Joshua. 1980. Bilingualism and biculturalism as individual and societal phenomena. Journal of Multilingual & Multicultural Development 1.1: 3–15. Franck, Johannes. 1910. Mittelniederländische Grammatik mit Lesestücken und Glossar. Leipzig: Chr. Herm. Tauchnitz. [Middle Dutch grammar with readings and glossary. Leipzig: Chr. Herm. Tauchnitz]. Freywald, Ulrike, Leonie Cornips, Natalia Ganuza, Ingvild Nistov &Toril Opsahl. 2015. Beyond verb second – a matter of novel informationstructural effects? Evidence from German, Swedish, Norwegian and Dutch. In Language, youth and identity in the 21st century: Linguistic practices across urban spaces, edited by Jacomine Nortier & Bente A. Svendsen, 73–92. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Frischbier, Hermann. 1882. Preussiches Wörterbuch. Ost- und Westpreussische Provinzialismen in alphabetischer Folge. Berlin:

    Plautdietsch

    437

    Verlag von Th. Chr. Fr. (Adolph Enslin) Enslin. [Prussian Dictionary. East and West Prussian provincialisms in alphabetical order. Berlin: Press of Th. Chr. Fr. (Adolph Enslin) Enslin.] Hedges, Kelly L. 1996. Plautdietsch and Huuchdietsch in Chihuahua: Language, Literacy, and Identity among the Old Colony Mennonites in Northern Mexico. PhD diss., Yale University, New Haven, CT. Hopp, Holger, Michael T. Putnam & Nora Vosburg. 2018. Derivational complexity vs. transfer effects. Long-distance wh-movement in heritage and L2 grammars. Linguistic Approaches to Bilingualism. Accessed January 9, 2018. doi: 10.1075/lab.17014 hop. Kaufmann, Göz. 2015. Rare phenomena revealing basic syntactic mechanisms: The case of unexpected verb-object sequences in Mennonite Low German. In Variation in Language: System- and Usagebased Approaches, edited by Aria Adli, Marco García García & Göz Kaufmann, 113–146. Berlin/Boston: de Gruyter. Kaufmann, Göz. Under review. The world beyond verb clusters. Aspects of the syntax of Mennonite Low German. Habilitation, Albert-LudwigsUniversität, Freiburg im Breisgau, Germany. To appear in Studies in language variation, edited by Peter Auer, Frans L. Hinskens & Paul Kerswill. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins. Keel, William D. 2006. Deitsch, Däätsch, Düütsch, and Dietsch: the varieties of Kansas German dialects after 150 years of German group settlement in Kansas. In Preserving Heritage: A Festschrift for C. Richard Beam, edited by Joshua R. Brown & Leroy Hopkins, 27–48. Society for German-American Studies with the support of the Max Kade Center for German-American Studies and the Joyce and Elizabeth Hall Center for the Humanities. Klein, Thomas. 1985. Phonetik und Phonologie, Graphetik und Graphemik des Altniederdeutschen (Altsächsischen). In Sprachgeschichte: Ein Handbuch zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache und ihrer Erforschung, edited by Werner Besch, Anne Betten, Oskar Reichmann & Stefan Sonderegger, 1074–1078. Berlin: De Gruyter Mouton. [Phonetics and phonology, graphetics and graphemics of Old Low German (Old Saxon). In History of language: A handbook to the history

    438

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    of the German language and its research, edited by Werner Besch, Anne Betten, Oskar Reichmann & Stefan Sonderegger, 1074-1078. Berlin: De Gruyter Mouton]. Langer, Nils. 2001. Linguistic purism in action: How auxiliary tun was stigmatized in Early New High German (Vol. 60). Berlin/New York: Walter de Gruyter. Lasch, Agathe. 1914. Mittelniederdeutsche Grammatik. Halle: Max Niemeyer Verlag. [Middle Low German Grammar. Halle: Max Niemeyer Press]. McCaffery, Isaias J. 2008. Wi Leahre Plautdietsch: A Beginner’s Guide to Mennonite Low German. Goessel, Kansas: Mennonite Heritage Museum. Moelleken, Wolfgang W. 1987. Die rußlanddeutschen Mennoniten in Kanada und Mexiko: Sprachliche Entwicklung und diglossische Situation. Zeitschrift für Dialektologie und Linguistik 54: 145–183. [The Russia German Mennonites in Canada and Mexico: Linguistic development and diglossic situation. Journal for Dialectology and Linguistics 54: 145–183]. Moelleken, Wolfgang W. 1993. Retroflexes r im Niederdeutsch der mexikanischen Altkolonier Mennoniten. Zeitschrift für Dialektologie und Linguistik, 60. Jahrgang, H. 1: 21–38. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner Verlag. [Retroflex r in Low German of the Mexican Old Colony Mennonites. Journal for Dialectology and Linguistics, 60th edition, H. 1:21-38. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner Press]. Niebaum, Hermann. 2006. Zur Sprache des ältesten Fundament-Buchs von Menno Simons. In Grammatik genießen. Gedenkschrift für Doc. Dr. phil. Hildegard Boková, (Schriften zur diachronen Sprachwissenschaft, 15), edited by Hana Andrášová, Peter Ernst & Libuše Spáčilová, 255– 281. Vienna. [On the language of the oldest Fundament-book of Menno Simons. In Enjoying grammar. Commemorative volume for Doc. Dr. phil. Hildegard Boková, (Papers on diachronic linguistics, 15), edited by Hana Andrášová, Peter Ernst & Libuše Spáčilová, 255–281. Vienna]. Nieuweboer, Rogier. 1999. The Altai Dialect of Plautdiitsch (West-Siberian Mennonite Low German). München/Newcastle: Lincom Europa.

    Plautdietsch

    439

    Nuijtens, Emile T. G. 1962. De tweetalige Mens. Een taalsociologisch onderzoek naar het gebruik van dialect en cultuurtaal in Borne. Assen: Van Gorkum. [The Bilingual Man. A linguistic sociological study of the use of dialect and cultural language in Borne]. Penner, Lloyd C. 1976. The Mennonites on the Washita River: the culmination of four centuries of migrations. PhD diss., Oklahoma State University, Stillwater, OK. Quiring, Jacob. 1928. Die Mundart von Chortitza in Süd-Rußland. PhD diss., Ludwig-Maximilian-Universität, München, Germany. [The dialect of Chortitza in South Russia. Diss., L-M-University, Munich, Germany]. Rosenberg, Peter. 2003. Comparative Speech Island Research: Some Results from Studies in Russia and Brazil. In German Language Varieties Worldwide: Internal and External Perspectives/Deutsche Sprachinseln weltweit: Interne und externe Perspektiven, edited by William D. Keel & Klaus J. Mattheier, 199–238. Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang. Salmons, Joseph. 2005. The role of community and regional structure in language shift. In Regionalism in the Age of Globalism: Volume 1: Concepts of regionalism, edited by Lothar Hönnighausen, Marc Frey, James Peacock & Niklaus Steiner, 129–138. Madison: Center for the Study of Upper Midwestern Cultures. Salmons, Joseph. 2018. A history of German: What the past reveals about today’s language. Oxford University Press. Sawatzky, Harry L. 1971. They sought a country: Mennonite colonization in Mexico. With an appendix on Mennonite colonization in British Honduras. Univ. of California Press. Sawatzky, Harry L. 1986. Sie suchten eine Heimat: deutsch-mennonitische Kolonisierung in Mexiko, 1922–1984 (Vol. 35). NG Elwert. [They sought a home: German-Mennonite colonization in Mexico, 1922-1984 (Vol. 35). NG Elwert]. Schiller, Karl & August Lübben. 1875. Mittelniederdeutsches Wörterbuch. Bremen: Verlag von J. Kühtmanns Buchhandlung. [Middle Low German dictionary. Bremen: Press of J. Kühtmann's Bookstore].

    440

    John te Velde and Nora Vosburg

    Siemens, Heinrich. 2012. Plautdietsch. Grammatik, Geschichte, Perspektiven. Bonn: Tweeback. [Plautdietsch. Grammar, history, perspectives. Bonn: Tweeback]. te Velde, John. R. 2017. German V2 and the PF-interface. Evidence from dialects. Journal of Germanic Linguistics 29.2: 146–193. Thiessen, Jack. 2003. Mennonite Low German Dictionary/MennonitischPlattdeutsches Wörterbuch. Madison: Max Kade Institute. van der Horst, Joop M. 1998. Doen in Old and Early Middle Dutch: A comparative approach. In DO in English Dutch and German. History and present-day variation, 53–64, edited by Ingrid Tieken-Boon van Ostade, Marijke van der Wal & Arjan Leuvensteijn. Münster: Nodus Publikationen. Van Loey, Adolphe C. H. 1980. Middelnederlandse Spraakkunst. Deel I: Vormleer. 8th edition. Groningen: Tjeenk Willink. (1st edition published in 1948 in Groningen by Wolters). [Middle Dutch Grammar. Part I: Morphology] Vosburg, Nora. 2019. Change in life and language: Mennonite communities is southwestern Kansas. In Selected Proceedings of the 9th Workshop on Immigrant Languages in the Americas (WILA 9), edited by Kelly Biers & Joshua R. Brown, 54–63 Somerville, MA: Cascadilla Proceedings Project. Weber, Thilo. 2018. An OT analysis of do-support across varieties of German. Journal of Comparative Germanic Linguistics 21:75–129. Wiese, Heike. 2013. What can new urban dialects tell us about internal language dynamics? The power of language diversity. Linguistische Berichte, Sonderheft 19: 208–245. Zacharias, Ed. 2009. Plautdietsch Lexicon: http://plautdietsch.22web.org/ home/index.htm.

    ABOUT THE EDITOR Michela Russo. After completing her PhD in Paris 2001, she was appointed as an Associate Professor (maître de conferences) in Phonology at the Linguistics department of the University Paris 8 between 2002 and 2014. Since September 2014, she is Full Professor at the University of Lyon in Romance and Gallo-Romance Linguistics and Dialectology. In terms of institutions, her research is conducted within the frame of the Research Unit Formal structures of Language (SFL UMR 7023 CNRS) at the University of Paris 8. Her research deals with Phonetics and Phonology, Morphology, Romance Linguistics (especially Italo-Romance and Gallo-Romance), both in synchrony and diachrony, with the structure of language, its development, and its manifestations. More specifically, she addressed the issue of metaphony, the nature and modeling of vowel harmony, of the evolutionary link between concatenative Morphology and internal Morphology for which she proposed a formal description, of concatenativity in grammar, and the problem of linearity in Phonology and Morphology.

    LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS Daniel Petit, PhD in Greek and Indo-European Linguistics at Sorbonne University (1996), Habilitation thesis in Baltic and Indo-European Linguistics at the École Pratique des Hautes Études (EPHE, 2002), is full professor of Indo-European Linguistics at the École Normale Supérieure of Paris since 2003 and director of studies of Baltic and Indo-European Linguistics at the Ecole Pratique des Hautes Etudes (EPHE) since 2011. His publications concern Greek, Baltic and Indo-European linguistics.

    Nadira Aljović is an associate professor of English and linguistics, currently teaching at the University of Sarajevo. She obtained her doctoral degree in linguistics at the University of Paris 8 in 2000 and has since taught courses in syntax, morphology, historical linguistics, and English grammar at the University of Paris 8 and the University of Zenica. She has published papers in formal (morpho)syntax and a contrastive reference grammar book on non-finite clauses in English and Bosnian/Croatian/Serbian. Her recent research focuses specifically on agreement patterns within noun phrases and their relevance for the morphology-syntax interface.

    444

    List of Contributors

    Maximilien Guérin is currently a postdoctoral researcher at the CNRS research unit LLACAN (“Languages and cultures of Africa”). He is a typologist specializing in morphology and syntax: Tense, Aspect, Mood (TAM), auxiliary verb constructions and grammaticalization phenomena, especially within the Construction Grammar framework. His research focuses on Romance and African languages, especially Niger-Congo. His work includes analysis of Wolof verbal periphrases, revisiting the notion of ‘auxiliary’ and treating the periphrases as a network of interrelated constructions, as well as comparative analysis of verb constructions in Atlantic languages and the historical sources of Wolof verb inflection, and the documentation of endangered Gallo-Romance varieties spoken in central France.

    Jean Léo Léonard was initially trained in Uralic linguistics (Finnish, Estonian, Vepsian and Mordvin) in France and Finland. He has a wide experience in other languages (especially, Mesoamerican and Romance languages, but also Basque, Albanian, Baltic and Slavic languages). He has recently carried out fieldwork in the Russian Federation, Georgia, Central America, Colombia and Bolivia, developing methods for the revival and native teaching of endangered languages (http://axe7.labexefl.org/taxonomy/term/12). His research in general linguistics and dialectology aims at connecting dialectology to linguistic typology, within a (post)generative framework (recently, on Otomanguean, Totonacan, and Kartvelian languages). He has held teaching positions in Finland (Tampere), Estonia (Tartu), Italy (Trento), and in Sorbonne-Nouvelle and Sorbonne University (Paris). He is currently full Professor of linguistic anthropology at the University of Montpellier 3 (University Paul-Valéry), France.

    Vincent Surrel is a PhD student affiliated to the Structures Formelles du Langage laboratory (UMR 7023 CNRS & University of Paris 8) and to the Centre Jean-Mabillon of the École Nationale des Chartes (Paris). His current research is focused on the field of historical linguistics and

    List of Contributors

    445

    dialectology of the North Occitan domain. He is working on the development of the corpus of linguistic documents of Velay, a marginal area of the Auvergne language. His linguistic questions concern the description of Occitan scriptae but also syntactical and morphological aspects such as agentive suffixes, and more generally the relationship between linguistic variation and textual variation. His current research mainly deals with graphemics, but also seeks to renew the diachronic description of morphological and syntactic phenomena for this area. He teaches linguistics and dialectology at the University of Lyon 3 Jean-Moulin.

    Timothée Premat is a PhD student affiliated to the Structures Formelles du Langage laboratory (UMR 7023 CNRS & University of Paris 8). He works in diachronic French phonology. His main concerns are about prosodic phonology of medieval French, especially the treatment of final schwa in prose, metrics and textsetting. Part of his work in metrics and textsetting implements the theories of generative metrics and textsetting. In metrics, he uses computational methods, he developed a program of prosodic and annotation for medieval French, the PAM. Beside prosodic phonology, he works on Gallo-Romance historical sociolinguistic and dialectology. He also has occasional activities of supporting students in performing vocal ancient music at the National Superior Conservatory of Music and Dance of Lyon (France), and to trained professional artists.

    Sophie Chouvion. Graduated in musicology, popular music, jazz and piano, Sophie Chouvion is both an active musician and an academic researcher. In the academic dimension, she mostly works on 16th century vocal music, both on the philological and on the analytic dimensions. Her main work focuses on editing and analyzing the work of Henry Fresneau, a French composer from the 16th century. In parallel to the traditional musicological analysis, she applies the methods of generative textsetting analysis to provide a better understanding of the relationship between text

    446

    List of Contributors

    and music in Fresneau’s work. She teaches musicology at the University Lumière Lyon 2 (France).

    Axelle Verner is a singer and independent researcher. She is graduated from the Notre-Dame de Paris choir school and from the National Superior Conservatory of Music and Dance (CNSMD) of Lyon (France). As a singer, she explores all periods of western European music, from Middle Ages songs to contemporary music. She performed under the direction of reputed conductors such as Sébastien Daucé (ensemble Correspondances), Simon Pierre Bestion (ensemble La Tempête) and Albane Imbs (ensemble Les Kapsber’girls). As a researcher, she first worked on restoring a 16th century French pronunciation for the city of Lyon, based on the work of the historical grammarian Meigret. She is now dedicating her work to the analysis of textsetting in ancient music, with a consistent focus on the philological consequences of such analysis and their transmission to singers and performers.

    Guillaume Enguehard is an Assistant Professor at the University of Orléans (France). His work focuses on the phonological representation of prosodic units from a structuralist point of view, and the modelling of phonetic processes leading to neutralization with the smallest number of principles. Most of his recent papers are based on two post-generativist concepts: the association line and the OCP, which he compares with the logical conjunction and the logical disjunction respectively.

    Shanti Ulfsbjorninn. Since 2018 Shanti Ulfsbjorninn has been an Associate Professor in Linguistics at the University of Deusto in Bilbao, the Basque Country. Before this he held a Marie Curie Post-Doctoral Fellowship at the University of Lyon. His PhD is from the University of London. He is primarily a morpho-phonologist interested in the linguistic architecture from a modular perspective. This includes the workings of morpho-phonological

    List of Contributors

    447

    derivations, especially with regard to morphologically conditioned segmentzero alternations and class feature driven allomorphy. At the other end, he is also concerned with the Substance Free mapping between phonology and phonetics. His research often involves Romance and Austronesian languages, Basque and English.

    Gilbert Puech. Born in Paris in 1946, Gilbert Puech received higher education in Lyon. After a two-year position in Alexandria (Egypt) as Assistant Professor in French, he joined the Ph.D. program of Linguistics at the University of California, San Diego. He was appointed as Full Professor in 1985, in charge of the Department of Linguistics. Then, he took responsibilities in the scientific management of University Lyon 2 as VicePresident for Research (1996-2001) and President (2001-2006). He led the program PERSEE, whose mission under the auspices of the French Department for Higher Education is to make scientific documentation accessible in open access format. His research work has been focused on theoretical Phonology, mainly applied to two domains: Tones in Bantu languages and Maltese. He did fieldwork in Gabon and, of course, in Malta where he criss-crossed all villages of Malta and Gozo. His publications are in relation with these domains. Retired in 2013, he is about to publish a book on Maltese Phonology.

    John R. te Velde has been professor of German studies and syntactic theory at Oklahoma State University, Stillwater since 1991. He is now full Professor of German at Oklahoma State University since 2006. His field of research includes the syntactic, morphological and phonological properties of West Germanic languages, both synchronic and diachronic, with special focus on German and its dialects. He had his PhD, from the University of Washington (1988) along with honors from Fulbright Senior Scholar at the Zentrum für Allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft, Berlin, Germany, Jan.-July, 1999; and Oklahoma Humanities Scholar, summer, 2017.

    448

    List of Contributors

    Nora Vosburg is currently working as a lecturer in the German Department at SUNY at New Paltz. In 2020, she completed her PhD in German Linguistics at the Pennsylvania State University. She has previously received the Magistra Artium at the Christian-Albrechts-Universität zu Kiel (Germany, 2010) and completed a PhD in Spanish Linguistics at the same university in 2015. Her field of research includes multilingual heritage, bilingualism in language contact situations, the speaker profile, the interaction between structure and social factors, minority speaker communities in the Americas, Germanic varieties spoken outside of historically German speaking areas, and language change and maintenance in Anabaptist communities.

    INDEX

    A abessive, 344 ablative, 5, 344 adessive, 2, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 17, 18, 20, 21, 23, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 344 agglutinative, 355, 372 agree, 44, 45, 46, 48, 50, 51, 56, 60, 62, 64, 68, 71, 145, 177, 264, 289, 299, 321, 322, 335, 348 agreement, v, viii, 43, 44, 45, 46, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 59, 60, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 70, 71, 115, 129, 141, 145, 210, 335, 350, 351, 352, 441 allative, 2, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 21, 22, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 38, 39, 42, 344 allomorphy, v, ix, 101, 102, 104, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 120, 121, 123, 125, 126, 142, 143, 144, 145, 149, 152, 153, 154, 155, 157, 167, 180, 211, 445 ancient Greek, 240, 241 Arabic dialects, 163, 164, 186, 190 Arabic heritage, 160, 163 assimilation, 199, 233, 234, 236, 319, 354

    Atlantic languages, vi, viii, xii, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, 315, 317, 318, 326, 327, 328, 329, 333, 334, 336, 337, 341, 442 attributive adjective, 43, 44, 48, 50, 58, 59, 60, 61, 64, 65 autosegmental principles, 108

    B Baltic, viii, 1, 2, 5, 6, 8, 9, 40, 42, 376, 392, 396, 399, 405, 406, 441, 442 Bantu languages, 373, 445 bare articles, 102 Belorussia, viii, 1, 2, 3, 5, 9, 13, 34, 38, 39 bilingualism, x, 214, 436, 437, 448 bisyllabic UR, 102, 118, 119, 131, 136, 137, 144 branching, 104, 108, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 244 branchingness, 223, 234, 235, 236, 237

    450

    Index C

    case, v, viii, 1, 5, 6, 7, 8, 18, 21, 24, 30, 31, 33, 37, 39, 40, 42, 43, 50, 51, 52, 53, 56, 66, 74, 75, 79, 83, 86, 92, 104, 118, 120, 123, 125, 129, 130, 140, 146, 153, 157, 166, 168, 170, 174, 179, 181, 183, 186, 209, 210, 216, 224, 226, 230, 233, 237, 239, 240, 245, 247, 251, 253, 254, 258, 261, 265, 266, 267, 271, 276, 286, 288, 290, 294, 319, 323, 324, 333, 335, 343, 349, 350, 351, 352, 353, 354, 355, 357, 368, 378, 379, 385, 392, 396, 402, 403, 404, 406, 408, 416, 421, 425, 431, 437 case system, viii, 1, 6, 40, 402 class shifts, 368, 372 classes, 203, 337, 341, 346, 348, 349, 357, 360, 365, 366, 373, 405 classification, xiii, 306, 307, 328, 336, 337, 441, 349 clitic, 44, 70, 71, 74, 75, 80, 85, 90, 93, 94, 95, 96, 102, 117, 129, 134, 135, 136, 146, 256, 264, 273, 282, 288, 353, 354 closest conjunct agreement, 44 clusters, 103, 104, 105, 111, 155, 158, 174, 177, 186, 225, 233, 240, 241, 306, 407, 428, 437 collective, 46, 47, 51, 234 communities, 160, 379, 380, 382, 383, 384, 385, 387, 388, 406, 408, 423, 431, 435, 440, 448 compensatory lengthening, 319, 346, 359 complexity, 222, 229, 232, 234, 244 configuration, viii, 1, 9, 12, 33, 40, 44, 46, 74, 109, 171, 247, 259, 275, 283 conflict, 38, 51, 56, 265, 279, 294 conjugation, 163, 164, 166, 175, 183, 184, 209, 341, 429 conjunct, v, viii, 43, 44, 46, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 54, 55, 56, 57, 59, 60, 62, 63, 65, 66, 67, 68

    constituents, xi, 218, 247, 248, 250, 256, 258, 259, 260, 261, 263, 264, 266, 269, 270, 271, 283, 284, 285, 286, 288, 291 constituents matching, 247, 248, 250, 256, 260, 261, 266, 270, 271, 284, 285, 286, 288, 291 construction, xii, 6, 8, 9, 16, 18, 19, 21, 23, 29, 30, 31, 34, 40, 70, 80, 91, 94, 177, 180, 303, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317, 325, 329, 332, 334, 335, 336, 337, 338, 341, 349, 427, 430, 432, 444 contours, 236 control under contiguity, 160 controller, 47, 55, 59 correlation, 32, 73, 104, 106, 107, 222, 411, 434 cyclic derivations, 165 cyclical analysis, 164

    D declarative model, 353, 372 default, 50, 52, 189, 233, 345, 351, 353, 354, 356, 358, 360, 362, 365, 368, 369, 370, 431 definite articles, v, ix, 101, 102, 106, 107, 132, 138, 143, 144, 149, 155, 158, 403, 404, 405, 423, 424 definiteness, 71, 74, 102, 107, 108, 113, 129, 143 deictic marker, 304, 308, 309, 310, 311, 313, 314, 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, 323, 325, 326, 327, 328, 331, 332, 333, 335 desinential, 356, 357, 359, 361, 362, 363 determiners, 48, 108, 121, 129, 135, 136, 137, 138, 139, 140, 142, 144, 146, 149, 158, 319, 321, 322, 323, 325, 327, 328, 330, 333, 334, 335 dialect, v, vi, viii, x, xii, xiii, 1, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 18, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26,

    Index 27, 31, 32, 33, 34, 37, 38, 40, 41, 42, 73, 85, 96, 97, 99, 123, 138, 142, 145, 150, 156, 159, 161, 162, 163, 166, 171, 187, 196, 197, 200, 203, 207, 213, 214, 216,218, 312, 341, 343, 344, 346, 347, 356, 359, 364, 368, 369, 389, 392, 393, 395, 401, 417, 426, 438, 439 dialectal grammar, 248, 249, 285, 290, 292 diasystem, 250, 344, 345, 355, 368, 372, 374 diasystemic analysis, xii, 343 distal, 304, 312, 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, 323, 324, 325, 328, 333 distributed morphology, 102, 107, 150

    E education, 379, 383, 384, 385, 387, 388, 401, 434 educational system, 385, elative, 344 element theory, 214, 230, 231, 243 ellipsis, viii, 43, 44, 46, 47, 48, 54, 55, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 379, 430, 431 emphatic consonants, x, 160, 162, 188, 189, 213 Empty Category Principle, 108, 109, 344, 359 enclitic, 113, 167, 177, 181, 211 endangered, xiii, 2, 383, 381, 382, 444 environment, x, 129, 162, 383, 384, 385, 386, 387, 392, 399, 400, 402, 425, 434 Europe, xiii, 154, 377, 378, 379, 380, 381, 383, 388, 389, 390, 391, 392, 396, 398, 412 European Community, 161, 162 essive, 344, 353 Estonian, 343, 344, 345, 346, 347, 348, 350, 352, 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 363, 364, 365, 368, 371, 372, 373, 374, 375, 376, 442

    451 evidence, viii, xiii, 10, 12, 13, 14, 17, 33, 36, 52, 55, 62, 64, 79, 110, 122, 127, 129, 133, 161, 189, 209, 217, 263, 269, 306, 368, 388, 400, 405, 411, 413, 415, 431, 435 evolution, xii, 5, 6, 8, 9, 19, 26, 33, 40, 78, 373, 389, 434

    F final schwa, 247, 248, 249, 250, 256, 259, 261, 271, 277, 279, 281, 284, 285, 289, 291, 292, 443 Finnic, vi, viii, xii, 343, 344, 345, 346, 347, 349, 353, 356, 357, 359, 364, 365, 367, 368, 372, 392 Finnish, 343, 344, 345, 347, 348, 350, 351, 355, 357, 364, 372, 373, 374, 375, 376, 442 Finno-Ugrian linguistics, xii, 343, 346 first conjunct agreement, v, viii, 43, 44, 49, 54, 55, 59, 65, 67 floating object, 108 formation, 179, 227, 347, 380, 381, 383, 392, 393, 406 French 16th century polyphony, 248 fusional, 346, 373

    G gapping, 60, 61, 64 gemination, x, 101, 112, 116, 117, 118, 119, 127, 131, 134, 135, 138, 141, 143, 144, 149, 170, 171, 182, 187, 216, 235, 363, 364 genitive, 5, 16, 18, 27, 29, 35, 304, 344, 350, 356, 359, 402, 404 genre, 169, 177, 248, 249, 253 Germany, 377, 380, 402, 412 goal, 8, 43, 78, 286

    452

    Index

    Gothic, viii, xi, 221, 224, 225, 226, 237, 238, 240, 246 government, iv, ix, x, 105, 107, 108, 109, 113, 147, 150, 222, 223, 229, 235, 240, 242, 244, 344, 347, 348, 362, 382 government phonology, ix, x, 105, 107, 222, 223, 229, 235, 240, 242, 362 graph, 356, 357, 358, 359, 363, 364, 365 grouping, 255, 260, 263, 264, 266, 269, 270, 282, 303, 336, 417 gutturals, 162, 190, 191, 193, 196, 198, 199, 207

    H harmony, 53, 54, 259, 361, 364, 368, 369 history, 5, 8, 18, 94, 379, 377, 378, 380, 382, 384, 408, 417, 434 human, viii, 10, 11, 18, 21, 27, 32, 304, 311, 312, 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, 328, 333, 335, 336 hypothesis, xii, xiii, 47, 113, 123, 142, 232, 249, 256, 281, 285, 286, 287, 291, 320, 325, 334, 357, 400, 408, 416

    I identity, 74, 200, 273, 274, 295, 383, 395, 398, 436 illative, 2, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 15, 16, 21, 24, 25, 26, 30, 32, 33, 344, 353, 354, 363 imaala, 190, 215 indefinite, x, 84, 85, 88, 95, 101, 105, 110, 112, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136, 137, 138, 139, 140, 141, 143, 144, 146, 158, 319, 374 indefiniteness, x, 84, 86, 94, 132, 134, 141, 143, 144 inessive, 2, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 30, 32, 33, 36, 37, 38, 344

    inflectional morphology, xii, 344, 345, 367, 375 inflectional systems, xii, 343, 346 insertion, xi, 102, 108, 110, 210, 233, 247, 249, 260, 264, 265, 271, 282, 283, 284, 285, 287, 288, 289, 291 Italy, 73, 74, 99, 102, 112, 120, 121, 122, 129, 135, 138, 145, 153, 154, 444 integration, 2, 75, 95, 183, 188, 434 integrity, 33, 170, 197, 267, 273 iteration, 260, 261, 269, 273 interface, xiv, 70, 354, 375, 440 introflection, 356, 357, 359, 363, 368 Italian, v, ix, x, 50, 72, 74, 98, 99, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 125, 127, 128, 130, 132, 135, 141, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 157, 158,159, 161, 185, 193, 213, 214 Italian dialects, 74, 113, 114, 116, 118, 123, 127, 128, 130, 143, 144, 147, 148, 155, 158 Italo-Romance, viii, ix, x, 101, 102, 105, 107, 110, 112, 114, 122, 127, 135, 142, 144, 146, 149, 155, 447 L languages, vii, viii, x, 5, 13, 3, 35, 41, 44, 45, 48, 49, 65, 67, 70, 71, 73, 85, 93, 99, 144, 159, 161, 162, 191, 193, 194, 196, 197, 213, 215, 227, 240, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, 311, 313, 314, 315, 317, 318, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 334, 335, 336, 337, 338, 339, 341, 342, 343, 345, 347, 348, 349, 358, 359, 369, 372, 373, 379, 380, 394, 398, 401, 402, 403, 407, 408, 409, 410, 421, 422, 430, 434, 435, 444, 447

    Index language change, 216, 378, 434, 446 language contact, 329, 409, 416, 429, 446 language development, 213 language diversity, 440 language maintenance, vi, 377 language skills, 385 laryngeals, 190 latent position, 131 lateral hardening, 139 Latvian, 2, 5, 6 length, 141, 147, 150, 158, 170, 176, 180, 182, 204, 206, 207, 208, 209, 211, 217, 222, 236, 237, 239, 244, 245, 259, 283, 413 lenition, 156, 158, 229, 230, 235, 245, 355 Levantine dialects, x, 159, 163, 164, 166, 187 licensing, 48, 51, 55, 58, 62, 64, 67, 105, 121, 122, 128, 176, 177, 346, 347, 348, 352, 359, 366, 374 licensor, x, 111, 120, 122, 123, 127, 128, 143 linguistics, xii, 40, 41, 70, 71, 100, 150, 221, 338, 344, 346, 371 linguistic philology, 70 Lithuanian, v, viii, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 40, 41, 42, 395, 396, 405 locative, v, vi, viii, xii, 1, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 24, 25, 29, 30, 31, 35, 37, 39, 40, 135, 142, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317, 318, 320, 321, 323, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 331, 333, 334, 335, 336, 337 locative roles, 1, 9, 40 loss of emphatic and guttural consonants, 160

    M Maghrebi, x, 159, 163, 164, 171, 187, 213

    453 Malta, x, 159, 160, 162, 188, 193, 197, 200, 205, 207, 214, 215, 216, 217, 219, 445 Maltese language, 217, 218, 219 mass, xii, 101, 107, 110, 112, 134, 141, 158, 394 matrix, 71, 78, 350, 353, 435 melody, 108, 109, 118, 126 melodic interaction, meter, 255, 260, 261, 262, 264, 294, 295, 296 Mexico, xiii, 379, 381, 383, 384, 387, 388, 390, 408, 414, 419, 420, 425, 433, 437, 439, 440, 441 migration, 93, 382, 383, 384, 385, 392, 393, 395, 403, 406, 407, 409, 411, 414 modular, vii, 148, 294, 347, 444 morphology, xii, xiii, xiv, 35, 46, 50, 65, 70, 75, 147, 148, 149, 153, 163, 187, 219, 235, 303, 305, 342, 345, 346, 347, 348, 349, 355, 367, 378, 381, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, 425, 427, 433, 443, 444 morphosyntactic processes, ix, 141, 143, 144 music, xi, 247, 249, 250, 251, 252, 253, 254, 255, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 282, 283, 284, 285, 286, 293, 295, 445, 446

    N Nakanai, viii, xi, 221, 227, 228, 229, 239, 240, 243, 244 Neapolitan, 106, 114, 116, 127, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136, 139, 140, 142, 143, 145, 149, 155, 156 neuter, 44, 52, 67, 129, 130, 149, 304, 332, 404 Niger-Congo languages, 305, 372 non-templatic stems, 159, 160, 162, 167, 183, 184, 186 North America, 160, 379, 381, 382, 384, 386, 395, 398, 405, 411, 413, 419, 426, 433, 434, 435, 437

    454

    Index

    nucleus, 105, 123, 172, 185, 186, 203, 210, 227, 277, 279, 359, 363 null subject, v, viii, ix, 69, 70, 71, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 86, 95, 97, 98, 100 number, 1, 11, 12, 31, 37, 40, 43, 45, 48, 49, 51, 52, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 64, 66, 70, 72, 102, 116, 129, 145, 147, 148, 169, 177, 222, 223, 224, 231, 232, 234, 257, 259, 266, 270, 292, 299, 319, 328, 335, 349, 350, 351, 352, 353, 354, 355, 365, 367, 393, 401, 404, 414, 416, 417, 432, 434, 444

    O obligatory contour principle, 160, 168 Occitan language (Velay), v, viii, 69, 70, 71, 76, 77, 78, 79, 85, 94, 98, 443 orthography, 179, 193, 198, 257, 401, 412, 418, 420

    P paradigm function morphology, vi, xii, 343, 345, 347, 349, 373 particle phonology, xii, 232, 243, 245, 343 partitive, 135, 139, 345, 357, 359 pharyngealization, 191, 201, 205, 206, 207, 211 pharyngealized vowels, 200, 203, 206, 207 pharyngeals, 190 phonemes, 397, 398, 408, 412, 413, 414, 415, 422, 424 phonological form, 110 phonologization, 189, 203, 205 phonology, ix, x, xiv, 96, 105, 107, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 155, 156, 157, 158, 165, 212, 214, 215, 216, 218, 222, 223, 229, 232, 235, 240, 242, 243, 244, 245, 246, 295, 338, 341, 346, 360, 362, 372, 374, 375, 376, 445, 447

    phonosyntactic, 135, 157 Plautdietsch, vi, xiii, 377, 378, 379, 380, 383, 384, 385, 386, 387, 388, 389, 390, 392, 394, 400, 401, 403, 406, 409, 410, 411, 412, 414, 423, 425, 429, 431, 433, 434, 436, 437, 438, 440 presentative, vi, xii, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 313, 316, 317, 322, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 333, 334, 335, 336, 340 principles, x, xii, 108, 160, 168, 230, 259, 271, 284, 285, 286, 294, 446 probe, 45, 52 process, xii, 43, 55, 56, 82, 108, 118, 123, 127, 128, 130, 136, 141, 187, 234, 261, 264, 273, 274, 276, 291, 347, 354, 356, 357, 361, 365, 395, 400, 431, 434, 435 progressive, vi, xii, 162, 213, 224, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317, 318, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 331, 333, 334, 335, 336, 354, 429 projection, 58, 62, 73, 169, 182, 432 prosodic, x, 86, 91, 137, 139, 140, 141, 155, 176, 179, 181, 184, 213, 242, 243, 255, 256, 257, 258, 263, 264, 266, 270, 273, 283, 284, 286, 290, 291, 294, 295, 348, 350, 356, 359, 363, 365, 368, 369, 370, 371, 443, 444 Proto-Western Arabic, viii, x, 164, 213 pseudo-gapping, 60

    R reciprocal, 51, 52, 55, 56, 59 reduplication, vi, x, 172, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 229, 234, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245, 325 repetition, 57, 58, 249, 253, 261, 262, 267, 273, 275, 283, 287, 289, 293 resolution agreement, 50

    Index rhoticisation, 136, 137, 138, 139, 140, 141, 144 rhythm, 242, 260, 265, 266, 296 rules, ix, xii, 66, 102, 103, 177, 255, 257, 258, 267, 277, 284, 288, 347, 349, 352, 357, 367, 372, 373, 374, 389 Russia, 13, 379, 383, 384, 386, 387, 391, 393, 394, 395, 407, 409, 411, 413, 4014, 419, 436, 440, 441

    S Sanskrit, viii, xi, 221, 226, 227, 229, 233, 238, 239, 240, 245 segments, xi, 104, 105, 168, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 253, 347, 348 settlements, 380, 381, 383, 385, 386, 387, 388, 411, 412, 414, 436 shape, ix, 101, 102, 104, 107, 108, 110, 116, 117, 126, 129, 131, 135, 142, 144, 165, 178, 179, 184, 195, 223, 367, 374 social change, 380, 382, 389, 436 social justice, 381 social network, 162 social structure, 387 solution, 56, 179, 256, 266, 289, 393 Somali, 235 sonority, vi, x, 104, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 237, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245 South Slavic, 44, 68 speech, 196, 209, 260, 379, 381, 393, 403, 410, 419, 425, 427, 433, 436, 437 spelling, 189, 192, 200, 211, 401, 410, 412, 421 standardization, 2, 162, 381, 410, 418, 421 stem alternations, 347, 359 stress, 10, 159, 160, 164, 165, 166, 167, 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 208, 209, 211, 213, 217, 218, 244, 256, 258, 259

    455 strict CV model, 107 stripping, 60, 61, 64 strong grade, 352, 363 structural dimension, 262 subject pronouns, v, ix, 69, 70, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 86, 88, 89, 90, 91, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 99 suppletion, 347 syllabic constituency, 169, 222 syllabic structure and stress, x, 159, 160, 211, 217 syncope, 162, 166, 167, 173, 176, 177, 178, 179, 181, 182, 184, 185, 186, 210 syntactic doubling, 131, 148, 155 syntax, x, xiii, xiv, 40, 41, 52, 53, 65, 66, 67, 69, 70, 72, 75, 76, 96, 97, 99, 145, 146, 148, 149, 151, 154, 158, 295, 338, 375, 378, 379, 406, 425, 426, 429, 431, 435, 437, 441, 442

    T templates, xi, 183, 221, 222, 223, 233, 237, 239, 240, 359, 366 templatic stems, 159, 162, 167, 169, 178, 179, 183, 186 tense-aspect-mood, 305 textsetting, xi, 247, 248, 249, 250, 252, 253, 254, 255, 260, 261, 263, 264, 265, 267, 269, 270, 271, 277, 278, 282, 283, 284, 285, 286, 287, 288, 289, 290, 291, 292, 294, 443, 444 trochaic foot, 170 typology, xii, xiii, 71, 122, 154, 215, 224, 294, 340, 343, 346, 374, 442

    U underlying representation, ix, 102, 108, 112, 114, 127, 209, 269, 278, 279, 280, 282 universal grammar, xii, 160

    456

    Index

    uvulars, 190

    V verbal dependency, 305 verbal morphology, xii, 305 virtual geminates, 235, 245 vocabulary, x, 44, 53, 108, 110, 129, 161, 162, 168, 188, 213 vocabulary item feature harmony, 53 vocabulary items, 44, 53 vowel harmony, 345, 354, 364, 368, 447

    W weak grade, 352, 355

    word format, 378 word and paradigm, 347, 354, 372 word stratum, 177 word syntax, x

    Z Zietela, v, viii, 1, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 31, 32, 33, 34, 37, 38, 40, 42

    Φ φ-features, x, 102, 108, 129, 130, 131, 137, 143, 144